Contents

Volvo XC60 Twin Engine 2018 Owners Manual PDF

1 of 680
1 of 680

Summary of Content for Volvo XC60 Twin Engine 2018 Owners Manual PDF

XC60 T W I N E N G I N E

OWNER'S MANUAL

VLKOMMEN!

We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your Volvo. The car has been designed for the safety and comfort of you and your pas- sengers. Volvo strives to be one of the safest cars in the world. Your Volvo is also designed to meet applicable safety and environmental requirements.

To increase your enjoyment of your Volvo, we recommend that you read the instructions and maintenance information in this owner's manual.

The owner's manual is also available as a mobile app (Volvo Manual) and on the Volvo Cars support site (support.volvocars.com).

We encourage everyone to always wear their seatbelt in this and other cars. Please do not drive if you are under the influence of alcohol or medication or have an impaired ability to drive in some other way.

2

OWNER INFORMATION Owner information 18

Owner's manual in centre display 19

Navigate in the owner's manual in the centre display

20

Owner's Manual in mobile devices 22

Volvo Cars support site 22

Reading the owner's manual 23

The owner's manual and the environment 25

YOUR VOLVO Volvo ID 28

Creating and registering a Volvo ID 28

Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure 30

IntelliSafe-driver support 33

Sensus - online connectivity and entertainment

34

Software updates 37

Recording data 37

Terms & Conditions for Services 38

Customer Privacy Policy 38

Important information on accessories and auxiliary equipment

39

Installation of accessories 39

Connection of equipment to the car's diagnostic socket

40

Showing the car's identification number 41

Driver distraction 41

SAFETY Safety 44

Safety during pregnancy 44

Whiplash Protection System 45

Seatbelts 46

Putting on and taking off seatbelts 47

Seatbelt tensioner 48

Resetting the electric seatbelt tensioner* 49

Door and seatbelt reminder 49

Airbags 51

Driver airbags 51

Passenger airbag 52

Activating and deactivating passen- ger airbag*

54

Side airbags 56

Airbags 57

Safety mode 57

Starting and moving the car after safety mode

58

Child safety 59

Child seats 60

Upper mounting points for child seats 60

Lower mounting points for child seats 61

i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child seats

62

Child seat positioning 62

TABLE OF CONTENTS

3

Child seat mounting 64

Table for location of child seats using the car's seatbelts

66

Table for location of i-Size child seats 68

Table for location of ISOFIX child seats 69

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Instruments and controls in left-hand drive car

74

Instruments and controls in right- hand drive car

75

Driver display 77

Driver display settings 79

Fuel gauge 79

Hybrid gauge 80

Hybrid battery gauge 81

Trip computer 82

Show trip data in the driver display 83

Resetting the trip meter 84

Show trip statistics in the centre display 85

Settings for trip statistics 85

Time and date 86

Outside temperature gauge 87

Indicator symbols in the driver display 87

Warning symbols in the driver display 89

License agreement for the driver display 90

Application menu in driver display 96

Handling the application menu in the driver display

97

Messages in the driver display 98

Managing messages in the driver display 99

Handling a message saved from the driver display

99

Overview of centre display 101

Managing the centre display 104

Activating and deactivating centre display 107

Navigating in the centre display's views 107

Managing tiles in centre display 111

Function view in centre display 114

Moving apps and buttons in centre display

116

Symbols in the centre display's status bar 116

Keyboard in centre display 118

Changing keyboard language in cen- tre display

121

Enter the characters, letters and words manually in the centre display

121

Changing the appearance in the centre display

123

Switching off and changing the vol- ume of the system sound in the cen- tre display

123

Changing system units 124

Changing system language 124

Opening settings in the centre display 124

Open contextual setup in the centre display

125

Changing settings in the centre display 126

Resetting user data for change of ownership

126

4

Resetting settings in the centre display 127

Setting types in the centre display 127

Table showing centre display settings 128

Driver profiles 129

Selecting driver profile 130

Renaming a driver profile 131

Resetting settings in the driver profiles 131

Linking remote control key to driver profile

131

Message in centre display 132

Managing messages in the centre display 133

Handling a message saved from the centre display

134

Head-up display* 134

Activating and deactivating the head- up display*

136

Settings for head-up display* 136

Voice recognition 137

Using voice recognition 138

Controlling a telephone with voice recognition

139

Voice control of radio and media 140

Settings for voice recognition 140

LIGHTING Lighting control 144

Adjusting light functions via the cen- tre display

145

Position lamps 145

Daytime running lights 146

Dipped beam 147

Using main beam 147

Active main beam 148

Using direction indicators 150

Active bending lights* 150

Rear fog lamp 151

Brake lights 152

Emergency brake lights 152

Hazard warning flashers 152

Using home safe lighting 153

Approach light duration 153

Interior lighting 154

Adjusting interior lighting 155

WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS Windows, glass and mirrors 158

Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds

158

Reset sequence for pinch protection 159

Power windows 159

Operating power windows 160

Rearview and door mirrors 161

Adjusting rearview mirror dimming 162

Angling the door mirrors 163

Panorama roof* 164

Operating the panorama roof* 166

Automatic closing of the panoramic roof's* sun blind

168

Using windscreen wipers 169

Heated windscreen wiper nozzles* 170

Using the rain sensor 170

Using the rain sensor's memory function 171

Using windscreen and headlamp washers 172

Using the rear window wiper and washer 173

Using automatic rear windscreen wiping when reversing

174

5

SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL Manual front seat 176

Power front seat* 177

Adjusting the power front seat* 177

Storing memory function in power operated front seat*

178

Using stored memory in a powered front seat

179

Massage settings in the front seat* 179

Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat

180

Adjusting the length of the seat cushion in the front seat

181

Adjusting the side support* in the front seat

181

Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front seat

182

Adjusting the passenger seat from the driver's seat*

183

Lowering the backrests in the rear seat 184

Adjusting the head restraints in the rear seat

187

Steering wheel controls and horn 188

Steering lock 189

Adjusting the steering wheel 189

CLIMATE Climate 192

Climate zones 192

Climate control - sensors 192

Perceived temperature 193

Controlling climate control with voice recognition

193

Air quality 194

Clean Zone* 195

Clean Zone Interior Package* 196

Interior Air Quality System* 196

Activating and deactivating the air quality sensor*

197

Passenger compartment filter 197

Air distribution 197

Changing air distribution 198

Opening, closing and aiming the air vents 199

Table of air distribution options 200

Climate controls 203

Activating and deactivating heated front seat*

204

Activating and deactivating automatic start of heated front seat*

205

Activating and deactivating heated rear seat*

205

Activating and deactivating ventilated front seat*

206

Activating and deactivating the heated steering wheel*

207

Activating and deactivating automatic start of heated steering wheel*

207

Activating auto climate control 208

Activating and deactivating air recir- culation

208

Activating and deactivating time set- ting for air recirculation

209

Activating and deactivating max defroster 209

Activating and deactivating the heated windscreen*

211

Activating and deactivating automatic start of heated windscreen*

212

Activating and deactivating the heated rear window and door mirrors

212

Activating and deactivating automatic starting of the heated rear window and door mirrors

213

Regulating fan level for front seat 213

Regulating temperature for front seat 214

Synchronising temperature 214

Activating and deactivating air condi- tioning

215

Heater 216

Parking heater 217

Additional heater 218

6

Activating and deactivating automatic start of auxiliary heater

219

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Lock confirmation 222

Lock indication setting 223

Remote control key 223

Locking and unlocking with the remote control key

225

Settings for remotely controlled and inside unlocking

227

Unlocking the tailgate with the remote control key

227

Remote control key range 228

Replacing the battery in the remote control key

229

Ordering more remote control keys 232

Red Key - restricted remote control key* 232

Red Key settings* 233

Detachable key blade 234

Locking and unlocking with the detachable key blade

235

Immobiliser 236

Type approval for the remote control key system

238

Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces* 247

Keyless locking and unlocking* 248

Settings for Keyless entry* 249

Keyless unlocking of the tailgate* 249

Antenna locations for the start and lock systems

250

Locking and unlocking from inside the car

251

Unlocking the tailgate from the inside of the car

252

Activating and deactivating child safety locks

253

Automatic locking when driving 254

Opening and closing the power*- operated tailgate

254

Programming maximum opening for power operated tailgate*

257

Opening and closing the tailgate with foot movement*

258

Private locking 260

Activating and deactivating private locking

260

Alarm* 261

Activating and deactivating alarms* 263

Reduced alarm level* 264

Double lock* 264

Temporarily deactivating double locks* 265

Detection of unknown car component* 265

7

DRIVER SUPPORT Driving support systems 268

Speed-dependent steering force 268

Stability system Roll Stability Control 269

Electronic stability control 270

Sport mode for electronic stability control 271

Activating/deactivating Sport mode in Electronic Stability Control

271

Limitation for sport mode in Elec- tronic Stability Control

272

Symbols and messages for elec- tronic stability control

273

Speed Limiter 274

Activating and starting the Speed Limiter 275

Managing speed for the Speed Limiter 275

Deactivate the Speed Limiter and set it in standby mode

276

Reactivating the Speed Limiter from standby mode

277

Deactivating the Speed Limiter 277

Limitations for Speed Limiter 278

Automatic Speed Limiter 278

Activate/deactivate Automatic Speed Limiter

280

Changing the tolerance for the Auto- matic Speed Limiter

281

Limitations for Automatic Speed Limiter 281

Cruise Control 282

Activating and starting Cruise Control 283

Managing speed for the Cruise Control 284

Deactivate Cruise Control and set it in standby mode

285

Reactivating Cruise Control from standby mode

285

Deactivating Cruise Control 286

Distance Warning* 287

Head-up display for Distance Warning 287

Activating/deactivating Distance Warning 288

Setting the time interval for Distance Warning

288

Limitations of Distance Warning 289

Adaptive Cruise Control* 290

Adaptive Cruise Control and Collision risk warning

293

Head-up display for Adaptive Cruise Control if there is a risk of collision

293

Activating and starting Adaptive Cruise Control

294

Managing speed with Adaptive Cruise Control

295

Setting time interval for Adaptive Cruise Control

296

Deactivating/reactivating Adaptive Cruise Control

297

Overtaking assistance with Adaptive Cruise Control

299

Starting overtaking assistance with Adaptive Cruise Control

299

Limitations for overtaking assistance with Adaptive Cruise Control

299

Changing target with Adaptive Cruise Control

300

Automatic braking with Adaptive Cruise Control

300

Limitations for Adaptive Cruise Control 301

Change between Cruise Control and Adaptive Cruise Control

302

Symbols and messages for Adaptive Cruise Control

304

Pilot Assist 306

Pilot Assist and Collision risk warning 309

Head-up display for Pilot Assist if there is a risk of collision

310

Activating and starting Pilot Assist 311

Managing speed for Pilot Assist 312

Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist 313

Deactivating/activating Pilot Assist 314

Overtaking assistance with Pilot Assist 316

Start overtaking assistance with Pilot Assist

316

Limitations for overtaking assistance with Pilot Assist

317

Change the target with Pilot Assist 317

Automatic braking with Pilot Assist 318

8

Limitations of Pilot Assist 318

Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist* 320

Radar unit 321

Limitations for radar device 322

Recommended radar device mainte- nance

325

Type approval for radar device 326

Camera unit 330

Limitations for camera unit 331

Recommended camera device main- tenance

334

City Safety 334

Parameters and subfunctions for City Safety

335

Setting the warning distance for City Safety

337

Detection of obstacles with City Safety 338

City Safety in cross traffic 340

Limitations for City Safety in cross traffic 341

City Safety steering assistance for evasive manoeuvre

341

Limitations of City Safety steering assistance when taking evasive action

342

City Safety when evasive manoeu- vres are prevented

342

Limitations of City Safety 343

Messages for City Safety 346

Rear Collision Warning 347

Limitations of Rear Collision Warning 347

BLIS* 348

Activate/deactivate BLIS 349

Limitations of BLIS 350

Recommended maintenance for BLIS 350

Messages for BLIS 352

Cross Traffic Alert* 353

Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert 354

Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert 354

Recommended maintenance for Cross Traffic Alert

355

Messages for Cross Traffic Alert 356

Road Sign Information* 357

Activating/deactivating Road Sign Information

358

Road Sign Information and sign display 358

Road Sign Information and Sensus Navigation

360

Road Sign Information with Speed Warning and Settings

360

Activating/deactivating Speed warn- ing in Road Sign Information

361

Road Sign Information with Speed Camera Information

362

Limitations of Road Sign Information 362

Driver Alert Control 363

Activate/deactivate Driver Alert Control 364

Select rest stop guidance in the event of a warning with Driver Alert Control

365

Limitations of Driver Alert Control 365

Lane assistance 365

Steering assistance with lane assistance 367

Activate/deactivate Lane Keeping Aid 368

Select assistance option for lane assistance

368

Limitations of Lane assistance 368

Symbols and messages for lane assistance

370

Lane assistance symbols in the driver display

372

Steering assistance at risk of collision 373

Activating/deactivating Steering assistance in the event of a collision risk

373

Steering assistance upon risk of run-off 374

Steering assistance level in the event of a run-off risk

374

Activating/deactivating Steering assistance in the event of run-off risk

375

Limitations for steering assistance upon risk of running off the road

375

Steering assistance upon risk of head-on collision

376

9

Activating/deactivating Steering assistance in the event of a risk of a head-on collision

377

Limitations for steering assistance upon risk of head-on collision

377

Steering assistance upon risk of rear-end collision*

378

Activating/deactivating Steering assistance on risk of rear-end collision*

379

Limitations for steering assistance upon risk of rear-end collision

379

Symbols and messages for steering assistance upon risk of collision

381

Park Assist* 382

Park Assist Pilot front, rear and along the sides

383

Activating/deactivating Park Assist Pilot 384

Limitations of Parking assistance 384

Recommended Park Assist Pilot maintenance

385

Symbols and messages for Park Assist Pilot

386

Park assist camera* 387

Parking cameras' camera views 388

Park assist lines for parking camera 390

Sensor fields from Park Assist Pilot for parking camera

392

Starting the park assist camera 392

Limitations for park assist camera 393

Recommended parking camera maintenance

394

Symbols and messages for Park assist camera

395

Park Assist Pilot* 396

Parking variants with Park Assist Pilot 396

Parking with Park Assist Pilot 397

Leaving a car park with Park Assist Pilot 400

Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* 401

Recommended Park Assist Pilot maintenance

402

Messages for Park Assist Pilot* 403

HYBRID INFORMATION General information about Twin Engine 406

Charging the hybrid battery 407

Charging current 408

Charging cable 410

Ground fault breaker in the charging cable

411

Temperature monitoring of the charging cable

412

The charging cable's control unit 412

Opening and closing the hatch for the charging input socket

413

Start charging the hybrid battery 414

Charging status in the car's charging input socket

416

Charging status in the charging cable's control unit

418

Charging status in the car's driver display 420

Stop charging of hybrid battery 422

Symbols and messages relating to Twin Engine in the driver display

423

Long-term storage of vehicles with hybrid batteries

425

10

STARTING AND DRIVING Starting the car 428

Switching off the car 430

Ignition positions 430

Selecting ignition mode 431

Alcohol lock* 432

Bypass of the alcohol lock* 432

Before starting the engine with the alcohol lock

433

Brake functions 433

Foot brake 434

Brake assistance 435

Braking on wet roads 435

Braking on gritted roads 436

Brake system maintenance 436

Parking brake 436

Activating and deactivating the park- ing brake

437

Automatic parking brake activation setting

438

Parking on a hill 439

In the event of a fault in the parking brake

439

Automatic braking when stationary 440

Activating and deactivating the auto- matic brake at a standstill

440

Help when starting on a hill 441

Auto braking after a collision 441

Gearbox 442

Gear positions for automatic gearbox 443

Changing gear with steering wheel paddles*

445

Gear selector inhibitor 446

Kick-down function 446

Gear shift indicator* 446

All-wheel drive 447

Drive systems 447

Starting and stopping the combus- tion engine in Twin Engine

448

Drive modes 449

Changing drive mode 453

Level control* and shock absorption 454

Settings for level control* 457

Low speed control 457

Activating and deactivating low- speed driving using a function button

458

Hill descent control 458

Activating and deactivating hill descent control with the function button

459

Economical driving 460

Driving with electric operation 461

Factors that affect range when run- ning on electricity

462

"Hold" and "Charge" function 463

Preparations for a long trip 464

Winter driving 465

Driving in water 466

Opening and closing the fuel filler flap 466

Filling fuel 467

Handling of fuel 469

Petrol 469

Petrol particle filter 470

Overheating in the engine and drive system

471

Overloading the starter battery 472

Using jump starting with another battery 472

Towbar* 474

Specifications for towbar* 475

Extendable and retractable towbar* 475

Driving with a trailer 477

Trailer stability assist* 479

Checking trailer lamps 480

Towbar-mounted bicycle rack* 481

Towing 482

Fitting and removing the towing eye 483

Recovery 484

HomeLink* 484

11

Programming HomeLink* 485

Using HomeLink 487

Type approval for HomeLink* 488

Compass 488

Activating and deactivating the compass 488

Calibrating the compass 489

SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Sound, media and Internet 492

Audio settings 492

Apps 493

Downloading apps 494

Updating apps 495

Deleting apps 496

Radio 496

Start radio 497

Changing radio band and radio station 497

Searching for radio stations 498

Setting radio favourites 499

Settings for radio 499

RDS radio 501

Digital radio* 501

Link between FM and digital radio* 502

Media player 502

Media playback 503

Controlling and changing media 504

Searching media 505

Gracenote 506

CD player* 507

Video 507

Playing a video 507

Playing back DivX 508

Settings for video 508

Media via Bluetooth 508

Connecting a device via Bluetooth 509

Media via USB port 509

Connecting a device via USB port 509

TV* 510

Using the TV* 510

Settings for TV* 511

Apple CarPlay* 511

Using Apple CarPlay* 512

Settings for Apple CarPlay* 513

Tips for using Apple CarPlay* 514

Android Auto* 515

Using Android Auto* 515

Settings for Android Auto* 516

Tips for using Android Auto* 517

Phone 517

Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time

518

Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth automatically

520

Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth manually

520

Disconnecting a Bluetooth-con- nected phone

521

12

Switch between Bluetooth-con- nected phones

521

Removing a Bluetooth-connected phone 522

Managing phone calls 522

Managing text messages 523

Settings for text messages 524

Managing the phone book 524

Settings for phone 525

Settings for Bluetooth devices 526

Internet-connected car* 526

Connecting the car to the Internet via a mobile device (Bluetooth)

527

Connecting the car to the Internet via a mobile device (Wi-Fi)

528

Connect the car to the Internet via car modem (SIM card)

528

Settings for car modem 529

Sharing Internet access from the car via a Wi-Fi hotspot

530

No or poor Internet connection 531

Remove Wi-Fi network 531

Wi-Fi technologies and security 532

User terms and conditions and data sharing

532

Activating and deactivating data sharing 532

Compatible media formats 533

Technical specifications for USB devices 534

Storage space on hard disk 534

License agreement for audio and media 535

WHEELS AND TYRES Tyres 546

Dimension designation for tyre 547

Dimension designation for wheel rim 548

Tyres' rotation direction 549

Tread wear indicators on the tyres 549

Checking tyre pressure 550

Adjusting tyre pressure 550

Recommended tyre pressure 551

Tyre pressure monitoring system* 552

Calibrate the system for tyre pres- sure monitoring*

553

See tyre pressure statue in the cen- tre display*

555

Action in the event of warning for low tyre pressure

556

When changing wheels 557

Tool kit 557

Jack* 557

Wheel bolts 558

Removing a wheel 559

Fitting the wheels 561

Spare wheel* 562

Taking out the spare wheel 563

Winter wheels 563

Snow chains 564

13

Emergency puncture repair kit 565

Using a puncture repair kit 566

Inflating tyres with the compressor from the puncture repair kit

569

LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Passenger compartment interior 572

Tunnel console 573

Electrical sockets 574

Using electrical sockets 576

Using the glovebox 577

Sun visors 579

Cargo area 579

Recommendations for loading 579

Roof load and loading on load carriers 581

Bag hooks 581

Load retaining eyelets 581

Through-load hatch in the rear seat 582

Fitting and removing cargo cover* 582

Operating cargo cover* 584

Fitting and removing safety grilles* 585

Fitting and removing the safety net* 586

First aid kit 588

Warning triangle 588

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Volvo service programme 590

Data transfer between car and work- shop via Wi-Fi

590

Download Center 591

Managing system updates via the Download Centre

591

Car status 592

Book service and repair 593

Sending car information to a workshop 594

Raise the car 595

Opening and closing the bonnet 597

Servicing the climate control system 598

Head-up display when replacing the windscreen*

599

Engine compartment overview 599

Engine oil 600

Checking and filling with engine oil 601

Topping up coolant 602

Bulb replacement 604

Bulb specifications 604

Starter battery 605

Hybrid battery 609

Symbols on the batteries 610

Fuses and central electrical units 610

Replacing a fuse 611

14

Fuses in engine compartment 612

Fuses under glovebox 616

Fuses in cargo area 619

Cleaning the interior 623

Cleaning the centre display 623

Cleaning the head up display* 624

Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining 625

Cleaning the seatbelts 625

Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats 625

Cleaning leather upholstery 626

Cleaning the leather steering wheel 627

Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood parts

627

Cleaning the exterior 628

Polishing and waxing 628

Handwashing 629

Automatic car wash 630

High-pressure washing 631

Cleaning the wiper blades 631

Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim components

632

Cleaning wheel rims 633

Rustproofing 633

Car paintwork 634

Touching up minor paintwork damage 634

Colour codes 636

Replacing the wiper blade, rear window 636

Replacing windscreen wiper blades 637

Wiper blades in service position 638

Filling washer fluid 639

SPECIFICATIONS Type designations 642

Dimensions 645

Weights 647

Towing capacity and towball load 648

Engine specifications 650

Engine oil specifications 651

Adverse driving conditions for engine oil 652

Coolant specifications 653

Transmission fluid specifications 653

Brake fluid specifications 653

Fuel tank - volume 654

Air conditioning specifications 654

Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions 656

Approved wheel and tyre sizes 658

Lowest permitted tyre load index and speed rating for tyres

659

Approved tyre pressures 660

15

ALPHABETICAL INDEX Alphabetical Index 661

OWNER INFORMATION

OWNER INFORMATION

18

Owner information Owner's information is available in several differ- ent product formats, both digital and printed. The owner's manual is available in the car's cen- tre display, as a mobile app and on the Volvo Cars support site. There is a Quick Guide and a supplement to the owner's manual available in the glovebox, with specifications and fuse infor- mation, amongst other things. A printed owner's manual can be ordered.

The car's centre display1

In the centre display, drag down the top view and tap on Owner's manual. Available here are options for visual navi- gation with exterior and interior images of the car. The informa- tion is searchable and is also

divided into categories.

Mobile app In App Store or Google Play, search for "Volvo Manual", download the app to your smartphone or tablet and select the car. Available in the app are video tutorials and options for visual navigation with exterior

and interior images of the car. It is easy to navi- gate between the different sections in the owner's manual and the content is searchable.

Volvo Cars support site Go to support.volvocars.com and select your country. Here you can find owner's manuals, both online and in PDF format. On the Volvo Cars support site there are also video tutorials and further information and

help regarding your Volvo and your car owner- ship. The page is available for most markets.

Printed information There is a supplement to the owner's manual1 in the glove- box that contains information on fuses and specifications, as well as a summary of important and practical information.

There is also a Quick Guide available in printed format that helps you to get started with the most commonly used functions in the car.

Depending on equipment level selected, market, etc. additional owner's information may also be available in printed format in the car.

A printed owner's manual and associated supple- ment can be ordered. Contact a Volvo retailer to order.

IMPORTANT

The driver is always responsible that the vehi- cle is driven safely in traffic and that applica- ble laws and regulations are followed. It is also important that the car is maintained and handled in accordance with Volvo's recom- mendations in the owner's information.

If there should be a difference between the information in the centre display and the prin- ted information then it is always the printed information that applies.

1 A complete printed manual is included with the car for markets without owner's manual in the centre display.

OWNER INFORMATION

}}

19

NOTE

Changing the language in the centre display may mean that some owner information is not compliant with national or local laws and reg- ulations. Do not switch to a language that is difficult to understand as this may make it dif- ficult to find your way back in the structure on screen.

Related information Owner's manual in centre display (p. 19)

Owner's Manual in mobile devices (p. 22)

Volvo Cars support site (p. 22)

Reading the owner's manual (p. 23)

Owner's manual in centre display A digital2 version of the owner's manual is availa- ble in the car's centre display. The digital owner's manual can be accessed from the top view, and in some cases the contextual owner's manual can also be accessed from the top view.

NOTE

The digital owner's manual is not available while driving.

Owner's manual

The owner's manual is accessed from the top view.

To open the owner's manual - drag down the top view in the centre display and tap on Owner's manual.

The information in the owner's manual can be accessed directly via the owner's manual home- page or its top menu.

Contextual owner's manual

The contextual owner's manual is accessed from the top view.

When the contextual owner's manual is available, it is shown to the right of Owner's manual in the top view.

Pressing the contextual owner's manual opens an article in the owner's manual that is related to the content that is shown on the screen. E.g. press Navigation Manual - an article that is related to navigation opens.

This only applies to some of the apps in the car. For third party apps that are downloaded, it is not possible, for example, to access app-specific arti- cles.

2 Applies for most markets.

||

OWNER INFORMATION

20

Related information Navigate in the owner's manual in the centre

display (p. 20)

Navigating in the centre display's views (p. 107)

Downloading apps (p. 494)

Navigate in the owner's manual in the centre display The digital owner's manual can be accessed from the centre display top view in the car. The content is searchable and it is easy to navigate between different sections.

The owner's manual is accessed from the top view.

To open the owner's manual - drag down the top view in the centre display and tap on Owner's manual.

There is a range of different options for finding information in the owner's manual. The options can be accessed from the owner's manual home- page and from the top menu.

Opening the menu in the top menu Press in the upper list in the owner's

manual.

> A menu containing various options for finding information opens:

Homepage Tap on the symbol to go back to the start page in the owner's manual.

Categories The articles in the owner's manual are structured into main categories and subcate- gories. The same article can be found in several appropriate categories in order to be found more easily.

1. Press Categories.

> The main categories are shown in a list.

2. Tap on a main category ( ).

> A list of subcategories ( ) and articles

( ) is shown.

3. Tap on an article to open it.

To go back, press the back arrow.

OWNER INFORMATION

21

Quick Guide Press the symbol to access a page with links to a selection of articles that can be particularly useful to read in order to get to know the most common func- tions of the car. The articles can also be accessed via cate-

gories, but are collected here for quick access. Tap on an article in order to read it in its entirety.

Hotspots for exterior and interior Exterior and interior overview images of the car. Different parts are designated with hot- spots that lead to articles about those parts of the car.

1. Press Exterior or Interior.

> Exterior or interior images are shown with so-called hotspots in place. The hotspot leads to articles about the corresponding part of the car. Swipe horizontally over the screen to browse among the images.

2. Tap on a hotspot.

> The title of the article about the area is shown.

3. Tap on the title to open the article.

To go back, press the back arrow.

Favourites Press the symbol to access the articles saved as favourites. Tap on an article in order to read it in its entirety.

Saving or deleting articles as favourites

Save an article as favourite by pressing at the top right when an article is open. When an article has been saved as a favourite the star is filled in:

.

To remove an article as a favourite, press the star again in the current article.

Video Press the symbol to view brief instruction videos for various functions in the car.

Information Tap on the symbol to obtain information about which version of the owner's manual is availa- ble in the car as well as other useful information.

Using the search function in the top menu

1. Tap on in the top menu of the owner's manual. A keyboard appears in the lower part of the screen.

2. Type in a keyword, such as "seatbelt".

> Suggestions for articles and categories are shown while letters are being entered.

3. Tap on the article or category to access it.

Related information Owner's manual in centre display (p. 19)

Keyboard in centre display (p. 118)

Reading the owner's manual (p. 23)

OWNER INFORMATION

* Option/accessory.22

Owner's Manual in mobile devices The owner's manual is available as a mobile

app3 from both the App Store and Google Play. The app is adapted for smartphones and tablets.

The owner's manual can be downloaded as a mobile app from the App Store or Google Play. The QR code provided here takes you directly to the app. Alternatively, you can search for "Volvo manual" in

the App Store or Google Play.

The app contains a video along with exterior and interior images where different parts of the car are highlighted with so-called hotspots, which lead to articles about the area in question. It is easy to navigate between the different sections

in the owner's manual and the content is search- able.

The mobile app is available from both the App Store and Google Play.

Related information Reading the owner's manual (p. 23)

Volvo Cars support site More information on your car is available on the Volvo Cars website and support site.

Support on the Internet Go to support.volvocars.com to visit the site. The support site is available for most markets.

It contains support for functions such as web- based services and functions, Volvo On Call*, the navigation system* and apps. Videos and step- by-step instructions explain different procedures, e.g. how to connect the car to the Internet via a mobile phone.

Downloadable information

Maps For cars equipped with Sensus Navigation, there is the facility to download maps from the support page.

Owner's manuals as PDF Owner's manuals are available for download in PDF format. Select car model and model year to download the manual as required.

Contact The support site contains contact details to cus- tomer support and your nearest Volvo retailer.

3 For certain mobile devices.

OWNER INFORMATION

}}

* Option/accessory. 23

Log in to Volvo Cars website Create a personal Volvo ID and log in to www.volvocars.com. When you have logged in it is possible to get an overview of service, agree- ments and warranties, amongst other things. Here there is also information about accessories and software adapted for your car model.

Related information Volvo ID (p. 28)

Reading the owner's manual A good way of getting to know your new car is to read the owner's manual, ideally before your first journey. Reading the owner's manual is a good way to become familiar with new functions, get advice on how best to handle the car in different situa- tions and learn how to make the best use of all the car's features. Please pay attention to the safety instructions contained in the owner's man- ual.

The intention of this owner's information is to explain all of the possible features, functions and options included in a Volvo vehicle. It is not intended as an indication or guarantee that all of these features, functions and options are included in every vehicle. Some terminology used may not exactly match terminology used in sales, marketing and advertising materials.

Development work is constantly underway in order to improve our product. Modifications may mean that information, descriptions and illustra- tions in the owner's manual differ from the equip- ment in the car. We reserve the right to make modifications without prior notice.

Do not remove this manual from the car - if prob- lems should arise then the necessary information about where and how to seek professional help will be missing.

Volvo Car Corporation

Options/accessories In addition to standard equipment, the owner's manual also describes options (factory fitted equipment) and certain accessories (retrofitted extra equipment).

All types of option/accessory are marked with an asterisk: *.

The equipment described in the owner's manual is not available in all cars - they have different equipment depending on adaptations for the needs of different markets and national or local laws and regulations.

In the event of uncertainty over what is standard or an option/accessory, contact a Volvo retailer.

Special texts

WARNING

Warning texts appear if there is a risk of injury.

IMPORTANT

"Important" texts appear if there is a risk of damage.

NOTE

NOTE texts give advice or tips that facilitate the use of e.g. features and functions.

||

OWNER INFORMATION

24

Footnote The owner's manual contains information in cer- tain locations in the form of a footnote at the bot- tom of the page or at the end of a table. This information is an addition to the text that it refers to via a number. If the footnote refers to text in a table then letters are used instead of numbers for referral.

Message texts There are displays in the car that show menu and message texts. In the owner's manual the appearance of these texts differs from the normal text. Examples of menu texts and message texts: Phone, New message.

Decals The car contains different types of decal which are designed to convey important information in a simple and clear manner. The decals in the car have the following descending degree of impor- tance for the warning/information.

Warning of personal injury

Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field, white text/image on black message field. Used to indi- cate the presence of danger which, if the warning is ignored, may result in serious personal injury or fatality.

Risk of property damage

White ISO symbols and white text/image on black or blue warning field and message field. Used to indicate the presence of danger which, if the warning is ignored, may result in damage to property.

Information

White ISO symbols and white text/image on black message field.

NOTE

It is not intended that the decals illustrated in the owner's manual should be exact replicas of those in the car. They are included to show their approximate appearance and location in the car. The information that applies to your particular car is available on the respective decals for your car.

OWNER INFORMATION

25

Procedure lists Procedures where action must be taken in a cer- tain sequence are numbered in the owner's man- ual:

When there is a series of illustrations for step-by-step instructions each step is num- bered in the same way as the corresponding illustration.

Lists of letters appear adjacent to the series of illustrations where the order of the instruc- tions is not significant.

Arrows appear numbered and unnumbered and are used to illustrate a movement.

Arrows with letters are used to clarify a movement when the relative order is of no relevance.

If there is no series of illustrations for step-by- step instructions then the different steps are numbered with normal numbers.

Position lists Red circles containing a number are used in overview images where different components are pointed out. The number recurs in the position list featured in connection with the illustration that describes the item.

Bulleted lists A bulleted list is used when there is a list of points in the owner's manual.

Example:

Coolant

Engine oil

Related information Related information refers to other articles con- taining closely associated information.

Images Illustrations used in the owner's manual are sometimes schematic and are intended to pro- vide an overall picture or example of a certain function. Illustrations may deviate from the car's appearance depending on equipment level and market.

To be continued }} This symbol is located furthest down to the right when an article continues on the following page.

Continued from previous page || This symbol is located furthest up to the left when an article continues from the previous page.

Related information Owner's manual in centre display (p. 19)

Owner's Manual in mobile devices (p. 22)

Volvo Cars support site (p. 22)

The owner's manual and the environment The Owner's Manual is printed on paper origi- nating from controlled forests.

The Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) symbol shows that the paper pulp in a printed owner's manual comes from FSC-certified forests or other controlled sources.

Related information Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure (p. 30)

YOUR VOLVO

YOUR VOLVO

* Option/accessory.28

Volvo ID Volvo ID provides access to a wide range of per-

sonalized Volvo services1 online.

It is possible to create a Volvo ID from the car, volvocars.com or Volvo On Call app2. Certain functions and services require that the car is reg- istered to a personal Volvo ID. Registering the Volvo ID to the car makes a wide range of Volvo services available directly from the car.

Examples of services:

Volvo On Call* - Volvo ID is used when log- ging in to the Volvo On Call app.

Send to Car - Makes it possible to send an address from an Internet map service directly to the car.

Book Service and Repair - Register your pre- ferred workshop/retailer at volvocars.com to be able to book service directly from the car.

Advantages of Volvo ID One user name and one password to access

online services, i.e. only one username and one password to remember.

If the username/password for a service (e.g. Volvo On Call) is changed, then it is also changed automatically for other services.

Related information Creating and registering a Volvo ID (p. 28)

Book service and repair (p. 593)

Creating and registering a Volvo ID It is possible to create a Volvo ID in different ways. If the Volvo ID is created at volvocars.com or with Volvo On Call app, the Volvo ID must also be registered to the car to enable use of the various Volvo ID services.

Create a Volvo ID with the app 1. Download the Volvo ID app from Download

Centre in the centre display's app view.

2. Start the app and register a personal email address.

3. Follow the instructions that are automatically sent to the specified email address.

> A Volvo ID has now been created and automatically registered to the car. Volvo ID services can now be used.

Create a Volvo ID on the Volvo Cars website

1. Go into www.volvocars.com and log in3 using the icon at the top right. Select Create Volvo ID.

2. Enter a personal email address.

3. Follow the instructions that are automatically sent to the specified email address.

> A Volvo ID has now been created. Read below to learn how to register the ID to the car.

1 The services available may vary over time and vary depending on equipment level and market. 2 If you have Volvo On Call*. 3 Available in certain markets.

YOUR VOLVO

* Option/accessory. 29

Create a Volvo ID with the Volvo On Call

app4

1. Download the latest version of the Volvo On Call app from a smartphone, via e.g. App Store, Windows Phone or Google Play.

2. Choose to create a Volvo ID from the app's start page and enter a personal email address.

3. Follow the instructions that are automatically sent to the specified email address.

> A Volvo ID has now been created. Read below to learn how to register the ID to the car.

Registering your Volvo ID to the car If you created your Volvo ID via the web or the Volvo On Call app, register it to your car as fol- lows:

1. If not done already, download the Volvo ID app from Download Centre in the app view.

NOTE

To download apps, the car must be con- nected to the Internet.

2. Start the app and enter your Volvo ID/your email address.

3. Follow the instructions that are automatically sent to the email address linked to your Volvo ID.

> Your Volvo ID is now registered to the car. Volvo ID services can now be used.

Related information Volvo ID (p. 28)

Downloading apps (p. 494)

Managing system updates via the Download Centre (p. 591)

Internet-connected car* (p. 526)

4 Cars with Volvo On Call*.

YOUR VOLVO

30

Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure Volvo Car Corporation is constantly working on the development of safer and more efficient

products and solutions in order to reduce the negative impact on the environment.

Environmental care is one of Volvo Cars core val- ues and influences all operations. The environ- mental work is based on the whole life cycle of the car and takes into account the environmental impact it has, from design to scrapping and recy- cling. Volvo Cars' basic principle is that every new product developed must have less impact on the environment than the product it replaces.

Volvo's environmental management work has resulted in the development of more effective and less polluting drivelines Drive-E. Personal environment is also important to Volvo - the air

inside a Volvo is, for example, cleaner than the air outside thanks to the climate control system.

Your Volvo complies with stringent international environmental standards. All Volvo's manufactur- ing units must be ISO 14001 certified, and this supports a systematic approach to the opera- tion's environmental issues, which leads to con- tinuous improvement with reduced environmental impact. Holding the ISO certificate also means that environmental laws and regulations in force are complied with. Volvo also requires that its partners must also meet these requirements.

Fuel consumption Since a large part of a car's total environmental impact stems from its use, the emphasis of Volvo Cars' environmental work is on reducing fuel con- sumption, carbon dioxide emissions and other air pollutants. Volvo cars have competitive fuel con- sumption in each of their respective classes. Lower fuel consumption generally results in lower emission of the greenhouse gas, carbon dioxide.

YOUR VOLVO

}}

* Option/accessory. 31

Contributing to a better environment An energy-efficient and fuel-efficient car not only contributes to a reduced impact on the environ- ment, but also means reduced costs for the owner of the car. As the driver, it is easy to reduce fuel consumption and thereby save money and contribute to a better environment - here is some advice:

Plan for an effective average speed. Speeds above approx. 80 km/h (approx. 50 mph) and below 50 km/h (approx. 30 mph) lead to increased energy consumption.

Follow the Service and Warranty Booklet's recommended intervals for service and main- tenance of the car.

Avoid letting the engine idle - switch off the engine when stationary for longer periods. Pay attention to local regulations.

Plan the journey - a lot of unnecessary stops and uneven speed contribute to increased fuel consumption.

Use preconditioning - it improves the range of the hybrid battery and reduces the energy requirement while driving.

Also remember to always dispose of environmen- tally hazardous waste, such as batteries and oil, in an environmentally safe manner. Consult a work- shop in the event of uncertainty about how this type of waste should be discarded - an author- ised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Efficient emission control Your Volvo is manufactured following the concept "Clean inside and out" a concept that encom- passes a clean interior environment as well as highly efficient emission control. In many cases the exhaust emissions are well below the applica- ble standards.

Clean air in the passenger compartment An air filter helps prevent dust and pollen enter- ing the passenger compartment via the air intake.

The Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)* ensures that the incoming air is cleaner than the air in the traffic outside.

The system cleans the air in the passenger com- partment from contaminants such as particles, hydrocarbons, nitrous oxides and ground-level ozone. If the outside air is contaminated then the air intake is closed and the air is recirculated. Such a situation may arise in heavy traffic, queues and tunnels for example.

IAQS is a part of the Clean Zone Interior Pack- age (CZIP)*, which also includes a function that allows the fan to start when the car is unlocked with the remote control key.

Interior The material used in the interior of a Volvo is carefully selected and has been tested in order to be pleasant and comfortable. Some of the details are hand-made, such as the seams of the steer-

ing wheel that are sewn by hand. The interior is monitored in order not to emit strong odours or substances that cause discomfort in the event of e.g. high heat and bright light.

Volvo workshops and the environment Regular maintenance creates the conditions for a long service life and low fuel consumption for your car. In this way you also contribute to a cleaner environment. When Volvo's workshops are entrusted with the service and maintenance of your car it becomes part of Volvo's system. Volvo makes clear demands regarding the way in which workshop premises shall be designed in order to prevent spills and discharges into the environment. The workshop staff have the knowl- edge and the tools required to guarantee good environmental care.

Recycling Since Volvo works from a life cycle perspective, it is also important that the car is recycled in an environmentally sound manner. Almost all of the car can be recycled. The last owner of the car is therefore requested to contact a retailer for refer- ral to a certified/approved recycling facility.

Related information Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions

(p. 656)

Economical driving (p. 460)

||

YOUR VOLVO

32

The owner's manual and the environment (p. 25)

Air quality (p. 194)

YOUR VOLVO

* Option/accessory. 33

IntelliSafe-driver support IntelliSafe is the Volvo Cars concept for car safety. IntelliSafe comprises a number of sys- tems, both standard and optional, whose pur- pose is to make a car journey safe, to prevent injuries and to protect passengers and other road users.

Support IntelliSafe includes driver support functions such as Adaptive cruise control* which helps the driver to maintain an even speed combined with a pre- selected time interval to the vehicle ahead.

Pilot Assist5 helps the driver to drive the car between the lane's edge markings using steering assistance as well as to maintain an even speed, combined with a preselected time interval to the vehicle ahead.

Park Assist Pilot* helps the driver to park in or leave a parking space.

Other examples of systems that can help the driver are the Active main beam, Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* and Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* systems.

Prevention City Safety is a function that can contribute to preventing accidents. The function can prevent or mitigate a collision with pedestrians, cyclists, larger animals or vehicles. Visual, acoustic and

brake pulse warnings are given in the event of a risk of collision to help the driver act in time. If the driver does not react to the warning and the risk of collision is assessed as imminent then City Safety can automatically brake the car.

Lane assistance (LKA) is another example of a function that can help prevent accidents by help- ing the driver - on motorways and similar larger roads - to reduce the risk of the car accidentally leaving its own lane.

The function Steering aid during increased collision risk can help the driver reduce the risk of the car leaving its lane unintentionally and/or colliding with another vehicle or obstacle by actively steering the car back into its lane and/or swerving.

Protection With the aim of protecting the driver and passen- gers, the car is equipped with seatbelt tensioners which can tension the seatbelts in critical situa- tions and in collisions. The car also has airbags and inflatable curtains, as well as Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS), which protects against whiplash injuries.

Related information Driving support systems (p. 268)

Active main beam (p. 148)

Safety (p. 44)

Seatbelts (p. 46)

Airbags (p. 51)

Whiplash Protection System (p. 45)

5 This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market.

YOUR VOLVO

* Option/accessory.34

Sensus - online connectivity and entertainment Sensus makes it possible to surf the Internet, use different types of apps and make the car a Wi-Fi hotspot.

This is Sensus

Sensus offers an intelligent interface and online connectivity with the digital world. An intuitive navigation structure makes it possible to receive relevant support, information and entertainment when it is necessary, without distracting the driver.

Sensus covers all solutions in the car that are connected with entertainment, online connectiv- ity, navigation* and the user interface between driver and car. It is Sensus that makes communi- cation possible between you, the car and the out- side world.

Information when it is needed, where it is needed The different displays in the car provide informa- tion at the right time. The information is shown in different locations based on how it should be pri- oritised by the driver.

YOUR VOLVO

}}

* Option/accessory. 35

Different types of information are shown in different displays depending on how the information should be prioritised.

Head-up display*

The head-up display shows selected information that the driver should deal with as soon as possi- ble. Such information may, for example, include

traffic warnings, speed information and naviga- tion* information. Road Sign Information and incoming phone calls are also shown in the head- up display. The display is operated via the right- hand steering wheel keypad and via the centre display.

Driver display

The driver display shows information on speed and e.g. incoming calls or song tracks being

||

YOUR VOLVO

* Option/accessory.36

played. The display is operated via the two steer- ing wheel keypads.

Centre display

Many of the main functions of the car are con- trolled from the centre display, a touch screen which reacts to touch. The number of physical buttons and controls in the car is therefore mini- mal. The screen can even be operated while wearing gloves.

From here, for example, you can control the cli- mate control system, the entertainment system and seat position*. The information that is shown in the centre display can be acted on by the driver or someone else in the car when the opportunity arises.

Voice recognition system The voice recognition system can be used without the driver needing to take his/her hands off the steering wheel. The sys- tem can understand natural speech. Use voice recognition to, for example, play back a

song, call someone, increase the temperature or read out a text message.

Related information Head-up display* (p. 134)

Driver display (p. 77)

Overview of centre display (p. 101)

Voice recognition (p. 137)

Internet-connected car* (p. 526)

Sharing Internet access from the car via a Wi-Fi hotspot (p. 530)

YOUR VOLVO

}}

37

Software updates So that you as a Volvo customer get the best experience of your car, Volvo continuously devel- ops the systems in the cars and the services that you are offered.

You can update the software in your Volvo to the latest version when your car is serviced at an authorised Volvo dealer. The latest software update gives you access to new functions and improvements, as well as previous improvements included with previous software updates.

For more information about released updates and answers to frequently asked questions, please go to support.volvocars.com.

NOTE

Functionality after updating may vary depend- ing on market, model, model year and options.

Related information Sensus - online connectivity and entertain-

ment (p. 34)

Managing system updates via the Download Centre (p. 591)

Recording data As part of Volvo's safety and quality assurance, certain information about the vehicle's operation, functionality and incidents are recorded in the car.

This vehicle is equipped with an "Event Data Recorder" (EDR). Its primary purpose is to regis- ter and record data related to traffic accidents or collision-like situations, such as times when the airbag deploys or the vehicle strikes an obstacle in the road. The data is recorded in order to increase understanding of how vehicle systems work in these types of situations. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short time, usually 30 seconds or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record data related to the following in the event of traffic accidents or collision-like situations:

How the various systems in the car worked

Whether the driver and passenger seatbelts were fastened/tensioned

The driver's use of the accelerator or brake pedal

The travel speed of the vehicle

This information can help us better understand the circumstances in which traffic accidents, inju- ries and damage occur. The EDR only records data when a non-trivial collision situation occurs. The EDR does not record any data during normal

driving conditions. Similarly, the system never registers who is driving the vehicle or the geo- graphic location of the accident or near-miss sit- uation. However, other parties, such as the police, could use the recorded data in combination with the type of personally identifiable information routinely collected after a traffic accident. Special equipment and access to either the vehicle or the EDR is required to be able to interpret the regis- tered data.

In addition to the EDR, the car is equipped with a number of computers designed to continually check and monitor the function of the car. They can record data during normal driving conditions, but in particular register faults affecting the vehi- cle's operation and functionality, or upon activa- tion of the vehicle's driver support function (e.g. City Safety and the auto brake function).

Some of the recorded data is required to enable service and maintenance technicians to diagnose and remedy any faults that occurred in the vehi- cle. The registered information is also needed to enable Volvo to satisfy legal requirements laid out in laws and by government authorities. Informa- tion registered in the vehicle is stored in its com- puter until the vehicle is serviced or repaired.

In addition to the above, the registered informa- tion can be used in aggregate form for research and product development with the aim of contin- uously improving the safety and quality of Volvo cars.

YOUR VOLVO

38

Volvo will not contribute to the above-described information being disclosed to third parties with- out the vehicle owner's consent. To comply with national legislation and regulations, Volvo may be forced to disclose information of this nature to the police or other authorities who may assert a legal right to access such. Special technical equipment which Volvo and workshops that have entered into agreements with Volvo have access to is required to be able to read and interpret the recorded data. Volvo is responsible that the infor- mation, which is transferred to Volvo during serv- icing and maintenance, is securely stored and managed and that its management complies with relevant legal requirements. For further informa- tion - contact a Volvo retailer.

Terms & Conditions for Services Volvo offers services so that you can drive your Volvo as safely and as comfortably as possible. These services include everything from assis- tance in emergencies to navigation and various maintenance services.

Before using the services, it is important for you to read the Terms & Conditions for Services at support.volvocars.com.

Related information Customer Privacy Policy (p. 38)

Customer Privacy Policy Volvo respects and safeguards the personal integrity of everyone visiting our website. This policy regards to the handling of customer data and personal information. The purpose is to give current, past and potential customers a gen- eral understanding of:

The circumstances in which we gather and process your personal data.

The types of personal data we gather.

The reason we gather your personal data.

How we handle your personal data.

This policy can be read in its entirety at support.volvocars.com.

Related information User terms and conditions and data sharing

(p. 532)

Terms & Conditions for Services (p. 38)

Recording data (p. 37)

YOUR VOLVO

}}

39

Important information on accessories and auxiliary equipment The incorrect connection and installation of accessories and extra equipment can negatively affect the car's electronic system. We strongly recommend that Volvo owners only install Volvo approved original accessories, and that installation of accessories is only carried out by trained and qualified Volvo service technicians. Certain accessories only function when associ- ated software is installed in the car's computer system.

The equipment described in the owner's manual is not available in all cars - they have different equipment depending on adaptations for the needs of different markets and national or local laws and regulations.

Options or accessories described in this manual are marked with an asterisk. In the event of uncertainty over what is standard or an option/ accessory, contact a Volvo retailer.

WARNING

The driver always bears the ultimate responsi- bility that the car is used safely and that laws and regulations in force are followed.

It is also important that the car has mainte- nance and service according to Volvo's rec- ommendations, the owner's information and the service and warranty booklet.

If the on-board information differs from the printed owner's manual then the printed infor- mation always has precedence.

Related information Installation of accessories (p. 39)

Connection of equipment to the car's diag- nostic socket (p. 40)

Reading the owner's manual (p. 23)

Installation of accessories We strongly recommend that Volvo owners only install Volvo approved original accessories, and that installation of accessories is only carried out by trained and qualified Volvo service techni- cians. Certain accessories only function when associated software is installed in the car's com- puter system.

Volvo original accessories are tested to ensure that they function with the car sys- tems for performance, safety and emissions control. In addition, a trained and qualified Volvo service technician knows where acces- sories may or may not be safely installed in your Volvo. Always seek the advice of a trained and qualified Volvo service technician before installing any accessories in or on your car.

Accessories that are not approved by Volvo may not have been specifically tested for use with your car.

Some of the car's performance or safety sys- tems can be negatively affected if you install accessories that have not been tested by Volvo, or if you permit someone without experience of the car to install accessories.

Damage that is caused by accessories instal- led in a non-approved or incorrect way is not covered by any new car warranty. More war- ranty information can be found in the service and warranty booklet. Volvo does not accept

||

YOUR VOLVO

40

any liability for deaths, personal injury or costs arising as a result of the installation of non-original accessories.

Related information Important information on accessories and

auxiliary equipment (p. 39)

Connection of equipment to the car's diagnostic socket Incorrect connection and installation of software or diagnostic tools may have a negative effect on the car's electronic system. We strongly recommend that Volvo owners only install Volvo approved original accessories, and that installation of accessories is only carried out by trained and qualified Volvo service technicians. Certain accessories only function when associ- ated software is installed in the car's computer system.

Data link connector (On-board Diagnostic, OBDII) is under the instrument panel on the driver's side.

NOTE

Volvo Cars accepts no liability for the conse- quences if unauthorised equipment is con- nected to the On-board Diagnostic socket (OBDII). This socket should only be used by trained and qualified Volvo service techni- cians.

Related information Important information on accessories and

auxiliary equipment (p. 39)

YOUR VOLVO

41

Showing the car's identification number When contacting a Volvo retailer concerning your Volvo On Call subscription, for example, you will need the car's identification number

(VIN6). 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre

display.

2. Continue to System System

Information Vehicle Identification Number.

> The car's identification number is shown.

Driver distraction The driver is responsible for doing everything possible to ensure the safety of themselves, their passengers and other road users. Part of this responsibility is avoiding distractions such as carrying out an activity that is not related to oper- ating the car in a driving environment.

Your new Volvo is, or can be, equipped with con- tent-rich entertainment and communications sys- tems. This could be mobile phones with hands- free, navigation systems and audio systems with lots of functions. You may also have other porta- ble electronic devices for your own convenience. Used correctly, in a safe way they can enrich the driving experience. If they are used in the wrong way they could distract you.

We wish to give the following warnings regarding such systems, to indicate Volvo's concern for your safety. Never use a device or function in the car in such a way that it will distract you from the task of driving safely. Distractions can lead to serious accidents. Apart from these general warnings, we offer the following advice regarding the new functions that may be in the car:

WARNING

Never use a hand-held mobile phone while driving. In some areas it is forbidden for the driver to use a mobile phone while the car is moving.

If the car is equipped with a navigation system you must only set and change the itinerary when the car is parked.

Never program the audio system while the car is moving. Program the radio's presets when the car is parked and then use the programmed presets for faster and simpler use of the radio.

Never use laptops or hand-held comput- ers while the car is moving.

Related information Sound, media and Internet (p. 492)

6 Vehicle Identification Number

SAFETY

SAFETY

44

Safety The vehicle is equipped with several safety sys- tems that work together to protect the vehicle's driver and passengers in the event of an acci- dent.

The car is equipped with a number of sensors that react in the event of an accident and activate different safety systems, such as different types of airbags and seatbelt tensioners. Depending on the specific accident situation, such as collisions at different angles, roll-over or driving off the road, the systems react in different ways to pro- vide the best protection.

There are also mechanical safety systems such as Whiplash Protection System. The car is also constructed so that a large part of the force of a collision is distributed to beams, pillars, floor, roof and other parts of the body.

The car's safety mode may be activated after a collision if an important function in the car has been damaged.

Warning symbol in driver display The warning symbol is illuminated in the driver display when the car's elec- trical system is set in ignition position II. The symbol is extinguished after

approx. 6 seconds if the car's safety system is fault-free.

WARNING

If the warning symbol remains illuminated or is switched on during driving and the mes- sage SRS airbag Service urgent Drive to workshop is shown in the driver display, it means that part of one of the safety systems does not have full functionality. Volvo recom- mends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted as soon as possible.

WARNING

Never modify or repair the car's various safety systems yourself. Defective work in one of the systems can cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted.

If the specific warning symbol is broken then the general warning symbol is illu- minated instead and the driver display shows the same message.

Related information Safety during pregnancy (p. 44)

Seatbelts (p. 46)

Airbags (p. 51)

Whiplash Protection System (p. 45)

Safety mode (p. 57)

Child safety (p. 59)

Safety during pregnancy It is important that the seatbelt is used correctly during pregnancy, and that pregnant drivers adjust their seating position.

Seatbelt

The diagonal section should wrap over the shoul- der then be routed between the breasts and to the side of the abdomen.

The lap section should lay flat over the thighs and as low as possible under the abdomen. It must never be allowed to ride upward. Remove the slack from the seatbelt and ensure that it fits as close to the body as possible. In addition, check that there are no twists in the seatbelt.

Seating position As the pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers must adjust the seat and steering wheel such that they can easily maintain control of the vehi-

SAFETY

}}

* Option/accessory. 45

cle as they drive (which means that they must be able to easily operate the foot pedals and steer- ing wheel). The aim should be to position the seat with as large a distance as possible between abdomen and steering wheel.

Related information Safety (p. 44)

Seatbelts (p. 46)

Manual front seat (p. 176)

Power front seat* (p. 177)

Whiplash Protection System Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS) reduces the risk of whiplash injuries. The system consists of energy absorbing backrests and seat cushion, as well as a specially designed head restraint in the front seats. WHIPS is deployed in the event of a rear-end collision, where the angle and speed of the colli- sion and the nature of the colliding vehicle all have an influence.

When WHIPS is deployed, the front seat back- rests are lowered backward and the seat cush- ions move downward to change the seating posi- tion of the driver and front seat passenger. Its movement helps to absorb some of the forces that can arise and cause whiplash.

WARNING

WHIPS is a supplement to the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.

WARNING

Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS yourself. Volvo recommends that an author- ised Volvo workshop should be contacted.

If the front seats have been subjected to a major load, such as in conjunction with a colli- sion, the seats must be replaced. Some of the seats' protective properties may have been lost even if they do not appear damaged.

Do not leave any objects on the floor behind or under the front seats or in the rear seat that may prevent WHIPS from functioning.

WARNING

Do not squeeze rigid objects between the rear seat cushion and the front seat's back- rest.

If a backrest in the rear seat is lowered then any load must be secured to prevent it from sliding up to the front seat backrest in the event of a collision.

WARNING

If a backrest in the rear seat is lowered or a rear-facing child seat is used in the rear seat, the corresponding front seat must be moved forward so that it does not make contact with the lowered backrest or child seat.

||

SAFETY

* Option/accessory.46

Seating position For optimum protection from WHIPS the driver and passenger must have the correct seating position and make sure that the system's func- tion is not obstructed.

Set the correct seating position in the front seat before driving starts.

Driver and front seat passenger should sit in the centre of the seat with as little space as possible between the head and the head restraint.

WHIPS and child seats The protection provided by the car to children seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is not diminished by WHIPS.

Related information Safety (p. 44)

Manual front seat (p. 176)

Power front seat* (p. 177)

Rear Collision Warning (p. 347)

Seatbelts Heavy braking can have serious consequences if the seatbelts are not used. It is important that the seatbelt lies against the body so it can provide maximum protection. Do not lean the backrest too far back. The seatbelt is designed to protect in a normal seating position.

WARNING

Remember not to clip or hook the seatbelt to hooks or other interior fittings, as this pre- vents the belt from tightening properly.

WARNING

The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat- belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision.

WARNING

Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted.

If the seatbelt has been subjected to a major load, such as in conjunction with a collision, the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of the seatbelt's protective properties may have been lost even if the seatbelt does not appear damaged. The seatbelt must also be replaced if it shows signs of wear or damage. The new seatbelt must be type-approved and designed for installation at the same location as the replaced seatbelt.

Related information Safety (p. 44)

Seatbelt tensioner (p. 48)

Putting on and taking off seatbelts (p. 47)

Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 49)

SAFETY

}}

47

Putting on and taking off seatbelts Make sure that all passengers have fastened their seatbelts before starting to drive.

Putting on seatbelts 1. Pull out the seatbelt slowly and make sure it

is not twisted or damaged.

NOTE

The seatbelt locks and cannot be withdrawn:

if it is pulled out too quickly

during braking and acceleration

if the car leans heavily.

2. Lock the belt by inserting the locking tab in the intended buckle.

> A loud "click" indicates that the belt has locked.

WARNING

Always insert the tongue of the seatbelt into the buckle on the correct side. The seatbelts and buckles would otherwise possibly not function as intended in the event of a colli- sion. There is a risk of serous injury.

3. In the front seats the seatbelt can be adjusted for height.

Press together the seat mounting and move the seatbelt up or down.

Position the belt as high as possible without it chafing against your throat.

The seatbelt must pass over the shoulder (not down over the arm).

4. Tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling the diagonal shoulder belt up towards the shoulder.

The hip strap must be positioned low down (not over the abdomen).

||

SAFETY

* Option/accessory.48

WARNING

Each seatbelt is designed for only one person.

WARNING

Remember not to clip or hook the seatbelt to hooks or other interior fittings, as this pre- vents the belt from tightening properly.

WARNING

Do not make any damages on seatbelts nor insert any foreign objects into a buckle. The seatbelts and buckles would then possibly not function as intended in the event of a colli- sion. There is a risk of serous injury.

Taking off seatbelts 1. Press the red button on the seatbelt buckle

and then let the belt retract.

2. If the seatbelt does not retract fully, feed it in by hand so that it does not hang loose.

Related information Seatbelts (p. 46)

Seatbelt tensioner (p. 48)

Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 49)

Seatbelt tensioner The car is fitted with standard seatbelt tension- ers and electric* seatbelt tensioners that can tension the seatbelts in critical situations and collisions.

Standard seatbelt tensioner All the seatbelts are equipped with a standard seatbelt tensioner.

The seatbelt tensioner tensions the seatbelt in the event of a collision with sufficient force in order to more effectively restrain the occupant.

Electric seatbelt tensioner* The driver and front passenger seatbelts are equipped with an electric seatbelt tensioner.

The seatbelt tensioners work together and can be activated together with the driver support sys- tems City Safety and Rear Collision Warning. In critical situations, such as panic braking, driving off the road (e.g. the car rolls into a ditch, lifts off the ground or hits something in the terrain), skid- ding, or risk of collision, the seatbelt can be ten- sioned by the seatbelt tensioner's electric motor.

The electric seatbelt tensioner helps to adjust the occupant to a better position, reducing the risk of striking the car's interior and improving the effect of safety systems, such as the car's airbags.

When the critical situation has come to an end, the seatbelt and the electric seatbelt preten-

sioner are restored automatically, but they can also be restored manually.

IMPORTANT

If the passenger airbag is deactivated, the electric seatbelt tensioner on the passenger side will also be deactivated.

WARNING

Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted.

If the seatbelt has been subjected to a major load, such as in conjunction with a collision, the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of the seatbelt's protective properties may have been lost even if the seatbelt does not appear damaged. The seatbelt must also be replaced if it shows signs of wear or damage. The new seatbelt must be type-approved and designed for installation at the same location as the replaced seatbelt.

Related information Seatbelts (p. 46)

Putting on and taking off seatbelts (p. 47)

Resetting the electric seatbelt tensioner* (p. 49)

Activating and deactivating passenger air- bag* (p. 54)

SAFETY

}}

* Option/accessory. 49

City Safety (p. 334)

Rear Collision Warning (p. 347)

Resetting the electric seatbelt tensioner* The electric seatbelt tensioner is designed to be reset automatically, but the seatbelt tensioner can be reset manually if the belt remains extended. 1. Stop the car at a safe place.

2. Unfasten the seatbelt and then refasten it.

> The seatbelt and electric seatbelt ten- sioner are reset.

WARNING

Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted.

If the seatbelt has been subjected to a major load, such as in conjunction with a collision, the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of the seatbelt's protective properties may have been lost even if the seatbelt does not appear damaged. The seatbelt must also be replaced if it shows signs of wear or damage. The new seatbelt must be type-approved and designed for installation at the same location as the replaced seatbelt.

Related information Seatbelt tensioner (p. 48)

Seatbelts (p. 46)

Door and seatbelt reminder The system reminds unbelted occupants to wear a seatbelt, and also warns about an open door, bonnet, tailgate or fuel filler flap.

Driver display graphics

Graphics in the driver display with different types of warnings. The warning colour on the door and tailgate is dependent on the vehicle's speed.

The driver display's graphics show which seats in the car are occupied by belted and unbelted pas- sengers.

The same graphic also shows if the bonnet, tail- gate, fuel filler flap or any door is open.

The graphic can be acknowledged by pressing the O button on the right-hand steering wheel keypad.

||

SAFETY

50

Seatbelt reminder

Visual reminder in the roof console.

A visual reminder is given in the roof console and by means of the warning symbol in the driver dis- play.

The acoustic reminder is dependent on speed, driving time and distance.

The belt status of the driver and passengers is shown in the driver display graphics when a belt is buckled or unbuckled.

Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt reminder system.

Front seat A visual and acoustic reminder remind the driver and front seat passenger to use a seatbelt if either of them is not wearing one.

Rear seat The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two subfunctions:

Provides information on which seatbelts are being used in the rear seat. The driver dis- play's graphics are shown when the seatbelts are in use.

Reminding that a seatbelt in the rear seat is unfastened during a journey by means of a visual and acoustic reminder. The reminder will cease once the seatbelt has been put on again.

Reminder for doors, bonnet, tailgate and fuel filler flap If the bonnet, tailgate, fuel filler flap or a door is not closed properly, the driver display's graphics show what is open. Stop the car in a safe place as soon as possible and close the source of the warning.

If the car is driven at a speed lower than approx. 10 km/h (6 mph) then the driver display's information symbol illu- minates.

If the car is driven at a speed higher than approx. 10 km/h (6 mph) then the driver display's warning symbol illumi- nates.

Related information Seatbelts (p. 46)

Putting on and taking off seatbelts (p. 47)

SAFETY

}}

51

Airbags The car is equipped with airbags and inflatable curtains for driver and passengers.

NOTE

The detectors react differently depending on the nature of the collision and whether or not the seatbelts are fastened. Applies to all belt positions.

It is therefore possible that only one (or none) of the airbags may inflate in a collision. The detectors sense the force of the collision on the vehicle and the action is adapted accord- ingly so that none, one or more airbags are deployed.

WARNING

The airbag system's control module is located in the centre console. If the centre console is drenched with water or other liquid, discon- nect the cables to the starter battery. Do not attempt to start the car since the airbags may deploy. Recovering the car. Volvo recom- mends that it is transported to an authorised Volvo workshop.

Deployed airbags If any of the airbags have deployed, the following is recommended:

Recovering the car. Volvo recommends that it is transported to an authorised Volvo work- shop. Do not drive with deployed airbags.

Volvo recommends engaging an authorised Volvo workshop to handle the replacement of components in the car's safety systems.

Always contact a doctor.

WARNING

Never drive with deployed airbags. They can make steering difficult. Other safety systems may also be damaged. The smoke and dust created when the airbags are deployed can cause skin and eye irritation/injury after inten- sive exposure. In case of irritation, wash with cold water. The rapid deployment sequence and airbag fabric may cause friction and skin burns.

Related information Safety (p. 44)

Driver airbags (p. 51)

Passenger airbag (p. 52)

Side airbags (p. 56)

Airbags (p. 57)

Driver airbags As a supplement to the seatbelts, the car is equipped with steering wheel airbag and knee

airbag1 on the driver's side.

Steering wheel airbag and knee airbag1 on the driver's side in the front seat.

In the event of a frontal collision, the airbags help to protect the head, neck, face and chest of the driver as well as the knees and legs.

A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the airbag/airbags is inflated. The airbag cushions the initial collision impact for the occu- pant. The airbag deflates when compressed by the collision. When this occurs, smoke escapes into the car. This is completely normal. The entire process, including inflation and deflation of the airbag, occurs within tenths of a second.

1 The car is only equipped with knee airbag in certain markets.

||

SAFETY

52

WARNING

The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision.

To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag deploys, passengers must sit as upright as possible with their feet on the floor and backs against the backrest.

WARNING

Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted for repair. Defective work in the airbag system could cause malfunction and result in serious per- sonal injury.

Steering wheel airbag location This airbag is fitted into the centre of the steering wheel. The steering wheel is marked AIRBAG.

Knee airbag1 location The airbag is folded up in the lower part of the instrument panel on the driver's side. Its cover panel is marked AIRBAG.

WARNING

Do not place or attach any object on the top or front of the panel where the knee airbag is stowed.

Related information Airbags (p. 51)

Passenger airbag (p. 52)

Passenger airbag As a supplement to the seatbelts, the vehicle is equipped with an airbag on the passenger side in the front seat.

Front passenger airbag in front seat.

In the event of a frontal collision, the airbag helps to protect the head, neck, face and chest of the passenger as well as the knees and legs.

A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the airbag is inflated. The airbag cushions the initial collision impact for the occupant. The airbag deflates when compressed by the collision. When this occurs, smoke escapes into the car. This is completely normal. The entire process, including inflation and deflation of the airbag, occurs within tenths of a second.

1 The car is only equipped with knee airbag in certain markets.

SAFETY

* Option/accessory. 53

WARNING

The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision.

To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag deploys, passengers must sit as upright as possible with their feet on the floor and backs against the backrest.

WARNING

Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted for repair. Defective work in the airbag system could cause malfunction and result in serious per- sonal injury.

Passenger airbag location The airbag is folded up into a compartment above the glovebox. Its cover panel is marked AIRBAG.

WARNING

Do not put objects in front of or above the dashboard where the passenger airbag is located.

Label for passenger airbag

Label on the passenger side's sun visor.

Label on the passenger side's door pillar. The label becomes visible when the passenger door is opened.

The warning label for the passenger airbag is positioned as shown above.

WARNING

If the car is not equipped with a switch to acti- vate/deactivate the passenger airbag, the air- bag will always be activated.

WARNING

Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front of the front passenger seat.

Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the airbag is activated.

Front-facing passengers (children and adults) must never sit on the front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is deactivated.

Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life or lead to serious personal injury.

Related information Airbags (p. 51)

Driver airbags (p. 51)

Activating and deactivating passenger air- bag* (p. 54)

SAFETY

* Option/accessory.54

Activating and deactivating passenger airbag* The passenger airbag can be deactivated if the car is equipped with a switch, Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch (PACOS).

Switch The switch for the passenger airbag is located on the passenger end of the instrument panel and is accessible when the passenger door is open.

Check that the switch is in the required position.

ON - the airbag is activated and all front-fac- ing passengers (children and adults) can sit safely on the passenger seat.

OFF - The airbag is deactivated and children in rear-facing child seats can sit safely on the passenger seat.

WARNING

If the car is not equipped with a switch to acti- vate/deactivate the passenger airbag, the air- bag will always be activated.

Activating passenger airbag

Pull the switch outward and turn from OFF (B) to ON (A).

> The driver display shows the message Passenger airbag on Please acknowledge.

NOTE

If the passenger airbag has been activated/ deactivated with the car in ignition position I or lower, a message is shown in the driver display and the following indicator in the roof console approx. 6 seconds after the car's electrical system has been set in ignition position II.

SAFETY

}}

55

2. Confirm the message by pressing the right- hand steering wheel keypad's O button.

> A text message and a warning symbol in the roof console indicate that the airbag for the front passenger seat is activated.

WARNING

Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat when the airbag is activated.

The passenger airbag must always be acti- vated when front-facing passengers (children and adults) are sitting in the front passenger seat.

Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life or lead to serious personal injury.

Deactivating passenger airbag

Pull the switch outward and turn from ON (A) to OFF (B).

> The driver display shows the message Passenger airbag off Please acknowledge.

NOTE

If the passenger airbag has been activated/ deactivated with the car in ignition position I or lower, a message is shown in the driver display and the following indicator in the roof console approx. 6 seconds after the car's electrical system has been set in ignition position II.

2. Confirm the message by pressing the right- hand steering wheel keypad's O button.

> A text message and a symbol in the roof console indicate that the airbag for the front passenger seat is deactivated.

WARNING

Front-facing passengers (children and adults) must never sit on the passenger seat when the airbag is deactivated.

Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life or lead to serious personal injury.

IMPORTANT

If the passenger airbag is deactivated, the electric seatbelt tensioner on the passenger side will also be deactivated.

||

SAFETY

56

Related information Seatbelt tensioner (p. 48)

Child seats (p. 60)

Side airbags The side airbags on the driver's and passenger seats act to protect the chest and hips in the event of a collision.

The side airbags are fitted in the outer backrest frames of the front seats and help to protect the driver and passengers in the front seat.

A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the side airbags are inflated. The airbag inflates between the occupant and the door panel and thereby cushions the initial impact. The airbag deflates when compressed by the collision. The side airbag is normally only deployed on the side of the collision.

WARNING

Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted for repair. Defective work in the side airbag system could cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury.

WARNING

Do not put objects in the area between the outside of the seat and the door panel, since this area is required by the side airbag.

Volvo recommends the use only of car seat covers approved by Volvo. Other seat covers may impede the operation of the side airbags.

WARNING

Side airbags are a supplement the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.

Side airbags and child seats The protection provided by the car to children seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is not diminished by the side airbag.

Related information Airbags (p. 51)

SAFETY

}}

57

Airbags The inflatable curtain, Inflatable Curtain (IC), helps to prevent the driver and passengers from striking their heads on the inside of the car dur- ing a collision.

The inflatable curtain is mounted along both sides of the headlining and helps protect the driver and outer seat passengers of the car. The panels are labelled with IC AIRBAG.

A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the inflatable curtain is inflated.

WARNING

Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted for repair. Defective work in the inflatable curtain system can cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury.

WARNING

Never hang or attach heavy items onto the handles in the roof. The hooks are only designed for light coats and jackets (not for solid objects such as umbrellas).

Do not screw or install anything onto the car's headlining, door pillars or side panels. This could compromise the intended protection. Volvo recommends only using Volvo genuine parts that are approved for fitting within these areas.

WARNING

Leave 10 cm (4 inches) space between the load and the side windows if the car is loaded to above the top edge of the door windows. Otherwise, the intended protection of the inflatable curtain, which is concealed in the headlining, may be compromised.

WARNING

The inflatable curtain is a supplement to the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.

Related information Airbags (p. 51)

Safety mode Safety mode is a protective state that is trig- gered when a collision may have damaged any of the car's vital functions, such as the fuel lines, sensors for any of the safety systems, or the brake system. If the car has been in a collision, the message Safety mode See Owner's manual may be shown on the driver display with a warning sym- bol as long as the display is not damaged and the car's electrical system is still in working order. This message means that the car has reduced functionality.

WARNING

Never, under any circumstances, attempt to restart the car if it smells of fuel when the Safety mode See Owner's manual mes- sage is shown in the driver display. Leave the car at once.

If the car is in safety mode, it is possible to attempt to reset the system in order to start and move the car for a short distance, if in a danger- ous traffic situation for example.

||

SAFETY

58

WARNING

Never attempt to repair your car or reset the electronics yourself if the car has been in safety mode. This could result in personal injury or the car not functioning as normal. Volvo recommends that engaging an author- ised Volvo workshop to check and restore the car to normal status after Safety mode See Owner's manual has been shown.

WARNING

If the car is in safety mode it must not be towed. It must be transported from its loca- tion. Volvo recommends that it is transported to an authorised Volvo workshop.

Related information Safety (p. 44)

Starting and moving the car after safety mode (p. 58)

Recovery (p. 484)

Starting and moving the car after safety mode If the car is in safety mode, it is possible to attempt to reset the system in order to start and move the car for a short distance, if in a danger- ous traffic situation for example.

Starting the car after safety mode 1. Check the general damage situation of the

car and whether any fuel has been leaking. There must be no smell of fuel either.

If there is only minor damage and a check has revealed no fuel leaks, starting can be attempted.

WARNING

Never, under any circumstances, attempt to restart the car if it smells of fuel when the Safety mode See Owner's manual mes- sage is shown in the driver display. Leave the car at once.

2. Switch off the car.

3. Then try to start the car.

> The driver's display shows the message Car start System check, wait while the car's electronics carry out a systems check and then try to resume normal sta- tus. This can take up to one minute.

4. Then try to start the car again when the mes- sage Car start System check, wait is no longer shown in the driver's display.

IMPORTANT

If the message Safety mode See Owner's manual is still shown on the display the car must not be driven or towed but a vehicle recovery service must then be used instead. Even if the car appears to be driveable, hid- den damage may make the car impossible to control once moving.

Moving the car after safety mode 1. If the driver display shows the message

Normal mode The car is now in normal mode after a start attempt, the car can be carefully moved if standing in a dangerous position.

2. Do not move the car further than necessary.

WARNING

If the car is in safety mode it must not be towed. It must be transported from its loca- tion. Volvo recommends that it is transported to an authorised Volvo workshop.

SAFETY

59

Related information Safety mode (p. 57)

Starting the car (p. 428)

Recovery (p. 484)

Child safety Children must always sit secure while travelling in the car. Volvo has child safety equipment (child seats and attachment devices) which is designed for fitting in this particular car. Using Volvo's child safety equipment, you obtain the optimum conditions for a child to travel safely in the car. In addition, the child safety equipment fits in well and is simple to use.

The equipment that should be used is selected taking account of the weight and size of the child.

Volvo recommends that children travel in a rear- facing child seat until as late an age as possible, at least until 3-4 years of age, and then in a front-facing child seat until the child is 140 cm (4 feet 7 inches) tall.

NOTE

Legal provisions about the type of child seat that must be used for children of different ages and heights vary from country to coun- try. Check what does apply.

NOTE

When using child safety equipment, it is important to read the installation instructions included.

In the event of questions when fitting child safety equipment, contact the manufacturer for clearer instructions.

Children of all ages and sizes must always sit correctly secured in the car. Never allow a child to sit on the knee of a passenger.

Related information Safety (p. 44)

Child seats (p. 60)

Activating and deactivating child safety locks (p. 253)

SAFETY

* Option/accessory.60

Child seats Suitable child seats should always be used when children are travelling in the car. Children should sit comfortably and safely. Make sure that the child seat is positioned, mounted and used correctly.

Look in the installation instructions for the child seat for the correct fitting.

NOTE

When using child safety equipment, it is important to read the installation instructions included.

In the event of questions when fitting child safety equipment, contact the manufacturer for clearer instructions.

NOTE

Never leave a child seat loose in the car. Always secure it according to the instructions for the child seat, even when it is not in use.

Related information Child safety (p. 59)

Upper mounting points for child seats (p. 60)

Lower mounting points for child seats (p. 61)

i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child seats (p. 62)

Child seat positioning (p. 62)

Activating and deactivating passenger air- bag* (p. 54)

Upper mounting points for child seats The car is equipped with upper mounting points for child seats on the rear seat's outer seats. The upper mounting points are primarily intended for use with front-facing child seats.

Always follow the manufacturer's installation instructions when connecting a child seat to the upper mounting points.

The location of the mounting points

Mounting point locations are indicated by symbols on the rear of the backrest.

The mounting points are located on the rear of the rear seat's outer seats.

SAFETY

* Option/accessory. 61

WARNING

The child seat's upper straps must be routed through the hole in the head restraint leg before they are tensioned at the mounting point. If this is not possible, follow the recom- mendations from the child seat manufacturer.

NOTE

Fold the head restraints in order to facilitate fitting this type of child seat in cars with fold- ing head restraints on the outer seats.

NOTE

In cars with a cargo cover over the luggage compartment, this must be removed before child seats can be attached to the securing points.

Related information Child seats (p. 60)

Lower mounting points for child seats (p. 61)

i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child seats (p. 62)

Table for location of child seats using the car's seatbelts (p. 66)

Lower mounting points for child seats The car is equipped with lower mounting points for child seats in the front seat* and the rear seat. The lower mounting points are designed to be used in conjunction with certain rear-facing child seats.

Always follow the manufacturer's installation instructions when connecting a child seat to the lower mounting points.

The location of the mounting points

Mounting point locations in the front seat.

The mounting points in the front seat are located on the sides of the passenger seat's legroom.

The mounting points in the front seat are only mounted if the vehicle is equipped with a switch to activate/deactivate the passenger airbag*.

Mounting point locations in the rear seat.

The mounting points in the rear seat are located on the rear section of the front seat's floor rails.

Related information Child seats (p. 60)

Upper mounting points for child seats (p. 60)

i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child seats (p. 62)

Table for location of child seats using the car's seatbelts (p. 66)

SAFETY

62

i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child seats The car is equipped with i-Size/ISOFIX2 mount- ing points for child seats in the rear seat.

i-Size/ISOFIX is a fixture system for car child seats that is based on an international standard.

Always follow the manufacturer's installation instructions when connecting a child seat to the i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points.

The location of the mounting points

Mounting point locations are indicated by symbols2 on the upholstery of the backrest.

The mounting points for i-Size/ISOFIX are located behind covers in the lower section of the rear seat's backrest, in the outer seats.

Lift the covers in order to access the mounting points.

Related information Child seats (p. 60)

Upper mounting points for child seats (p. 60)

Lower mounting points for child seats (p. 61)

Table for location of i-Size child seats (p. 68)

Table for location of ISOFIX child seats (p. 69)

Child seat positioning It is important to position the child seat in the right place in the car and this depends, amongst other things, on the type of child seat and whether the passenger airbag is activated.

Rear-facing child seat and airbag are not compatible.

Always fit rear-facing child seats in the rear seat if the passenger airbag is activated. If a child is sitting on the front passenger seat then he/she could suffer serious injury if the airbag deploys.

If the passenger airbag is deactivated then rear- facing child seats can be fitted on the front pas- senger seat.

2 Names and symbols change depending on market.

SAFETY

63

NOTE

Regulations regarding the placement of chil- dren in cars vary from country to country. Check what does apply.

WARNING

Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front of the front passenger seat.

Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the airbag is activated.

Front-facing passengers (children and adults) must never sit on the front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is deactivated.

Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life or lead to serious personal injury.

Label for passenger airbag

Label on the passenger side's sun visor.

Label on the passenger side's door pillar. The label becomes visible when the passenger door is opened.

The warning label for the passenger airbag is positioned as shown above.

Related information Child seats (p. 60)

Child seat mounting (p. 64)

Table for location of child seats using the car's seatbelts (p. 66)

Table for location of i-Size child seats (p. 68)

Table for location of ISOFIX child seats (p. 69)

SAFETY

64

Child seat mounting It is important to remember a number of things when a child seat is mounted and used, which depend on where the child seat is positioned.

WARNING

Booster cushions/child seats with steel braces or some other design that could rest on the seatbelt buckle's opening button must not be used, as they could cause the seatbelt buckle to open accidentally.

Do not secure the straps for the child seat into the seat's horizontal adjustment bar or in springs, rails or beams under the seat. Sharp edges may damage the straps.

Do not allow the upper section of the child seat to rest against the windscreen.

NOTE

When using child safety equipment, it is important to read the installation instructions included.

In the event of questions when fitting child safety equipment, contact the manufacturer for clearer instructions.

NOTE

Never leave a child seat loose in the car. Always secure it according to the instructions for the child seat, even when it is not in use.

Installation in the front seat When fitting rear-facing child seats, check

that the passenger airbag is deactivated.

When fitting front-facing child seats, check that the passenger airbag is activated.

Only use child seats that are recommended by Volvo, are universally approved or are semi-universal, and where the car is included on the manufacturer's vehicle list.

ISOFIX child seats can only be fitted when the car is equipped with the ISOFIX console3

accessory.

If the child seat is equipped with lower straps, Volvo recommends that the lower mounting points are used with these3.

The ISOFIX guide can be used in order to facilitate child seat installation.

Installation in the rear seat

WARNING

Child seats with support legs must not be mounted in the centre seat, risk of danger.

Only use child seats that are recommended by Volvo, are universally approved or are semi-universal, and where the car is included on the manufacturer's vehicle list.

The outer seats are equipped with the ISOFIX fixture system and are approved for i- Size4.

The outer seats are equipped with upper mounting points. Volvo recommends that child seat's upper straps should be pulled through the hole in the head restraint before being tensioned at the mounting point. If this is not possible, follow the recommendations from the child seat manufacturer.

If the child seat is equipped with lower straps, never adjust the position of the seat in front after the straps have been fitted in the lower mounting points. Always remember to remove the lower straps when the child seat is not installed.

3 The accessory range varies depending on market. 4 Varies depending on market.

SAFETY

65

Related information Child seat positioning (p. 62)

Table for location of child seats using the car's seatbelts (p. 66)

Table for location of i-Size child seats (p. 68)

Table for location of ISOFIX child seats (p. 69)

SAFETY

66

Table for location of child seats using the car's seatbelts The table gives a recommendation for which child seats suit which locations, and for what size of child.

NOTE

Always read the owner's manual section on installing a child seat before installing one in the car.

Weight Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-facing

child seats)

Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-facing

child seats)

Outer rear seat Centre rear seat

Group 0

max 10 kg UA, B X UB UB

Group 0+

max 13 kg UA, B X UB UB

Group 1

9-18 kg LC UFA, D UD, LC UD

Group 2

15-25 kg LC UFA, E UE, LC UE

SAFETY

67

Weight Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-facing

child seats)

Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-facing

child seats)

Outer rear seat Centre rear seat

Group 3

22-36 kg X UFA, E UE UE

U: Suitable for universal category restraints approved for use in this mass group.

UF: Suitable for front-facing universally approved child seats.

L: Suitable for particular child restraints. These restraints may be of the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal categories.

X: The seat is not suitable for children in this mass group.

A Adjust the backrest to a more upright position. B Volvo recommends: Volvo infant seat (type approval E1 04301146). C Volvo recommends: Volvo rear-facing seat (type approval E5 04212). D Volvo recommends rear-facing child seat for children in this mass group. E Volvo recommends: Booster cushion with and without back (type approval E5 04216); Volvo booster seat (type approval E1 04301312).

WARNING

Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is activated.

Related information Child seat positioning (p. 62)

Child seat mounting (p. 64)

Table for location of i-Size child seats (p. 68)

Table for location of ISOFIX child seats (p. 69)

Seatbelts (p. 46)

SAFETY

68

Table for location of i-Size child seats The table gives a recommendation for which i- Size child seats suit which locations, and for what size of child.

The child seat must be approved in accordance with UN Reg R129.

NOTE

Always read the owner's manual section on installing a child seat before installing one in the car.

Type of child seat Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-

facing child seats)

Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-fac-

ing child seats)

Outer rear seat Centre rear seat

i-Size child seats X X i-UA, B X

i-U: Suitable for i-Size "universal" child seat, front-facing and rear-facing.

X: Not suitable for universally approved child seats.

A Volvo recommends rear-facing child seats for this group. B Volvo recommends: BeSafe iZi Kid X2 i-Size (type approval E4-129R-000002).

Related information Child seat positioning (p. 62)

Child seat mounting (p. 64)

Table for location of child seats using the car's seatbelts (p. 66)

Table for location of ISOFIX child seats (p. 69)

i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child seats (p. 62)

SAFETY

}}

69

Table for location of ISOFIX child seats The table gives a recommendation for which ISOFIX child seats suit which locations, and for what size of child.

The child seat must be approved in accordance with UN Reg R44 and the car model must be included in the manufacturer's vehicle list.

NOTE

Always read the owner's manual section on installing a child seat before installing one in the car.

Weight Size classA Type of child seat Front seat (with deactivated air-

bag, only rear-facing child

seats)B

Front seat (with activated air-

bag, only front-facing child

seats)B

Outer rear seat Centre rear seat

Group 0

max 10 kg E Rear-facing infant seat ILB, C, XD X ILC X

Group 0+

max 13 kg

E Rear-facing infant seat

ILB, C, E, XD X ILC XC Rear-facing child seat

D Rear-facing child seat

||

SAFETY

70

Weight Size classA Type of child seat Front seat (with deactivated air-

bag, only rear-facing child

seats)B

Front seat (with activated air-

bag, only front-facing child

seats)B

Outer rear seat Centre rear seat

Group 1

9-18 kg

A Front-facing child seat

X ILB, E, F, XD ILF, IUFF XB Front-facing child seat

B1 Front-facing child seat

C Rear-facing child seat ILB, E, XD X IL X

D Rear-facing child seat

IL: Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint systems. These child restraint systems are those of the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal catego- ries.

IUF: Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraint systems of universal category approved for use in the mass group.

X: Not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems.

A For child seats with the ISOFIX fixture system there is a size classification to help users choose the right type of child seat. The size class can be read on the child seat's label. B Works for the installation of ISOFIX child seats that are semi-universally approved (IL) if the car is equipped with the ISOFIX console accessory (the accessory range varies depending on market). C Volvo recommends: Volvo infant seat secured using the ISOFIX fixture system (type approval E1 04301146). D Applicable if the car is not fitted with an ISOFIX bracket. E Adjust the backrest so that the head restraint does not interfere with the child seat. F Volvo recommends rear-facing child seat for children in this mass group.

WARNING

Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is activated.

NOTE

If an i-Size/ISOFIX child seat has no size classification, the car model must be included on the vehicle list for the child seat.

NOTE

Volvo recommends contacting an authorised Volvo dealer for information about which i- Size/ISOFIX child seats Volvo recommends.

Related information Child seat positioning (p. 62)

Child seat mounting (p. 64)

SAFETY

71

Table for location of child seats using the car's seatbelts (p. 66)

Table for location of i-Size child seats (p. 68)

i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child seats (p. 62)

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.74

Instruments and controls in left- hand drive car The overviews show where the displays and controls near the driver are located.

Steering wheel and instrument panel

Position lamps, daytime running lights, dipped beam, main beam, direction indica- tors, rear fog lamp, resetting the trip meter

Steering wheel paddles for manual gear changing in an automatic gearbox*

Head-up display*

Driver display

Wipers and washing, rain sensor*

Right-hand steering wheel keypad

Steering wheel adjustment

Horn

Left-hand steering wheel keypad

Bonnet opening

Display lighting, tailgate unlocking/opening*/ closing*, halogen headlamp levelling

Roof console

Front reading lamps and interior lighting

Panorama roof*

Display in roof console

Manual dimming of interior rearview mirror

Centre and tunnel console

Centre display

Hazard warning flashers, defrosting, media

Gear selector

Start knob

Drive mode control

Parking brake

Automatic braking when stationary

Driver's door

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

}}

* Option/accessory. 75

Memories for power front seat*, door mirror and head-up display* settings

Central locking

Power windows, door mirrors, electric child safety lock*

Adjusting front seat

Related information Manual front seat (p. 176)

Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 177)

Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 189)

Lighting control (p. 144)

Starting the car (p. 428)

Driver display (p. 77)

Overview of centre display (p. 101)

Gearbox (p. 442)

Instruments and controls in right- hand drive car The overviews show where the displays and controls near the driver are located.

Steering wheel and instrument panel

Position lamps, daytime running lights, dipped beam, main beam, direction indica- tors, rear fog lamp, resetting the trip meter

Steering wheel paddles for manual gear changing in an automatic gearbox*

Head-up display*

Driver display

Wipers and washing, rain sensor*

Right-hand steering wheel keypad

Display lighting, tailgate unlocking/opening*/ closing*, halogen headlamp levelling

Bonnet opening

Horn

Steering wheel adjustment

Left-hand steering wheel keypad

Roof console

Front reading lamps and interior lighting

Panorama roof*

Display in roof console

Manual dimming of interior rearview mirror

Centre and tunnel console

||

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.76

Centre display

Hazard warning flashers, defrosting, media

Gear selector

Start knob

Drive mode control

Parking brake

Automatic braking when stationary

Driver's door

Memories for power front seat*, door mirror and head-up display* settings

Central locking

Power windows, door mirrors, electric child safety lock*

Adjusting front seat

Related information Manual front seat (p. 176)

Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 177)

Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 189)

Lighting control (p. 144)

Starting the car (p. 428)

Driver display (p. 77)

Overview of centre display (p. 101)

Gearbox (p. 442)

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

}}

* Option/accessory. 77

Driver display The driver display shows information about the car and driving. The driver display contains gauges, indicators and indicator and warning symbols. The content of the driver display depends on the car's equip- ment, settings and which functions are active at that time.

The driver display is activated as soon as a door is opened, i.e. in ignition position 0. The driver display extinguishes after a while if it is not used. To reactivate it, proceed with one of the following:

Depress the brake pedal.

Activate ignition position I.

Open one of the doors.

WARNING

In the event of a fault in the driver display the information on e.g. brakes, airbags or other safety systems may not be shown. In which case, the driver cannot check the status of the car's systems or receive current warnings and information.

WARNING

If the driver display should extinguish, not illu- minate on activation/start or be fully or parti- ally illegible, the car must not be used. You should visit a workshop immediately. Volvo recommends an authorised Volvo workshop.

Location in the driver display:

On the left In the middle On the right

Speedometer Indicator and warning symbols Tachometer/Hybrid gaugeA

Trip meter Outside temperature gauge Gear shift indicator

OdometerB Clock Drive mode

(Hybrid, Off Road, Pure, Power or AWD)

Cruise control and speed limiter information Messages, in some cases with graphics Fuel gauge

Road Sign Information* Door and seatbelt information Hybrid battery gauge

Charge status Distance to empty tank

||

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.78

On the left In the middle On the right

Media player Distance to empty battery

Navigation map* Instantaneous fuel consumption

Phone App menu (activated via steering wheel keypad)

Voice recognition

CompassA

A Depends on drive mode selected. B Accumulated mileage.

Dynamic symbol The dynamic symbol in its basic form.

The centre of the driver display contains a dynamic symbol that changes appearance for dif- ferent types of message. An amber or red marker around the symbol indicates the degree of severity of a control or warning message. With an animation, the basic shape can be turned into a larger image in order to graphically indicate where a problem is situated or to clarify informa- tion.

Examples of indicator symbol.

Related information Driver display settings (p. 79)

Warning symbols in the driver display (p. 89)

Indicator symbols in the driver display (p. 87)

Trip computer (p. 82)

Messages in the driver display (p. 98)

Handling the application menu in the driver display (p. 97)

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

* Option/accessory. 79

Driver display settings Settings for the driver display's display options can be made in the driver display's application menu and in the centre display's settings menu.

Settings in the driver display's app menu In the app menu, you can choose which informa- tion is shown on the driver display from:

Trip computer

media player

phone

navigation system*.

Settings in the centre display

Selecting information type 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top

view.

2. Press My Car Displays Driver Display Information.

3. Select what should be shown in the back- ground:

Show no information in background

Show information for current playing media

Show navigation even if no route is set.

Selecting theme 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top

view.

2. Tap on My Car Displays Display Themes

3. Select a theme (appearance) for the driver display:

Glass

Minimalistic

Performance

Chrome Rings.

Selecting language 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top

view.

2. Tap on System System Languages and

Units System Language to select lan- guage.

> A change will affect the language in all displays.

These settings are personal and are saved auto- matically to the active driver profile.

Related information Driver display (p. 77)

Handling the application menu in the driver display (p. 97)

Changing settings in the centre display (p. 126)

Fuel gauge The fuel gauge in the driver display shows the fuel level in the tank.

The beige zone in the fuel gauge indicates the quantity of fuel in the tank.

When the fuel level is low and it is soon time to refuel, the fuel pump symbol illuminates and changes to amber colour. The trip computer also indicates the distance to empty tank.

Related information Driver display (p. 77)

Hybrid battery gauge (p. 81)

Filling fuel (p. 467)

Fuel tank - volume (p. 654)

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

80

Hybrid gauge In drive modes Hybrid and Pure, the driver dis- play shows a hybrid gauge that can help the driver to drive the car in a more energy-efficient way.

The hybrid gauge shows in different ways the relationship between how much power is being taken from the electric motor and how much power is available.

Symbols in the hybrid gauge Indicates current level for available electric motor power. If the symbol is filled in, it means that the electric motor is in use.

If the symbol is not filled in, it means that the electric motor is not in use.

Indicates the power level when the combustion engine starts. If the symbol is filled in, it means that the combus- tion engine is in use.

Indicates the power level when the internal combustion engine is due to start. If the symbol is not filled in, it means that the combustion engine is

not in use.

Indicator that shows that the hybrid battery is being charged, e.g. if the brake pedal is gently depressed.

Driver-requested power The pointer in the hybrid gauge indicates the amount of engine power requested by the driver by regulating the accelerator pedal. The higher the reading on the scale, the more power is requested by the driver in the current gear. The marking between the lightning bolt and the drop indicates the transition point where the electric motor stops working and the combustion engine takes over.

Example:

The car is started but stationary, no power is requested.

The electric motor cannot supply the amount of engine power requested and the internal combustion engine starts.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

81

The car generates current to the battery, the battery is charged, e.g. when the brake pedal is pressed lightly or during engine braking down a hill.

Related information Drive modes (p. 449)

Driver display (p. 77)

Foot brake (p. 434)

Driving with electric operation (p. 461)

Starting and stopping the combustion engine in Twin Engine (p. 448)

Hybrid battery gauge The hybrid battery gauge shows how much energy there is in the hybrid battery.

The energy in the hybrid battery is used for the electric motor, but also to cool or heat the car. The trip computer calculates an approximate dis- tance for the energy left in the hybrid battery.

Symbols in the hybrid battery gauge

The symbol in the hybrid battery gauge indi- cates that the Hold function is activated, and the

symbol indicates that the Charge function is activated.

Related information Driver display (p. 77)

Charging the hybrid battery (p. 407)

"Hold" and "Charge" function (p. 463)

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

82

Trip computer The car's trip computer records and calculates vales such as e.g. distance, fuel consumption and average speed whilst driving. In order to facilitate fuel-efficient driving, informa- tion is recorded about both instantaneous and average fuel consumption. The information from the trip computer can be shown in the driver dis- play.

Trip computer information in the driver display1.

The following meters are included in the trip computer:

Trip meter

Odometer

Instantaneous fuel consumption

Distance to empty tank

Distance to empty battery

Tourist - alternative speedometer

Units for distance, speed, etc. can be changed via system settings in the centre display.

Trip meter There are two trip meters, TM and TA.

TM can be reset manually and TA is reset auto- matically if the car is not used for at least four hours.

The following information is registered while driv- ing:

Mileage

Driving time

Average speed

Average fuel consumption.

The values apply from the trip meter's latest reset.

Odometer The odometer records the car's total mileage. This value cannot be reset to zero.

Instantaneous fuel consumption This gauge shows the fuel consumption that the car has at the moment. The value is updated approximately every second.

Distance to empty tank The trip computer calculates the remaining mile- age with the fuel available in the tank.

The calculation is based on the average fuel con- sumption over the last 30 km (20 miles) and the remaining drivable fuel quantity.

When the gauge shows "----", there is not enough fuel left to be able to calculate the remaining mileage. Refuel as soon as possible.

NOTE

There may be a slight deviation if the driving style has been changed.

An economic driving style generally results in a longer driving distance.

Distance to empty battery The gauge shows the approximate dis- tance that can be driven with the energy quantity remaining in the hybrid battery.

No guaranteed range remains when the gauge shows "----".

The calculation is based on the average con- sumption of normally loaded vehicle, during nor- mal driving and taking into account whether the air conditioning (AC) is switched on or off. When

1 The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

}}

83

changing between the Hybrid and Pure drive modes, the calculated distance increases since the Pure mode has reduced climate settings (ECO climate).

NOTE

There may be a slight deviation if the driving style has been changed.

An economic driving style generally results in a longer driving distance.

Start value for fully charged hybrid battery Since it is difficult to anticipate driving style and other factors that affect the range for electric operation, Volvo has decided to use a start value when the car is fully charged. The start value indi- cates an up-to figure instead of a forecast for the range for electric operation. The difference in start value between Hybrid and Pure is due to the car being allowed to use more energy from the hybrid battery in Pure mode, as well as that the car changes over to ECO climate.

Mileage for electric operation In order to achieve the longest possible mileage for electric operation, the driver of an electrically powered car also has to think about energy con- servation. The more consumers there are (stereo, electric heating in windows/mirrors/seats, very cold air from the climate control system, etc.) that are active - the shorter the potential mileage.

NOTE

In addition to high current take-off in the pas- senger compartment, sudden acceleration and braking, high speed, heavy loads, low out- side temperature and uphill gradients also reduce the possible driving distance.

Tourist - alternative speedometer The alternative digital speedometer makes it eas- ier to drive in countries where speed limit signs are in a different unit than that shown in the car's instruments.

The digital speed is then shown in the opposite unit to that shown in the analogue speedometer. If the analogue speedometer is graduated in mph, the digital speedometer shows the corres- ponding speed in km/h and vice versa.

Related information Show trip data in the driver display (p. 83)

Resetting the trip meter (p. 84)

Show trip statistics in the centre display (p. 85)

Driver display (p. 77)

Show trip data in the driver display The trip computer's recorded and calculated val- ues can be shown in the driver display. The values are saved in a trip computer app. Via the app menu, you can choose which information is shown on the driver display.

Open and navigate in the app menu using the right- hand steering wheel keypad.

App menu

Left/right

Up/down

Confirm

||

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

84

1. Open the app menu in the driver display by pressing (1).

(It is not possible to open the app menu while there is an unacknowledged message in the driver display. The message must first be acknowledged before the app menu can be opened.)

2. Navigate to the trip computer app to left or right with (2).

> The top four menu rows show measured values for trip meter TM. The next four menu rows show measured values for trip meter TA. Scroll up or down in the list with (3).

3. Scroll down to the option buttons to select which information to show in the driver dis- play:

Distance to empty tank

Odometer

Mileage for trip meter TM, TA, or no dis- play of mileage

Instantaneous fuel consumption, average consumption for TM or TA, alternatively, no display of fuel consumption

Tourist (alternative speedometer).

Distance to empty battery

Select or deselect an option with the O but- ton (4). The change is made immediately.

Related information Trip computer (p. 82)

Resetting the trip meter (p. 84)

Resetting the trip meter Reset the trip meter using the left-hand stalk switch.

Reset all information in trip meter TM (i.e. mileage, average consumption, average speed and driving time) with a long press on the RESET button on the left-hand stalk switch.

A short press on the RESET button resets only the mileage.

The trip meter TA can only be reset automatically when the car has not been used for four or more hours.

Related information Trip computer (p. 82)

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

}}

85

Show trip statistics in the centre display Trip statistics from the trip computer are dis- played graphically in the centre display and pro- vide an overview that facilitates more fuel-effi- cient driving.

Open the Driver performance app in app view in order to show the trip statistics.

Each bar in the diagram sym- bolises a distance of 1, 10 or 100 km, alternatively miles. The

bars are filled in from the right as driving pro- gresses. The bar on the far right shows the value for the current distance.

The average fuel consumption and total driving time are calculated since the last time the trip statistics were reset.

Fuel and electricity consumption are shown in separate graphs. Electricity consumption is "net" consumption, i.e. energy consumed minus regen- erated energy created during braking.

Trip statistics from the trip computer2.

NOTE

When driving with electric operation, fuel con- sumption can be indicated in the trip statistics if the additional heater3 is running.

Related information Settings for trip statistics (p. 85)

Trip computer (p. 82)

Settings for trip statistics Reset or adjust settings for trip statistics.

1. Open the Driver performance app in app view in order to show the trip statistics.

2. Press Preferences to

change graph scale. Select resolution 1, 10 or 100 km/miles for the bar.

reset data after every trip. Performed when the car has been stationary for more than 4 hours.

reset data for the current trip.

Trip statistics, calculated average consump- tion and total driving time are always reset simultaneously.

Units for distance, speed, etc. can be changed via system settings in the centre display.

2 The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model. 3 Applicable to fuel-driven auxiliary heater.

||

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

86

Related information Show trip statistics in the centre display

(p. 85)

Trip computer (p. 82)

Resetting the trip meter (p. 84)

Time and date The clock is shown in both the driver display and the centre display.

Clock location

Clock location in the 12-inch and 8-inch driver display.

In the centre display, the clock is located at the top right of the status bar.

In certain situations, messages and information may cover the clock in the driver display.

Settings for time and date Select Settings System Date and

Time in the centre display's top view to change settings for time and date format.

Adjust time and date by pressing the up or down arrow on the touch screen.

Automatic time for cars with GPS When the car is equipped with a navigation sys- tem, Auto Time can be selected. The time zone is then adjusted automatically based on the loca- tion of the car. For certain types of navigation systems, the current location (country) must also be set to obtain the right time zone. If Auto Time is not selected, time and data are adjusted with arrow up or arrow down on the touch screen.

Summer time In certain countries, it is possible to select auto- matic setting of summer time with Auto. For other countries, summer time can be set with On or Off.

Related information Driver display (p. 77)

Changing settings in the centre display (p. 126)

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

}}

87

Outside temperature gauge The outside temperature is shown in the driver display. A sensor detects the temperature outside of the car.

Outside temperature gauge location in the 12-inch and 8-inch driver display.

If the car has been stationary, the gauge may dis- play a temperature reading that is too high.

When the outside temperature is within the range -5 C to +2 C (23 till 36 F) a snowflake symbol is also shown in the driver display as a warning for potentially slippery conditions.

The snowflake symbol is also illuminated briefly in the head-up display, if the car is equipped with one.

Change the unit for the temperature gauge via system settings in the centre display top view.

Related information Driver display (p. 77)

Changing system units (p. 124)

Indicator symbols in the driver display The indicator symbols alert the driver that a func- tion is activated, that a system is operating, or that a fault or abnormal condition exists.

Symbol Specification

Information, read display text

When one of the car's systems does not behave as intended, this information symbol illuminates and a text appears on the driver display. The information symbol can also illuminate in conjunction with other symbols.

Fault in brake system

The symbol lights up when there is a fault in the parking brake.

ABS fault

If this symbol illuminates then the system is not working. The car's regular brake system continues to work, but without the ABS function.

Automatic brake on

The symbol illuminates when the function is activated and the foot brake or parking brake is acting. The brake holds the car stationary when it has stopped.

||

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

88

Symbol Specification

Tyre pressure system

The symbol illuminates when tyre pressure is too low. If there is a fault in the tyre pressure system, the symbol will flash for approx. 1 minute and then illuminate with a constant glow. This may be because the system cannot detect or warn of low tyre pressure as intended.

Emissions system

If the symbol illuminates after the engine has been started then it may be due to a fault in the car's emissions system. Drive to a work- shop for checking. Volvo recom- mends that an authorised Volvo workshop is contacted.

Left and right-hand direction indicator

The symbols flash when the direc- tion indicators are used.

Symbol Specification

Position lamps

The symbol lights up when the position lamps are switched on.

Fault in the headlamp system

The symbol illuminates if a fault has occurred in the ABL function (Active Bending Lights) or if another fault has occurred in the headlamp system.

Active main beam on

The symbol lights up blue when the automatic main beam is on.

Active main beam off

The symbol lights up white when the automatic main beam is off.

Main beam On

The symbol illuminates when main beam is on and with main beam flash.

Active main beam on

The symbol lights up blue when active main beam is on. Position lamps are switched on.

Symbol Specification

Active main beam off

The symbol lights up white when active main beam is off. Position lamps are switched on.

Main beam On

The symbol lights up when main beam and the position lamps are switched on.

Rear fog lamp on

This symbol illuminates when the rear fog lamp is switched on.

Rain sensor on

This symbol illuminates when the rain sensor is on.

Preconditioning on

The symbol illuminates when the engine block and passenger com- partment heater/air conditioning are preconditioning the car.

Stability system

A flashing symbol indicates that the stability system is operating. If the symbol illuminates with con- stant glow then there is a fault in the system.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

}}

89

Symbol Specification

Stability system, sport mode

The symbol illuminates when the sport mode is activated. Sport mode allows for a more active driv- ing experience.

Lane assistance

White symbol: Lane assistance is on and road lines are detected.

Grey symbol: Lane assistance is on but road lines are not detected.

Amber symbol: Lane assistance warns/intervenes.

Lane assistance and rain sensor

White symbol: Lane assistance is on and road lines are detected. Rain sensor is on.

Grey symbol: Lane assistance is on but road lines are not detected. Rain sensor is on.

Related information Driver display (p. 77)

Warning symbols in the driver display (p. 89)

Warning symbols in the driver display The warning symbols alert the driver that an important function is activated or that a serious fault or condition exists.

Symbol Specification

Warning

The red warning symbol illuminates when a fault has been indicated which could affect the safety and/or drivability of the car. An explanatory text is shown on the driver display at the same time. The warning symbol can also illuminate in conjunction with other symbols.

Seatbelt reminder

This symbol illuminates or flashes if someone in a front seat has not put on their seatbelt or if someone in a rear seat has taken off their seatbelt.

Airbags

If the symbol remains illuminated or illuminates while driving, a fault has been detected in one of the car's safety systems. Read the message in the driver display. Volvo recom- mends that an authorised Volvo workshop is contacted.

Symbol Specification

Fault in brake system

If this symbol illuminates, the brake fluid level may be too low. Visit the nearest authorised workshop to have the brake fluid level checked and rectified.

Parking brake applied

This symbol illuminates with a con- stant glow when the parking brake is applied.

A flashing symbol means that a fault has arisen. Read the message in the driver display.

Low oil pressure

If this symbol illuminates during driving then the engine's oil pres- sure is too low. Stop the engine immediately and check the engine oil level, top up if necessary. If the symbol illuminates and the oil level is normal, contact a workshop. Volvo recommends that an author- ised Volvo workshop is contacted.

||

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

90

Symbol Specification

Alternator not charging

This symbol illuminates during driv- ing if a fault has occurred in the electrical system. Visit a workshop. Volvo recommends that an author- ised Volvo workshop is contacted.

Collision risk

City Safety warns of a risk of colli- sion with other vehicles, pedes- trians, cyclists or large animals.

Related information Indicator symbols in the driver display (p. 87)

Driver display (p. 77)

License agreement for the driver display A license is an agreement for the right to oper- ate a certain activity or the right to use someone else's entitlement according to the terms and conditions in the agreement. The following text is Volvo's agreement with the manufacturer or developer.

Boost Software License 1.0 Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person or organization obtaining a copy of the software and accompanying documentation covered by this license (the "Software") to use, reproduce, display, distribute, execute, and transmit the Software, and to prepare derivative works of the Software, and to permit third-parties to whom the Software is furnished to do so, all subject to the following: The copyright notices in the Software and this entire statement, including the above license grant, this restriction and the following disclaimer, must be included in all copies of the Software, in whole or in part, and all derivative works of the Software, unless such copies or derivative works are solely in the form of machine-executable object code generated by a source language processor.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND NON-

INFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR ANYONE DISTRIBUTING THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

}}

91

BSD 4-clause "Original" or "Old" License Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1990, 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.

4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY

AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

BSD 3-clause "New" or "Revised" License Copyright (c) 2011-2014, Yann Collet.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. Neither the name of the organisation nor the names of its contributors may be used to

endorse or promote products derive from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

||

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

92

BSD 2-clause Simplified license Copyright (c) , All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,

OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

The views and conclusions contained in the software and documentation are those of the authors and should not be interpreted as representing official policies, either expressed or implied, of the FreeBSD Project.

FreeType Project License 1. 1 Copyright 1996-1999 by David Turner,

Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg Introduction The FreeType Project is distributed in several archive packages; some of them may contain, in addition to the FreeType font engine, various tools and contributions which rely on, or relate to, the FreeType Project. This license applies to all files found in such packages, and which do not fall under their own explicit license. The license affects thus the FreeType font engine, the test programs, documentation and makefiles, at the very least. This license was inspired by the BSD, Artistic, and IJG (Independent JPEG Group) licenses, which all encourage inclusion and use of free software in commercial and freeware products alike. As a consequence, its main points are that: o We don't promise that this software works. However, we are be interested in any kind of bug reports. (`as is'

distribution) o You can use this software for whatever you want, in parts or full form, without having to pay us. (`royalty-free' usage) o You may not pretend that you wrote this software. If you use it, or only parts of it, in a program, you must acknowledge somewhere in your documentation that you've used the FreeType code. (`credits') We specifically permit and encourage the inclusion of this software, with or without modifications, in commercial products, provided that all warranty or liability claims are assumed by the product vendor. Legal Terms 0. Definitions Throughout this license, the terms `package', `FreeType Project', and `FreeType archive' refer to the set of files originally distributed by the authors (David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg) as the `FreeType project', be they named as alpha, beta or final release. `You' refers to the licensee, or person using the project, where `using' is a generic term including compiling the project's source code as well as linking it to form a `program' or `executable'. This program is referred to as `a program using the FreeType engine'. This license applies to all files distributed in the original FreeType archive, including all source code, binaries and documentation, unless otherwise stated in the file in its original, unmodified form as distributed in the original archive. If you are unsure whether or not a particular file is covered by this license, you

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

}}

93

must contact us to verify this. The FreeType project is copyright (C) 1996-1999 by David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. All rights reserved except as specified below. 1. No Warranty THE FREETYPE ARCHIVE IS PROVIDED `AS IS' WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT WILL ANY OF THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE, OF THE FREETYPE PROJECT. As you have not signed this license, you are not required to accept it. However, as the FreeType project is copyrighted material, only this license, or another one contracted with the authors, grants you the right to use, distribute, and modify it. Therefore, by using, distributing, or modifying the FreeType project, you indicate that you understand and accept all the terms of this license.

2. Redistribution Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: o Redistribution of source code must retain this license file (`licence.txt') unaltered; any additions, deletions or changes to the original files must be clearly indicated in accompanying

documentation. The copyright notices of the unaltered, original files must be preserved in all copies of source files. o Redistribution in binary form must provide a disclaimer that states that the software is based in part of the work of the FreeType Team, in the distribution documentation. We also encourage you to put an URL to the FreeType web page in your documentation, though this isn't mandatory. These conditions apply to any software derived from or based on the FreeType code, not just the unmodified files. If you use our work, you must acknowledge us. However, no fee need be paid to us.

3. Advertising The names of FreeType's authors and contributors may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. We suggest, but do not require, that you use one or more of the following phrases to refer to this software in your documentation or advertising materials: `FreeType Project', `FreeType Engine', `FreeType library', or `FreeType Distribution'.

4. Contacts There are two mailing lists related to FreeType: o freetype@freetype.org Discusses general use and applications of FreeType, as well as future and wanted additions to the library and distribution. If you are looking for support, start in this list if you haven't found anything to help you in the documentation. o devel@freetype.org

Discusses bugs, as well as engine internals, design issues, specific licenses, porting, etc. o http://www.freetype.org Holds the current FreeType web page, which will allow you to download our latest development version and read online documentation. You can also contact us individually at: David Turner Robert Wilhelm Werner Lemberg

||

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

94

Libpng License This copy of the libpng notices is provided for your convenience. In case of any discrepancy between this copy and the notices in the file png.h that is included in the libpng distribution, the latter shall prevail.

COPYRIGHT NOTICE, DISCLAIMER, and LICENSE:

If you modify libpng you may insert additional notices immediately following this sentence.

libpng versions 1.0.7, July 1, 2000, through 1.0.13, April 15, 2002, are Copyright (c) 2000-2002 Glenn Randers-Pehrson and are distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-1.0.6 with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors

Simon-Pierre Cadieux

Eric S. Raymond

Gilles Vollant

and with the following additions to the disclaimer:

There is no warranty against interference with your enjoyment of the library or against infringement. There is no warranty that our efforts or the library will fulfill any of your particular purposes or needs. This library is provided with all faults, and the entire risk of satisfactory quality, performance, accuracy, and effort is with the user.

libpng versions 0.97, January 1998, through 1.0.6, March 20, 2000, are Copyright (c) 1998, 1999 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and are distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-0.96, with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors:

Tom Lane

Glenn Randers-Pehrson

Willem van Schaik

libpng versions 0.89, June 1996, through 0.96, May 1997, are Copyright (c) 1996, 1997 Andreas Dilger Distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-0.88, with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors:

John Bowler

Kevin Bracey

Sam Bushell

Magnus Holmgren

Greg Roelofs

Tom Tanner

libpng versions 0.5, May 1995, through 0.88, January 1996, are Copyright (c) 1995, 1996 Guy Eric Schalnat, Group 42, Inc.

For the purposes of this copyright and license, "Contributing Authors" is defined as the following set of individuals:

Andreas Dilger

Dave Martindale

Guy Eric Schalnat

Paul Schmidt

Tim Wegner

The PNG Reference Library is supplied "AS IS". The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. disclaim all warranties, expressed or implied, including, without limitation, the warranties of merchantability and of fitness for any purpose. The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. assume no liability for direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages, which may result from the use of the PNG Reference Library, even if advised of the possibility of such damage.

Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify, and distribute this source code, or portions hereof, for any purpose, without fee, subject to the following restrictions:

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

}}

95

1. The origin of this source code must not be misrepresented.

2. Altered versions must be plainly marked as such and must not be misrepresented as being the original source.

3. This Copyright notice may not be removed or altered from any source or altered source distribution.

The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. specifically permit, without fee, and encourage the use of this source code as a component to supporting the PNG file format in commercial products. If you use this source code in a product, acknowledgment is not required but would be appreciated.

A "png_get_copyright" function is available, for convenient use in "about" boxes and the like:

printf("%s",png_get_copyright(NULL));

Also, the PNG logo (in PNG format, of course) is supplied in the files "pngbar.png" and "pngbar.jpg (88x31) and "pngnow.png" (98x31).

Libpng is OSI Certified Open Source Software. OSI Certified Open Source is a certification mark of the Open Source Initiative.

Glenn Randers-Pehrson randeg@alum.rpi.edu April 15, 2002

MIT License Copyright (c)

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:

The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

zlib License The zlib/libpng License Copyright (c)

This software is provided 'as-is', without any express or implied warranty. In no event will the authors be held liable for any damages arising from the use of this software.

Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including commercial applications, and to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the following restrictions:

1. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not claim that you wrote the original software. If you use this software in a product, an acknowledgment in the product documentation would be appreciated but is not required.

2. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be misrepresented as being the original software.

3. This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution.

||

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

96

SGI Free Software B License Version 2.0. SGI FREE SOFTWARE LICENSE B (Version 2.0, Sept. 18, 2008)

Copyright (C) [dates of first publication] Silicon Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notice including the dates of first publication and either this permission notice or a reference to http:// oss.sgi.com/projects/FreeB/ shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL SILICON GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

Except as contained in this notice, the name of Silicon Graphics, Inc. shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from Silicon Graphics, Inc.

Related information Driver display (p. 77)

Application menu in driver display Application menu (app menu) in the driver dis- play provides quick access to commonly used functions for certain apps.

The app menu in the driver display can be used instead of using the centre display. The figure is schematic - the layout may vary.

The app menu is shown in the driver display and is controlled using the steering wheel's right- hand keypad. The app menu makes it easier to switch between different apps or functions within the apps without having to let go of the steering wheel.

App menu functions Different apps give access to different types of functions. The following apps and their associ- ated functions can be controlled from the app menu:

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

97

App Functions

Trip com- puter

Selection of trip meter, selec- tion of what to show in the driver display, etc.

Media player

Selection of active source for the media player.

Phone Calling a contact from the call list.

Navigation Guide to destination, etc.

Related information Driver display (p. 77)

Overview of centre display (p. 101)

Handling the application menu in the driver display (p. 97)

Handling the application menu in the driver display The application menu (the app menu) in the driver display is operated with the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.

The app menu and the steering wheel's right-hand key- pad.

Open/close

Left/right

Up/down

Confirm

Opening/closing the app menu Press on open/close (1).

(It is not possible to open the app menu while there is an unacknowledged message in the driver display. The message must first be acknowledged before the app menu can be opened.)

> The app menu opens/closes.

The app menu closes automatically after a period of inactivity or after certain options have been selected.

Navigating and selecting in the app menu 1. Navigate between the different apps that are

available by tapping on left or right (2).

> Functions for previous/next app are shown in the app menu.

2. Browse through the functions for the selected app by tapping on up or down (3).

3. Confirm or highlight an option for the func- tion by pressing on confirm (4).

> The function is activated and for some options the app menu then closes.

If the app menu is opened again, the functions of the most recently selected app are shown first.

Related information Application menu in driver display (p. 96)

Messages in the driver display (p. 98)

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

98

Messages in the driver display The driver display can show messages to inform or assist the driver in the event of different events.

Message in the driver display.

The driver display shows messages that are of high priority for the driver.

The messages can be shown in different parts of the driver display depending on what other infor- mation is currently being displayed. After a while, or when the message has been acknowledged/ action taken if required, the message disappears from the driver display. If a message needs to be saved, it is placed in the Car status app, which is opened from the app view in the centre display.

Message composition may vary and they can be shown together with graphics, symbols or buttons for acknowledging the message or accepting a request, for example.

Service messages Shown below is a selection of important service messages and their meanings.

Message Specification

Stop safelyA Stop and switch off the engine. Serious risk of damage - consult a work- shopB.

Turn off engineA

Stop and switch off the engine. Serious risk of damage - consult a work- shopB.

Service urgent Drive to work- shopA

Contact a workshopB to check the car immediately.

Service requiredA

Contact a workshopB to check the car as soon as possible.

Regular main- tenance

Book time for maintenance

Time for regular service - contact a workshopB. Shown before the next service date.

Regular main- tenance

Time for main- tenance

Time for regular service - contact a workshopB. Shown at the next service date.

Message Specification

Regular main- tenance

Maintenance overdue

Time for regular service - contact a workshopB. Shown when the service date has passed.

Temporarily offA

A function has been tem- porarily switched off and is reset automatically while driving or after starting again.

A Part of message, shown together with information on where the problem has arisen.

B An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information Managing messages in the driver display

(p. 99)

Handling a message saved from the driver display (p. 99)

Message in centre display (p. 132)

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

}}

99

Managing messages in the driver display Messages in the driver display are handled using the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.

Message in the driver display and the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.

Left/right

Confirm

Some messages in the driver display contain one or more buttons for acknowledging the message or accepting a request, for example.

Managing a new message For messages with buttons:

1. Navigate between the different buttons that are available by tapping on left or right (1).

2. Confirm the selection by pressing on confirm (2).

> The message disappears from the driver display.

For messages without buttons:

Close the message by pressing on confirm (2), or allow the message to close automati- cally after a while.

> The message disappears from the driver display.

If a message needs to be saved, it is placed in the Car status app, which is opened from the app view in the centre display. The message Car message stored in Car Status application is shown in the centre display in conjunction with this.

Related information Messages in the driver display (p. 98)

Handling a message saved from the driver display (p. 99)

Message in centre display (p. 132)

Handling a message saved from the driver display Whether saved from the driver display or the centre display, messages are managed in the centre display.

Saved messages can be seen in the Car Status app.

Messages that are shown in the driver display and that need to be saved are added in the Car status app in the centre display. The message Car message stored in Car Status application is shown

in the centre display in conjunction with this.

||

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

100

Reading a saved message To read a saved message immediately:

Press the button to the right of the Car message stored in Car Status application message in the centre display.

> The saved message is shown in the Car status app.

To read a saved message later:

1. Open the Car status app from the app view in the centre display.

> The app is opened in the bottom tile of the home view.

2. Select the Messages tab in the app.

> A list of saved messages is shown.

3. Tap on a message to expand/minimise.

> More information on the message is shown in the list and the image to the left in the app shows information about the message graphically.

Managing a saved message In maximised mode, some messages have two buttons available to book service or read the owner's manual.

To book service for a saved message:

In maximised mode for the message, press Request appoint.Call to make Appointment4 for help in booking service.

> With Request appoint.: The Appointments tab opens in the app and creates a request to book service and repair work.

With Call to make Appointment: The phone app is initiated and calls a service centre to book service and repair work.

To read the owner's manual for a saved mes- sage:

In maximised mode for the message, press Owner's manual to read about the mes- sage in the owner's manual.

> The owner's manual opens in the centre display and shows information linked to the message.

Saved messages in the app are deleted automat- ically each time the engine is started.

Related information Messages in the driver display (p. 98)

Managing messages in the driver display (p. 99)

Message in centre display (p. 132)

4 Market dependent. Volvo ID and selected workshop also need to be registered.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

}}

101

Overview of centre display Many of the car's functions are controlled from the centre display. Presented here is the centre display and its options.

||

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.102

Three of the centre display's basic views. Swipe right or left to access the function or app view respectively5.

Function view - car functions that are acti- vated or deactivated with a press. Certain

functions are also so-called trigger functions, which means they open a window with set-

ting options. Examples of these include Camera. Settings for the head-up display*

5 The views are reversed for right-hand drive cars.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

* Option/accessory. 103

are also made from the function view, but adjustments are made using the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.

Home view - the first view that is shown when the screen is started.

Application view (app view) - apps that have been downloaded (third-party apps) and apps for embedded functions, such as FM radio. Tap on an app icon to open the app.

Status bar - the activities in the car are shown right at the top of the screen. Network and connection information is shown on the left-hand side of the status bar, while media- related information, the clock and indication about on-going background activity are shown on the right.

Top view - drag the tab down in order to access the top view. Settings, Owner's manual, Profile and the car's saved mes- sages are accessed from here. In some cases contextual settings (e.g. Navigation Settings) and the contextual owner's manual (e.g. Navigation Manual) can also be accessed in the top view.

Navigation - leads to map navigation, with e.g. Sensus Navigation*. Tap on the tile to expand it.

Media - recently used apps associated with media. Tap on the tile to expand it.

Phone - the phone function can be reached from here. Tap on the tile to expand it.

Extra tile - recently used apps or car func- tions that do not belong in any of the other tiles. Tap on the tile to expand it.

Climate row - information and direct interac- tion to set temperature and seat heating for example*. Tap on the symbol in the centre of the climate row in order to open the climate view with more setting options.

Related information Managing the centre display (p. 104)

Navigating in the centre display's views (p. 107)

Function view in centre display (p. 114)

Apps (p. 493)

Symbols in the centre display's status bar (p. 116)

Opening settings in the centre display (p. 124)

Open contextual setup in the centre display (p. 125)

Owner's manual in centre display (p. 19)

Media player (p. 502)

Phone (p. 517)

Climate controls (p. 203)

Switching off and changing the volume of the system sound in the centre display (p. 123)

Changing the appearance in the centre dis- play (p. 123)

Changing system language (p. 124)

Changing system units (p. 124)

Cleaning the centre display (p. 623)

Message in centre display (p. 132)

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.104

Managing the centre display Many of the car's functions are controlled and regulated from the centre display. The centre display is a touch screen that reacts to touch.

Using the touch screen functionality in the centre display The screen reacts differently depending on whether you press, drag or swipe across it. Actions such as browsing between different views, marking objects, scrolling in a list and mov-

ing apps can be performed by touching the screen in different ways.

An infrared light curtain just above the surface of the screen enables the screen to detect a finger that is just in front of the screen. This technology makes it possible to use the screen even with gloves on.

Two people can interact with the screen at the same time, e.g. to adjust the climate for the driver and passenger side respectively.

IMPORTANT

Do not use sharp objects on the screen as they may scratch it.

The table below presents the different proce- dures for operating the screen:

Procedure Execution Result

Press once. Highlights an object, confirms a selection or activates a function.

Press twice in quick suc- cession.

Zooms in on a digital object, such as the map*.

Press and hold. Grabs an object. Can be used to move apps or map points on the map*. Press and hold your finger against the screen and at the same time drag the object to the desired location.

Tap once with two fin- gers.

Zooms out from a digital object, such as the map*.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

}}

* Option/accessory. 105

Procedure Execution Result

Drag Changes between different views, scrolls a list, text or view. Hold depressed and drag in order to move apps or map points on the map*. Drag horizontally or vertically across the screen.

Swipe/drag quickly Changes between different views, scrolls a list, text or view. Drag horizontally or vertically across the screen.

Note that touching the upper section of the screen may cause the top view to open.

Drag apart Zooms in.

Drag together Zooms out.

||

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

106

Returning to home view from another view 1. Briefly press the home button below the cen-

tre display.

> The last position of the home view is shown.

2. Briefly press again.

> All tiles of the home view are set to their default mode.

NOTE

In home view standard mode - briefly press the home button. An animation that describes access to the different views is shown on the screen.

Scrolling in a list, article or view When a scroll indicator is visible in the screen, it is possible to scroll downward or upward in the view. Swipe downwards/upwards anywhere in the view.

The scroll indicator appears in the centre display when it is possible to scroll in the view.

Using the controls in the centre display

Temperature control.

The control is used for many of the car's func- tions. Regulate e.g. temperature by means of one of the following:

drag the control to the desired temperature,

tap on + or in order to raise or lower the temperature gradually, or

tap on the desired temperature on the con- trol.

Related information Activating and deactivating centre display

(p. 107)

Moving apps and buttons in centre display (p. 116)

Keyboard in centre display (p. 118)

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

}}

* Option/accessory. 107

Activating and deactivating centre display The centre display can be dimmed and reactiva- ted using the home button beneath the screen.

Home button for the centre display.

The effect of using the home button that the screen dims and the touchscreen no longer reacts to touch. The climate row will still be shown. All functions connected to the screen are still running, such as climate, audio, guidance* and apps. When the centre display is dimmed, it is a good opportunity to clean the screen. The dimming function can also be used to fade the screen so that it does not disturb while driving.

1. Give a long press on the physical home but- ton below the screen.

> The screen goes dark except for the cli- mate row, which continues to be shown. All functions connected to the screen are still running.

2. Reactivate the screen - briefly tap on the home button.

> The view that was displayed before the screen was switched off will be shown again.

NOTE

The screen cannot be deactivated when a prompt to perform an action is shown on the screen.

NOTE

The centre display deactivates automatically when the engine is off and the driver's door is opened.

Related information Cleaning the centre display (p. 623)

Changing the appearance in the centre dis- play (p. 123)

Overview of centre display (p. 101)

Navigating in the centre display's views There are five different basic views in the centre display: home view, top view, climate view, appli- cation view (app view) and function view. The screen is started automatically when the driver's door is opened.

Home view Home view is the view that is shown when the screen is started. It consists of four tiles: Navigation, Media, Phone and an extra tile.

An app or car function selected from the app or function view starts in the respective tile of the home view. For example FM radio starts in the Media tile.

The extra tile contains the last used app or car function that is not associated with any of the other three areas.

The tiles show brief information about each dif- ferent app.

NOTE

When the car is started, the home view's vari- ous sub-views show information on the cur- rent status of apps.

||

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.108

NOTE

In home view standard mode - briefly press the home button. An animation that describes access to the different views is shown on the screen.

Status bar The activities in the car are shown at the top of the screen. Network and connection information is shown on the left-hand side of the status bar, while media-related information, the clock and indication that background activity is in progress are shown on the right.

Top view

Top view dragged down.

A tab is located in the centre of the status bar at the top of the screen. Open the top view by

pressing on the tab or by dragging/swiping from the top downwards across the screen.

In the top view, access is always available to:

Settings

Owner's manual

Profile

The car's saved messages.

In the top view, access is given to the following in some cases:

Contextual setting (e.g. Navigation Settings). Change settings directly in the top view when an app (e.g. navigation) is run- ning.

Contextual owner's manual (e.g. Navigation Manual). Gain access directly in the top view to articles in the digital owner's manual that are related to the content displayed on screen.

Exit the top view - press outside the top view, on the home button or at the bottom of the top view and drag upward. The underlying view is then visi- ble and available for use again.

NOTE

The top view is not available during starting/ shutdown or when a message is shown on the screen. It is also not available when cli- mate view is shown.

Climate view The climate row is always visible at the bottom of the screen. The most common climate settings can be made directly there, such as setting tem- perature and seat heating*.

Press the symbol in the centre of the climate row to open the climate view and gain access to more climate set- tings.

Press the symbol to close the climate view and return to the previous view.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

}}

* Option/accessory. 109

Application view

Application view with the car's apps.

Swipe from right to left6 across the screen in order to access the application view (app view) from the home view. Apps that have been down- loaded (third-party apps) and apps for embedded functions, such as FM radio, are found here. Cer- tain apps show brief information directly in the

app view, such as the number of unread text messages for Messages.

Tap on an app to open it. It then opens in the tile to which it belongs, such as Media.

You can scroll down in the app view, depending on the number of apps. Do this by swiping/drag- ging from the bottom and up.

Go back to the home view again by swiping from left to right6 across the screen, or by pressing the home button.

Function view

The function view with buttons for different car func- tions.

Swipe from left to right6 across the screen in order to access the function view from the home view. From here you can activate or deactivate different car functions, e.g. BLIS*, Lane Keeping Aid* and Park Assist*.

6 Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction.

||

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

110

Depending on the amount of functions, it is also possible here to scroll downward in the view. Do this by swiping/dragging from the bottom and up.

Unlike in app view, where an app is opened with a press, a function is activated or deactivated by pressing the relevant function button. Some func- tions (trigger functions) open in a new window when pressed.

Go back to the home view again by swiping from right to left6 across the screen, or by pressing the home button.

Related information Managing tiles in centre display (p. 111)

Symbols in the centre display's status bar (p. 116)

Opening settings in the centre display (p. 124)

Open contextual setup in the centre display (p. 125)

Owner's manual in centre display (p. 19)

Driver profiles (p. 129)

Climate controls (p. 203)

Apps (p. 493)

Function view in centre display (p. 114)

Overview of centre display (p. 101)

6 Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

}}

111

Managing tiles in centre display Home view consists of four tiles: Navigation, Media, Phone and an extra tile. These views can be expanded.

||

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

112

Expanding a tile from default mode

Standard mode and expanded mode of a tile in the centre display.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

113

Expanding a tile:

For tiles Navigation, Media and Phone: Tap anywhere on the tile. When a tile is expanded, the extra tile in the home view is temporarily forced away. The other two are minimised and only certain information is shown. When the extra tile is tapped, the other three tiles are minimised and only cer- tain information is displayed.

The expanded view provides access to the basic functions of the app.

Closing an expanded tile:

The tile can be closed in three different ways.

Tap on the upper part of the expanded tile.

Tap on another tile (that tile will then open in expanded mode instead).

Briefly press the physical home button below the centre display.

Opening or closing a tile in full screen mode The extra tile7 and the tile for Navigation can be opened out in full screen mode, with even more information and more setting options.

When a new tile is opened in full-screen mode, no information from the other tiles is shown.

In expanded mode, open the app in full screen - press on the symbol.

Press on the symbol to go back to the expanded mode, or press the home button at the bottom of the screen.

Home button for the centre display.

There is always the option to go back to home view by pressing the home button. Go back to the home view's standard view from full screen mode - press twice on the home button.

Related information Managing the centre display (p. 104)

Activating and deactivating centre display (p. 107)

Navigating in the centre display's views (p. 107)

7 Does not apply to all apps or car functions opened via the extra tile

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

114

Function view in centre display All the buttons for car functions are located in the function view, one of the centre display's basic views. Navigate to the function view from

home view by swiping from left to right across

the screen8. Different types of buttons There are three different types of buttons for car functions; see below:

Type of button Property Affects car function

Function buttons Have on/off positions.

When a function is running, an LED indicator illuminates to the left of the icon for the button. Press the button to activate/deactivate a function.

Most buttons in function view are function buttons.

Trigger buttons Do not have on/off positions.

When a trigger button is depressed, a window for the function is opened. For example, it may be a window to change seat position.

Camera

Headrest Fold

Head-up Display Adjustments

Parking buttons Have on, off and scan modes.

Similar to the function buttons but with an extra position for parking scanning.

Park In

Park Out

8 Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

115

The buttons' different modes

When the LED indicator illuminates in green on a function or parking button, the function is acti- vated. When a function is activated, extra text with an explanation for certain functions is shown. The text is shown for a few seconds and then the button is shown with the LED indicator illuminated.

For Lane Keeping Aid, the text Works only at certain speeds is shown, for example, when the button is depressed.

Press the button once briefly to activate or deac- tivate the function.

The function is deactivated when the LED indica- tor is extinguished.

When a warning triangle is shown in the right- hand section of the button there is something not working as intended.

Related information Managing the centre display (p. 104)

Navigating in the centre display's views (p. 107)

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

116

Moving apps and buttons in centre display The apps and buttons for car functions in the app view and function view respectively can be moved and organised as desired.

1. Swipe from right to left9 to access the app view, or swipe from left to right9 to access the function view.

2. Tap on an app or button and hold it down.

> The app or button changes size and becomes slightly transparent. It is then possible to move it.

3. Drag the app or button to a vacant space in the view.

The maximum number of rows available for use in order to position apps or buttons is 48. To move an app or button outside the visible view, drag it to the bottom of the view. New rows are then added, where the app or button can be located.

An app or button can thus be located further down and is then not visible in the normal mode for the view.

Swipe across the screen to scroll up or down in the view.

NOTE

Hide the apps that you rarely or never use by moving them to the bottom, off the visible screen. This way it will be easier to find the apps you use more often.

NOTE

Apps and car function buttons cannot be added to locations that are already occupied.

Related information Function view in centre display (p. 114)

Apps (p. 493)

Managing the centre display (p. 104)

Symbols in the centre display's status bar Overview of the symbols that can be shown in the centre display's status bar.

The status bar shows activities in progress and, in some cases, their status. Not all symbols are shown all the time due to the limited space in the status bar.

Symbol Specification

Connected to the Internet.

Connection to the Internet failed.

Roaming activated.

Signal strength in mobile phone net- work.

Bluetooth device connected.

Bluetooth activated but no device connected.

Information sent to and from GPS.

Connected to Wi-Fi network.

9 Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

117

Symbol Specification

Tethering activated (Wi-Fi hotspot). The car then shares the available connection.

Car modem activated.

USB sharing active.

Process in progress.

Timer for preconditioning active.

Audio source being played back.

Audio source stopped.

Phone call in progress.

Audio source muted.

News is received from the radio channel.

Traffic information is received.

Clock.

Related information Navigating in the centre display's views

(p. 107)

Message in centre display (p. 132)

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

118

Keyboard in centre display The centre display keyboard makes it possible make entries using keys. It is also possible to "draw in" letters and characters on the screen by hand. The keyboard can be used to enter characters, letters and numbers, e.g. to write text messages from the car, enter passwords or search for arti- cles in the digital owner's manual.

The keyboard is only shown when entries can be made on the screen.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

}}

119

The image shows an overview of some of the buttons which may be shown in the keyboard. The appearance varies depending on language settings and the context in which the keyboard is being used.

||

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

120

Row of suggested words or characters10. The suggested words are adjusted as new letters are being entered. Browse among the suggestions by pressing on the right and left arrows. Tap on a suggestion to select it. Note that this function is not supported by all lan- guage selections. If not available, the row will not be shown on the keyboard.

The characters available on the keyboard depend on which language was selected (see point 7). Tap on a character to enter it.

The button works in different ways, depend- ing on the context in which the keyboard is used - either to enter @ (when an email address is entered) or to create a new row (for normal text input).

Hides the keyboard. If this is not possible, the button is not shown.

Used to enter capital letters. Press again to enter one capital letter and then continue with lower-case letters. Another press makes all letters capital letters. The next press restores the keyboard to lower-case letters. In this mode, the first letter after a full stop, exclamation mark or question mark is a capi- tal letter. The first letter in the text field is also a capital letter. In text fields intended for names or addresses, each word automatically starts with a capital letter. In text fields for password, web address or email address

entry, all letters are automatically lower case unless otherwise set with the button.

Number entry. The keyboard (2) is then

shown with numbers. Press , which in

number mode is shown instead of , to

return to the letter keyboard, or to open the keyboard with special characters.

Changes text input language, e.g. EN. The available characters and word suggestions (1) vary depending on the selected language. To make it possible to change languages for the keyboard, the languages must first be added under Settings.

Space.

Undoes entered text. Pressing briefly deletes one character at a time. Hold the button depressed to delete characters more quickly.

Changes keyboard mode to write letters and characters by hand instead.

Pressing the confirmation button above the key- pad (not visible in the illustration) confirms the entered text. The appearance of the button dif- fers depending on context.

Variants of a letter or character

Variants of a letter or character, e.g. or , can be entered by holding down the letter or charac- ter. A box is displayed showing possible variants of letters or characters. Press the required var- iant. If no variant is selected, the original letter/ character is entered.

Related information Changing keyboard language in centre dis-

play (p. 121)

Enter the characters, letters and words man- ually in the centre display (p. 121)

Managing the centre display (p. 104)

Managing text messages (p. 523)

10 Applies to Asiatic languages.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

}}

121

Changing keyboard language in centre display To make it possible to switch between different languages for the keyboard, the languages must first be added under Settings.

Adding or deleting languages in settings The keyboard is automatically set to the same languages as the system language. The keyboard language can be manually adapted without affecting the system language.

1. Press Settings in the top view.

2. Press System System Languages and

Units Keyboard Layouts.

3. Select one or more languages from the list.

> It is now possible to switch between the selected languages directly from the key- board for text input.

If no languages have been actively selected under Settings, the keyboard retains the same language as the car's system language.

Switching between different languages in the keyboard

When a number of languages have been selected in Settings, the button in the keyboard is used to switch between the different lan- guages.

To change keyboard language with list:

1. Give a long press on the button.

> A list opens.

2. Select the required language. If more than four languages have been selected under Settings, it is possible to scroll in the list from the keyboard.

> The keyboard is adapted to the selected language and other word suggestions are given.

To change the keyboard language without dis- playing the list:

One short press of the button.

> The keyboard is adapted to the next lan- guage in the list without displaying the list.

Related information Changing system language (p. 124)

Keyboard in centre display (p. 118)

Enter the characters, letters and words manually in the centre display The centre display keyboard allows you to enter characters, letters and words on the screen by "drawing" by hand.

Press the button on the key- board to change from typing with the keys to entering letters and characters by hand.

Area for writing characters/letters/words/ parts of word.

The text field where the characters or word suggestions11 appear as they are written on screen (1).

11 Applies to certain system languages.

||

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

122

Suggestions for characters/letters/word/ part of word. It is possible to scroll through the list.

Space. A space can also be created by entering a dash (-) in the area for hand-writ- ten letters (1). See the heading "Entering a space in the free text field with handwriting recognition" below.

Undo entered text. Press briefly to delete one character/one letter at a time. Wait a moment before pressing again to delete the next character/letter, etc.

Return to the keyboard with regular charac- ter input.

Switch off/on sound when entering.

Hide the keyboard. If this is not possible, the button is not shown.

Change text input language.

Writing characters/letters/words by hand 1. Write a character, a letter, a word or parts of

a word in the area for hand-written letters (1). Write a word or parts of a word above each other or on a line.

> A number of suggested characters, letters or words is shown (3). The most likely choice is found at the top of the list.

IMPORTANT

Do not use sharp objects on the screen as they may scratch it.

2. Enter the character/letters/word by waiting a moment.

> The character/letter/word at the top of the list is entered. It is also possible to select a different character by pressing the required character, letter or word in the list.

Deleting/changing characters/letters written by hand

Delete all characters in the text field (2) by swiping across the handwriting field (1).

There are several options for deleting/ changing characters/letters:

Press the intended letter or word in the list (3).

Press the text undo button (5) to delete the letter and begin again.

Swipe horizontally from right to left12 over the area for handwritten letters (1). Delete multiple letters by swiping over the area several times.

Pressing the X in the text field (2) deletes all of the entered text.

12 For Arabic keyboard - swipe in the opposite direction. Swiping from right to left creates a space.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

123

Changing row in the free text field with handwriting

Change row by hand by drawing the above character in the handwriting field13.

Entering a space in the free text field with handwriting recognition

Enter a space by drawing a dash from left to right14.

Related information Keyboard in centre display (p. 118)

Changing the appearance in the centre display The appearance of the screen in the centre dis- play can be changed by selecting a theme. 1. Press Settings in the top view.

2. Press My Car Displays Display Themes.

3. Then select a theme, e.g. Minimalistic or Chrome Rings.

As a supplement to these appearances, it is pos- sible to choose between Normal and Bright. With Normal, the screen background is dark and the text is light. This alternative is the default for all themes. A light variant can also be selected, in which the background is light and the text is dark. This alternative can be useful in e.g. strong day- light.

This alternative is always available for the user and is not affected by the surrounding lighting.

Related information Opening settings in the centre display

(p. 124)

Activating and deactivating centre display (p. 107)

Cleaning the centre display (p. 623)

Switching off and changing the volume of the system sound in the centre display The centre display can be used to change the volume of the system sound or switch off the system sound altogether. 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre

display.

2. Press Sound System Volumes.

3. Under Touch Sounds, drag the control to change the volume/switch off screen touch sounds. Drag the control to the desired vol- ume.

Related information Overview of centre display (p. 101)

Changing settings in the centre display (p. 126)

Audio settings (p. 492)

13 For Arabic keyboards - draw the same character, but reversed. 14 For Arabic keyboard - draw the dash from right to left.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

124

Changing system units Units settings are defined in the centre display's Settings menu.

1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.

2. Continue to System System Languages

and Units Units of Measurement.

3. Select from the following unit standards:

Metric - kilometres, litres and degrees Celsius.

Imperial - miles, gallons and degrees Celsius.

US - miles, gallons and degrees Fahren- heit.

> The units in the driver display, centre dis- play and head-up display are changed.

Related information Overview of centre display (p. 101)

Opening settings in the centre display (p. 124)

Changing settings in the centre display (p. 126)

Changing system language (p. 124)

Changing system language Language settings are defined in the centre dis- play menu Settings.

NOTE

Changing the language in the centre display may mean that some owner information is not compliant with national or local laws and reg- ulations. Do not switch to a language that is difficult to understand as this may make it dif- ficult to find your way back in the structure on screen.

1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.

2. Continue to System System Languages and Units.

3. Select System Language. Languages that support voice recognition have a voice recog- nition symbol.

> The language in the driver display, centre display and head-up display is changed.

Related information Overview of centre display (p. 101)

Opening settings in the centre display (p. 124)

Changing settings in the centre display (p. 126)

Changing system units (p. 124)

Opening settings in the centre display Settings and information for many of the car's functions can be managed in the centre display.

Top view with button for Settings.

1. Open the top view by pressing on the tab or by dragging/swiping from the top down- wards across the screen.

2. Press Settings to open the settings menu.

3. Press one of the categories shown and navi- gate to subcategories and respective set- tings by pressing again.

4. Press Back to go back in the settings menu.

Press Close to close the settings menu.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

125

Related information Overview of centre display (p. 101)

Changing settings in the centre display (p. 126)

Setting types in the centre display (p. 127)

Table showing centre display settings (p. 128)

Open contextual setup in the centre display It is possible to use contextual setup for most of the car's basic apps so that you can change set- tings directly in the top view in the centre dis- play.

Top view with button for contextual setting.

The apps installed in the car from the beginning, e.g. FM radio and USB, are a part of Sensus and are part of the car's embedded functions. Set- tings for these apps can be changed directly in the top view in the centre display.

When contextual setup is available:

1. Drag down top view when an app is in expanded mode, e.g. Navigation.

2. Press Navigation Settings.

3. Change settings as desired and confirm the selections.

Press Close or the physical home button beneath the centre display to close setup view.

Most of the car's basic apps have this contextual setting option, but not all.

Third party apps Third party apps are not included in the car's sys- tem from the beginning, but are the type that can be downloaded e.g. Volvo ID. Here the settings are always made inside the app and not from the top view.

Related information Opening settings in the centre display

(p. 124)

Overview of centre display (p. 101)

Resetting settings in the centre display (p. 127)

Downloading apps (p. 494)

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.126

Changing settings in the centre display You can change Settings and information for many of the car's functions via the centre dis- play. 1. Open the top view by pressing on the tab or

by dragging/swiping from the top down- wards across the screen.

2. Press Settings to open the settings menu.

3. Press on one of the categories and subcate- gories to navigate to the required setting.

4. Change one or more settings. Different types of setting are changed in different ways.

> The changes are saved immediately.

A subcategory in the settings menu with different types of settings (here, a multi-selector button and radio but- tons).

Related information Overview of centre display (p. 101)

Resetting settings in the centre display (p. 127)

Setting types in the centre display (p. 127)

Table showing centre display settings (p. 128)

Resetting user data for change of ownership In the event of a change of ownership, user data and system settings should be restored to fac- tory settings.

The settings in the car can be reset at different levels. Restore all user data and system settings to the original factory settings in the event of a change of ownership. In the event of a change of ownership it is also important to change the owner of the Volvo On Call* service.

Related information Resetting settings in the centre display

(p. 127)

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

}}

127

Resetting settings in the centre display It is possible to reset the defaults for all settings defined in the centre display settings menu.

Two types of reset There are two different types of resets for set- tings in the settings menu:

Factory reset - clears all data and files and resets all settings to their default values.

Reset Personal Settings - clears personal data and resets personal settings to their default values.

Resetting settings Follow these instructions to reset your settings.

NOTE

Factory reset is only possible when the car is stationary.

1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.

2. Continue to System Factory reset.

3. Select the required reset type.

> A pop-up window is shown.

4. Press OK to confirm the reset.

For Reset Personal Settings, the reset must be confirmed by pressing Reset for the active profile or Reset for all profiles.

> Selected settings are reset.

Related information Overview of centre display (p. 101)

Opening settings in the centre display (p. 124)

Changing settings in the centre display (p. 126)

Table showing centre display settings (p. 128)

Setting types in the centre display Different types of setting are changed in differ- ent ways. See the table for a description of the various types of setting.

Setting types

Setting

type

Description

Trigger function

Starts an app or separate view for more advanced settings through a press on the text, e.g. to connect a device with Bluetooth.

Radio but- ton

Select a setting from several options by pressing the required radio button, e.g. to select a sys- tem language.

Multi- selector button

Select a level for something by pressing the required part of the button, e.g. to select a sensitivity level for City Safety.

Checkbox Activate/deactivate a function by pressing on the box to select/ deselect it, e.g. to select auto- matic start of seat heating.

||

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.128

Setting

type

Description

Slider Select a level for something within an interval by pressing and dragging the slider, e.g. to select volume level.

Display of informa- tion

No actual setting. Shows infor- mation about something, e.g. the car's identification number.

Related information Overview of centre display (p. 101)

Table showing centre display settings The settings menu in the centre display has a number of main categories and subcategories where settings and information for many of the car's functions are collected.

There are seven main categories: My Car, Sound, Navigation, Media, Communication, Climate and System.

In turn, each category contains a number of sub- categories and setting options. The tables below show the first level of subcategories. The setting options for a function or area are described in more detail in the corresponding section of the owner's manual.

Some settings are personal, which means that they can be saved to Driver Profiles. Other set- tings are global, which means they are not linked to a driver profile.

My Car

Subcategories

Displays

IntelliSafe

Drive Preferences/Individual Drive Mode*

Lights and Lighting

Mirrors and Convenience

Subcategories

Locking

Parking Brake and Suspension

Wipers

Sound

Subcategories

Tone

Balance

System Volumes

Navigation

Subcategories

Map

Route and Guidance

Traffic

Media

Subcategories

AM/FM radio

DAB*

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

}}

* Option/accessory. 129

Subcategories

Gracenote

TV*

Video

Communication

Subcategories

Phone

Text Messages

Android Auto*

Apple CarPlay*

Bluetooth Devices

Wi-Fi

Car Wi-Fi Hotspot

Car Modem Internet*

Volvo On Call*

Volvo Service Networks

Climate The main category Climate has no subcatego- ries.

System

Subcategories

Driver Profile

Date and Time

System Languages and Units

Privacy and data

Keyboard Layouts

Voice Control*

Factory reset

System Information

Related information Overview of centre display (p. 101)

Changing settings in the centre display (p. 126)

Resetting settings in the centre display (p. 127)

Driver profiles Many of the settings made in the car can be adapted according to the driver's personal pref- erences and can be saved in one or more driver profiles. The personal settings are automatically saved in the active driver profile. Each key can be linked to a driver profile. When the linked key is used, the car is adapted to the settings of that specific driver profile.

What settings are saved in the driver profiles? In the car, the settings defined are either per- sonal or global. Only personal settings are saved in driver profiles.

Settings that can be saved in a driver profile include, amongst other things, screens, mirrors, front seats, navigation*, audio and media system, language and voice control.

Some settings, referred to as global settings, can be changed but are not saved to a specific driver profile. Changes to global settings affect all pro- files.

||

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

130

Global settings The global settings and parameters are not changed when changing between driver profiles. They remain the same regardless of which driver profile is active.

Keyboard layout settings are an example of global settings. If driver profile X is used to add additional languages to the keyboard, these remain available for use even if driver profile Y is used. The keyboard layout settings are not saved to a specific driver profile - the settings are global.

Personal preferences If driver profile X was used to e.g. set centre dis- play brightness, driver profile Y is not affected by this setting. It has been saved to driver profile X - the brightness setting is a personal setting.

Related information Selecting driver profile (p. 130)

Renaming a driver profile (p. 131)

Resetting settings in the driver profiles (p. 131)

Linking remote control key to driver profile (p. 131)

Table showing centre display settings (p. 128)

Selecting driver profile When the centre display has been started, the selected driver profile is shown at the top of the screen. The driver profile last used is the one that will be active next time the car is unlocked. It is possible to change to another driver profile after the car has been unlocked. However, if the remote control key has been linked to a driver profile then this is what is selected when the car is started. There are two options for changing to another driver profile.

Option 1:

1. Tap on the name of the driver profile shown in the top of the centre display when the dis- play has been started.

> A list of selectable driver profiles is shown.

2. Select the driver profile required.

3. Press Confirm.

> The driver profile is selected and the sys- tem loads the settings for the new driver profile.

Option 2:

1. Drag down the top view in the centre display.

2. Press Profile.

> The same list as for Option 1 is shown.

3. Select the driver profile required.

4. Press Confirm.

> The driver profile is selected and the sys- tem loads the settings for the new driver profile.

Related information Driver profiles (p. 129)

Navigating in the centre display's views (p. 107)

Renaming a driver profile (p. 131)

Linking remote control key to driver profile (p. 131)

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

}}

131

Renaming a driver profile It is possible to change the name of the different driver profiles used in the car. 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre

display.

2. Press System Driver Profiles.

3. Select Edit Profile.

> A menu opens, where the profile can be edited.

4. Tap in the box Profile Name.

> A keyboard appears, and it is possible to

change the name. Tap on to close the keyboard.

5. Save the name change by pressing Back or Close.

> The name has now been changed.

NOTE

A profile name cannot start with a space, as the profile name will not then be saved.

Related information Selecting driver profile (p. 130)

Keyboard in centre display (p. 118)

Resetting settings in the driver profiles Settings that have been saved to one or more driver profiles can be reset if the car is station- ary.

NOTE

Factory reset is only possible when the car is stationary.

1. Press Settings in the top view.

2. Press System Factory reset Reset Personal Settings.

3. Select one of the options Reset for the active profile, Reset for all profiles or Cancel.

Related information Driver profiles (p. 129)

Resetting settings in the centre display (p. 127)

Linking remote control key to driver profile It is possible to link your key to a driver profile. The driver profile along with all of its settings will then be automatically selected every time the car is used with that specific remote control key.

The first time the remote control key is used, it is not linked to any specific driver profile. When the car is started, the Guest profile will automatically be activated.

A driver profile can be selected manually without linking it to the key. When the car is unlocked, the last active driver profile is activated. Once the key has been linked to a driver profile, a driver profile does not need to be selected when that specific key is used.

Linking a remote control key to a driver profile First select the profile to be linked to the key, if the profile to be linked is not already active. The active profile can then be linked to the key.

1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.

2. Press System Driver Profiles.

3. Select the desired profile. The display returns to the home view. The Guest profile cannot be linked to a key.

||

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

132

4. Drag down the top view again and tap on

Settings System Driver Profiles Edit Profile.

5. Select Connect key to link the profile with the key. It is not possible to link a driver pro- file to a different key than the one currently being used in the car. If there are multiple keys in the car, the message More than one key is found, put the key you want to connect on backup reader will be dis- played.

Backup reader's location in the tunnel console. > When the message Profile connected

to key is shown, the key and the driver profile are linked.

6. Press OK.

> This key is now linked to the driver profile and will remain linked as long as the Connect key box is not unticked.

Related information Driver profiles (p. 129)

Renaming a driver profile (p. 131)

Remote control key (p. 223)

Message in centre display The centre display can show messages to inform or assist the driver in the event of different events.

Message in the centre display's top view.

The centre display shows messages that are of lower priority for the driver.

Most messages are shown above the centre dis- play's status bar. After a while, or when any required action related to the message has been taken, the message disappears from the status bar. If a message needs to be saved, it is posi- tioned in the top view in the centre display.

Message composition may vary and they can be shown together with graphics, symbols or a but- ton for activating/deactivating a function linked to the message.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

133

Pop-up messages In some cases, a message is shown in the form of a pop-up window. Pop-up messages have higher priority than messages shown in the sta- tus bar and require acknowledgement/action before they disappear. Messages that need to be saved are positioned in the top view in the centre display.

Related information Managing messages in the centre display

(p. 133)

Handling a message saved from the centre display (p. 134)

Messages in the driver display (p. 98)

Managing messages in the centre display Messages in the centre display are handled in centre display views.

Message in the centre display's top view.

Some messages in the centre display have a but- ton (or several buttons in pop-up messages) for e.g. activating/deactivating a function linked to the message.

Managing a new message For messages with buttons:

Press the button to perform the action or allow the message to close automatically after a while.

> The message disappears from the status bar.

For messages without buttons:

Close the message by tapping on it, or allow the message to close automatically after a while.

> The message disappears from the status bar.

If a message needs to be saved, it is positioned in the top view in the centre display.

Related information Message in centre display (p. 132)

Handling a message saved from the centre display (p. 134)

Messages in the driver display (p. 98)

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.134

Handling a message saved from the centre display Whether saved from the driver display or the centre display, messages are managed in the centre display.

Saved messages and possible options in the top view.

Messages that are shown in the centre display that need to be saved are added in the top view of the centre display.

Reading a saved message 1. Open the top view in the centre display.

> A list of saved messages is shown. Mes- sages with an arrow to the right can be maximised.

2. Tap on a message to expand/minimise.

> More information on the message is shown in the list and the image to the left in the app shows information about the message graphically.

Managing a saved message Some messages have a button for e.g. activating/ deactivating a function linked to the message.

Press the button to perform the action.

Saved messages in the top view are deleted automatically when the car is switched off.

Related information Message in centre display (p. 132)

Managing messages in the centre display (p. 133)

Messages in the driver display (p. 98)

Head-up display* The head-up display supplements the car's driver display and projects information from the driver display onto the windscreen. The projec- ted image can only be seen from the driver posi- tion.

Incoming phone calls.

The head-up display shows warnings and infor- mation relating to speed, cruise control functions, navigation, etc. in the driver's field of vision. Road Sign Information and incoming phone calls can also be shown in the head up display.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

* Option/accessory. 135

NOTE

The driver's ability to see the information in the head-up display is impaired by the follow- ing:

use of polarising sunglasses

a driving position which means that the driver is not sitting centred in the seat

objects on the display unit's cover glass

unfavourable light conditions.

IMPORTANT

The display unit from which the information is projected is located in the instrument panel. To avoid damage to the display unit's cover glass - do not store any objects on the cover glass and make sure that no objects fall down onto it.

Examples of what can be shown in the display.

Speed

Cruise control

Navigation

Road signs

A number of symbols can be shown temporarily in the head-up display, e.g.:

If the warning symbol illuminates - read the warning message in the driver dis- play.

If the information symbol illuminates - read the message in the driver display.

NOTE

Certain visual defects may cause headaches and a feeling of stress during the use of the head-up display.

City Safety in the head-up display When City Safety is activated, the information in the head-up display is replaced by a graphic for City Safety. This graphic is illuminated even if the head-up display is switched off.

The graphic for City Safety flashes in order to catch the driver's attention.

Related information Activating and deactivating the head-up dis-

play* (p. 136)

Cleaning the head up display* (p. 624)

Head-up display when replacing the wind- screen* (p. 599)

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.136

Activating and deactivating the head-up display* The head-up display can be activated and deac- tivated when the car has been started.

Press the Head-up Display button in the centre display function view. An indicator in the button illuminates when the function is activated.

Related information Settings for head-up display* (p. 136)

Head-up display* (p. 134)

Settings for head-up display* Adjust the settings for the head up display's pro- jection onto the windscreen. Settings can be defined in the centre display when the car has started and a projected image is displayed on the windscreen.

The setting is saved as a personal setting in the driver profile.

Selecting display options Select functions to be shown in the head up dis- play.

1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view.

2. Press My Car Displays Head-Up Display Options.

3. Select one or more functions:

Show Navigation

Show Road Sign Information

Show Driver Support

Show Phone.

Adjusting brightness and vertical position

1. Press the Head-up Display Adjustments button in the centre display function view.

2. Adjust the brightness and vertical position of the projected image in the driver's field of vision using the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.

Reducing the brightness

Increasing the brightness

Raising the position

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

}}

* Option/accessory. 137

Lowering the position

Confirm

The brightness of the graphics is automatically adapted to their background light conditions. The brightness is also affected by the adjustment of the brightness in the car's other displays.

The height position can be stored in the memory function of the power* front seat.

Calibrate the horizontal position The head-up display's horizontal position may need to be calibrated if the windscreen or display unit is replaced. Calibration means that the pro- jected image is rotated clockwise or anticlock- wise.

1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view.

2. Select My Car Displays Head-Up

Display Options Head-Up Display Calibration.

3. Calibrate the image's horizontal position with the steering wheel's right keypad.

Rotate anticlockwise

Rotate clockwise

Confirm

Related information Head-up display* (p. 134)

Activating and deactivating the head-up dis- play* (p. 136)

Voice recognition15

The driver can use voice recognition to control certain functions in the media player, Bluetooth- connected phone, climate system and Volvo's navigation system*.

Voice commands offer additional convenience and assist the driver to not be distracted so that he or she can concentrate on driving, the road and the traffic situation.

WARNING

The driver always holds overall responsibility for driving the vehicle in a safe manner and complying with all applicable rules of the road.

Voice control system microphone

15 Applies to certain markets.

||

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.138

Voice control is done in dialogue form with the user saying commands and receiving verbal responses from the system. The voice recognition system uses the same microphone as Bluetooth- connected devices, and the voice recognition system's responses are given via the car's speak- ers. In some cases, a text message is also shown in the driver display. Functions are controlled from the right-hand steering wheel keypad. Set- tings are made via the centre display.

System updating The voice recognition system is continuously improved. Download updates for optimal perform- ance from support.volvocars.com.

Related information Using voice recognition (p. 138)

Controlling a telephone with voice recogni- tion (p. 139)

Voice control of radio and media (p. 140)

Controlling climate control with voice recog- nition (p. 193)

Settings for voice recognition (p. 140)

Using voice recognition16

Depress the steering wheel button for voice recognition

to activate the system and initiate a dialogue using voice commands.

Remember the following:

Speak after the tone with a normal voice at a normal tempo.

Do not speak while the system is replying (the system cannot understand commands during this time).

Avoid background noise in the passenger compartment by having the doors, windows and panoramic roof* closed.

Voice recognition can be deactivated as follows:

by saying "Cancel".

with a long press on the voice recognition

button on the steering wheel .

To speed up communication and skip the prompts from the system, press the steering

wheel button for voice recognition when the system voice is speaking and say the next com- mand.

Example of voice recognition control Press , say "Call [Forename] [Surname] [number category]" - dials the selected contact from the phone book. If the contact has several phone numbers (e.g. home, mobile, work), the right category must be referred to.

So press and say "Call Robin Smith Mobile".

Commands/phrases The following commands are always available for use:

"Repeat" - repeats the last voice instruction in the ongoing dialogue.

"Cancel" - discontinue the dialogue.

"Help" - starts a help dialogue. The system replies with the commands available in the current situation, a prompt or an example.

Commands for specific functions such as phone and radio are described in specific sections.

16 Applies to certain markets.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

* Option/accessory. 139

Digits The number commands are stated differently depending on the function to be controlled:

Phone numbers and postcodes must be spoken individually, number by number, e.g. zero three one two two four four three (03122443).

House numbers can be spoken individually or in groups, e.g. two two or twenty-two (22). For English and Dutch, several groups can be said in sequence, e.g. twenty-two twenty- two (22 22). For English, double or triple can be used, e.g. double zero (00). Numbers can be given within the range 0-2300.

Frequencies can be spoken as ninety eight point eight (98.8), a hundred and four point two or hundred four point two (104.2).

Related information Voice recognition (p. 137)

Controlling a telephone with voice recogni- tion (p. 139)

Voice control of radio and media (p. 140)

Controlling climate control with voice recog- nition (p. 193)

Settings for voice recognition (p. 140)

Controlling a telephone with voice recognition17

Call a contact, have messages read aloud or dictate brief messages with voice control com- mands to a Bluetooth connected telephone. To specify a contact in the phone book, the voice recognition command must include contact infor- mation that is entered in the phone book. If a contact, e.g. Robyn Smith, has several phone numbers then the number category can also be stated, e.g. Home or Mobile: "Call Robin Smith Mobile".

Press and say one of the following com- mands:

"Call [contact]" - dials the selected contact from the phone book.

"Call [phone number]" - dials the phone number.

"Recent calls" - displays the call list.

"Read message" - message is read out. If there are several messages - select which message should be read out.

"Message to [contact]" users are reques- ted to say a brief message. The message is then repeated aloud and the user can choose to send18 or revise the message. For this function to work, the car must be con- nected to the Internet.

Related information Voice recognition (p. 137)

Using voice recognition (p. 138)

Voice control of radio and media (p. 140)

Controlling climate control with voice recog- nition (p. 193)

Settings for voice recognition (p. 140)

Internet-connected car* (p. 526)

17 Applies to certain markets. 18 Only certain phones can broadcast messages from the car. For compatibility, see support.volvocars.com.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.140

Voice control of radio and media19

Commands for radio and media player device control are shown below.

Tap on and say one of the following com- mands:

"Media" - starts a dialogue for media and radio and shows examples of commands.

"Play [artist]" - plays back music by the selected artist.

"Play [song title]" - plays back the selected song.

"Play [song title] from [album]" - plays back the selected song from the selected album.

"Play [TV channel name]" - starts the selected TV channel*20.

"Play [radio station]" - starts playing back the selected radio channel.

"Tune to [frequency]" - starts the selected radio frequency in the current frequency band. If no radio source is active, the FM band is started by default.

"Tune to [frequency] [wavelength]" - starts the selected radio frequency in the selected frequency band.

"Radio" - starts FM radio.

"Radio FM" - starts FM radio.

"DAB " - starts DAB radio*.

"TV" - starts playback from TV*20.

"CD" - starts playback from CD*.

"USB" - starts playback from USB.

"iPod" - starts playback from iPod.

"Bluetooth" - starts playback from a Blue- tooth-connected media source.

"Similar music" plays back music similar to the music currently playing back from USB devices.

Related information Voice recognition (p. 137)

Using voice recognition (p. 138)

Controlling a telephone with voice recogni- tion (p. 139)

Controlling climate control with voice recog- nition (p. 193)

Settings for voice recognition (p. 140)

Settings for voice recognition21

Settings for the voice control system are selected here.

Settings System Voice Control

Settings can be made within the following areas:

Repeat Voice Command

Gender

Speech Rate

Audio settings Select audio settings under:

Settings Sound System Volumes Voice Control

Language settings Voice recognition is not possible for all lan- guages. Languages available for voice recogni- tion are marked with an icon in the language list -

.

Changing the language also affects menu, mes- sage and help texts.

Settings System System Languages

and Units System Language

19 Applies to certain markets. 20 Applies to certain markets. 21 Applies to certain markets.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

141

Related information Voice recognition (p. 137)

Using voice recognition (p. 138)

Controlling a telephone with voice recogni- tion (p. 139)

Controlling climate control with voice recog- nition (p. 193)

Voice control of radio and media (p. 140)

Audio settings (p. 492)

Changing system language (p. 124)

LIGHTING

LIGHTING

* Option/accessory.144

Lighting control The different lighting controls are used to control both exterior and interior lighting. The left-hand stalk switch activates and adjusts the exterior lighting. The interior brightness is adjusted using a thumbwheel on the instrument panel.

Exterior lighting

Rotating ring in the left-hand stalk switch.

When the car's electrical system is in ignition position II or when the car is running, the follow- ing functions are available in the rotating ring's different positions.

Position Specification

Daytime running lights.

Main beam flash can be used.

Daytime running lights and position lamps.

Position lamps when the car is parked.A

Main beam flash can be used.

Dipped beam and position lamps.

Main beam can be activated.

Main beam flash can be used.

Position Specification

Daytime running lights and position lamps in daylight.

Dipped beam and position lamps in weak daylight or darkness, or when the front fog lamp* and/or rear fog lamp are activated.

The Active main beam function can be activated.

Main beam can be activated when dipped beam is switched on.

Main beam flash can be used.

Active main beam on/off.

A If the car is stationary but running, the rotating ring can be

moved to position from another position to switch on only the position lamps instead of other lighting.

Volvo recommends that mode is used when the vehicle is driven.

WARNING

The car's audio system is not able to deter- mine when daylight is too weak or sufficiently strong, e.g. in fog and rain, in all situations.

The driver is always responsible for ensuring that the car is driven with a beam pattern suit- able for the traffic situation and in accordance with applicable traffic regulations.

LIGHTING

}}

* Option/accessory. 145

Thumbwheel in instrument panel

Thumbwheel (to left) for adjusting interior brightness.

Related information Adjusting light functions via the centre dis-

play (p. 145)

Interior lighting (p. 154)

Position lamps (p. 145)

Using direction indicators (p. 150)

Using main beam (p. 147)

Dipped beam (p. 147)

Rear fog lamp (p. 151)

Active bending lights* (p. 150)

Brake lights (p. 152)

Emergency brake lights (p. 152)

Hazard warning flashers (p. 152)

Adjusting light functions via the centre display Several light functions can be adjusted and acti- vated via the centre display, such as active main beam, home safe lighting and approach lighting. 1. Press Settings in the top view.

2. Press My Car Lights and Lighting.

3. Select Exterior Lights or Interior Lighting.

Related information Lighting control (p. 144)

Active main beam (p. 148)

Using home safe lighting (p. 153)

Approach light duration (p. 153)

Using direction indicators (p. 150)

Opening settings in the centre display (p. 124)

Function view in centre display (p. 114)

Position lamps Position lamps can be used so that other road users can see the car if it stops or is parked. The position lamp is switched on with the rotating ring on the stalk switch.

Stalk switch rotating ring in position lamps position.

Turn the rotating ring to the position - the position lamps are switched on (number plate lighting is switched on at the same time).

If the car's electrical system is in ignition position II or the car is running then the daytime running lights are switched on instead of the front posi- tion lamps. When the rotating ring is in this posi- tion, the position lamps are switched on regard- less of the ignition position of the car's electrical system.

If the car is stationary but running, the rotating

ring can be moved to the position lamp

||

LIGHTING

* Option/accessory.146

position from another position to switch on only the position lamps instead of other lighting.

When driving for more than 30 seconds at max. 10 km/h (approx. 6 mph), or if the speed exceeds 10 km/h (approx. 6 mph), the daytime running lights are switched on. The driver should

turn to a position other than .

If the tailgate is opened when it is dark outside, the rear position lamps come on (if not already switched on) to warn road users approaching from behind. This takes place irrespective of the position of the rotating ring or the ignition posi- tion of the car's electrical system.

Related information Lighting control (p. 144)

Ignition positions (p. 430)

Daytime running lights The car has sensors that detect the light condi- tions in the surroundings. The daytime running lights are switched on when the rotating ring on

the stalk switch is in position , or

as well as when the car's electrical system is in ignition position II or when the car is run-

ning. In position , the headlamps change automatically to dipped beam in weak daylight or darkness.

Stalk switch rotating ring in AUTO position.

If the stalk switch rotating ring is in the position, the daytime running lights (DRL1) are switched on when the car is driven in daylight. The car automatically changes lighting from day- time running light to dipped beam in weak day- light or darkness. Changing to dipped beam also

takes place if the front fog lamp* and/or rear fog lamp are activated.

WARNING

This system help to save energy - it cannot determine in all situations when daylight is too weak or sufficiently strong, e.g. in mist and rain.

The driver is always responsible for ensuring that the car is driven with the correct beam pattern for the traffic situation and in accord- ance with applicable traffic regulations.

Related information Lighting control (p. 144)

Ignition positions (p. 430)

Dipped beam (p. 147)

1 Daytime Running Lights

LIGHTING

}}

147

Dipped beam When driving with the stalk switch's rotating ring

in the position, dipped beam is activated automatically in weak daylight or darkness, when the car's electrical system is in ignition position II or when the car is running.

Stalk switch rotating ring in AUTO position.

With the stalk switch's rotating ring in position, dipped beam is also activated automati- cally if the rear fog lamp is activated.

Dipped beam is always switched on when the rotating ring on the stalk switch is in position

when the car's electrical system is in igni- tion position II or when the car is running.

Tunnel detection The car detects when it is driven into a tunnel and switches from daytime running lights to dipped beam.

Note that the rotating ring in the left-hand stalk

switch must be in mode for tunnel detec- tion to work.

Related information Lighting control (p. 144)

Ignition positions (p. 430)

Daytime running lights (p. 146)

Using main beam Main beam is operated with the left-hand stalk switch. Main beam is the car's strongest lighting and should be used when driving in the dark for better visibility, as long as it does not dazzle other road users.

Steering wheel stalk switch with rotating ring.

Main beam flash Move the stalk switch backwards slightly to main beam flash position. Main beam comes on until the stalk switch is released.

||

LIGHTING

148

Main beam Main beam can be activated when the steer- ing wheel stalk switch's rotating ring is in

position 2 or . Activate main beam by moving the stalk switch forwards. Deactivate by moving the stalk switch back- wards.

When main beam has been activated the symbol illuminates in the driver display.

Related information Lighting control (p. 144)

Active main beam (p. 148)

Active main beam Active main beam is a function which uses a camera sensor at the top edge of the wind- screen to detect the headlamp beams from oncoming traffic or the rear lights of vehicles in front, and then switches from main beam to dipped beam.

Active main beam is activated with the rotating ring on

the stalk switch in position .

The function can also take streetlights into account. Main beam is reactivated when the cam- era sensor no longer sees any oncoming vehicles or vehicles ahead.

The function can start while driving in the dark when the car's speed is approx. 20 km/h (approx. 12 mph) or higher.

If active main beam is deactivated while main beam is on, the lighting is immediately reset to dipped beam.

When active main beam is activated, the symbol

illuminates with a white glow in the driver display.

When main beam is activated, the symbol shines blue. This also applies for LED headlamps if the main beam is partially dimmed, i.e. if the light beam shines with slightly more than dipped beam.

2 When dipped beam is activated.

LIGHTING

* Option/accessory. 149

Car with LED3 headlamps* If the active main beam has the on/off functional- ity4 then the lighting returns to main beam about a second after the camera sensor no longer detects the headlamp beams from oncoming traffic or the rear lights from vehicles in front.

If the active main beam has adaptive functional- ity4 then, unlike what happens during conven- tional dimming, the light beam continues to illu- minate with main beam on both sides of oncom- ing traffic or vehicles ahead - only the part of the light beam that points directly to the vehicle is dimmed.

Adaptive functionality: Dipped beam directly towards oncoming vehicle, but continued main beam on both sides of the vehicle.

The lighting returns to full main beam about a second after the camera sensor no longer detects the headlamp beams from oncoming traffic or the rear lights from vehicles in front.

Limitations for active main beam The camera sensor on which the function is based has limitations.

If this symbol is shown in the driver dis- play, together with the message Active High Beam Temporarily unavailable, then switching between

main and dipped beam must be performed man- ually. The rotating ring on the stalk switch can still

be in the position. The symbol extin- guishes when these message are shown.

The same applies if this symbol is shown together with the message Windscreen sensor Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual.

Active main beam may be temporarily unavailable e.g. in situations with dense fog or heavy rain. When active main beam becomes available again, or the windscreen sensors are no longer blocked,

the message goes out and the symbol illu- minates.

WARNING

Active main beam is an aid for using the opti- mum beam pattern when conditions are favourable.

The driver always bears responsibility for man- ually switching between main and dipped beam when traffic situations or weather con- ditions so require.

Related information Lighting control (p. 144)

Using main beam (p. 147)

Limitations for camera unit (p. 331)

3 LED (Light Emitting Diode) 4 Depending on the car's equipment level.

LIGHTING

* Option/accessory.150

Using direction indicators The car's direction indicators are operated with the left-hand stalk switch. The direction indicator lamps flash three times or continuously, depend- ing on how far up or down the stalk switch is moved.

Direction indicators.

Short flash sequence Move the stalk switch up or down to the first position and release. The direction indicator lamps flash three times. The function can be activated/deactivated via the centre display.

NOTE

This automatic flashing sequence can be stopped by moving the stalk switch immediately in the opposite direction.

If the symbol for direction indicators in the driver display flashes more quickly than normal - see the message in the driver display.

Continuous flash sequence Move the stalk switch up or down to its end position.

The stalk switch remains in its position and is moved back manually, or automatically by the steering wheel movement.

Related information Hazard warning flashers (p. 152)

Adjusting light functions via the centre dis- play (p. 145)

Active bending lights* Active bending lights are designed to provide maximum illumination in bends and junctions.

Cars with LED5 headlamps* can have active bending lights, depending on the car's equip- ment level.

Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left) and activated (right) respectively.

Active bending lights follow steering wheel move- ments to provide maximum illumination in bends and junctions and can thereby provide the driver with improved visibility.

The function is activated automatically when the car is started. In the event of a fault in the func-

tion, the symbol illuminates in the driver display at the same time as the driver display shows an explanatory text.

5 LED (Light Emitting Diode)

LIGHTING

151

The function is only active in weak daylight or darkness and only when the car is moving and dipped beam is switched on.

Deactivating/activating the function The function is activated when the car is supplied from the factory and can be deactivated/acti- vated via the centre display's function view.

Press the Active Bending Lights button.

Related information Adjusting light functions via the centre dis-

play (p. 145)

Rear fog lamp The rear fog lamp is considerably stronger than the normal rear lights and should only be used in reduced visibility due to fog, snow, smoke or dust so that other road users have an early warn- ing of a vehicle ahead.

Button for rear fog lamp.

The rear fog lamp is a lamp at the rear of the car, on the driver's side.

The rear fog lamp can only be switched on when ignition position II is active or the car is running and the rotating ring on the stalk switch is in

position or .

Press the on/off button. The symbol in the driver display illuminates when the rear fog lamp is switched on.

The rear fog lamp switches off automatically when the start knob it turned clockwise to switch off the car or the stalk switch rotating ring is set

to the or position.

NOTE

Regulations on the use of rear fog lamps vary from country to country.

Related information Lighting control (p. 144)

Ignition positions (p. 430)

LIGHTING

152

Brake lights The brake light automatically comes on during braking.

The brake light is switched on when the brake pedal is depressed. It is also switched on when the car is braked automatically by one of the driver support systems.

Related information Emergency brake lights (p. 152)

Brake functions (p. 433)

Emergency brake lights Emergency brake lights are activated to alert vehicles behind about heavy braking.

The function means that the brake light flashes instead of - as in normal braking - shining with a constant glow. The emergency brake lights are activated during heavy braking or if the ABS system is activated at high speeds.

After the driver brakes to a low speed and then releases the brake, the brake light returns to nor- mal glow.

The car's hazard warning flashers are activated at the same time. These flash until the driver accel- erates the car to a higher speed again or switches off the hazard warning flashers.

Related information Brake lights (p. 152)

Foot brake (p. 434)

Hazard warning flashers (p. 152)

Hazard warning flashers Hazard warning flashers warn other road users by means of all of the car's direction indicators being activated simultaneously. The function can be used to give a warning in the event of traffic hazards.

Button for hazard warning flashers.

Press the button to activate the hazard warning flashers.

The hazard warning flashers are automatically activated when the car brakes so powerfully that the emergency brake lights are activated and the speed is low. The hazard warning flashers start to flash after the emergency brake lights have stop- ped flashing and are then deactivated automati- cally when the car drives away again or are deac- tivated if the button is depressed.

LIGHTING

* Option/accessory. 153

NOTE

Regulations for the use of hazard warning flashers may vary between countries.

Related information Emergency brake lights (p. 152)

Using direction indicators (p. 150)

Using home safe lighting Some of the exterior lighting can be kept switched on to work as home safe lighting after the car has been locked.

To activate the function:

1. Switch off the car.

2. Move the left-hand stalk switch forward toward the instrument panel and release.

3. Get out of the car and lock the door.

When the function is activated, a symbol illumi- nates in the driver display and position lamps, exterior handle lighting* and number plate light- ing are switched on.

The length of time that home safe lighting remains on can be set via the centre display.

Related information Adjusting light functions via the centre dis-

play (p. 145)

Approach light duration (p. 153)

Approach light duration Approach lighting is switched on when the car is unlocked and is used to switch on the car's lighting at a distance.

The function is activated when the remote control key is used for unlocking. At which point, position lamps, exterior handle lighting*, number plate lighting, interior roof lamps, floor lamps and cargo area lighting are switched on. If a door is opened within the activation time, the time for the lighting in the outside handles* and the interior lighting will be extended.

The function can be activated and deactivated via the centre display.

Related information Adjusting light functions via the centre dis-

play (p. 145)

Using home safe lighting (p. 153)

Remote control key (p. 223)

LIGHTING

* Option/accessory.154

Interior lighting The interior is equipped with several different types of lighting to improve the experience. This includes, reading lamps, glovebox lighting and ground lighting. All lighting in the passenger compartment can be switched on and off manually at least 5 minutes from when:

the car has been switched off and its electri- cal system is in ignition position 0

the car has been unlocked but it has not been started.

Front roof lighting

Controls in roof console for the front reading lamps and passenger compartment lighting.

Reading lamp, left-hand side

Passenger compartment lighting

Auto function for passenger compartment lighting

Reading lamp, right-hand side

Reading lighting The reading lamps on the right and left-hand sides can be turned on and off by briefly pressing the buttons in the roof console. Brightness is adjusted by holding the button pressed in.

Passenger compartment lighting The floor lighting and interior roof lighting are switched on or off with a short press on the but- ton in the roof console.

Auto function for passenger compartment lighting The automatic function is activated by a short press on the AUTO button in the roof console. With the automatic system activated, the light indicator in the button illuminates and the pas- senger compartment lighting is switched on and off according to the following.

Passenger compartment lighting:

illuminates when the car is unlocked and when it is switched off

extinguishes when the car is started and when it is locked

comes on and goes off, respectively, when a side door is opened or closed

remains on for 2 minutes if one of the side doors is open.

Rear roof lighting* The rear area of the car has reading lighting, which is also used as passenger compartment lighting.

Reading lamps above the rear seat.

In cars with panorama roof* there are two lamp units, one on each side of the roof.

LIGHTING

}}

* Option/accessory. 155

The reading lamps are switched on or off by briefly pressing the button on the lamp. Bright- ness is adjusted by holding the button pressed in.

Glovebox lighting Glovebox lighting is switched on and off respec- tively when the lid is opened or closed.

Sun visor mirror lighting* The lighting for the mirror in the sun visor is switched on and off respectively when the cover is opened or closed.

Ground lighting* The ground lighting is switched on and off when the corresponding door is opened or closed.

Lighting in the cargo area The lighting in the cargo area is switched on and off respectively when the tailgate is opened or closed.

Decor lighting The ambient light is switched on when you open the doors and is switched off when the car is locked. The intensity of the decor lighting can be adapted in the centre display and also precisely adjusted using the thumbwheel in the instrument panel.

Ambience lights* The car is equipped with a number of LEDs that make it possible to change the colour of the light. These lights are switched on when the car is run-

ning. The ambience light can be adapted in the centre display and also precisely adjusted using the thumbwheel in the instrument panel.

Lighting in storage compartments in doors The lighting in the storage compartments in the doors is switched on when you open the doors and is switched off when the car is locked. The brightness can be precisely adjusted using the thumbwheel in the instrument panel.

Lighting in front cup holders in tunnel console The lighting in the front cup holders is switched on when the car is unlocked and is switched off when the car is locked. The brightness can be precisely adjusted using the thumbwheel in the instrument panel.

Related information Adjusting interior lighting (p. 155)

Lighting control (p. 144)

Ignition positions (p. 430)

Passenger compartment interior (p. 572)

Adjusting interior lighting The lamps inside the car come on differently depending on the ignition position used. The interior lighting can be adjusted with a thumb- wheel in the instrument panel, and certain light functions can also be adjusted via the centre display.

The thumbwheel, on the instru- ment panel by the steering wheel, is used to adjust the brightness of the display light, control light, ambient light and ambience light*

Adjusting ambient decor illumination 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre

display.

2. Press My Car Lights and Lighting Interior Lighting.

3. Choose between the following settings:

Under Ambient Light Intensity, select from Off, Low and High.

Under Ambient Light Level, select from Reduced and Full.

Adjusting ambience light* The car is equipped with a number of LEDs that make it possible to change the colour of the light. These lights are switched on when the car is run- ning.

||

LIGHTING

156

Changing the brightness of the lights 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre

display.

2. Press My Car Lights and Lighting

Interior Lighting Interior Mood Lighting.

3. Under Interior Mood Light Intensity, select from Off, Low and High.

Changing the colour of the light 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre

display.

2. Press My Car Lights and Lighting

Interior Lighting Interior Mood Lighting.

3. Choose between By Temperature and By Colour in order to change the colour of the light.

With the By Temperature option, the light changes according to the set passenger compartment temperature.

With the By Colour option, the Theme Colours subcategory can be used to adjust further.

Related information Interior lighting (p. 154)

Adjusting light functions via the centre dis- play (p. 145)

Ignition positions (p. 430)

WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

* Option/accessory.158

Windows, glass and mirrors The car contains controls for windows, glass and mirrors. Some of the windows in the car are laminated.

Laminated glass The windscreen and panorama* roof have lamina- ted glass. The glass is reinforced, which provides better protection against break-ins and improved sound insulation in the passenger compartment. Laminated glass is available as an option for cer- tain other glass surfaces.

The symbol is shown on the windows where the glass is laminated1

Related information Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds

(p. 158)

Panorama roof* (p. 164)

Power windows (p. 159)

Rearview and door mirrors (p. 161)

Head-up display* (p. 134)

Using windscreen wipers (p. 169)

Using windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 172)

Activating and deactivating the heated wind- screen* (p. 211)

Activating and deactivating the heated rear window and door mirrors (p. 212)

Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds All windows and sun blinds* controlled electri- cally have pinch protection which is deployed if they are blocked by any object when opening or closing. In the event of blocking, the movement stops and then reverses automatically to approx. 50 mm (approx. 2 inches) from the blocked position (or to full ventilation position).

If the pinch protection has deployed then it is still possible to operate once more in the same direc- tion without pinch protection, if this is done within 10 seconds after pinch protection deployment. In other words, it is possible to force pinch protec- tion when closing has been cancelled, e.g. when ice is formed, by continuing to press the control until fully closed.

WARNING

If the starter battery is disconnected, the automatic opening and closing function must be reset to work properly. A reset must take place for pinch protection to work.

1 Does not apply to the windscreen or panorama roof* which are always laminated and thus do not have this symbol.

WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

}}

* Option/accessory. 159

Related information Reset sequence for pinch protection

(p. 159)

Operating power windows (p. 160)

Panorama roof* (p. 164)

Reset sequence for pinch protection If any fault arises with the electrical functions of the power windows, a reset sequence can be tested.

WARNING

If the starter battery is disconnected, the automatic opening and closing function must be reset to work properly. A reset must take place for pinch protection to work.

If the problem persists, or if it concerns the pan- oramic roof or sunroof, contact a workshop.2

Reset the power window 1. Start with the window in closed position.

2. Then operate it in the manual position 3 times upwards to closed position.

> The system is initiated automatically.

Related information Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds

(p. 158)

Operating power windows (p. 160)

Power windows The power windows are operated using the con- trol panels in each respective door. The driver's door has controls for operating all windows and also to activate the child safety locks.

Driver's door control panel.

Electric child safety locks* that deactivate the controls in the rear doors to prevent doors or windows from being opened from the inside.

Controls for rear windows.

Controls for front windows.

The power windows are equipped with pinch pro- tection. If any fault arises with the pinch protec- tion, a reset sequence can be tested.

2 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

||

WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

* Option/accessory.160

WARNING

Children, other passengers or objects may be trapped by the moving parts.

Always operate the windows with caution.

Do not allow children to play with the controls.

Never leave children alone in the car.

Remember to always switch off the power supply to the power windows by setting the car's electrical system in ignition posi- tion 0, and then take the remote control key with you when leaving the car.

Never put an object or part of the body through the windows, even if the car's electrical system is fully disconnected.

Related information Operating power windows (p. 160)

Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds (p. 158)

Reset sequence for pinch protection (p. 159)

Operating power windows Using the driver's door control panel, all power windows can be operated - using the control panels in the other doors operates the power window in the individual door. The power windows are equipped with pinch pro- tection. If any fault arises with the pinch protec- tion, a reset sequence can be tested.

WARNING

Children, other passengers or objects may be trapped by the moving parts.

Always operate the windows with caution.

Do not allow children to play with the controls.

Never leave children alone in the car.

Remember to always switch off the power supply to the power windows by setting the car's electrical system in ignition posi- tion 0, and then take the remote control key with you when leaving the car.

Never put an object or part of the body through the windows, even if the car's electrical system is fully disconnected.

Operating the power windows.

Operating without auto. Move one of the controls gently up or down. The power win- dows move up or down as long as the control is held in position.

Operating with auto. Move one of the con- trols up or down to the end position and release it. The window runs automatically to its end position.

In order for the power windows to be used, the ignition position must be I or II. The power win- dows can be operated for a few minutes after the car has been switched off and after the ignition has been switched off - although not after a door has been opened. Only one control panel can be operated at a time.

It can also be operated using the remote control key, keyless opening* with the door handle or the central locking button.

WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

}}

* Option/accessory. 161

WARNING

Check that children or other passengers are not at risk of crushing when all the windows are closed with:

keyless closing*

central locking button

remote control key.

NOTE

One way to reduce the pulsating wind noise when the rear windows are open is to also open the front windows slightly.

NOTE

The windows cannot be opened at speeds above approx. 180 km/h (approx. 112 mph), but they can be closed.

The driver always bears responsibility for fol- lowing traffic regulations in force.

Related information Power windows (p. 159)

Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds (p. 158)

Reset sequence for pinch protection (p. 159)

Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 248)

Locking and unlocking with the remote con- trol key (p. 225)

Locking and unlocking from inside the car (p. 251)

Rearview and door mirrors The rearview mirrors and door mirrors are used to give the driver better visibility to the rear.

Interior rearview mirror The interior rearview mirror is adjusted easily by angling it manually. The interior rearview mirror can be fitted with HomeLink*, automatic dim- ming* and compass*.

Door mirrors

WARNING

Both mirrors are bent to provide optimal vision. Objects may appear to be further away than they actually are.

The door mirror positions are adjusted with the joystick in the driver's door control panel. There are also a number of automatic settings that can be linked to the memory function buttons for the power seat*.

Related information HomeLink* (p. 484)

Compass (p. 488)

Adjusting rearview mirror dimming (p. 162)

Angling the door mirrors (p. 163)

WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

* Option/accessory.162

Storing memory function in power operated front seat* (p. 178)

Activating and deactivating the heated rear window and door mirrors (p. 212)

Adjusting rearview mirror dimming Bright light from behind could be reflected in the rearview mirrors and dazzle the driver. Use dim- ming when disturbed by light from behind.

Manual dimming The interior rearview mirror can be dimmed with a control in the mirror's lower edge.

Control for manual dimming.

1. Use dimming by moving the control in towards the passenger compartment.

2. Return to normal mode by moving the control towards the windscreen.

The control for manual dimming is not available on mirrors with automatic dimming.

Automatic dimming* Bright light from behind is automatically dimmed by the interior rearview and door mirrors. Auto- matic dimming is always active while driving, apart from when gearbox reverse position is selected.

NOTE

When sensitivity is changed there is no imme- diately noticeable change in dimming, but the change will be complete after a while.

Dimming sensitivity will affect both the interior rearview mirror and the door mirrors.

1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.

2. Press My Car Mirrors and Convenience.

3. Under Rearview Mirror Auto Dimming, select Normal, Dark or Light.

The interior rearview mirror contains two sensors - one forward facing and one rearward facing - that work together to identify and eliminate daz- zling light. The forward facing sensor detects ambient light, while the rearward facing sensor detects the light from vehicle headlights behind.

For the door mirrors to be equipped with auto- matic dimming, the interior rearview mirror must also be equipped with automatic dimming.

WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

}}

* Option/accessory. 163

NOTE

If the sensors are obscured by e.g. parking permits, transponders, sun visors or objects in the seats or in the cargo area in such a way that light is prevented from reaching the sen- sors, then the dimming function of the interior rearview and door mirrors is reduced.

Related information Rearview and door mirrors (p. 161)

Angling the door mirrors (p. 163)

Angling the door mirrors To ensure better visibility to the rear, the door mirrors need to be set to the preferences of the driver. There are a number of automatic settings that can also be linked to the memory function buttons for the power seat*.

Using controls for door mirrors

Controls for door mirrors.

The door mirror positions are adjusted with the joystick in the driver's door control panel.

1. Press the L button for the left-hand door mir- ror or the R button for the right-hand door mirror. The light in the button illuminates.

2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the centre.

3. Press the L or R button again. The light should no longer be illuminated.

Resetting to neutral Mirrors that have been moved out of position by an external force must be reset electrically to the neutral position for electric retracting/extending to work correctly.

1. Fold in the door mirrors by pressing down the L and R buttons simultaneously.

2. Fold them out again by pressing the L and R buttons simultaneously.

3. Repeat the above procedure as necessary.

The mirrors are now reset in neutral position.

Folding in rearview mirrors electrically* The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving in narrow spaces.

1. Depress the L and R buttons simultaneously (ignition position must be at least I).

2. Release them after approximately 1 second. The mirrors automatically stop in the fully retracted position.

Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L and R buttons simultaneously. The mirrors automati- cally stop in the fully extended position.

Angling during parking3

The door mirror can be angled down for the driver to view the side of the road when parking for example.

3 Only in combination with power seat with memory buttons*.

||

WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

* Option/accessory.164

Engage reverse gear and press the L or R button.

Note that the button may need to be pressed twice, depending on whether it was already pre- selected. The button flashes when the door mir- ror is angled down. When reverse gear is disen- gaged, the door mirror automatically starts to return after approx. 3 seconds and then reaches its original position after approx. 8 seconds.

Automatic angling during parking3

With this setting, the door mirror is automatically angled down when reverse gear is selected. The folded position is preset and cannot be adjusted. You can make the door mirror return to its origi- nal position by pressing the L or R button twice.

1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view.

2. Press My Car Mirrors and Convenience.

3. Under Exterior Mirror Tilt at Reverse, select Off, Driver, Passenger or Both to activate/deactivate and to select which review mirror should be angled.

Automatic retraction when locking* When the car is locked/unlocked with the remote control key the door mirrors are automatically retracted/extended.

1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view.

2. Press My Car Mirrors and Convenience.

3. Select Fold Mirror When Locked to acti- vate/deactivate.

Related information Rearview and door mirrors (p. 161)

Adjusting rearview mirror dimming (p. 162)

Storing memory function in power operated front seat* (p. 178)

Activating and deactivating the heated rear window and door mirrors (p. 212)

Panorama roof* The panorama roof is divided into two glass sec- tions. The front section can be opened vertically at the rear edge (ventilation position) or horizon- tally (open position). The rear section is fixed roof glass.

The panoramic roof has a wind deflector and a sun blind made of perforated fabric and located under the glass roof to provide extra protection from factors such as strong sunlight.

The panoramic roof and sun blind are operated with a control located in the roof.

It can also be operated using the remote control key, keyless opening* with the door handle or the central locking button.

3 Only in combination with power seat with memory buttons*.

WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

* Option/accessory. 165

In order that the panoramic roof and the sun blind can be operated, the car's electrical system must be in ignition position I or II.

WARNING

Children, other passengers or objects may be trapped by the moving parts.

Always operate the windows with caution.

Do not allow children to play with the controls.

Never leave children alone in the car.

Remember to always switch off the power supply to the power windows by setting the car's electrical system in ignition posi- tion 0, and then take the remote control key with you when leaving the car.

Never put an object or part of the body through the windows, even if the car's electrical system is fully disconnected.

IMPORTANT

Do not open the panoramic roof when load carriers are fitted.

Do not place any heavy objects on the panoramic roof.

IMPORTANT

Remove ice and snow before opening the panoramic roof.

Do not operate the panoramic roof if it has frozen closed.

Wind deflector

The panorama roof has a wind deflector that is raised when the panorama roof is in the open position.

Related information Operating the panorama roof* (p. 166)

Automatic closing of the panoramic roof's* sun blind (p. 168)

Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds (p. 158)

Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 248)

Locking and unlocking with the remote con- trol key (p. 225)

Locking and unlocking from inside the car (p. 251)

WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

* Option/accessory.166

Operating the panorama roof* The panoramic roof and sun blind are operated with a control in the roof panel and both are equipped with pinch protection.

WARNING

Children, other passengers or objects may be trapped by the moving parts.

Always operate the windows with caution.

Do not allow children to play with the controls.

Never leave children alone in the car.

Remember to always switch off the power supply to the power windows by setting the car's electrical system in ignition posi- tion 0, and then take the remote control key with you when leaving the car.

Never put an object or part of the body through the windows, even if the car's electrical system is fully disconnected.

IMPORTANT

Do not open the panoramic roof when load carriers are fitted.

Do not place any heavy objects on the panoramic roof.

IMPORTANT

Remove ice and snow before opening the panoramic roof.

Do not operate the panoramic roof if it has frozen closed.

In order that the panoramic roof and the sun blind can be operated, the car's electrical system must be in ignition position I or II.

It can also be operated using the remote control key, keyless opening* with the door handle or the central locking button.

WARNING

Check that children or other passengers are not at risk of crushing when all the windows are closed with:

keyless closing*

central locking button

remote control key.

IMPORTANT

Check that the panoramic roof is properly closed when closing.

The movement of the roof is stopped if the con- trol is released during manual operation, or when the glass reaches the comfort position4 or the maximum opening or closing position. The move- ment of both panoramic roof and sun blind are also stopped if the roof control is operated again in the opposite direction to the current direction of movement.

The panoramic roof and the sun blind are also equipped with pinch protection.

NOTE

For manual opening, the sun blind must be fully open before the panoramic roof can be opened. When the procedure is reversed, the panoramic roof must be fully closed before the sun blind can be fully closed.

4 Comfort position is a position where wind noise and resonance noise are at a comfortably low level while driving.

WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

}}

* Option/accessory. 167

Open and close ventilation position

Ventilation position, vertically at the rear edge.

Open by pressing the control upward once.

Close by pressing the control downward once.

When the ventilation position is selected the front glass cover is raised at its rear edge. If the sun blind is fully closed when ventilation position is selected, then it opens automatically approx. 50 mm (approx. 2 inches).

The sun blind follows automatically if the panor- amic roof is closed from ventilation position.

Fully open and close the panoramic roof using the roof control

Operation, manual mode

Operation, automatic mode

Manual operation 1. To open the sun blind - press the control

backwards to the position for manual open- ing.

2. Open the panoramic roof to comfort position - press the control backwards a second time to the position for manual opening.

3. Open the panoramic roof to maximum posi- tion - press the control backwards a third time to the position for manual opening.

Close by repeating the preceding procedure in reverse order - press the control forward/down- ward to the manual closing position instead.

Automatic operation 1. Open the sun blind to maximum position -

press the control backward to the position for automatic opening and release.

2. Open the panoramic roof to comfort position - press the control backwards a second time to the position for automatic opening and release.

3. Open the panoramic roof to maximum posi- tion - press the control backwards a third time to the position for automatic opening and release.

Close by repeating the preceding procedure in reverse order - press the control forward/down- ward to the automatic closing position instead.

Automatic operation - rapid opening or closing The panoramic roof and sun blind can be opened or closed simultaneously:

To open - press the control rearward to the automatic operation position twice and release.

To close - press the control forward/down- ward to the automatic operation position twice and release.

Related information Panorama roof* (p. 164)

Automatic closing of the panoramic roof's* sun blind (p. 168)

WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

* Option/accessory.168

Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds (p. 158)

Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 248)

Locking and unlocking with the remote con- trol key (p. 225)

Locking and unlocking from inside the car (p. 251)

Automatic closing of the panoramic roof's* sun blind With this function, the sun blind is closed auto- matically 15 minutes after the car has been locked if it is parked in hot weather. This is in order to lower the passenger compartment tem- perature and protect the car's upholstery from sun-fading. The function is deactivated when the car is sup- plied from the factory and can be activated or deactivated in the centre display.

1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.

2. Press My Car Locking.

Select Auto Close Sunroof Curtain to activate/deactivate.

NOTE

The sun blind is also closed when all windows are closed with:

keyless closing*

central locking button

remote control key.

Related information Panorama roof* (p. 164)

Operating the panorama roof* (p. 166)

Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds (p. 158)

Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 248)

Locking and unlocking with the remote con- trol key (p. 225)

Locking and unlocking from inside the car (p. 251)

WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

* Option/accessory. 169

Using windscreen wipers The windscreen wiper cleans the windscreen. Different settings for the windscreen wiper are made with the right-hand steering wheel stalk switch.

Right-hand stalk switch.

Thumbwheel, used to set rain sensor sensi- tivity and wiper swipe frequency.

Single sweep Lower the stalk switch and release to make one sweep.

Windscreen wipers off Move the stalk switch to position 0 to switch off the windscreen wipers.

Intermittent wiping Set the number of sweeps per time unit with the thumbwheel when intermittent

wiping is selected.

Continuous wiping Raise the stalk switch for the wipers to sweep at normal speed.

Raise the stalk switch further for the wip- ers to sweep at high speed.

IMPORTANT

Before activating the wipers - ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen in, and that any snow or ice on the windscreen and rear win- dow is scraped away.

IMPORTANT

Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers are cleaning the windscreen. The windscreen must be wet when the windscreen wipers are operating.

Related information Using the rain sensor (p. 170)

Using windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 172)

Using automatic rear windscreen wiping when reversing (p. 174)

Heated windscreen wiper nozzles* (p. 170)

Using the rain sensor's memory function (p. 171)

Using the rear window wiper and washer (p. 173)

Filling washer fluid (p. 639)

Wiper blades in service position (p. 638)

Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 637)

Replacing the wiper blade, rear window (p. 636)

WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

* Option/accessory.170

Heated windscreen wiper nozzles* The washer nozzles are heated automatically in cold weather to prevent the washer fluid from freezing.

Related information Using the rain sensor (p. 170)

Using windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 172)

Using automatic rear windscreen wiping when reversing (p. 174)

Using the rain sensor's memory function (p. 171)

Using the rear window wiper and washer (p. 173)

Filling washer fluid (p. 639)

Wiper blades in service position (p. 638)

Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 637)

Replacing the wiper blade, rear window (p. 636)

Using windscreen wipers (p. 169)

Using the rain sensor The rain sensor automatically starts the wind- screen wipers based on how much water it detects on the windscreen. Rain sensor sensitiv- ity can be adjusted with the thumbwheel on the right-hand stalk switch.

Right-hand stalk switch.

Rain sensor button

Thumbwheel sensitivity/frequency

When the rain sensor is activated, the rain sensor

symbol is shown in the driver display.

Activating the rain sensor When activating the rain sensor, the car must be running or the electrical system in ignition posi- tion I or II while the windscreen wiper stalk switch must be in position 0 or in the position for a single sweep.

Activate the rain sensor by pressing the rain sen-

sor button .

Press the stalk switch down for the wipers to make an extra sweep.

Turn the thumbwheel upward for higher sensitiv- ity and downward for lower sensitivity. An extra sweep is made when the thumbwheel is turned upward.

Deactivating the rain sensor Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the rain

sensor button or moving the stalk switch up to another wiper program.

The rain sensor is deactivated automatically in ignition position 0 or when the engine is switched off.

The rain sensor is deactivated automatically when wiper blades are set in service position. The rain sensor is reactivated when service mode has been deactivated.

IMPORTANT

The windscreen wipers could start and be damaged in an automatic car wash. Deacti- vate the rain sensor while the car is running or when the car's electrical system is in igni- tion position I or II. The symbol in the driver display extinguishes.

WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

* Option/accessory. 171

Related information Using windscreen and headlamp washers

(p. 172)

Using automatic rear windscreen wiping when reversing (p. 174)

Heated windscreen wiper nozzles* (p. 170)

Using the rain sensor's memory function (p. 171)

Using the rear window wiper and washer (p. 173)

Filling washer fluid (p. 639)

Wiper blades in service position (p. 638)

Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 637)

Replacing the wiper blade, rear window (p. 636)

Using windscreen wipers (p. 169)

Using the rain sensor's memory function The rain sensor automatically starts the wind- screen wipers based on how much water it detects on the windscreen.

Activating/deactivating the memory function The memory function for the rain sensor can be activated in such a way that the rain sensor but- ton does not need to be depressed each time the car is started:

1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.

2. Press My Car Wipers.

3. Select Rain Sensor Memory to activate/ deactivate the memory function.

Related information Using the rain sensor (p. 170)

Using windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 172)

Using automatic rear windscreen wiping when reversing (p. 174)

Heated windscreen wiper nozzles* (p. 170)

Using the rear window wiper and washer (p. 173)

Filling washer fluid (p. 639)

Wiper blades in service position (p. 638)

Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 637)

Replacing the wiper blade, rear window (p. 636)

Using windscreen wipers (p. 169)

WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

* Option/accessory.172

Using windscreen and headlamp washers Windscreen and headlamp washers clean the windscreen and headlamps. Windscreen and headlamp washers are started using the right- hand stalk switch.

Starting windscreen and headlamp washers

Washing function, right-hand stalk switch.

Move the right-hand stalk switch toward the steering wheel to start the windscreen and headlamp washers.

> The windscreen wipers will make several more sweeps once the stalk switch has been released.

IMPORTANT

Avoid activating the washer system when it is frozen or the washer reservoir is empty, other- wise there is a risk of damaging the pump.

Headlamp washing* To save fluid, the headlamps are washed auto- matically at a defined interval when the head- lamps are switched on.

Reduced washing If only approx. 1 litre (1 qt) of washer fluid remains in the reservoir and the message Washer fluid Level low, refill, together with the

symbol, is shown in the driver display, then the supply of washer fluid to the headlamps is switched off. This is to prioritise cleaning the windscreen and the visibility through it. The head- lamps are only washed if main or dipped beam is switched on.

Related information Using the rain sensor (p. 170)

Using automatic rear windscreen wiping when reversing (p. 174)

Heated windscreen wiper nozzles* (p. 170)

Using the rain sensor's memory function (p. 171)

Using the rear window wiper and washer (p. 173)

Filling washer fluid (p. 639)

Wiper blades in service position (p. 638)

Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 637)

Replacing the wiper blade, rear window (p. 636)

Using windscreen wipers (p. 169)

WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

* Option/accessory. 173

Using the rear window wiper and washer Rear window wiper and washer clean the rear window. Washing/wiping is started and settings are changed by means of the right-hand steering wheel stalk switch.

Activating the rear window wiper and washer

NOTE

The rear window wiper is equipped with over- heating protection which means that the motor is switched off if it overheats. The rear window wiper works again after a cooling- down period.

Select for intermittent wiping with the rear window wiper.

Select for continuous speed with the rear window wiper.

Move the right-hand steering wheel stalk switch forward to start rear window washing and wiping.

Related information Using the rain sensor (p. 170)

Using windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 172)

Using automatic rear windscreen wiping when reversing (p. 174)

Heated windscreen wiper nozzles* (p. 170)

Using the rain sensor's memory function (p. 171)

Filling washer fluid (p. 639)

Wiper blades in service position (p. 638)

Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 637)

Replacing the wiper blade, rear window (p. 636)

Using windscreen wipers (p. 169)

WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

* Option/accessory.174

Using automatic rear windscreen wiping when reversing Engaging reverse gear while the windscreen wipers are on initiates rear window wiping. The function stops when reverse gear is disengaged.

1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.

2. Press My Car Wipers.

3. Select Auto Rear Wiper to activate/deacti- vate wiping when reversing.

If the rear window wiper is already on at continu- ous speed, no change is made.

Related information Using the rain sensor (p. 170)

Using windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 172)

Heated windscreen wiper nozzles* (p. 170)

Using the rain sensor's memory function (p. 171)

Using the rear window wiper and washer (p. 173)

Filling washer fluid (p. 639)

Wiper blades in service position (p. 638)

Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 637)

Replacing the wiper blade, rear window (p. 636)

Using windscreen wipers (p. 169)

SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

* Option/accessory.176

Manual front seat The car's front seats have different setting options for optimum seating comfort.

Raise/lower the front edge of the seat cush- ion* by pumping up/down.1

Change the length* of the seat cushion by pulling the lever up and moving the seat cushion forward/backward by hand.

Adjust the seat forward/backward by lifting the handle and adjusting the distance to the steering wheel and pedals. Check that the seat is locked after the position has been adjusted.

Change the lumbar support* by pressing the button upward/downward/forward/back.

Raise/lower the seat by means of adjusting the control up/down.

Change the backrest inclination by turning the control knob.

WARNING

Adjust the position of the driver's seat before setting off, never while driving. Make sure that the seat is in locked position in order to avoid personal injury in the event of heavy braking or an accident.

Related information Power front seat* (p. 177)

Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 177)

Storing memory function in power operated front seat* (p. 178)

Using stored memory in a powered front seat (p. 179)

Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat (p. 180)

Adjusting the length of the seat cushion in the front seat (p. 181)

Massage settings in the front seat* (p. 179)

Adjusting the side support* in the front seat (p. 181)

Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front seat (p. 182)

Adjusting the passenger seat from the driv- er's seat* (p. 183)

1 Only applies to the driver's seat.

SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

}}

* Option/accessory. 177

Power front seat* The car's front seats have different setting options for optimum seating comfort. The power seat can be moved forwards/backwards and upwards/downwards. The front edge of the seat cushion can be raised/lowered as well as adjusted in length* and the backrest inclination can be changed. The lumbar support can be adjusted upward/downward/forward/backward.

The power seats have overload protection which is tripped if a seat is blocked by an object. If this happens, remove the object and then operate the seat again.

The seat can be adjusted for a period of time after unlocking the door without the engine run- ning. Seat adjustment can always be performed when the engine is running. Adjustment can also be performed for a period of time after the engine has been switched off.

Related information Manual front seat (p. 176)

Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 177)

Storing memory function in power operated front seat* (p. 178)

Using stored memory in a powered front seat (p. 179)

Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat (p. 180)

Adjusting the length of the seat cushion in the front seat (p. 181)

Massage settings in the front seat* (p. 179)

Adjusting the side support* in the front seat (p. 181)

Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front seat (p. 182)

Adjusting the passenger seat from the driv- er's seat* (p. 183)

Adjusting the power front seat* Set to desired sitting position using the control on the front seat's seating section. To activate the multi-function control and set the various comfort functions, turn the control upwards/ downwards.

To activate the multi-function control and set the various comfort functions, turn the con- trol* upwards/downwards.

Raise/lower the seat cushion front edge by adjusting the control up/down.

Raise/lower the seat by means of adjusting the control up/down.

Move the seat forward/backward by adjust- ing the control forward/backward.

Change the backrest inclination by adjusting the control forward/backward.

||

SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

* Option/accessory.178

Only one movement (forward/back/up/down) can be made at a time.

The backrests of the front seats cannot be low- ered fully forward.

Related information Manual front seat (p. 176)

Power front seat* (p. 177)

Storing memory function in power operated front seat* (p. 178)

Using stored memory in a powered front seat (p. 179)

Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat (p. 180)

Adjusting the length of the seat cushion in the front seat (p. 181)

Massage settings in the front seat* (p. 179)

Adjusting the side support* in the front seat (p. 181)

Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front seat (p. 182)

Adjusting the passenger seat from the driv- er's seat* (p. 183)

Storing memory function in power operated front seat* The memory function stores settings for the seat, door mirrors, and head-up display*.

It is possible to store two different settings with the memory function. The memory function key- pad is located either on one front door or both*.

Button M for storing settings.

Memory button

Memory button

Store setting 1. Adjust seat, door mirrors and head-up display

to the desired position.

2. Press and hold the M button depressed. The light indicator in the button illuminates.

3. Within three seconds, press and hold the 1 or 2 button.

> When the position has been stored in the selected memory button an acoustic sig- nal sounds and the light indicator in the M button extinguishes.

If none of the memory buttons is depressed within three seconds then the M button extin- guishes and no storing takes place.

The seat must be adjusted again before a new memory can be set.

Related information Manual front seat (p. 176)

Power front seat* (p. 177)

Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 177)

Using stored memory in a powered front seat (p. 179)

Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat (p. 180)

Adjusting the length of the seat cushion in the front seat (p. 181)

Massage settings in the front seat* (p. 179)

Adjusting the side support* in the front seat (p. 181)

Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front seat (p. 182)

Adjusting the passenger seat from the driv- er's seat* (p. 183)

SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

}}

* Option/accessory. 179

Using stored memory in a powered front seat The memory function stores settings for the seat, door mirrors, and head-up display*.

Using a stored setting A stored setting can be used with the front door either open or closed:

Open front door Depress one of the memory buttons 1 or 2

with a short press. Seat, door mirrors and head-up display move and then stop at the positions stored in the selected memory but- ton.

Closed front door Hold one of the memory buttons 1 or 2

depressed until seat, door mirrors and head- up display stop in the positions that are stored in the selected memory button.

If the memory button is released, the movement of the seat, door mirrors and head-up display will be stopped.

WARNING

Because the driver's seat can be adjusted with the ignition off, children should never be left unattended in the vehicle.

Movement of the seat can be STOPPED at any time by pressing any button on the power seat control panel.

Do not adjust the seat while driving.

Make sure there is nothing under the seats when they are being adjusted.

Related information Manual front seat (p. 176)

Power front seat* (p. 177)

Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 177)

Storing memory function in power operated front seat* (p. 178)

Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat (p. 180)

Adjusting the length of the seat cushion in the front seat (p. 181)

Massage settings in the front seat* (p. 179)

Adjusting the side support* in the front seat (p. 181)

Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front seat (p. 182)

Adjusting the passenger seat from the driv- er's seat* (p. 183)

Massage settings in the front seat* Both the multi-function control* on the seat and the centre display can be used in order to change the settings. The range of settings is shown in the centre display.

Multi-function control, located on the side of the seat's seating section.

Settings for massage The following setting options are available for massage:

On/Off: Select On/Off in order to switch on/off the massage function.

Programs 1-5: There are 5 preset massage programs. Select between Swell, Tread, Advanced, Lumbar and Shoulder.

Intensity: Select between Low, Normal and High.

Speed: Select between Slow, Normal and Fast.

||

SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

* Option/accessory.180

Restarting massage The massage function is deactivated automati- cally after 20 minutes. Reactivation of the func- tion is performed manually.

Tap on Restart, which is shown in the centre display, to restart the selected massage pro- gram.

> The massage program restarts. If no action is taken, the message remains shown in the top view.

Related information Manual front seat (p. 176)

Power front seat* (p. 177)

Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 177)

Storing memory function in power operated front seat* (p. 178)

Using stored memory in a powered front seat (p. 179)

Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat (p. 180)

Adjusting the length of the seat cushion in the front seat (p. 181)

Adjusting the side support* in the front seat (p. 181)

Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front seat (p. 182)

Adjusting the passenger seat from the driv- er's seat* (p. 183)

Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat Both the multi-function control on the seat and the centre display can be used in order to change the settings. The range of settings is shown in the centre display*.

Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat The front seat has massage in the backrest. The massage is performed by air cushions that can massage with different settings.

The massage function can only be activated when the car's engine is running.

1. Activate the multi-function control by turning the control upward/downward. The seat set- tings view will be shown on the centre dis- play.

2. Select Massage in the seat settings view.

3. To choose between the different massage functions, select either directly in the touch screen or by moving the cursor up/down using the multi-function control's upper/ lower button. Change the setting in the selected function by selecting directly in the touch screen or by pressing the arrows, or by using the multi-function control's front/rear button.

Related information Manual front seat (p. 176)

Power front seat* (p. 177)

Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 177)

Storing memory function in power operated front seat* (p. 178)

Using stored memory in a powered front seat (p. 179)

Adjusting the length of the seat cushion in the front seat (p. 181)

Massage settings in the front seat* (p. 179)

Adjusting the side support* in the front seat (p. 181)

Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front seat (p. 182)

Adjusting the passenger seat from the driv- er's seat* (p. 183)

SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

}}

* Option/accessory. 181

Adjusting the length of the seat cushion in the front seat Both the multi-function control* on the seat and the centre display can be used in order to change the settings. The range of settings is shown in the centre display.

Multi-function control, located on the side of the seat's seating section.

To activate the multi-function control, turn the control upwards/downward.

Adjusting the seat cushion Seat cushion length can be adjusted by using the multi-function control on the seat.

1. Activate the multi-function control by turning the control upward/downward. The seat set- tings view will be shown on the centre dis- play.

2. Select Cushion extension in the seat set- tings view.

Press the front section of the four-way button (round) to extend the seat cushion.

Press the rear section of the four-way button to retract the seat cushion.

Related information Manual front seat (p. 176)

Power front seat* (p. 177)

Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 177)

Storing memory function in power operated front seat* (p. 178)

Using stored memory in a powered front seat (p. 179)

Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat (p. 180)

Massage settings in the front seat* (p. 179)

Adjusting the side support* in the front seat (p. 181)

Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front seat (p. 182)

Adjusting the passenger seat from the driv- er's seat* (p. 183)

Adjusting the side support* in the front seat Both the multi-function control* on the seat and the centre display can be used in order to change the settings. The range of settings is shown in the centre display.

Multi-function control, located on the side of the seat's seating section.

The sides of the backrest can be adjusted to pro- vide side support.

To adjust the side support:

1. Activate the multi-function control by turning

the control upwards/downwards . The seat settings view will be shown in the centre display.

||

SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

* Option/accessory.182

2. Select Side bolsters in the seat settings view.

Press the front section of the four-way

button to increase side support .

Press the rear section of the four-way button to decrease side support.

Related information Manual front seat (p. 176)

Power front seat* (p. 177)

Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 177)

Storing memory function in power operated front seat* (p. 178)

Using stored memory in a powered front seat (p. 179)

Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat (p. 180)

Adjusting the length of the seat cushion in the front seat (p. 181)

Massage settings in the front seat* (p. 179)

Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front seat (p. 182)

Adjusting the passenger seat from the driv- er's seat* (p. 183)

Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front seat Activate the multi-function control* by turning the control upwards/downwards. The seat settings view will be shown on the centre display.

Multi-function control, located on the side of the seat's seating section.

4-way lumbar support provides options to adjust the lumbar support. Use it by pressing the four- way button located on the side of the seat's seat- ing section. The lumbar support can be adjusted forwards/backwards and upwards/downwards.

Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front seat To adjust the lumbar support:

1. Activate the multi-function control by turning the control upward/downward. The seat set- tings view will be shown on the centre dis- play.

2. Select Lumbar in the seat settings view.

Press the four-way button (round) upwards/downwards to move the lumbar support upwards/downwards.

Press the front section of the four-way button to increase lumbar support.

Press the rear section of the four-way button to decrease lumbar support.

Related information Manual front seat (p. 176)

Power front seat* (p. 177)

Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 177)

Storing memory function in power operated front seat* (p. 178)

Using stored memory in a powered front seat (p. 179)

Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat (p. 180)

Adjusting the length of the seat cushion in the front seat (p. 181)

Massage settings in the front seat* (p. 179)

SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

}}

* Option/accessory. 183

Adjusting the side support* in the front seat (p. 181)

Adjusting the passenger seat from the driv- er's seat* (p. 183)

Adjusting the passenger seat from the driver's seat* The front passenger seat can be adjusted from the driver's seat.

Activating the function The function is activated via the function view in the centre display:

Press the Adjust Passenger Seat button to activate.

Adjust passenger seat From activation of the function, the driver must adjust the passenger seat within 10 seconds. If no adjustment is made within this time the func- tion is deactivated.

The driver adjusts the passenger seat using the controls on the driver's seat:

Move the passenger seat forward/backward by adjusting the control forward/backward.

Change the passenger seat's backrest incli- nation by adjusting the control forward/back- ward.

Related information Manual front seat (p. 176)

Power front seat* (p. 177)

Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 177)

Storing memory function in power operated front seat* (p. 178)

Using stored memory in a powered front seat (p. 179)

Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat (p. 180)

Adjusting the length of the seat cushion in the front seat (p. 181)

SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

* Option/accessory.184

Massage settings in the front seat* (p. 179)

Adjusting the side support* in the front seat (p. 181)

Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front seat (p. 182)

Lowering the backrests in the rear seat The rear seat's backrest is divided into two parts. The two parts can be folded forward indi- vidually.

WARNING

Adjust the seat and fix it before driving away. Take care when adjusting the seat. Uncontrolled or careless adjustment can lead to trapping injuries.

When loading long objects, they must always be strapped in securely to avoid injury and damage during sudden braking.

Always switch off the engine and apply the parking brake when loading and unloading the car.

For cars with automatic gearbox, set the gear selector in P to prevent it from being moved by mistake.

IMPORTANT

There must be no objects on the rear seat when the backrest is to be folded down. The seat belts must not be connected either. Oth- erwise there is a risk of damaging the rear seat upholstery.

IMPORTANT

The armrest* for the centre seat must be raised before lowering the seat.

If the car has private locking, the tailgate must be closed before lowering the seat.

NOTE

The front seats may need to be pushed for- wards, and/or the backrests adjusted upwards, in order that the rear backrests can be fully folded forward.

SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

}}

* Option/accessory. 185

Lowering the backrest

Car with electronic folding

If the car is equipped with electronic folding of the rear seat* there are buttons located in the cargo area. The backrests can also be lowered manually.

WARNING

Pay attention that people are not at risk of being trapped during the automatic folding of the rear seat. Since this takes place automati- cally on the press of a button, no one must be on or too close to the rear seat.

To facilitate folding of the rear seat, the car must be stationary and the tailgate open.

For electronically controlled folding of backrests:

1. Ensure that there are no occupants or objects in the rear seat.

2. Lower the centre seat's head restraint man- ually.

3. Hold the button for folding depressed. The buttons are marked L and R for left and right-hand backrest sections respectively.

4. The backrests are lowered automatically to horizontal position. The head restraints are also lowered automatically.

To lower the backrest manually:

1. Lower the centre head restraint manually .

2. Pull the handles located in the car's left and

right-hand rear seat backrests forward .

3. The backrest disengages from the lock and is automatically lowered to the horizontal position.

||

SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

186

Car without electronic folding The rear seat consists of two parts:

The right-hand seat and centre seat are folded as one unit.

The left-hand seat is folded separately.

If the right-hand section is being lowered - release and adjust the centre backrest head restraint.

Pull up the backrest's locking handle while folding the backrest forward at the same time. The locking handle for the head restraints is pulled up automatically when the backrest is folded. A red indicator on the lock

catch shows that the backrest is no longer locked in place.

NOTE

When the backrests have been lowered, the head restraints may need to be moved for- ward slightly so as not to make contact with the seat cushion.

Raising takes place in reverse order.

WARNING

When the backrest has been raised, the red indicator should no longer be showing. If it is still showing then the backrest is not locked in place.

WARNING

Check that the backrests and head restraints in the rear seat are locked properly after being folded up.

The head restraints of the outer seats must always be raised when there are passengers on any of the rear seats.

Raising the backrest Raising the backrest to upright position is carried out manually:

1. Move the backrest up/down manually.

2. Press the backrest until the lock engages.

3. The head restraint is raised manually.

4. If necessary, raise the centre seat's head restraint.

Related information Adjusting the head restraints in the rear seat

(p. 187)

SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

}}

* Option/accessory. 187

Adjusting the head restraints in the rear seat Adjust the centre seat head restraint according to the height of the passenger. Fold down the outer seat head restraints to improve rearward visibility.

Adjusting the head restraint, centre seat

The centre seat's head restraint must be adjusted according to the passenger's height so that, if possible, the whole of the back of the head is covered. Slide it up manually as required.

To lower the head restraint, the button (see illus- tration) must be depressed while the restraint is carefully moved down.

WARNING

The centre seat head restraint must be in its lowest position when the centre seat is not used. When the centre seat is used, the head restraint must be correctly adjusted to the height of the passenger so that it covers the whole of the back of the head if possible.

Electrical lowering of the rear seat's outer head restraints*

The outer head restraints can be retracted via the centre display's function view. You can lower the head restraints in ignition position 0.

||

SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

* Option/accessory.188

Press the Headrest Fold but- ton to activate/deactivate low- ering.

Move the head restraint back manually until a click is heard.

WARNING

Do not lower the outer head restraints if there are passengers in any of the outer rear seats.

WARNING

The head restraint must be in locked position after being folded up.

Manual lowering of the outer head restraints, rear seat For cars with electric rear seat folding*, the outer head restraints are folded manually with the con-

trol on the upper side of the seat; see figure . For cars without electric folding, fold down the outer head restraints with the inner control on the

upper side of the seat; see figure . Related information Lowering the backrests in the rear seat

(p. 184)

Steering wheel controls and horn The steering wheel houses the horn and con- trols for e.g. the driver support systems and voice recognition.

Keypads and paddles* in the steering wheel.

Controls for driver support systems2.

Paddle shifter* for manual gear changing in an automatic gearbox.

Controls for voice recognition, head-up dis- play settings, and menu, message and phone handling.

2 Speed Limiter*, Cruise Control, Adaptive Cruise Control*, Distance Warning* and Pilot Assist*.

SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

}}

189

Horn

The horn is located in the centre of the steering wheel.

Related information Steering lock (p. 189)

Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 189)

Steering lock The steering lock makes steering difficult if the car is e.g. taken unlawfully. A mechanical noise can be perceived when the steering lock locks or unlocks.

Activating the steering lock The steering lock is activated when the car is locked from the outside and the engine is switched off. If the car is left unlocked then the steering lock will lock automatically after a while.

Deactivating the steering lock The steering lock is deactivated when the car is unlocked from outside. If the car is not locked, the steering lock will deactivate if the remote control key is inside the passenger compartment and the car is started by turning the start knob clockwise to unlock the steering lock.

Related information Steering wheel controls and horn (p. 188)

Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 189)

Adjusting the steering wheel The steering wheel can be adjusted in different positions.

The steering wheel can be adjusted for height and for depth.

Steering wheel adjustment can be made in differ- ent ways depending on whether or not the car is equipped with knee airbag3.

WARNING

Adjust the steering wheel and fix it before driving away. The steering wheel must never be adjusted while driving.

With speed related power steering the level of steering force can be adjusted. Steering force is

3 The car is only equipped with knee airbag in certain markets.

||

SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

190

regulated according to the car's speed in order to give the driver enhanced road responsiveness.

With knee airbag

Lever for steering wheel adjustment.

1. Push the lever forwards to release the steer- ing wheel.

2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position that suits you.

3. Pull the lever back to fix the steering wheel in place. If the lever is stiff, press the steering wheel lightly at the same time as you move the lever back.

Without knee airbag

Lever for steering wheel adjustment.

1. Pull the lever backwards to release the steer- ing wheel.

2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position that suits you.

3. Push the lever forwards to secure the steer- ing wheel. If the lever is stiff, press the steer- ing wheel lightly at the same time as you move the lever back.

Related information Steering lock (p. 189)

Steering wheel controls and horn (p. 188)

CLIMATE

CLIMATE

* Option/accessory.192

Climate The car is equipped with electronic climate con- trol. The climate control system cools or heats as well as dehumidifies the air in the passenger compartment. All climate control system functions are con- trolled from the centre display and physical but- tons in the centre console.

Some functions for the rear seat can also be controlled from the climate controls* at the rear of the tunnel console.

Related information Climate zones (p. 192)

Climate control - sensors (p. 192)

Perceived temperature (p. 193)

Controlling climate control with voice recog- nition (p. 193)

Heater (p. 216)

Air quality (p. 194)

Air distribution (p. 197)

Climate controls (p. 203)

Climate zones The number of climate zones that the car is divi- ded into governs the options for setting different temperatures for different parts of the passenger compartment.

2-zone climate

Climate zones with 2-zone climate.

With 2-zone climate, the temperature in the pas- senger compartment can be set separately for the left and right-hand sides.

Related information Climate (p. 192)

Climate control - sensors The climate control system has a number of sen- sors to help control the climate in the car.

Sensor location

Moisture sensor - in the casing by the inte- rior rearview mirror.

Outside temperature sensor - in the right- hand door mirror.

Sun sensor - on the upper side of the instru- ment panel.

Temperature sensor for the passenger com- partment - by the physical buttons in the centre console.

NOTE

Do not cover or block the sensors with cloth- ing or other objects.

CLIMATE

}}

* Option/accessory. 193

With the Interior Air Quality System* there is also an air quality sensor that is fitted into the climate control system air intake.

Related information Climate (p. 192)

Interior Air Quality System* (p. 196)

Perceived temperature The climate control system regulates the climate in the passenger compartment based on the perceived temperature, not on actual tempera- ture.

The temperature you select in the passenger compartment corresponds to the physically per- ceived temperature as affected by factors such as the ambient temperature, air speed, humidity, solar radiation, etc. in and around the car at the time.

The system includes a sun sensor which detects on which side the sun is shining into the passen- ger compartment. This means that the tempera- ture can differ between the right and left-hand side's air vents despite the controls being set for the same temperature on both sides.

Related information Climate (p. 192)

Controlling climate control with voice recognition1

Voice recognition commands for the climate control system to e.g. change temperature, acti- vate a heated seat* or change fan level.

Press and say one of the following com- mands:

"Climate" - starts a dialogue for climate control and shows examples of commands.

"Set temperature to X degrees" - sets the desired temperature.

"Raise temperature"/"Lower temperature" - raise/lower the temperature setting one step.

"Sync temperature" - synchronises the temperature for all climate zones in the car with the temperature set for the driver's side.

"Air on feet"/"Air on body" - opens the desired air flow.

"Air on feet off"/"Air on body off" - closes the desired air flow.

"Set fan to max"/"Turn off fan" - changes the air flow to Max/Off.

"Raise fan speed"/"Lower fan speed" - raises/lowers the fan level one step.

"Turn on auto" - activates automatic climate regulation.

1 Applies to certain markets.

||

CLIMATE

* Option/accessory.194

"Air condition on"/"Air condition off" - activates/deactivates the air conditioning.

"Recirculation on"/"Recirculation off" - activates/deactivates the air circulation.

"Turn on defroster "/"Turn off defroster" - activates/deactivates defrosting of windows and door mirrors.

"Turn on max defroster"/"Turn max defroster off" - activates/deactivates the max defroster.

"Turn on electric defroster"/"Turn off electric defroster" - activates/deactivates the heated windscreen*.

"Turn on rear defroster"/"Turn off rear defroster" - activates/deactivates the heated rear window and door mirrors.

"Turn steering wheel heat on"/"Turn steering wheel heat off" - activates/deac- tivates the heated steering wheel*.

"Raise steering wheel heat"/"Lower steering wheel heat" - raises/lowers the setting for the heated steering wheel* one step.

"Turn on seat heat"/"Turn off seat heat" - activates/deactivates the heated seat*.

"Raise seat heat"/"Lower seat heat" - raises/lowers the setting for the heated seat* one step.

"Turn on seat ventilation"/"Turn off seat ventilation" - activates/deactivates the seat ventilation*.

"Raise seat ventilation"/"Lower seat ventilation" - raises/lowers the setting for the ventilated seat* one step.

Related information Climate (p. 192)

Voice recognition (p. 137)

Using voice recognition (p. 138)

Settings for voice recognition (p. 140)

Air quality The materials selected for the passenger com- partment and the air cleaning system ensure that the air quality in the passenger compartment is high.

Materials in the passenger compartment The interior of the passenger compartment is designed to be pleasant and comfortable, even for people with contact allergies and for asthma sufferers.

Tested materials have been developed in order to minimise the quantity of dust in the passenger compartment and to contribute to making the passenger compartment easier to keep clean.

The carpets in both the passenger compartment and the cargo area are removable and easy to remove and clean.

Use cleaning agents and car care products rec- ommended by Volvo to clean the interior.

Air cleaning system In addition to the passenger compartment filter, Clean Zone Interior Package* and the Interior Air Quality System* also help to maintain high air quality in the passenger compartment.

Related information Climate (p. 192)

Clean Zone* (p. 195)

CLIMATE

* Option/accessory. 195

Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 196)

Interior Air Quality System* (p. 196)

Passenger compartment filter (p. 197)

Clean Zone* The Clean Zone function checks and indicates whether or not all conditions have been met for good air quality in the passenger compartment.

The indicator is visible in the climate view in the centre display.

The indicator is visible in the climate row when the climate view is not open.

If the conditions have not been met then the Clean Zone text is white. When all conditions have been met, this is indicated by the text changing colour to blue.

Conditions that are checked:

That all doors and the tailgate are closed.

That all side windows and the panorama roof* are closed.

That the air quality system Interior Air Quality System* is activated.

That the ventilation fan is activated.

That the air recirculation is deactivated.

NOTE

Clean Zone does not indicate that the air quality is good. It only indicates that the con- ditions for good air quality have been met.

Related information Air quality (p. 194)

Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 196)

Interior Air Quality System* (p. 196)

Passenger compartment filter (p. 197)

CLIMATE

* Option/accessory.196

Clean Zone Interior Package* Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP) comprises a series of modifications that keep the passen- ger compartment even clearer from allergy and asthma-inducing substances.

The following is included:

An enhanced fan function that means that the fan starts when the car is unlocked with the remote control key. The fan fills the pas- senger compartment with fresh air. The func- tion starts when required and is disengaged automatically after a time or when one of the passenger compartment doors is opened. The amount of time the fan runs is reduced gradually due to reduced need up until the car is 4 years old.

The fully automatic air quality system Interior Air Quality System (IAQS).

Related information Air quality (p. 194)

Clean Zone* (p. 195)

Interior Air Quality System* (p. 196)

Passenger compartment filter (p. 197)

Interior Air Quality System* Interior Air Quality System (IAQS) is a fully auto- matic air quality system that separates gases and particles to reduce the levels of odours and contaminants in the passenger compartment. IAQS is a part of the Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP) and cleans the air in the passen- ger compartment from contaminants such as par- ticles, hydrocarbons, nitrous oxides and ground- level ozone.

If the air quality sensor senses that the outside air is contaminated, the air intake is closed and air recirculation is activated.

NOTE

The air quality sensor must always be enabled to ensure the best air in the passenger com- partment.

In a cold climate recirculation is limited so as to prevent misting.

In the event of misting, the defrost functions for windscreen, side windows and rear win- dow should be used.

Related information Activating and deactivating the air quality

sensor* (p. 197)

Air quality (p. 194)

Clean Zone* (p. 195)

Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 196)

Passenger compartment filter (p. 197)

CLIMATE

}}

* Option/accessory. 197

Activating and deactivating the air quality sensor* The air quality sensor is part of the fully auto- matic air quality system Interior Air Quality System (IAQS). It is possible to set whether the air quality sensor should be activated/deactivated.

1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.

2. Press Climate.

3. Select Air Quality Sensor to activate/deac- tivate the air quality sensor.

Related information Interior Air Quality System* (p. 196)

Passenger compartment filter All air entering the car's passenger compartment is cleaned with a filter.

Replacing the passenger compartment filter To maintain high climate system performance, the filter must be changed at regular intervals. Follow the Volvo Service Programme for the rec- ommended replacement intervals. If the car is used in a severely contaminated environment, it may be necessary to replace the filter more often.

NOTE

There are different types of passenger com- partment filter. Make sure that the correct fil- ter is fitted.

Related information Air quality (p. 194)

Clean Zone* (p. 195)

Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 196)

Interior Air Quality System* (p. 196)

Air distribution The climate control system distributes the incoming air via a number of different vents in the passenger compartment.

Automatic and manual air distribution With auto-regulated climate control running the air distribution takes place automatically. If nec- essary, the air distribution can be controlled man- ually.

Adjustable air vents Some of the air vents in the car are adjustable, which means that you can open/close the vent to aim the air flow.

Location of adjustable air vents in the passenger com- partment.

Four on the instrument panel and one on each of the door pillars between the front and rear doors.

||

CLIMATE

198

Related information Climate (p. 192)

Changing air distribution (p. 198)

Opening, closing and aiming the air vents (p. 199)

Table of air distribution options (p. 200)

Changing air distribution The air distribution can be changed manually if required.

The air distribution buttons in the climate view.

Air distribution - windscreen defroster vents

Air distribution - air vents in instrument panel and centre console

Air distribution - air vents in the floor

1. Open the climate view in the centre display.

2. Press one or more of the air distribution but- tons in order to open/close the correspond- ing air flow.

> The air distribution is changed and the buttons illuminate/extinguish.

Related information Air distribution (p. 197)

Opening, closing and aiming the air vents (p. 199)

Table of air distribution options (p. 200)

CLIMATE

199

Opening, closing and aiming the air vents Some air vents in the passenger compartment can be opened, closed and aimed individually. If the car's outer vents are aimed at the side win- dows then misting can be eliminated.

If the car's outer vents are aimed inwards then, in a hot climate, a comfortable environment is obtained in the passenger compartment.

Opening and closing the air vents Air vents for the front seat:

Air vent knob2.

Turn the knob in order to open/close the air flow from the vent.

The air flow is at maximum when the marking on the knob is in vertical position.

Air vents for the rear seat:

The air vent's thumbwheel2.

Roll the thumbwheel in order to open/close the air flow from the nozzle.

The longer the white lines on the thumb- wheel that are visible, the higher the air flow.

Aiming the air vents

The air vent's lever2.

Move the lever sideways/vertically in order to aim the air flow from the nozzle.

Related information Air distribution (p. 197)

Changing air distribution (p. 198)

Table of air distribution options (p. 200)

2 The illustration is schematic - nozzle design varies depending on location.

CLIMATE

200

Table of air distribution options The air distribution can be changed manually if required. The following options are available for setting.

Air distribution Purpose

If all air distribution buttons are deselected in manual mode, the climate control system returns to automatically regulated climate control.

Main air flow from the defroster vents. Some air flows from other air vents. Counteracts misting and icing in a cold and humid climate (to achieve this, fan level must not be low).

Main air flow from the air vents in the instrument panel. Some air flows from other air vents.

Provides efficient cooling in a hot climate.

Main air flow from the air vents at the floor. Some air flows from other air vents.

Provides heat or cooling to the floor.

CLIMATE

}}

201

Air distribution Purpose

Main air from the defroster vents and air vents in the instrument panel. Some air flows from other air vents.

Provides good comfort in hot and dry climates.

Main air flow from the defroster vents and air vents at the floor. Some air flows from other air vents.

Provides good comfort and good demisting in a cold or humid climate.

Main air flow from the air vents in the instrument panel and air vents at the floor. Some air flows from other air vents.

Provides good comfort in sunny weather with cool outdoor temperatures.

Main air flow from the defroster vents, from the air vents in the instrument panel and air vents at the floor.

Gives balanced comfort in the passenger compartment.

||

CLIMATE

202

Related information Air distribution (p. 197)

Opening, closing and aiming the air vents (p. 199)

Changing air distribution (p. 198)

CLIMATE

}}

* Option/accessory. 203

Climate controls The climate control system's functions are con- trolled from physical buttons in the centre con- sole, the centre display and the climate controls at the rear of the tunnel console*.

Physical buttons in centre console

Button for heated windscreen* and max defroster.

Button for heated rear window and door mir- rors.

Climate row in centre display The most common climate functions can be regulated from the climate row.

Temperature controls for driver and passen- ger side.

Controls for heated* and ventilated* driver and front passenger seat, as well as heated steering wheel*.

Button for access to the climate view. The graphic on the button shows activated cli- mate settings.

Climate view in centre display One tap on the centre button in the climate row gives access to the climate view. The climate view is divided into the tabs:

Main climate

Parking climate

Change between the tabs by swiping left/right or by pressing the respective heading.

Main climate In addition to the climate row's functions, other main climate functions can also be controlled in the Main climate tab.

Max, Electric, Rear - Controls for defrosting the windows and door mirrors.

AC - Controls for air conditioning.

Recirc - Controls for air recirculation.

Controls for air distribution.

||

CLIMATE

* Option/accessory.204

Fan control.

AUTO - Auto regulating the climate.

Parking climate The car's parking climate control can be regula- ted in the Parking climate tab.

Climate controls at rear of tunnel console* If the car is equipped with heated rear seats* there are physical buttons at the rear of the tun- nel console for controlling them.

Related information Climate (p. 192)

Activating and deactivating heated front seat* (p. 204)

Activating and deactivating heated rear seat* (p. 205)

Activating and deactivating ventilated front seat* (p. 206)

Activating and deactivating the heated steer- ing wheel* (p. 207)

Activating auto climate control (p. 208)

Activating and deactivating air recirculation (p. 208)

Activating and deactivating max defroster (p. 209)

Activating and deactivating the heated wind- screen* (p. 211)

Activating and deactivating the heated rear window and door mirrors (p. 212)

Regulating fan level for front seat (p. 213)

Synchronising temperature (p. 214)

Activating and deactivating air conditioning (p. 215)

Activating and deactivating heated front seat* The seats can be heated in order to increase comfort for driver and passengers when it is cold.

Steering wheel and seat buttons in the climate row.

1. Press the left or right-hand side's steering wheel and seat button in the climate row in the centre display in order to open the con- trols for seat and steering wheel.

If the car is not equipped with ventilated seats or heated steering wheel, the button for heated seats is immediately available in the climate row.

CLIMATE

}}

* Option/accessory. 205

2. Repeatedly press the button for heated seats in order to change between the four levels: Off, High, Medium and Low.

> The level changes and the button shows the set level.

WARNING

Heated seats must not be used by people who find it difficult to perceive an increase in temperature due to a lack of sensation or who otherwise have problems operating the con- trols for the heated seats. Otherwise they may suffer burn injuries.

Related information Climate controls (p. 203)

Activating and deactivating automatic start of heated front seat* (p. 205)

Activating and deactivating automatic start of heated front seat* The seats can be heated in order to increase comfort for driver and passengers when it is cold. It is possible to set whether automatic start of heated seats should be activated/deactivated when the engine is started. With automatic start activated, heating will start in the event of low ambient temperature.

1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.

2. Press Climate.

3. Select Auto Driver Seat Heating Level and Auto Passenger Seat Heating Level to activate/deactivate automatic start of heated driver's and passenger seat.

4. Select Low, Medium or High to select level after the function has been activated.

Related information Climate controls (p. 203)

Activating and deactivating heated front seat* (p. 204)

Activating and deactivating heated rear seat* The seats can be heated in order to increase comfort for driver and passengers when it is cold.

Activating and deactivating the heated rear seat from the rear seat

Buttons for heated seats at the rear of the tunnel con- sole.

Press repeatedly on the left or right-hand side's physical buttons for heated seats at the rear of the tunnel console to switch between the four levels: Off, High, Medium and Low.

> The level changes and the LEDs in the button show the set level.

||

CLIMATE

* Option/accessory.206

WARNING

Heated seats must not be used by people who find it difficult to perceive an increase in temperature due to a lack of sensation or who otherwise have problems operating the con- trols for the heated seats. Otherwise they may suffer burn injuries.

Related information Climate controls (p. 203)

Activating and deactivating ventilated front seat* The seats can be ventilated to provide increased comfort in a hot climate, for example. The ventilation system consists of fans in the seats and backrests that draw air through the seat upholstery. The cooling effect increases the cooler the passenger compartment air becomes. The system can be activated when the engine is running.

Steering wheel and seat buttons in the climate row.

1. Press the left or right-hand side's steering wheel and seat button in the climate row in the centre display in order to open the con- trols for seat and steering wheel.

If the car is not equipped with heated seats or heated steering wheel, the button for ven- tilated seats is immediately available in the climate row.

2. Repeatedly press the button for ventilated seats in order to change between the four levels: Off, High, Medium and Low.

> The level changes and the button shows the set level.

Related information Climate controls (p. 203)

CLIMATE

* Option/accessory. 207

Activating and deactivating the heated steering wheel* The steering wheel can be heated in order to increase comfort for the driver when it is cold.

Steering wheel and seat buttons in the climate row.

1. Press the driver's side steering wheel and seat button in the climate row of the centre display in order to open the controls for seat and steering wheel.

If the car is not equipped with heated seats or ventilated seats, the button for heated steering wheel is immediately available in the climate row.

2. Repeatedly press the button for heated steering wheel in order to change between the four levels: Off, High, Medium and Low.

> The level changes and the button shows the set level.

Related information Climate controls (p. 203)

Activating and deactivating automatic start of heated steering wheel* (p. 207)

Activating and deactivating automatic start of heated steering wheel* The steering wheel can be heated in order to increase comfort for the driver when it is cold. It is possible to set whether automatic start of heated steering wheel should be activated/deac- tivated when the engine is started. With auto- matic start activated, heating will start in the event of low ambient temperature.

1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.

2. Press Climate.

3. Select Auto Steering Wheel Heating Level to activate/deactivate automatic start of heated steering wheel.

4. Select Low, Medium or High to select level after the function has been activated.

Related information Activating and deactivating the heated steer-

ing wheel* (p. 207)

CLIMATE

208

Activating auto climate control With auto climate control activated, multiple cli- mate functions are controlled automatically.

Auto-regulation button in the climate view.

1. Open the climate view in the centre display.

2. Give a short or long press on AUTO.

Short press - air recirculation, air condi- tioning and air distribution are controlled automatically.

Long press - air recirculation, air condi- tioning and air distribution are controlled automatically, temperature and fan speed are changed to standard settings: 22 C (72 F) and level 3.

> Auto-regulation of the climate is activated and the button illuminates.

NOTE

Temperature and fan speed can be changed without deactivating the automatically-regula- ted climate control system. The automatically- regulated climate control system is deacti- vated when the air distribution is changed manually or when maximum defroster is acti- vated.

Related information Climate controls (p. 203)

Activating and deactivating air recirculation Air recirculation shuts out bad air, exhaust gases, etc. from outside the car by the climate control system reusing the air in the passenger compartment.

The air recirculation button in the climate view.

1. Open the climate view in the centre display.

2. Press Recirc.

> Air recirculation is activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes.

IMPORTANT

If the air in the car is recirculated for too long then there is a risk of misting on the insides of the windows.

CLIMATE

}}

* Option/accessory. 209

NOTE

It is not possible to activate air recirculation when max defroster is activated.

Related information Climate controls (p. 203)

Activating and deactivating time setting for air recirculation (p. 209)

Activating and deactivating time setting for air recirculation Air recirculation shuts out bad air, exhaust gases, etc. from outside the car by the climate control system reusing the air in the passenger compartment. It is possible set whether the air recirculation timer should be activated/deactivated. When the timer is activated, air recirculation is automatically switched off after 20 minutes.

1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.

2. Press Climate.

3. Select Recirculation Timer to activate/ deactivate the air recirculation timer.

Related information Activating and deactivating air recirculation

(p. 208)

Activating and deactivating max defroster Max defroster is used to quickly remove mist and ice from windows.

Activating and deactivating max defroster from centre console There is a physical button in the centre console for quick access to max defroster.

With heated windscreen* the max defroster can only be activated individually from the climate view in the centre display.

Physical button in the centre console.

Cars without heated windscreen:

Press the button.

> Max defroster is activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes.

||

CLIMATE

210

Cars with heated windscreen:

Press the button repeatedly in order to switch between the three levels:

Activated heated windscreen

Activated heated windscreen and max defroster

Deactivated.

> Heated windscreen and max defroster are activated/deactivated and the button illu- minates/extinguishes.

NOTE

Max defroster starts with a certain delay in order to avoid a short increase in fan level if the heated windscreen is deactivated by two quick presses of the button.

Activating and deactivating max defroster from centre display

Max defroster button in the climate view.

1. Open the climate view in the centre display.

2. Press Max.

> Max defroster is activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes.

Max defroster deactivates auto-regulation of the climate and air recirculation, acti- vates air conditioning and changes the fan level to 5 and the temperature to HI.

When max defroster is deactivated, the climate control system returns to the pre- vious settings.

NOTE

Changing the fan level to 5 increases the noise level.

Related information Climate controls (p. 203)

CLIMATE

* Option/accessory. 211

Activating and deactivating the heated windscreen* A heated windscreen is used to quickly remove mist and ice from the window.

Activating and deactivating heated windscreen from centre console In the centre console is a physical button for rapid access to the heated windscreen.

Physical button in the centre console.

Press the button repeatedly in order to switch between the three levels:

Activated heated windscreen

Activated heated windscreen and max defroster

Deactivated.

> Heated windscreen and max defroster are activated/deactivated and the button illu- minates/extinguishes.

Activating and deactivating heated windscreen from centre display

The button for heated windscreen in the climate view.

1. Open the climate view in the centre display.

2. Press Electric.

> Heated windscreen is activated/deacti- vated and the button illuminates/extin- guishes.

NOTE

A triangular area at the end of each side of the windscreen is not electrically heated, where de-icing may take longer.

NOTE

The heated windscreen may affect the per- formance of transponders and other commu- nication equipment.

Related information Climate controls (p. 203)

Activating and deactivating automatic start of heated windscreen* (p. 212)

CLIMATE

* Option/accessory.212

Activating and deactivating automatic start of heated windscreen* A heated windscreen is used to quickly remove mist and ice from the window. It is possible to set whether automatic start of heated windscreen should be activated/deacti- vated when the engine is started. With automatic start activated, heating will start when there is a risk of ice or misting on the windscreen/window. The heating switches off automatically when the windscreen/window is sufficiently warm and the ice or misting is gone.

1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.

2. Press Climate.

3. Select Auto Front Defroster to activate/ deactivate automatic start of heated wind- screen.

Related information Activating and deactivating the heated wind-

screen* (p. 211)

Activating and deactivating the heated rear window and door mirrors The heated rear window and door mirrors are used to quickly remove mist and ice from the windows and mirrors.

Activating and deactivating heated rear window and door mirrors from centre console In the centre console is a physical button for rapid access to the heated rear window and door mirrors.

Physical button in the centre console.

Press the button.

> Heated rear window and door mirrors are activated/deactivated and the button illu- minates/extinguishes.

Activating and deactivating heated rear window and door mirrors from centre display

The button for heated rear window and door mirrors in the climate view.

1. Open the climate view in the centre display.

2. Press Rear.

> Heated rear window and door mirrors are activated/deactivated and the button illu- minates/extinguishes.

Related information Climate controls (p. 203)

Activating and deactivating automatic star- ting of the heated rear window and door mir- rors (p. 213)

CLIMATE

213

Activating and deactivating automatic starting of the heated rear window and door mirrors The heated rear window and door mirrors are used to quickly remove mist and ice from the windows and mirrors. It is possible to set whether automatic start of heated rear window and door mirrors should be activated/deactivated when the engine is started. With automatic start activated, heating will start when there is a risk of ice or misting on the wind- screen/window. The heating switches off auto- matically when the windscreen/window is suffi- ciently warm and the ice or misting is gone.

1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.

2. Press Climate.

3. Select Auto Rear Defroster to activate/ deactivate automatic start of heated rear window and door mirrors.

Related information Activating and deactivating the heated rear

window and door mirrors (p. 212)

Regulating fan level for front seat3

The fan can be set to several different automati- cally controlled fan speeds for the front seat.

Fan control buttons in the climate view.

1. Open the climate view in the centre display.

2. Tap on the desired fan level, Off, 1-5 or Max.

> Fan level is changed and the buttons for the selected level illuminate.

IMPORTANT

If the fan is fully switched off then the air con- ditioning is not engaged, which results in a risk of misting on the insides of the windows.

NOTE

The climate control system automatically adjusts the air flow within the selected fan level based on requirements. This means that the fan speed may change even though the fan level is the same.

Related information Climate controls (p. 203)

3 For 2-zone climate, also rear seat.

CLIMATE

214

Regulating temperature for front seat4

The temperature can be set to the desired num- ber of degrees for the front seat's climate zones.

Temperature buttons in the climate row.

1. Press the left or right-hand side temperature button in the centre display's climate row to open the controls.

Temperature control.

2. Regulate the temperature by either of the following:

drag the control to the desired tempera- ture, or

press +/ to raise/lower the temperature gradually.

> The temperature changes and the button shows the set temperature.

NOTE

Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by selecting a higher or lower temperature than the actual desired temperature.

Related information Climate controls (p. 203)

Synchronising temperature The temperature in the car's different climate zones can be synchronised with the temperature set on the driver's side.

Synchronisation button on the driver's side temperature controls.

1. Press the driver's side temperature button in the centre display's climate row in order to open the controls.

2. Press Synchronise temperature.

> The temperature for all zones in the car is synchronised with the temperature set for the driver's side and the synchronisation symbol is shown adjacent to the tempera- ture button.

The synchronisation is stopped by means of a further press on Synchronise temperature or

4 For 2-zone climate, also rear seat.

CLIMATE

* Option/accessory. 215

by means of changing the temperature settings for a climate zone other than the driver's.

Related information Climate controls (p. 203)

Activating and deactivating air conditioning The air conditioning cools and dehumidifies incoming air as required.

The air conditioning button in the climate view.

1. Open the climate view in the centre display.

2. Press AC.

> The air conditioning is activated/deacti- vated and the button illuminates/extin- guishes.

When the air conditioning is activated, the climate control system automatically con- trols starting and switching off as required.

NOTE

Close all side windows and the panoramic roof* for air conditioning to work optimally.

NOTE

It is not possible to activate the air condition- ing when the fan control is in Off position.

Related information Climate controls (p. 203)

CLIMATE

216

Heater The heater helps the engine and passenger compartment reach the correct temperature before and during driving. The heater has two subfunctions:

Parking heater - heats the passenger com- partment, if necessary, when the parking cli- mate control's preconditioning is activated.

Additional heater - heats the passenger compartment and engine, if necessary, dur- ing driving.

Either a fuel-driven heater or an electric heater is used, depending on the market5.

The heater is fitted in the front right-hand wheel housing.

NOTE

When the heater is running6, smoke may be emitted from the right-hand front wheel hous- ing and a low hum may be heard. A ticking sound from the fuel pump may also be heard from the rear section of the car. This is per- fectly normal.

Battery and charging The heater is powered by the car's hybrid battery. If the charge level of the hybrid battery is too low, then the heater is switched off automatically and the driver display shows a message.

NOTE

Make sure that there is enough charge in the battery if the heater needs to be used.

Fuel and refuelling7

Warning label on fuel filler flap.

The heater uses fuel from the car's normal fuel tank.

If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of the car should point downhill to ensure that there is a supply of fuel to the heater.

If the level in the fuel tank is too low then the heater is switched off automatically and the driver display shows a message.

NOTE

Make sure there is enough fuel in the car's normal fuel tank if the heater needs to be used.

WARNING

Fuel which spills out could be ignited. Switch off the fuel-driven heater before starting to refuel.

Check in the driver display that the heater is switched off. This symbol is lit when it is working as a parking heater.

Related information Climate (p. 192)

Parking heater (p. 217)

Additional heater (p. 218)

5 An authorised Volvo retailer has information regarding which markets use which type of heater. 6 Applicable to fuel-driven auxiliary heater. 7 Applies to fuel-driven heater.

CLIMATE

}}

217

Parking heater The parking heater heats the passenger com- partment as necessary before driving if the car's preconditioning is activated.

The parking heater is one of two subfunctions of the car's heater. The heater is fitted in the front right-hand wheel housing.

This symbol illuminates in the driver display8 when the parking heater is active.

NOTE

When the heater is running9, smoke may be emitted from the right-hand front wheel hous- ing and a low hum may be heard. A ticking sound from the fuel pump may also be heard from the rear section of the car. This is per- fectly normal.

The parking heater starts automatically if the parking climate's preconditioning is activated and the passenger compartment needs to be heated up.

It switches off automatically when a set timer time or the heater's maximum run time expires, or if the car is restarted.

The heater's maximum running time is 40 minutes.

NOTE

Make sure there is enough fuel in the car's normal fuel tank if the parking heater needs to be used10.

Make sure that there is enough charge in the hybrid battery if the parking heater needs to be used.

WARNING

Do not use preconditioning11:

In unventilated spaces indoors. Exhaust gases are emitted if the heater starts.

In locations with combustible or flamma- ble material nearby. Fuel, gas, long grass, sawdust, etc. may ignite.

When there is a risk that the heaters exhaust line may be blocked. For exam- ple, deep snow inside the front right-hand wheel housing can obstruct the heaters ventilation.

Remember that the preconditioning can be started by a timer that has been set for a long time in advance.

WARNING

If there is a smell of fuel, unusual amounts of smoke, black smoke, or unusual sounds com- ing from the parking heater12, switch off the heater and, if possible, pull out its fuse. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo work- shop should be contacted for repair.

8 Applies to fuel-driven heater. 9 Applicable to fuel-driven auxiliary heater. 10 Applicable to fuel-driven auxiliary heater. 11 Applicable to fuel-driven auxiliary heater. 12 Applicable to fuel-driven auxiliary heater.

||

CLIMATE

218

Related information Heater (p. 216)

Additional heater (p. 218)

Additional heater The auxiliary heater helps to heat the passenger compartment and engine while driving.

The additional heater is one of two subfunctions of the car's heater. The heater is fitted in the front right-hand wheel housing.

NOTE

When the heater is running13, smoke may be emitted from the right-hand front wheel hous- ing and a low hum may be heard. A ticking sound from the fuel pump may also be heard from the rear section of the car. This is per- fectly normal.

The additional heater starts and is controlled automatically when heating is required while the car is being driven.

It switches off automatically when the car is switched off.

NOTE

Make sure there is enough fuel in the car's normal fuel tank if the auxiliary heater needs to be used14.

Related information Heater (p. 216)

Parking heater (p. 217)

Activating and deactivating automatic start of auxiliary heater (p. 219)

13 Applicable to fuel-driven auxiliary heater. 14 Applicable to fuel-driven auxiliary heater.

CLIMATE

219

Activating and deactivating automatic start of auxiliary heater The auxiliary heater helps to heat the passenger compartment and engine while driving. It is possible to set whether automatic start for the additional heater should be activated/deacti- vated.

1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.

2. Press Climate.

3. Select Additional Heater to activate/deac- tivate automatic start of the additional heater.

NOTE

Volvo recommends that the automatic start for the additional heater should be switched off for short driving distances15.

NOTE

If the auxiliary heater's automatic starting is deactivated, this may impede comfort in the passenger compartment as the climate con- trol system will then have no heat source dur- ing electrical operation.

Related information Additional heater (p. 218)

15 Applicable to fuel-driven auxiliary heater.

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.222

Lock confirmation When the car is locked or unlocked the direction indicators confirm that locking or unlocking was correctly performed.

Exterior indication Locking

The car's hazard warning flashers indicate locking by flashing and retracting the door mirrors1.

Unlocking

The car's hazard warning flashers indicate unlocking by two flashes and extending the door mirrors1.

All doors, tailgate and bonnet must be closed to indicate the car is locked. If locking is performed with only the driver's door closed2, the car will be locked but lock indication with hazard warning flashers will only occur after all doors, tailgate and bonnet have been closed.

Lock and alarm indicator

The lock and alarm indicator on the instrument panel show the status of the alarm system.

Long flash indicates locking of the car. When the car is locked, this will be indicated by short, pul- sating flashes.

Other indication The home safe lighting and approach light func- tions also provide indication of locking and unlocking.

Indication in lock buttons

Front door

Lock buttons with indicator lamp in the front door.

An illuminated indicator lamp in the lock button of either front door indicates that all doors are locked. If any door is opened, the lamp will extin- guish in both doors.

1 Only for cars with retractable power door mirrors. 2 Does not apply to cars equipped with the keyless locking/unlocking (Passive Entry*).

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

}}

* Option/accessory. 223

In rear door*

Lock button with indicator lamp in the rear door.

An illuminated indicator lamp in the lock button for one of the doors indicates that the door in question is locked. If any door is unlocked, its lamp will extinguish while the others will continue to illuminate.

Related information Lock indication setting (p. 223)

Approach light duration (p. 153)

Using home safe lighting (p. 153)

Lock indication setting It is possible to select how the car confirms locking and unlocking in the centre display set- tings menu.

1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view.

2. Press My Car Locking.

3. Tap on Visible Locking Feedback to select when the car should give a visible response: at Lock, Unlock, Both, or to switch off the function.

Indication with retractable door mirrors*

1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view.

2. Press My Car Mirrors and Convenience.

3. Select Fold Mirror When Locked to acti- vate or deactivate the function.

Related information Lock confirmation (p. 222)

Remote control key The remote control key locks and unlocks the doors and tailgate. The remote control key needs to be inside the car for it to be started.

Remote control key, on left, and button-less key (Key Tag)*, on right.

The remote control key is not physically used when starting since the car is equipped with sup- port for keyless starting (Passive Start) as stand- ard. The key must be in the front part of the pas- senger compartment, e.g. in the driver's pocket or the runnel console cup holder, for it to be possi- ble to start the car.

||

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.224

Keyless locking and unlocking of doors and tail- gate (Passive Entry*) is also available as an option. The key then has a range extending in a semicircle with a radius of approx. 1.5 metres (5 feet) out from the driver's door and approx. 1 metre (3 feet) out from the tailgate respec- tively.

With keyless starting and keyless locking and unlocking, the remote control key can be located anywhere in the passenger compartment or the cargo area and maintain the functionality to start the car.

Each one of the remote control keys included with the car can be linked to a driver profile with unique settings for the car. When a key with a certain profile is used, the car's settings are adapted according to the profile.

Button-less key (Key Tag) For cars equipped with keyless locking and unlocking*, a slightly smaller, lighter and button- less key (Key Tag) is supplied. It works the same way as the normal remote control key when it comes to keyless starting and locking and unlocking3. It has no detachable key blade and the battery cannot be replaced.

Remote control key buttons

The remote control key has four buttons - one on the left-hand side and three on the right-hand side.

Locking - Pressing the button locks the doors, tailgate and fuel filler flap and also arms the alarm*.

Press and hold to close all of the windows and the panorama roof* simultaneously.

Unlocking - Pressing the button unlocks the doors and tailgate and also disarms the alarm.

A longer press opens all windows simultane- ously4.

Tailgate - Unlocks the tailgate only and disarms its alarm. On cars with power oper- ated tailgate*, the tailgate is opened auto- matically when the button is held depressed.

The tailgate is also closed with a long press - acoustic warning signals sound.

Panic function Used to attract attention in an emergency. Press and hold the button for at least 3 seconds or press it twice within 3 seconds to activate the direction indicators and the horn. The function can be turned off with the same button once it has been active for at least 5 seconds. Otherwise the func- tion switches off automatically after 3 minutes.

WARNING

If anyone is left in the car, make sure the power windows and panoramic roof* are de- energised by always taking the remote control key with you when you leave the car.

NOTE

Be aware of the risk of locking the remote control key/Key Tag in the car.

A remote control key/Key Tag left in the car will be deactivated when the car is locked and the alarm is armed using another valid key. The "Double lock" function is also deacti- vated.

The deactivated key is reactivated when the car is unlocked.

3 The key is waterproof to a depth of approx. 10 metres (30 feet) for up to 60 minutes, which makes it suitable for use in activities in and around water. 4 The total airing function can be used, for example, to quickly air the car in hot weather.

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

}}

* Option/accessory. 225

Interference Remote control key functions for keyless starting and keyless locking and unlocking* can be dis- rupted by electromagnetic fields and screening.

NOTE

Avoid storing the remote control key close to metal objects or electronic apparatus, e.g. mobile phones, tablets, laptops or chargers - preferably no closer than 10-15 cm (4-6 inches).

If there is still interference - use the remote con- trol key's detachable key blade to unlock and then place the key in the backup reader in the cup holder to disarm the car.

NOTE

When the remote control key is placed in the cup holder, make sure that no other car keys, metal objects or electronic apparatus (e.g. mobile phones, tablets, laptops or chargers) are in the cup holder. Several car keys close to each other in the cup holder can cause interference with each other.

Related information Locking and unlocking with the remote con-

trol key (p. 225)

Remote control key range (p. 228)

Replacing the battery in the remote control key (p. 229)

Detachable key blade (p. 234)

Red Key - restricted remote control key* (p. 232)

Immobiliser (p. 236)

Locking and unlocking with the remote control key The buttons on the remote control key can be used to lock and unlock all doors and the tail- gate simultaneously.

Locking with the remote control key

Remote control key.

Press the remote control key button to lock.

||

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.226

The driver's door must be closed in order for the lock sequence to be activated5. If any of the other doors or the tailgate is open, then these are not locked and their alarms armed* until they are closed. The alarm's movement detectors* are activated when all the doors and the tailgate are closed and locked.

NOTE

Be aware of the risk of locking the remote control key/Key Tag in the car.

A remote control key/Key Tag left in the car will be deactivated when the car is locked and the alarm is armed using another valid key. The "Double lock" function is also deacti- vated.

The deactivated key is reactivated when the car is unlocked.

Locking when the tailgate is open

NOTE

If the car has been locked while the tailgate is open, be careful not to leave the remote con- trol key in the cargo area when the tailgate is closed and the car is completely locked6.

Unlocking with the remote control key Press the remote control key button to

unlock.

Automatic relocking If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened within two minutes of unlocking, they are locked automatically. This function prevents the car from being left unlocked unintentionally.

When the remote control key does not work

NOTE

Always try moving closer to the car and mak- ing another unlock attempt.

If it is not possible to lock or unlock with the remote control key, the battery may be dis- charged - in which case, lock or unlock the driv- er's door with the detachable key blade.

Related information Settings for remotely controlled and inside

unlocking (p. 227)

Unlocking the tailgate with the remote con- trol key (p. 227)

Remote control key (p. 223)

Replacing the battery in the remote control key (p. 229)

Locking and unlocking with the detachable key blade (p. 235)

5 If the car is equipped with keyless locking/unlocking then all side doors must be closed. 6 If the car is equipped with keyless locking/unlocking and the key is detected inside the car, the tailgate will not lock when it is closed.*

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory. 227

Settings for remotely controlled and inside unlocking It is possible to select different sequences for remotely controlled unlocking.

1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view.

2. Press My Car Locking Remote and Interior Unlock.

3. Select option:

All Doors

- unlocks all doors simultaneously.

Single Door

- unlocks the driver's door. Unlocking all of the doors requires two presses on the remote control key's unlock button.

The settings made here also affect central unlocking via opening handles from the inside.

Related information Locking and unlocking with the remote con-

trol key (p. 225)

Locking and unlocking from inside the car (p. 251)

Unlocking the tailgate with the remote control key It is possible to unlock just the tailgate by press- ing a button on the remote control key.

Use the remote control key button to unlock the tailgate and disable the alarm.

1. Press the remote control key's button.

> The lock and alarm indicator on the instru- ment panel extinguishes in order to show that the alarm is not armed for the whole of the car.

The alarm's level and movement sensors and the sensors for opening the tailgate are disconnected.

The tailgate is unlocked, but remains closed while the doors remain locked and their alarm functions armed.

To open the tailgate, grip the rubber pres- sure plate beneath the tailgate handle and open the tailgate.

If the tailgate is not opened within 2 minutes then it is relocked and the alarm is re-armed.

2. With the power operated tailgate option* -

Long press (approx. 1.5 seconds) on the

remote control key's button

> The tailgate is unlocked and opened, while the doors remain locked and their alarm functions armed.

Related information Locking and unlocking with the remote con-

trol key (p. 225)

Opening and closing the power*-operated tailgate (p. 254)

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.228

Remote control key range In order for the remote control key to work prop- erly it needs to be within a certain distance from the car.

For manual use The remote control key's functions for e.g. lock- ing/unlocking that are activated by pressing on

or have a range that extends approx. 20 metres (65 feet) from the car.

If the car does not verify a button being pressed - move closer and try again.

For keyless use7

The marked area in the illustration shows areas covered by the system's antennas.

For keyless use, a remote control key or the but- ton-less key (Key Tag) must be within a semicir-

cular area with a radius of approx. 1.5 metres (5 feet) on both long sides and approx. 1 metre (3 feet) from the tailgate.

NOTE

The remote control key functions may be dis- rupted by surrounding radio waves, buildings, topographical conditions, etc. The car can always be locked/unlocked with the key blade.

If the remote control key is removed from the car

If the remote control key is removed from the car when the engine is run- ning, the warning message Car key not found Removed from car is

shown in the driver display and an acoustic reminder sounds when the last door is closed.

The message extinguishes when the key is returned to the car, followed by a press of the right-hand keypad's O button, or when the last door is closed.

Related information Remote control key (p. 223)

Antenna locations for the start and lock sys- tems (p. 250)

Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces* (p. 247)

7 Only applies to cars equipped with the keyless locking/unlocking option (Passive Entry*).

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

}}

* Option/accessory. 229

Replacing the battery in the remote control key The battery in the remote control key needs to be replaced when it has become discharged.

NOTE

All batteries have a limited service life and must eventually be replaced (does not apply to Key Tag). The service life of the battery var- ies depending on how often the vehicle/key is used.

The battery for the remote control key should be replaced if:

the information symbol illuminates and the message Car key battery low See Owner's manual is shown in the driver display

and/or

the locks repeatedly do not react to signals from the remote control key within 20 metres (65 feet) of the car.

NOTE

Always try moving closer to the car and mak- ing another unlock attempt.

The battery in the button-less key8 (Key Tag) cannot be replaced - a new key can be ordered from an authorised Volvo workshop.

IMPORTANT

A discharged Key Tag must be handed over to an authorised Volvo workshop. The key must be deleted from the car since it is still possible to use it to start the car via back-up start.

Opening the key and changing the battery

Hold the remote control key with the front visible and the Volvo logo facing the right way - slide the button at bottom edge by the key ring to the right. Slide the front side's shell a few millimetres upwards.

The shell will then come free and can be lifted off the key.

8 This key is supplied with a car equipped with the keyless locking/entry option (Passive Entry*).

||

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

230

Turn the key, move the button to the side and slide the back shell a few millimetres upwards.

The shell will then come free and can be lifted off the key.

Use a screwdriver or similar to turn the bat- tery cover anticlockwise until the markings meet at the OPEN text.

Carefully lift away the battery cover by press- ing e.g. a fingernail into the recess.

Then prize the battery cover upwards.

The battery (+) side is facing upwards. Then carefully prize loose the battery as illustrated.

IMPORTANT

Avoid touching new batteries and their con- tact surfaces with your fingers as this may impair their function.

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

}}

231

Install a new battery with the (+) side up. Avoid touching the remote control key's bat- tery contacts with your fingers.

Place the battery in the holder with the edge down. Then slide the battery forwards so that it fastens under the two plastic catches.

Press the battery down so that it fastens under the upper black plastic catch.

NOTE

Use batteries with the designation CR2032, 3 V.

NOTE

Volvo recommends that the batteries to be used in the remote control key fulfil UN Manual of Test and Criteria, Part III, sub- section 38.3. Batteries fitted in the factory or replaced by an authorised Volvo workshop fulfil the above criteria.

Refit the battery cover and turn it clockwise until the marking aligns with the CLOSE text.

Reposition the rear side's shell and press it down until a clicking sound can be heard.

Then slide the shell back sedan.

> A further click will indicate that the shell is properly positioned and securely attached.

||

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.232

Turn the remote control key over and refit the front side's shell by pressing it down until a clicking sound can be heard.

Then slide the shell back sedan.

> A further click will indicate that the shell is securely attached.

IMPORTANT

Make sure that exhausted batteries are dis- posed of in a manner which is kind to the environment.

Related information Remote control key (p. 223)

Ordering more remote control keys The car is supplied with two remote control keys. A button-less key is supplied if the car is equip- ped with keyless locking and unlocking*. Addi- tional keys can be ordered. A total of twelve keys can be programmed and used for one single car. If additional keys are ordered, additional driver profiles are added - one per new remote control key. This also applies for the key tag.

Loss of a remote control key If you lose a remote control key then a new one can be ordered at a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. The remaining remote control keys must be taken to the work- shop. The code of the missing key must be erased from the system as a theft prevention measure.

The current number of keys registered to the car can be checked via driver profiles in the centre

display's top view, select Settings System Driver Profiles.

Related information Remote control key (p. 223)

Red Key - restricted remote control key* A Red Key makes it possible for the car's owner to set limitations for certain of the car's proper- ties. The limitations are intended to encourage the car to be driven in a safe manner, e.g. when being loaned out.

For a Red Key, it is possible to define the car's maximum speed, set speed reminders and deter- mine the loudspeaker system's maximum volume. In addition, some of the car's driver support sys- tems will always be active. Other functions of the key are the same as those of a normal remote control key.

One or more Red Keys can be ordered from a Volvo retailer. A total of eleven keys with restric- tions can be programmed and used for a single car - at least one must be a normal remote con- trol key.

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory. 233

The restrictions are intended to act as measures to reduce the risk of accidents, thereby making it feel safer to hand over the car to e.g. young dri- vers, valet parking or a workshop. The holder of a Red Key cannot change settings defined for it a regular remote control key is required for this.

Related information Red Key settings* (p. 233)

Remote control key (p. 223)

Red Key settings* The holder of a regular remote control key can define settings for Red Key. Certain driver sup- port functions are always active. 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top

view.

2. Press System Driver Profiles Red Key.

> The following settings can be defined:

Set Time Gap For Adaptive Cruise Control

Reduced Maximum Volume

Max Speed Limit

Speed Limit Warning

Adaptive cruise control*: Setting at first use: Longest intervals

Reduced max. volume (On/Off):

Setting at first use: On

Speed limiter (On/Off):

Setting interval: 50-250 km/h (30-160 mph)

Setting during first use is 120 km/h (75 mph)

Increments: 1 km/h (1 mph)

The driver display shows the symbol and message

Red key Speed limitation cannot be exceeded.

Speed reminder (On/Off):

Setting interval: 0-250 km/h (0-160 mph)

Setting during first use is: 50, 70 and 90 km/h (30, 45 and 55 mph)

Increments: 1 km/h (1 mph)

Max. number of simultaneous reminders: 6

Driver support functions The following driver support functions will always be active for the user of a Red Key:

Blind Spot Information (BLIS)*

Lane assistance (LKA)*

Distance Warning*

City Safety

Driver Alert Control (DAC)*

Road Sign Information*

Related information Red Key - restricted remote control key*

(p. 232)

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.234

Detachable key blade The remote control key contains a detachable key blade of metal with which a number of func- tions can be activated and some operations car- ried out.

The key blade's unique code is provided by authorised Volvo workshops, which are recom- mended when ordering new key blades.

The key blade's application areas Using the remote control key's detachable key blade:

the left-hand9 front door can be opened manually if central locking cannot be acti- vated with the remote control key.

all doors are emergency-locked.

the rear doors' mechanical child safety locks can be activated and deactivated.

The button-less key10 (Key Tag) does not have a detachable key blade. If necessary, use the detachable key blade from the normal remote control key.

Detaching the key blade

Hold the remote control key with the front visible and the Volvo logo facing the right way - slide the button at bottom edge by the key ring to the right. Guide the front side's shell a few millimetres upwards.

The shell will then come free and can be lifted off the key.

Detach the key blade by angling it up.

Return the key blade to its intended position in the remote control key after use.

Refit the shell by pressing it downward until a clicking sound is heard.

Then slide the shell back.

> A further click will indicate that the shell is securely attached.

Related information Locking and unlocking with the detachable

key blade (p. 235)

Remote control key (p. 223)

9 This applies whether the car is left-hand drive or right-hand drive. 10 Supplied with cars equipped with the keyless locking/unlocking option (Passive Entry*).

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

}}

* Option/accessory. 235

Locking and unlocking with the detachable key blade Amongst other things, the detachable key blade can be used to unlock the car from the outside - e.g. if the remote control key's battery has become discharged.

Unlocking

Pull out the front door handle on the left- hand side11 to its end position so that the lock cylinder become visible.

Insert the key in the lock cylinder.

Turn clockwise 45 degrees so that the key blade is pointing straight back.

Turn the key back 45 degrees to its starting position. Remove the key from the lock cylin- der and release the handle so that the rear section of the handle is resting against the car again.

5. Pull out the handle.

> The door opens.

Locking will be performed in the same way, but with an anticlockwise turn 45 degrees instead of clockwise in step (3).

Switching off the alarm*

NOTE

When the door is unlocked using the key blade and is then opened, the alarm is trig- gered.

The backup reader's location in the cup holder.

Deactivate the alarm as follows:

1. Place the remote control key on the key sym- bol in the backup reader in the bottom of the cup holder in the tunnel console.

2. Then turn the start knob clockwise and release it.

> The control automatically returns to its starting position - the alarm signal stops and the alarm switches off.

Locking It is also possible to lock the car with the remote control key's detachable key blade e.g. in the event of a loss of power or if the key's battery has become discharged.

The left-hand front door can be locked with its lock cylinder and the detachable key blade.

Other doors have no lock cylinders and instead have a lock switch on the end of each door which must be depressed using the key blade - they are then mechanically locked/blocked to prevent them being opened from outside.

The doors can still be opened from the inside.

11 This applies whether the car is right-hand drive or left-hand drive.

||

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.236

Manual locking of the door. Not to be mixed up with the child safety locks.

Remove the detachable key blade from the remote control key. Insert the key blade in the hole for lock reset and press the key in until the key bottoms, approx. 12 mm.

The door can be opened from both the out- side and the inside.

The door is blocked against opening from the outside. To return to position A, the inner door handle must be opened.

The doors can also be unlocked with the unlock button on the remote control key or with the cen- tral locking button on the driver's door.

NOTE

A door's lock reset only locks that partic- ular door - not all doors simultaneously.

A manually locked rear door with acti- vated manual or electric child safety locks cannot be opened from either the outside or the inside. A rear door that is locked in this way can only be unlocked with the remote control key or central locking but- ton.

Related information Detachable key blade (p. 234)

Activating and deactivating alarms* (p. 263)

Replacing the battery in the remote control key (p. 229)

Remote control key (p. 223)

Immobiliser The electronic immobiliser is a theft protection system that prevents an unauthorised person from starting the car. The car can only be started with the correct remote control key.

The following error message in the driver display is related to the electronic immobiliser:

Symbol Message Specification

Car key not found

See Owner's manual

Error reading the remote control key during starting - place the key on the key symbol in the cup holder and try again.

Remote-controlled immobiliser with tracking system12

The car is fitted with a system which makes it possible to track and locate the car and to remotely activate the immobiliser, which prevents starting the engine. Contact your nearest Volvo dealer for more information and assistance with activating the system.

12 Only certain markets and together with Volvo On Call*.

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

237

The following error message in the driver display is related to the remote-controlled immobiliser with tracking system:

Symbol Message Specification

Remotely immobilised

Car not pos- sible to start

The remote-con- trolled immobiliser with tracking sys- tem is activated. The car cannot be started. Contact Volvo On Call Service Centre.

Related information Remote control key (p. 223)

Ordering more remote control keys (p. 232)

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.238

Type approval for the remote control key system Type approval for the car's remote key system can be seen in the following tables.

For more information about type approval, see support.volvocars.com.

Lock system keyless start (Passive Start) and keyless locking/unlocking (Passive Entry*)

CEM marking for the remote control key system. For supplementary type approval numbers, see following tables.

Country/Area Type approval

Europe Delphi Deutschland GmbH, 42367 Wuppertal hereby declares that this VO3-134TRX conforms to the essential property requirements and other relevant provisions contained in directive 2014/53/EU (RED).

The full text of the EU declaration of conformity can be found at support.volvocars.com.

Jordan TRC/LPD/2014/250

Serbia P1614120100

Argentina CNC ID: C-14771

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

}}

239

Country/Area Type approval

Brazil MT-3245/2015

Indonesia Nomor: 38301/SDPPI/2015

Malaysia RAAT/37A/0315/S(15-0663)

Mexico IFETEL: RLVDEVO15-0396

Russia

The United Arab Emirates ER37847/15

DA0062437/11

||

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

240

Country/Area Type approval

Namibia TA-2016-02

South Africa TA-2014-1868

Remote control key

Country/Area Type approval

Europe Huf Hlsbeck & Frst GmbH & Co. KG hereby declares that this type of radio equipment HUF8423 conforms to directive 2014/53/EU.

The full text of the EU declaration of conformity can be found at support.volvocars.com.

Wavelength: 433.92 MHz

Maximum radiated transmission power: 10 mW

Manufacturer: Huf Hlsbeck & Frst GmbH & Co. KG, Steeger Str. 17, 42551 Vel- bert, Germany

Jordan TRC/LPD/2015/104

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

}}

241

Country/Area Type approval

Morocco AGREE PAR L'ANRT MAROC

Numro dagrment: MR 10668 ANRT 2015

Date dagrment: 24/07/2015

Mexico IFETEL

Marca: HUF

Modelo (s): HUF8423

NOM-121-SCT1-2009

La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada.

Namibia TA-2015-102

||

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

242

Country/Area Type approval

Oman

Serbia

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

}}

243

Country/Area Type approval

South Africa TA-2015-432

The United Arab Emirates

Key Tag

Country/Area Type approval

Europe Huf Hlsbeck & Frst GmbH & Co. KG hereby declares that this type of radio equipment HUF8432 conforms to directive 2014/53/EU.

The full text of the EU declaration of conformity can be found at support.volvocars.com.

Wavelength: 433.92 MHz

Maximum radiated transmission power: 10 mW

Manufacturer: Huf Hlsbeck & Frst GmbH & Co. KG, Steeger Str. 17, 42551 Vel- bert, Germany

Jordan TRC/LPD/2015/107

||

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

244

Country/Area Type approval

Morocco AGREE PAR L'ANRT MAROC

Numro dagrment: MR 10667 ANRT 2015

Date dagrment: 24/07/2015

Mexico IFETEL

Marca: HUF

Modelo (s): HUF8432

NOM-121-SCT1-2009

La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada.

Namibia TA-2015-103

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

}}

245

Country/Area Type approval

Oman

Serbia

||

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

246

Country/Area Type approval

South Africa TA-2015-414

The United Arab Emirates

Related information Remote control key (p. 223)

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory. 247

Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces* If the car is equipped with keyless locking and unlocking, it is sufficient to have the remote con- trol key in the vicinity e.g. in a pocket or a bag, making it more convenient to open the car if your hands are full.

Touch-sensitive surfaces

Door handle The outside of the door handles contains a recess for locking, while the inside contains a touch-sensitive surface for unlocking.

Touch-sensitive recess for locking

Touch-sensitive surface for unlocking

NOTE

It is important that only one touch-sensitive surface is activated at a time. Gripping the handle while touching the lock surface risks giving double commands. This means that the requested activity (locking/unlocking) will not be executed, or will be executed with a delay.

Tailgate The tailgate handle has a rubberised pressure plate that is only used for unlocking.

NOTE

Be aware that the system may be activated in connection with car washing if the remote control key is in range.

Related information Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 248)

Keyless unlocking of the tailgate* (p. 249)

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.248

Keyless locking and unlocking* The car is locked and unlocked from the outside using the door or tailgate handles if the car is equipped with keyless locking/unlocking (Passive Entry)*.

Touch-sensitive recess for locking

Touch-sensitive surface for unlocking

Rubberised pressure plate on the tailgate used for unlocking only.

NOTE

One of the car's remote control keys must be within range for locking and unlocking to work.

NOTE

Be aware that the system may be activated in connection with car washing if the remote control key is in range.

Keyless locking All side doors must be closed to be able to lock the car. The tailgate, on the other hand, can be

open when locking the car with a side door han- dle.

Touch the marked surface towards the rear on the outside of a door handle after the door has been closed, or press the lock13

button on the bottom edge of the tailgate before closing it.

> The lock indicator in the windscreen starts to flash to indicate the car is locked.

To close all side windows and the panoramic roof* simultaneously - place a finger against the touch-sensitive recess on the outside of the door handle and hold it there until all of the side win- dows and the panoramic roof have been closed.

Locking when the tailgate is open

NOTE

If the car has been locked while the tailgate is open, be careful not to leave the remote con- trol key in the cargo area when the tailgate is closed and the car is completely locked14.

13 Applies with power operated tailgate*. 14 If the key is detected inside the car, the tailgate will not lock when it is closed.

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

}}

* Option/accessory. 249

Keyless unlocking Grasp a door handle or press the rubberised

pressure plate beneath the tailgate handle to unlock the car.

> The lock indicator in the windscreen extin- guishes to confirm the car is unlocked - open the doors or tailgate as usual.

Automatic relocking If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened within two minutes of unlocking, they are locked automatically. This function prevents the car from being left unlocked unintentionally.

Related information Settings for Keyless entry* (p. 249)

Keyless unlocking of the tailgate* (p. 249)

Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces* (p. 247)

Settings for Keyless entry* It is possible to select different sequences for Keyless entry.

1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view.

2. Tap on My Car Locking Keyless Unlock

3. Select option:

All Doors

- unlocks all doors simultaneously.

Single Door

- unlocks selected door.

Related information Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 248)

Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces* (p. 247)

Keyless unlocking of the tailgate* For keyless unlocking of the tailgate, all you have to do is have the remote control key in a pocket or bag, for example. The tailgate is held closed by an electrical lock.

To open the tailgate:

1. Press gently on the rubberised pressure plate beneath the tailgate handle.

> The lock is released.

NOTE

One of the car's remote control keys must be within range behind the car for unlocking to work.

||

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.250

2. Lift by the outside handle in order to fully open the tailgate.

IMPORTANT

Minimal force is required to release the rear hatch lock - just gently press the rub- berised panel.

Do not place the lift force on the rubber panel when opening the rear hatch - lift the handle. Using too much force may damage the electrical contacts on the rub- ber panel.

It is also possible to unlock the tailgate hands- free with a foot movement under the rear bumper, see separate section.

WARNING

Do not drive with an open tailgate! Toxic exhaust fumes could be drawn into the car through the cargo area.

Related information Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 248)

Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces* (p. 247)

Remote control key range (p. 228)

Opening and closing the tailgate with foot movement* (p. 258)

Antenna locations for the start and lock systems The car is equipped with a keyless start and lock

system15 and therefore has a number of built-in antennas positioned at different locations in the car.

Under the cup holder in the front section of the tunnel console

In the upper front section of the left-hand rear door16

In the upper front section of the right-hand rear door16

In the cargo area16

WARNING

People with pacemaker operations should not come closer than 22 cm (9 inches) to the keyless system's antennas with their pace- maker. This is to prevent interference between the pacemaker and the keyless sys- tem.

Related information Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*

(p. 247)

Remote control key range (p. 228)

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

}}

* Option/accessory. 251

Locking and unlocking from inside the car The doors and tailgate can be locked and unlocked from inside using the central locking controls in the front doors. The lock controls* on the rear doors each lock their own rear door.

Central locking

Locking and unlocking button with indicator lamp in the front door.

Unlocking using a button in the front door Press the button to unlock all side doors

and the tailgate.

A long press on the button opens all the side windows simultaneously17.

Alternative unlocking method

Opening handle for alternative unlocking in the side door.

Pull the opening handle on one of the side doors and release.

> Depending on the settings in the remote control key, either all doors will be unlocked or only the selected door will be unlocked and opened.

To change this setting, tap on Settings

My Car Locking Remote and Interior Unlock in the centre display's top view.

Locking using a button in the front door Press the button - both front doors must

be closed.

> All doors and the tailgate are locked.

A long press on the button closes all side windows and the panorama roof* simultaneously.

Locking using a button in the rear door*

Locking button with indicator lamp in the rear door.

The rear door lock buttons only lock their respec- tive rear door.

Unlocking the rear door Pull the opening handle.

> The rear door is unlocked and opened.

15 The keyless lock system only applies to cars equipped with keyless locking and unlocking (Passive Entry*). 16 Only in cars equipped with keyless locking and unlocking (Passive Entry*). 17 The total airing function can be used, for example, to quickly air the car in hot weather.

||

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.252

Related information Settings for remotely controlled and inside

unlocking (p. 227)

Unlocking the tailgate from the inside of the car (p. 252)

Activating and deactivating child safety locks (p. 253)

Unlocking the tailgate from the inside of the car The tailgate can be unlocked from the inside by pressing a button on the instrument panel.

1.

Brief press on the button on the instru- ment panel.

> The tailgate can be unlocked and opened from the outside by grasping the rubber- ised pressure plate.

2.

With the power operated tailgate option* -

Long press on the button on the instru- ment panel.

> The tailgate opens.

Related information Locking and unlocking from inside the car

(p. 251)

Opening and closing the power*-operated tailgate (p. 254)

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

}}

* Option/accessory. 253

Activating and deactivating child safety locks The child safety locks prevent children from being able to open a rear door from the inside. There is an electric* and a manual lock.

Activating and deactivating electrically* The electric child safety locks can be activated and deactivated in all ignition positions higher than 0. Activation and deactivation can be per- formed up to 2 minutes after switching off the engine, provided that no door is opened.

Button for electric activation and deactivation.

1. Start the engine or choose an ignition posi- tion higher than 0.

2. Press the button in the driver's door control panel.

> The driver display shows the message Rear child lock Activated and the but- ton's lamp illuminates - the locks are active.

When the electric child safety lock is active then the rear:

windows can only be opened with the driver's door control panel

doors cannot be opened from inside.

To deactivate the locks:

Press the button in the driver's door control panel.

> The driver display shows the message Rear child lock Deactivated and the button's lamp goes out - the locks are deactivated.

The current setting is stored when the engine is switched off - if the child safety locks are acti- vated at engine shutdown, the function will remain activated the next time the engine is started.

Symbol Message Specification

Rear child lock Acti- vated

Child safety locks are acti- vated.

Rear child lock Deacti- vated

Child safety locks are deacti- vated.

Activating and deactivating manually

Manual child safety locks. Not to be mixed up with man- ual door locks.

Use the remote control key's detachable key blade to turn the knob.

The door is blocked against opening from the inside.

The door can be opened from both the out- side and the inside.

||

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.254

NOTE

A door's knob control only blocks that particular door - not both rear doors simultaneously.

Cars with an electric child safety lock do not have a manual child lock.

Related information Locking and unlocking from inside the car

(p. 251)

Detachable key blade (p. 234)

Automatic locking when driving The doors and tailgate are locked automatically when the car starts to move. To change this setting:

1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view.

2. Press My Car Locking.

3. Select Auto Lock Doors While Driving to deactivate or activate this function.

Related information Locking and unlocking from inside the car

(p. 251)

Opening and closing the power*- operated tailgate The car's tailgate can be opened and closed electrically.

Opening the power operated tailgate Choose one of the following options to open the tailgate:

Long press on the remote control key's button. Keep it depressed until the tailgate starts to open.

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

}}

* Option/accessory. 255

Long press on the instrument panel's button. Keep it depressed until the tailgate starts to open.

Light press on the tailgate handle.

Foot movement* under the rear bumper.

Closing the power operated tailgate Choose one of the following methods to close18

the tailgate:

Press the button on the underside of the tailgate to close.

> The tailgate closes automatically - the tail- gate remains unlocked.

NOTE

The button is active 24 hours after the hatch has been left open. Thereafter, it must be closed manually.

Long press on the button on the remote control key.

> The tailgate closes automatically and acoustic signals sound - the tailgate remains unlocked.

18 A car with keyless locking and unlocking (Passive Entry*) has one button for closing and one button for closing and locking.

||

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.256

Long press on the button on the instru- ment panel.

> The tailgate closes automatically and acoustic signals sound - the tailgate remains unlocked.

Foot movement* under the rear bumper.

> The tailgate closes automatically and acoustic signals sound - the tailgate remains unlocked.

Closing and locking18 the power operated tailgate Press the button on the underside of

the tailgate to close it and simultaneously lock the tailgate and doors (all doors must be closed for locking).

> The tailgate closes automatically - the tail- gate and doors are locked, and the alarm* is armed.

NOTE

One of the car's remote control keys must be within range for locking and unlocking to work.

When using keyless* locking or closing, three signals will sound if the key is not detected sufficiently close to the tailgate.

IMPORTANT

During manual tailgate operation, open or close it slowly. Do not use force to open/ close it if there is resistance. It may be dam- aged and stop working correctly.

Cancel opening or closing Cancel opening or closing in one of the following ways:

Press the button on the instrument panel.

Press the remote control key's button.

Press the closing button on the underside of the tailgate.

Press the rubberised pressure plate beneath the outside handle.

Using a foot movement*.

The tailgate's movement is interrupted and stops. The boot lid can then be operated manually.

Pinch protection If something with sufficient resistance prevents the tailgate from opening or closing then the pinch protection is activated.

During opening - movement is interrupted, the tailgate stops and a long acoustic signal sounds.

During closing - movement is interrupted, the tailgate stops, a long acoustic signal sounds

and the tailgate returns to the programmed max. position.

WARNING

Observe the risk of trapping when opening/ closing. Before starting opening/closing, check that there is nobody near to the tailgate as trapping may have serious consequences.

Always operate the tailgate with caution.

Pre-tensioned springs

The pre-tensioned springs for the power operated tail- gate.

18 A car with keyless locking and unlocking (Passive Entry*) has one button for closing and one button for closing and locking.

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory. 257

WARNING

Do not open the pre-tensioned springs for the power operated tailgate. They are pre-ten- sioned with high pressure and can cause injury if opened.

Related information Programming maximum opening for power

operated tailgate* (p. 257)

Opening and closing the tailgate with foot movement* (p. 258)

Remote control key range (p. 228)

Programming maximum opening for power operated tailgate* Adapt the tailgate's opening position to low roof height.

To adjust max. opening:

1. Open the tailgate - stop it in the open posi- tion.

NOTE

It is not possible to program an opening posi- tion lower than half-open tailgate.

2. Press the button on the underside of the tailgate for at least 3 seconds.

> Two short acoustic signals sound to indi- cate that the set position has been saved.

To reset max. opening:

Manually move the tailgate to its highest

possible position - press the button on the tailgate for at least 3 seconds.

> Two acoustic signals sound to indicate that the set position has been cleared. The tailgate will then assume its max. position when opened.

NOTE

If the system has been operating continu- ously for a long time, it is switched off to avoid overload. It can be used again after about 2 minutes.

Related information Opening and closing the power*-operated

tailgate (p. 254)

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.258

Opening and closing the tailgate with foot movement* To facilitate the operation of the tailgate when your hands are occupied, it can be opened and closed by means of a forward kicking motion under the rear bumper. If the car is equipped with keyless locking and unlocking* then you can unlock the tailgate with a foot movement.

The function with both opening and closing of the tailgate is also available when the car is equipped with power operated tailgate*.

NOTE

The foot-operated tailgate function is availa- ble in two versions:

Opening and closing with foot movement

Only unlocking with foot movement (lift up the tailgate manually to open it)

Note that the function for opening and clos- ing with foot movement requires power oper- ated tailgate*.

The sensor is located on left of centre in the bumper19.

One of the car's remote control keys must be within range behind the car (approx. 1 metre (3 feet)) for opening and closing to be possible. This also applies to an already unlocked car in order to avoid accidental opening e.g. in a car wash.

Opening and closing with foot movement

Kicking motion within the detector's valid activation area.

Make one slow, forward kicking motion under the left part of the rear bumper. Then take a step back. The bumper must not be touched.

> A short acoustic signal sounds when opening or closing is activated - the tail- gate is opened/closed.

If the tailgate is in open position then it is always closed20 on activation via foot movement.

If several kicking motions take place without an approved remote control key being located

19 If the car is equipped with skid plate* the sensor is located out on the left-hand corner of the bumper. 20 Applies to cars with power operated tailgate*.

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory. 259

behind the car, opening will not be possible until after a certain delay.

Do not leave your foot positioned under the car during the kicking motion. This could cause acti- vation to fail.

Cancelling opening or closing with foot movement Make one slow forward kicking motion when

opening or closing is in progress in order to stop the movement of the tailgate.

The remote control key does not have to be in the vicinity of the car to cancel opening or clos- ing.

NOTE

There is a risk of reduced function, or no function, if the rear bumper is loaded with large amounts of ice, snow, dirt or similar. For this reason, make sure you keep it clean.

NOTE

Pay attention to the possibility that the sys- tem may be activated in a car wash or similar if the remote key is within range.

Cars with the skid plate* accessory If the car is equipped with skid plate the sensor is located out on the left-hand corner of the bumper.

To activate opening or closing with a foot move- ment on a car equipped with skid plate, the kick- ing motion is made from the side of the car. One of the car's remote control keys must be within range (approx. 1 metre (3 feet)) for opening and closing to be possible.

Kicking motion within the detector's valid activation area.

Related information Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*

(p. 247)

Opening and closing the power*-operated tailgate (p. 254)

Remote control key range (p. 228)

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

260

Private locking The tailgate can be locked, so-called private locking which prevents it from being opened, e.g. when the car is taken in for service, left at a hotel or similar.

The private locking function button is located in the centre display function view. Depend- ing on the current status of the lock, Private Locking Unlocked or Private Locking Locked is shown.

Related information Activating and deactivating private locking

(p. 260)

Activating and deactivating private locking Private locking is activated with a function button in the centre display and an optional PIN code.

NOTE

The car needs to be in ignition mode I as a minimum for the private locking function to be activated.

Enter the security code before using for the first time A security code needs to be selected during the first time the function is used. It can then be used to deactivate private locking if the selected PIN code has been lost or forgotten. The security code acts as a PUK code for all subsequent PIN codes set for the private locking function.

Save the security code in a safe place.

To create a security code:

1. Press the button for private locking in the function view.

> A pop-up window is shown.

2. Enter the desired security code.

> The security code is saved. The private locking function is now ready for activa- tion.

If the system has been reset then the above pro- cedure needs to be repeated.

Activate private locking 1. Press the button for private locking in the

function view.

> A pop-up window is shown.

2. Enter the code to be used in order to unlock the tailgate after locking and tap on Confirm.

> The tailgate is locked. Confirmation of locking takes place by means of a green indicator being shown by the button in the function view.

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

}}

* Option/accessory. 261

Deactivate private locking 1. Press the button for private locking in the

function view.

> A pop-up window is shown.

2. Enter the code that was used for locking and tap on Confirm.

> The tailgate is unlocked. Confirmation of unlocking takes place by means of the green indicator by the button in the func- tion view extinguishing.

NOTE

If the PIN code has been lost/forgotten, or if the wrong PIN code has been entered more than three times, the security code can be used to deactivate the private locking.

NOTE

If private locking is activated and the car is unlocked via Volvo On Call* or the Volvo On Call* app, private locking will be deactivated automatically.

Related information Private locking (p. 260)

Alarm* The alarm provides audible and visual warnings if anyone enters the car without a valid remote control key or manipulates the starter battery or alarm siren.

When armed, the alarm is triggered if:

a door, the bonnet or the tailgate is opened21

a movement is detected in the passenger compartment (if fitted with a movement detector*)

the car is raised or towed away (if fitted with a tilt detector*)

the starter battery's cable is disconnected

the siren is disconnected.

Alarm signals When the alarm has been triggered, the following happens:

A siren sounds for 30 seconds or until the alarm is switched off.

The direction indicators flash for 5 minutes or until the alarm is switched off.

21 Applies to certain markets.

||

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.262

If the cause of alarm activation is not rectified, the alarm cycle is repeated up to 10 times22.

Alarm indicator

A red LED on the instrument panel indicates the alarm system's status:

LED not lit alarm not armed.

The LED flashes once every other second alarm is armed.

After the alarm has been disarmed, the LED flashes rapidly for a maximum of 30 seconds or until ignition position I has been selected by turning the start knob clockwise and releasing it - the alarm has been triggered.

Movement and tilt sensors* Movement and tilt sensors react to movements inside the car, if the window is broken or if any-

one tries to steal the wheels or tow the vehicle away.

The movement sensor triggers an alarm in the event of movement in the passenger compart- ment - air currents are also registered. For this reason the alarm is triggered if the car is left with a window or the panoramic roof* open or if the passenger compartment heater is used.

To avoid this:

Close the window and panoramic roof when leaving the car.

If the passenger compartment or parking heater is to be used direct the airflow from the air vents so that they do not point upwards in the passenger compartment.

Alternatively, use a reduced alarm level to tempo- rarily deactivate the movement and tilt sensors.

Also switch off the movement and tilt sensors when the car is being transported on a ferry or train as these movements may affect the car and trigger the alarm.

In the event of an alarm system fault If there is a fault in the alarm system, the driver display shows the symbol and the message Alarm system failure Service required. In which

case, contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

NOTE

Do not attempt to repair or alter components in the alarm system yourself. Any such attempts may affect the terms of the insur- ance.

Related information Activating and deactivating alarms* (p. 263)

Reduced alarm level* (p. 264)

Double lock* (p. 264)

22 Applies to certain markets.

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

}}

* Option/accessory. 263

Activating and deactivating alarms* The alarm is armed when the car is locked.

Arming the alarm Lock and arm the car alarm as follows:

press the remote control key's lock button

touch the marked surface on the outside of the door handles or the tailgate's rubberised pressure plate23.

If the car is equipped with both keyless locking/ unlocking* and a power-operated tailgate*, the

button on the underside of the tailgate can also be used to lock the car and arm the car alarm.

A red LED on the instrument panel flashes once every two seconds when the car is locked and the alarm is armed.

Deactivate the alarm Unlock and disarm the car alarm as follows:

press the remote control key's unlock button

grip one of the door handles or press on the tailgate's rubberised pressure plate23.

Deactivate the alarm without a functioning remote control key The car can be unlocked and disarmed even if the remote control key does not work, e.g. if the remote control key's battery is dead.

1. Open the driver's door with the detachable key blade.

> The alarm is triggered.

The backup reader's location in the cup holder.

2. Place the remote control key on the key sym- bol in the backup reader in the tunnel con- sole's cup holder.

3. Turn the start knob clockwise and release it.

> The alarm is deactivated.

Switching off a triggered alarm Press the remote control key's unlock button

or set the car in ignition position I by turning the start knob clockwise and then releasing.

NOTE

Remember that the alarm is activated when the car is locked.

If any of the doors are opened from the inside then the alarm is triggered.

Automatic arming and rearming of the alarm Automatic rearming of the alarm prevents the car being left with the alarm disarmed unintentionally.

If the car is unlocked with the remote control key (which disarms the alarm) but none of the doors or the tailgate is opened within two minutes, then the alarm is automatically re-armed. The car is relocked at the same time.

In certain markets, the alarm is armed automati- cally after a certain delay after the driver's door has been opened and closed without being locked.

23 Only applies to a car with keyless locking and unlocking* (Passive Entry).

||

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.264

To change this setting:

1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view.

2. Press My Car Locking.

3. Select Passive Arming Deactivation to deactivate the function temporarily.

Related information Alarm* (p. 261)

Reduced alarm level* A reduced alarm level means that the movement and tilt sensors are temporarily switched off. Switch off the movement and tilt detectors in order to avoid accidental triggering of the alarm - e.g. if a dog is left in a locked car or during trans- port on a car train or car ferry.

Press the Reduced Guard button in the centre display function view to switch off the movement and tilt sensors when subsequently locking the car.

At the same time, the double lock function is deactivated, i.e. unlocking from inside is possible.

If the car is unlocked and then locked again, the reduced alarm level must be reactivated.

Related information Alarm* (p. 261)

Double lock* (p. 264)

Double lock* Double lock means that all opening handles are disengaged mechanically, which prevents door opening from the inside when the car is locked from the outside. Double locks are activated with the remote con- trol key and in keyless locking (Passive Entry)*. Double locks are activated with a delay of about 10 seconds after the doors have locked.

If a door is opened within the delay time then the sequence is interrupted and the alarm is deacti- vated.

NOTE

Remember that the alarm is activated when the car is locked.

If any of the doors are opened from the inside then the alarm is triggered.

The car can only be unlocked with the remote control key, keyless unlocking or the Volvo On Call* app when double locks are activated.

The front left door can also be unlocked with the detachable key blade. If the car is unlocked with the detachable key blade, the alarm will be trig- gered.

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory. 265

WARNING

Do not allow anyone to remain in the car with- out first deactivating the double lock in order to avoid the risk of anyone being locked in.

Related information Temporarily deactivating double locks*

(p. 265)

Alarm* (p. 261)

Temporarily deactivating double locks* If someone is going to stay in the car but the doors must be locked from the outside, then the double lock function should be deactivated, to allow unlocking from the inside.

Press the Reduced Guard button in the centre display's function view in order to deacti- vate the double lock function temporarily.

This also means that the alarm's movement and tilt detectors* are switched off.

After this, Reduced Guard is shown in the cen- tre display and double locks are temporarily deactivated in the subsequent locking of the car.

In conventional locking, the electrical sockets are deactivated immediately, but when double locks are temporarily deactivated, they will be active for a maximum of 10 minutes after locking.

If the car is unlocked and then locked again, the double lock function must be deactivated again.

The system is reset the next time the engine is started.

Related information Double lock* (p. 264)

Alarm* (p. 261)

Detection of unknown car component* The "Foreign Component Detection" function can detect whether an unknown car component has been connected to the car.

Each LED headlamp* is designed for the car. If an unknown headlamp is connected, the driver display shows a message Unknown car part. Service required, unknown car part found. Volvo recommends contacting an authorised Volvo workshop.

Related information Volvo service programme (p. 590)

DRIVER SUPPORT

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.268

Driving support systems The car is equipped with different driver support systems which can assist the driver in different situations, either actively or passively.

The systems can, for example, help the driver to hold a set speed or a certain time interval to the vehicle in front, prevent a collision by warning the driver and brake the car or help the driver to park.

Some of the systems are fitted as standard, while others are options. This also varies depending on market.

Related information Speed-dependent steering force (p. 268)

Electronic stability control (p. 270)

Stability system Roll Stability Control (p. 269)

Rear Collision Warning (p. 347)

Speed Limiter (p. 274)

Cruise Control (p. 282)

Distance Warning* (p. 287)

Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 290)

Pilot Assist (p. 306)

Radar unit (p. 321)

Camera unit (p. 330)

City Safety (p. 334)

BLIS* (p. 348)

Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 353)

Road Sign Information* (p. 357)

Driver Alert Control (p. 363)

Lane assistance (p. 365)

Steering assistance at risk of collision (p. 373)

Park Assist* (p. 382)

Park assist camera* (p. 387)

Park Assist Pilot* (p. 396)

Speed-dependent steering force Speed related power steering causes the steer- ing wheel force to increase with the speed of the car in order to give the driver enhanced sensitiv- ity.

On motorways the steering feels firmer. When parking and at low speed steering is light and requires only a slight effort.

NOTE

In certain situations the power steering may become too hot and then needs to be tempo- rarily cooled - during this time the power steering operates with reduced power and turning the steering wheel may then be per- ceived to be slightly heavier.

In parallel with the temporarily reduced steer- ing assistance, the driver display shows a message as well as a STEERING WHEEL symbol.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 269

WARNING

While the power steering is working at reduced power, the driver support functions with steering assistance are not available.

In such a situation, the driver display shows the Power steering failure or Power Steering Assist Temporarily Reduced message, combined with a STEERING WHEEL symbol.

Change the steering force level* To select the steering force level, go to the "Drive modes" section and see the description at the alternative INDIVIDUAL under the heading "Selectable drive modes".

For the car models without a drive mode control with its INDIVIDUAL option, the selection of steering force is instead made via the centre dis- play's top view and the following search path:

Settings My Car Drive Modes Steering force

Steering force selection cannot be accessed dur- ing a turn if the speed exceeds 10 km/h (6 mph).

Related information Drive modes (p. 449)

Pilot Assist (p. 306)

City Safety steering assistance for evasive manoeuvre (p. 341)

Lane assistance (p. 365)

Steering assistance at risk of collision (p. 373)

Park Assist Pilot* (p. 396)

Stability system Roll Stability Control The stability system RSC1 minimises the risk of overturning, for example during a sudden evasive manoeuvre or if the car skids.

The RSC system registers if and how much the car's lateral inclination changes. This information is used to calculate the risk of the car overturn- ing. If the car is at risk, its electronic stability con- trol system engages, the engine torque is reduced and one or more wheels are braked until the car has regained its stability.

WARNING

Under normal driving conditions, the RSC sys- tem improves the car's road safety, but this must not be taken as a reason to increase speed. Always follow the normal precautions for safe driving.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.270

Electronic stability control Electronic Stability Control (ESC2) helps the driver to avoid skidding and improves the car's traction.

The driver display shows this symbol when the ESC system is engaged.

Braking from the ESC system may be heard as a pulsing sound, and the car may accel-

erate more slowly than expected when applying the throttle.

The ESC system consists of the following sub- functions:

Stability function3

Spin control and traction control system

Engine Drag Control

Trailer stability assist

WARNING

The stability system ESC is supplemen- tary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer it cannot han- dle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions.

ESC is not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropri- ate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.

Stability function3

The function checks the driving and brake force of the wheels individually in order to stabilise the car.

Spin control and traction control system The function is active at low speed and brakes the drive wheels that spin so that additional trac- tion shall be transferred from the drive wheels that are not spinning.

The function also prevents the driving wheels from spinning against the road surface during acceleration.

Engine Drag Control Engine Drag Control (EDC4) prevents involuntary wheel locking, e.g. after shifting down or engine braking when driving in low gear on slippery road surfaces.

Involuntary wheel locking while driving can, amongst other things, impair the driver's ability to steer the car.

Trailer stability assist*5 Trailer stability assist (TSA6) stabilises a car tow- ing a trailer in situations where they begin snak- ing. Also see section "Trailer stability assist" for more information.

NOTE

The TSA function is deactivated if ESC Sport Mode is activated.

1 Roll Stability Control 2 Electronic Stability Control 3 Also known as Active Yaw Control. 4 Engine Drag Control 5 Trailer stability assist is included when the Volvo genuine towbar is installed. 6 Trailer Stability Assist

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 271

Related information Sport mode for electronic stability control

(p. 271)

Activating/deactivating Sport mode in Elec- tronic Stability Control (p. 271)

Limitation for sport mode in Electronic Stabil- ity Control (p. 272)

Symbols and messages for electronic stabil- ity control (p. 273)

Sport mode for electronic stability control The ESC7 system is always activated it can- not be switched off. However, the driver can select ESC Sport Mode, which allows for a more active driving experience.

With the ESC Sport Mode subfunction selected, intervention from ESC is reduced and the car is allowed to skid more and greater con- trol than normal is thus transferred to the driver.

When ESC Sport Mode is selected, ESC can be considered as deactivated, despite helping the driver in many cases.

NOTE

With the ESC Sport Mode function selected, Trailer Stability Assist (TSA8) is deactivated.

ESC Sport Mode also provides maximum trac- tion if the car has become bogged down or is driving on a loose surface, such as in sand or deep snow.

Related information Electronic stability control (p. 270)

Towbar* (p. 474)

Activating/deactivating Sport mode in Electronic Stability Control The ESC9 system is always activated it can- not be switched off. However, the driver can select sport mode, which allows for a more active driving experience.

The Sport mode is activated/ deactivated in the centre dis- play's function view.

Tap on the ESC Sport Mode button in the function view.

> Sport mode is activated/deactivated - a green/grey indicator is displayed in the button.

The driver display indicates activated ESC Sport Mode by displaying this symbol with a constant glow until the function is deactivated or the engine is

switched off. The next time the engine is started, the ESC system is back in its normal mode again.

Related information Electronic stability control (p. 270)

7 Electronic Stability Control 8 Trailer Stability Assist 9 Electronic Stability Control

DRIVER SUPPORT

272

Limitation for sport mode in Electronic Stability Control There are certain limitations associated with the

ESC10 system's subfunction ESC Sport Mode being activated. The ESC Sport Mode function cannot be selected when one of the following functions is activated:

Speed limiter

Cruise control

Adaptive cruise control

Pilot Assist.

Related information Electronic stability control (p. 270)

10 Electronic Stability Control

DRIVER SUPPORT

273

Symbols and messages for electronic stability control A number of symbols and messages regarding electronic stability control (Electronic Stability

Control -ESC) can be shown on the driver dis- play.

The following table shows some examples.

Symbol Message Specification

Constant glow for approx. 2 seconds.

System check when the engine is started.

Flashing light. ESC system is being activated.

Constant glow. Sport mode is selected.

NOTE: The ESC system is not deactivated in this mode it is partly reduced.

ESC

Temporarily off

ESC system has been temporarily reduced due to excessive brake temperature - the function is reactiva- ted automatically when the brakes have cooled.

See the message in the driver display.

ESC

Service required

ESC system disengaged.

Stop the car in a safe place, switch off the engine and start it again.

Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

A text message can be cleared by briefly press-

ing the button, located in the centre of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.

If a message remains: Contact a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information Electronic stability control (p. 270)

DRIVER SUPPORT

274

Speed Limiter A speed limiter (SL11) can be likened to a reverse cruise control - the driver regulates the speed using the accelerator pedal but is preven- ted from accidentally exceeding a pre- selected/set maximum speed by the speed lim- iter.

Buttons and symbols for functions12.

: Activates the speed limiter from standby mode and resumes stored maximum speed

: Increases the stored maximum speed

: From standby mode - activates the speed limiter and stores current speed

: From active mode - deactivates/ changes the speed limiter to standby mode

: Reduces stored maximum speed

Marker for stored max speed

The car's current speed

Stored maximum speed

WARNING

The Speed Limiter function is supple- mentary driver support intended to facili- tate driving it cannot handle all situa- tions in all traffic, weather and road condi- tions.

The driver must always pay attention to traffic conditions and take action if the Speed Limiter is not maintaining a suita- ble speed.

The Speed Limiter is not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accord- ance with current traffic rules and regula- tions.

Related information Limitations for Speed Limiter (p. 278)

Activating and starting the Speed Limiter (p. 275)

Managing speed for the Speed Limiter (p. 275)

Deactivate the Speed Limiter and set it in standby mode (p. 276)

Reactivating the Speed Limiter from standby mode (p. 277)

Deactivating the Speed Limiter (p. 277)

Automatic Speed Limiter (p. 278)

Limitations for Automatic Speed Limiter (p. 281)

Activate/deactivate Automatic Speed Limiter (p. 280)

Changing the tolerance for the Automatic Speed Limiter (p. 281)

11 Speed Limiter 12 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

275

Activating and starting the Speed Limiter The speed limiter function (SL13) must first be selected and activated in order to be able to reg- ulate the speed.

Set the speed limiter in standby mode

NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

Press (1) or (3) to browse to the sym-

bol/function for speed limiter (4).

> Symbol (4) is shown and the speed limiter is set in standby mode.

Start the Speed Limiter The speed limiter cannot be activated until after the engine has been started. The lowest maxi-

mum speed that can be stored is 30 km/h (20 mph).

When the speed limiter is in standby mode

and the symbol is shown - press the

steering wheel button (2).

> The Speed Limiter starts and the current speed is stored as the maximum speed.

Related information Speed Limiter (p. 274)

Managing speed for the Speed Limiter The speed limiter (SL14) can be set to different speeds.

Setting/changing the stored speed

NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

Change the set speed with short or long

presses on steering wheel button (1) or

(3):

Short press: Each press changes the speed in increments of +/- 5 km/h (+/- 5 mph).

Press and hold: Release the button when the set speed indicator (4) has moved to the desired speed.

13 Speed Limiter 14 Speed Limiter

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

276

The speed set after the last button press is stored in the memory.

Related information Speed Limiter (p. 274)

Deactivate the Speed Limiter and set it in standby mode The speed limiter (SL15) can be temporarily deactivated and set in standby mode.

NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

To deactivate the Speed Limiter and set it in standby mode:

Press the steering wheel button (2).

> The speed limit markings and symbols in the driver display change colour from WHITE to GREY - the speed limiter is now temporarily deactivated and the driver can exceed the maximum speed setting.

Temporary deactivation with the accelerator pedal The speed limiter can also be temporarily deacti- vated and overridden with the accelerator pedal without the speed limiter first having to be set in standby mode - e.g. to be able to quickly acceler- ate the car out of a situation.

In which case, proceed as follows:

1. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and release it to interrupt acceleration when the desired speed has been reached.

> In this mode, the speed limiter is still acti- vated and the driver display's symbol is therefore WHITE.

2. Fully release the accelerator pedal when the temporary acceleration is finished.

> The car is then braked automatically below the last stored maximum speed.

Related information Speed Limiter (p. 274)

15 Speed Limiter

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

277

Reactivating the Speed Limiter from standby mode The speed limiter (SL16) can be reactivated after having been temporarily deactivated and placed in standby mode.

NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

To reactivate the Speed Limiter from standby mode:

Press the steering wheel button (1).

> The driver display's speed limit markings change colour from GREY to WHITE - the car's speed is then limited again by the last stored maximum speed.

or

Press the steering wheel button (2).

> The Speed Limiter indicators and symbols in the driver display change colour from GREY to WHITE the car will now apply its current speed as the maximum speed.

Related information Speed Limiter (p. 274)

Deactivating the Speed Limiter The speed limiter (SL17) can be deactivated.

NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

1. Press the steering wheel button (2).

> The speed limiter is set in standby mode.

2. Press the steering wheel button (1) or (3) to change to another function.

> The driver display's symbol and indicator for speed limiter (4) are switched off - which deletes the set/stored maximum speed.

3. Press the steering wheel button (2) again.

> Another function is activated.

16 Speed Limiter 17 Speed Limiter

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

278

Related information Speed Limiter (p. 274)

Limitations for Speed Limiter On steep downhill gradients the speed limiters braking effect may be inadequate and hence the stored maximum speed may be exceeded. In this case, the driver is alerted by the message Speed limit exceeded in the driver display.

NOTE

A text message that the maximum speed is exceeded will be activated if the speed has been exceeded by at least 3 km/h (approx. 2 mph).

Related information Speed Limiter (p. 274)

Automatic Speed Limiter The Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL18) function helps the driver to adapt the car's maximum speed to the speed shown on the road signs.

The Speed Limiter function (SL19) can be changed to Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL).

The automatic speed limiter uses speed informa- tion from the Road Sign Information20 function to automatically adapt the car's maximum speed.

18 Automatic Speed Limiter 19 Speed Limiter 20 Road Sign Information RSI

DRIVER SUPPORT

279

WARNING

The ASL function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer it cannot handle all situa- tions in all traffic, weather and road condi- tions.

Even if the driver clearly sees the speed- related road sign, the speed information from the Road Sign Information (RSI) function to ASL may be incorrect in such cases the driver must intervene him/herself and accelerate or brake to a suitable speed.

ASL is not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropri- ate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.

See also the heading "Limitations for Road Sign Information".

Is SL or ASL active? Symbols in the driver display show which speed limiter function is active:

Symbol SL ASL

A

Sign symbolB after "70" = ASL is acti- vated.

A WHITE symbol: Function active, GREY symbol: Standby mode. B See the following heading "ASL symbol" regarding the mean-

ing of the symbol's colour.

The ASL symbol The sign symbol (displayed alongside the stored speed, "70", in the centre of the speedometer) can be shown in three colours with the following mean-

ings:

Colour of sign

symbol

Meaning

Greenish yellow ASL is active

Grey ASL has been set in standby mode

Amber/Orange ASL is in temporary standby mode - e.g. due to a traffic sign not being read.

Related information Speed Limiter (p. 274)

DRIVER SUPPORT

280

Activate/deactivate Automatic Speed Limiter The automatic speed limiter function (ASL21) can be activated and deactivated as a supple-

ment to the speed limiter (SL22).

Activate ASL The Speed Sign Assist but- ton is located in the function view of the centre display.

To activate the automatic speed limiter:

1. Press the Speed Sign Assist button.

> ASL is set in standby mode, a green indi- cator appears on the button, and the driver display shows a sign symbol in the centre of the speedometer.

2. Press the steering wheel button .

> ASL is activated with the cars current speed.

NOTE

If the Automatic Speed Limiter function is activated, road sign information is shown in the driver display even if RSI is not activated.

To remove road sign information from the driver display, you must deactivate both Automatic Speed Limiter and RSI.

When the Automatic Speed Limiter func- tion is activated but RSI is deactivated, no warnings are given from RSI. In this situa- tion, settings for RSI cannot be adjusted either - to be able to adjust settings as well as receive warnings, RSI must be activated.

Deactivate ASL To deactivate the automatic speed limiter:

Tap on the Speed Sign Assist button in the function view.

> ASL is deactivated and the button's indi- cation becomes GREY - SL is activated instead.

WARNING

After switching from ASL to SL the car will no longer follow the signed speed limit but only the maximum speed stored in memory.

Related information Speed Limiter (p. 274)

21 Automatic Speed Limiter 22 Speed Limiter

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 281

Changing the tolerance for the Automatic Speed Limiter The Automatic Speed Limiter function (ASL23) can be set for different tolerance levels.

It is possible to increase/decrease the signed speed limit. If, for example, the car follows a signed speed limit of 70km/h (43 mph) the driver can instead choose to allow the car to maintain 75 km/h (47 mph).

Buttons and symbols for functions24.

Press the steering wheel button (1) until 70 km/h (43 mph) in the centre of the speedometer (4) changes to 75 km/h (47 mph).

> After which, the car uses the selected tol- erance 5 km/h (4 mph) as long as signs passed are showing 70 km/h (43 mph).

The tolerance is followed until a road sign with a lower or higher speed is passed - then the car follows the new signed speed limit instead and the tolerance is deleted from the memory.

If the Road Sign Information* function is activated, the signed speed limit will then be shown with a RED indicator on the speedometer.

The tolerance is adjusted in the same way as the speed setting is in the speed limiter.

NOTE

The maximum selectable tolerance is +/- 10 km/h (5 mph).

Related information Speed Limiter (p. 274)

Limitations for Automatic Speed Limiter Automatic speed limitation takes place using

speed information from the RSI25 function - not from the speed limit road signs that the car passes.

If RSI25 cannot interpret and provide speed infor- mation to the ASL, then the ASL is set in standby mode and changes over to SL. In such cases the driver must intervene and brake to a suitable speed.

The ASL will be reactivated when the RSI25 func- tion can once again interpret and provide speed information to the ASL.

See also the section "Limitations for Road Sign Information".

Related information Speed Limiter (p. 274)

23 Automatic Speed Limiter 24 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. 25 Road Sign Information - RSI

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.282

Cruise Control The cruise control (CC26) helps the driver main- tain an even speed, resulting in more relaxed driving on motorways and long, straight roads in regular traffic flows.

Overview

Buttons and symbols for functions27.

: Activates cruise control from standby mode and resumes stored speed

: Increases the stored speed

: From standby mode - activates cruise control and stores current speed

: From active mode - deactivates/ changes cruise control to standby mode

: Reduces stored speed

Marker for stored speed

The car's current speed

Stored speed

NOTE

In cars equipped with Adaptive Cruise Con- trol*, it is possible to switch between cruise control and Adaptive Cruise Control see the heading "Switch between CC and ACC".

WARNING

The cruise control function is supplemen- tary driver support intended to facilitate driving it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions.

The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system (see the list of links at the end of this article).

Cruise control is not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accord- ance with current traffic rules and regula- tions.

Related information Activating and starting Cruise Control

(p. 283)

Managing speed for the Cruise Control (p. 284)

Deactivate Cruise Control and set it in standby mode (p. 285)

26 Cruise Control 27 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

DRIVER SUPPORT

283

Reactivating Cruise Control from standby mode (p. 285)

Deactivating Cruise Control (p. 286)

Activating and starting Cruise Control The cruise control function (CC28) must first be selected and activated in order to be able to reg- ulate the speed.

NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

Set cruise control in standby mode To set cruise control in standby mode:

Press (1) or (3) to browse to the sym-

bol/function (4).

> The symbol is shown and the cruise con- trol can then be activated.

Activating/starting cruise control In order to start the Cruise control from the standby mode, the car's current speed must be 30 km/h (20 mph) or higher. The lowest speed that can be stored is 30 km/h (20 mph).

To start the cruise control:

With the symbol/function displayed,

press the steering wheel button (2).

> Cruise Control starts and the current speed becomes the stored speed.

NOTE

Cruise Control cannot be enabled at speeds below 30 km/h (20 mph).

Related information Cruise Control (p. 282)

28 Cruise Control

DRIVER SUPPORT

284

Managing speed for the Cruise Control Cruise control (CC29) can be set to different speeds.

Setting/changing the stored speed

NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

Change the set speed with short or long

presses on steering wheel button (1) or

(3):

Short press: Each press changes the speed in increments of +/- 5 km/h (+/- 5 mph).

Press and hold: Release the button when the speed indicator (4) has moved to the desired speed

The speed set after the last button press is stored in the memory.

If the driver increases the car's speed using the accelerator pedal before pressing the steering

wheel button (1), the speed stored will be the car's speed when the button is depressed, provided the driver's foot is on the accelerator pedal at the moment when the button is depressed.

A temporary increase in speed with the accelera- tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect the setting - the car returns to the last stored speed when the accelerator pedal is released.

Using engine braking instead of the foot brake With Cruise Control, speed is regulated with less frequent application of the foot brake. On a downhill gradient it may sometimes be desirable to start moving a little faster and limit the acceler- ation by engine braking. In this case the driver can temporarily disable foot brake application by Cruise Control.

To do so, proceed as follows:

Depress the accelerator pedal about halfway down and release.

> Cruise Control will disengage its auto- matic foot braking and then uses engine braking only.

Cruise control dependence on drive mode The cruise control's way of maintaining a speed may vary depending on the selected drive mode30.

Cruise control Eco Cruise In ECO drive mode the cruise control's accelera- tions and decelerations become smoother com- pared to other drive modes to optimise fuel and environmental economy. This can cause the car's speed to be temporarily above or below the set speed.

Cruise control Dynamic Cruise In Dynamic drive mode, the cruise control's accel- erations and decelerations are felt more strongly and seem more direct compared to other modes.

Related information Cruise Control (p. 282)

29 Cruise Control 30 See supplementary information in the section "Drive modes".

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

285

Deactivate Cruise Control and set it in standby mode Cruise control (CC31) can be temporarily deacti- vated so that it is set in the standby mode and can be reactivated later.

Deactivate Cruise Control and set in standby mode

NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

To set cruise control in standby mode:

Press the steering wheel button (2).

> The cruise control markings and symbols in the driver display change colour from WHITE to GREY - cruise control is now temporarily deactivated and the driver must then manually control the speed.

Standby mode on driver intervention The cruise control is temporarily deactivated and set in standby mode if:

the foot brake is used

the gear selector is moved to N position

the clutch pedal is held depressed for longer than 1 minute

the driver maintains a speed higher than the stored speed for longer than 1 minute.

The driver must then control the speed himself/ herself.

A temporary increase in speed with the accelera- tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect the setting - the car returns to the last stored speed when the accelerator pedal is released.

Automatic standby mode Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and set in standby mode if:

wheels lose traction

engine speed is too low/high

brake temperature is too high

speed falls below 30 km/h (20 mph).

The driver must then control the speed himself/ herself.

Related information Cruise Control (p. 282)

Reactivating Cruise Control from standby mode Cruise control (CC32) can be temporarily deacti- vated so that it is set in the standby mode and can be reactivated later.

Reactivating cruise control from standby mode

NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

To start cruise control from standby mode:

Press the steering wheel button (1).

> The cruise control markings and symbols in the driver display change colour from GREY to WHITE the car will now follow the most recently stored speed again.

31 Cruise Control 32 Cruise Control

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.286

or

To start cruise control from standby mode:

Press the steering wheel button (2).

> The cruise control markings and symbols in the driver display change colour from GREY to WHITE the car will now follow the current speed.

WARNING

A significant increase in speed may follow when the speed is resumed with the steering wheel button.

Related information Cruise Control (p. 282)

Deactivating Cruise Control Cruise Control CC can be deactivated.

Buttons and symbols for functions33.

To deactivate cruise control:

1. Press the steering wheel button (2).

> Cruise control is set in standby mode.

2. Press the steering wheel button (1) or (3) to change to another function.

> The driver display's symbol for cruise con-

trol (4) is extinguished - which deletes the set/stored speed.

3. Press the steering wheel button (2) again.

> Another function is activated.

NOTE

In cars equipped with Adaptive Cruise Con- trol*, it is possible to switch between cruise control and Adaptive Cruise Control see the heading "Switch between CC and ACC".

Related information Cruise Control (p. 282)

33 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 287

Distance Warning* The Distance Warning34 function can assist the driver to notice that the time interval to the vehi- cle ahead may be too short.

However, the requirement is that the car is equipped with a Head-up display to be able to show Distance Warning, which is then displayed with a symbol on the windscreen as long as the time interval to the vehicle ahead is shorter than the preselected value.

Distance warning is active at speeds above 30 km/h (20 mph) and only reacts to the vehicle ahead travelling in the same direction. No distance information is provided for oncoming, slow or stationary vehicles.

NOTE

Distance Alert is only available on cars that can display information on the wind- screen with a Head-up Display.

Distance warning is deactivated during the time the adaptive cruise control is active.

WARNING

Distance warning only reacts if the time win- dow to the vehicle ahead is shorter than the preset value the speed of the driver's vehi- cle is not affected.

NOTE

This function can come as either Standard or an Option depending on the market.

Related information Head-up display for Distance Warning

(p. 287)

Activating/deactivating Distance Warning (p. 288)

Setting the time interval for Distance Warn- ing (p. 288)

Limitations of Distance Warning (p. 289)

Head-up display for Distance Warning35

In cars equipped with head up display*, a sym- bol is shown on the windscreen for as long as the time interval to the vehicle ahead is shorter than the preset value.

Symbol for Distance Warning on the windscreen36.

However, this presupposes that the Show Driver Support function is activated via settings in the car's menu system; see the section "Head up display" for how this works.

34 Distance Alert 35 The Distance Warning function is only available in cars that can show information on the windscreen with a so-called Head-up display. 36 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.288

NOTE

Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light con- trasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the driver is not looking straight ahead may make the vis- ual warning signal in the windscreen difficult to recognise.

Related information Distance Warning* (p. 287)

Head-up display* (p. 134)

Activating/deactivating Distance Warning37

The Distance Warning function can be set with different time intervals or switched off.

On/Off Press the Distance Alert but- ton in the centre display func- tion view.

GREEN button indication - Distance Warning is activated.

GREY button indication - Distance Warning is deactivated.

Distance Warning is activated automatically each time the engine is started.

Related information Distance Warning* (p. 287)

Setting the time interval for Distance Warning38

The Distance Warning function can be set with different time intervals.

Different time intervals to the vehicle in front can be selected and shown in the driver display as 1-5 horizontal lines - the more lines the longer the time interval. One line represents about 1 second to the vehicle

in front, 5 lines represents about 3 seconds.

The same symbol is also shown when the adap- tive cruise control function is activated.

37 The Distance Warning function is only available in cars that can display information on the windscreen with a so-called Head-up display. 38 The Distance Warning function is only available in cars that can display information on the windscreen with a so-called Head-up display.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 289

Control for time interval.

Decrease time interval

Increase time interval

Distance indicator

Press the steering wheel button (1) or (2) to increase or decrease the time interval.

> The distance indicator (3) shows the cur- rent time interval.

NOTE

The higher the speed the longer the cal- culated distance in metres for a given time interval.

Only use the time intervals permitted by local traffic regulations.

The set time window is also used by the adaptive cruise control and Pilot Assist functions.

WARNING

Only use a time window that suits the current traffic conditions.

The driver should be aware that short time windows limit the amount of time available to react and take action if an unexpected traffic situation arises.

Related information Distance Warning* (p. 287)

Limitations of Distance Warning39

The Distance Warning function may have limita- tions in certain situations.

WARNING

The Distance Warning function is supple- mentary driver support intended to facili- tate driving and make it safer it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions.

The vehicle's size may affect the ability to detect, e.g. motorcycles, which could mean that the warning lamp illuminates at a shorter time window than set or that the warning is temporarily absent.

Extremely high speeds can cause the lamp to illuminate at a shorter time win- dow than that set due to limitations in radar unit range.

Distance Warning is not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accord- ance with current traffic rules and regula- tions.

39 The Distance Warning function is only available in cars that can display information on the windscreen with a so-called Head-up display.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.290

NOTE

The function uses the car's radar unit, which has some general limitations, see the section "Limitations for radar unit".

Related information Distance Warning* (p. 287)

Adaptive Cruise Control* The adaptive cruise control (ACC40) helps the driver to maintain an even speed combined with a pre-selected time interval to the vehicle ahead.

An adaptive cruise control provides a more relax- ing driving experience on long journeys on motor- ways and long straight main roads in smooth traf- fic flows.

The camera and radar unit measures the distance to the vehicle ahead41.

The driver selects the desired speed and a time interval to the vehicle ahead. If the camera and radar unit detects a slower vehicle in front of the car, the speed is adapted automatically via the preset time interval to the vehicle. When the road

is clear again the car returns to the selected speed.

WARNING

The adaptive cruise control function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions.

The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system (see the list of links at the end of this article).

The adaptive cruise control is not a sub- stitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsi- ble for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.

NOTE

This function can come as either Standard or an Option depending on the market.

40 Adaptive Cruise Control 41 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

291

Adaptive cruise control regulates the speed with acceleration and braking. It is normal for the brakes to emit a low sound when they are being used to adjust the speed.

The adaptive cruise control aims to control the speed in a smooth way. In situations that demand sudden braking the driver must brake himself/ herself. This applies in cases of large speed dif- ferences or if the vehicle in front brakes sud- denly. Due to the limitations of the radar unit, braking may come unexpectedly or not at all.

The adaptive cruise control aims to follow the vehicle ahead in the same lane at a time interval set by the driver. If the radar unit cannot see any vehicle in front then the car will instead maintain the speed set and stored by the driver. This also takes place if the speed of the vehicle ahead increases and exceeds the stored speed.

The following applies for cars with automatic gearbox:

Adaptive cruise control can follow another vehicle at speed from 0 km/h up to 200 km/h (125 mph).

The following applies for cars with manual gear- box:

The Adaptive cruise control can follow another vehicle at speeds from 30 km/h (20 mph) up to 200 km/h (125 mph).

WARNING

Adaptive cruise control is not a collision avoidance system. The driver is always responsible and must intervene if the sys- tem does not detect a vehicle ahead.

The adaptive cruise control does not brake for humans or animals, and not for small vehicles such as bicycles and motorcycles. Nor for low trailers, oncom- ing, slow or stationary vehicles and objects.

Do not use the adaptive cruise control in demanding situations, such as in city traf- fic, at junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot of water or slush on the road, in heavy rain/snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads or on slip roads.

IMPORTANT

Maintenance of adaptive cruise control com- ponents must only be performed at a work- shop - an authorised Volvo workshop is rec- ommended.

Overview

Controls

Buttons and symbols for functions41.

: Activates the adaptive cruise control from standby mode and resumes stored speed

: Increases the stored speed

: From standby mode - activates the adaptive cruise control and stores current speed

: From active mode - deactivates/ changes the adaptive cruise control to standby mode

: Reduces stored speed

Increases the time interval to vehicles ahead

41 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.292

Reduces the time interval to vehicles ahead

Target vehicle indicator: ACC has detected and is following a target vehicle at the preset time interval

Symbol for time interval to vehicles ahead

NOTE

In cars equipped with Adaptive Cruise Con- trol*, it is possible to switch between cruise control and Adaptive Cruise Control see the heading "Switch between CC and ACC".

Driver display

Indication of speeds41.

Stored speed

Speed of vehicle ahead.

Current speed of your car.

To see different combinations of symbols depending on traffic situation - see the heading "Symbols and messages for the adaptive cruise control".

Related information Adaptive Cruise Control and Collision risk

warning (p. 293)

Head-up display for Adaptive Cruise Control if there is a risk of collision (p. 293)

Activating and starting Adaptive Cruise Con- trol (p. 294)

Managing speed with Adaptive Cruise Con- trol (p. 295)

Setting time interval for Adaptive Cruise Con- trol (p. 296)

Deactivating/reactivating Adaptive Cruise Control (p. 297)

Overtaking assistance with Adaptive Cruise Control (p. 299)

Starting overtaking assistance with Adaptive Cruise Control (p. 299)

Limitations for overtaking assistance with Adaptive Cruise Control (p. 299)

Changing target with Adaptive Cruise Control (p. 300)

Automatic braking with Adaptive Cruise Con- trol (p. 300)

Limitations for Adaptive Cruise Control (p. 301)

Change between Cruise Control and Adap- tive Cruise Control (p. 302)

Symbols and messages for Adaptive Cruise Control (p. 304)

41 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 293

Adaptive Cruise Control and Collision risk warning

Audio and symbol for collision warning42.

Acoustic warning signal in the event of a risk of collision

Warning signal in the event of a risk of colli- sion

Distance measurement with the camera and radar unit

Adaptive Cruise Control uses approx. 40% of the capacity of the foot brake. If the car needs to be braked more heavily than the adaptive cruise control is capable of and the driver does not brake, the warning lamp and acoustic warning are activated to alert the driver that immediate inter- vention is required.

WARNING

The adaptive cruise control only warns of vehicles which its radar unit has detected - hence a warning may not be given, or it may be given with a certain delay.

Never wait for a warning. Apply the brakes when the situation requires.

Related information Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 290)

Head-up display for Adaptive Cruise Control if there is a risk of collision In cars equipped with a head up display*, the warning is shown on the windscreen by a flash- ing symbol.

Symbol for collision warning on the windscreen43.

NOTE

Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light con- trasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the driver is not looking straight ahead may make the vis- ual warning signal in the windscreen difficult to recognise.

Related information Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 290)

42 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. 43 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.294

Activating and starting Adaptive Cruise Control Adaptive cruise control (ACC44) must first be activated and then started if it is to control the speed and distance.

Setting the adaptive cruise control in standby mode

NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

Immediately after the engine is started the Adap- tive Cruise Control is in the standby mode. To set it in standby mode from active mode, proceed as follows:

Press steering wheel button (2) or (3) to

scroll to the symbol/function (4).

> The symbol is displayed and Adaptive Cruise Control is set in standby mode.

Starting/activating the adaptive cruise control In order to start the ACC the following require- ments apply:

The driver's seatbelt must be buckled and the driver's door must be closed.

There must be a vehicle (the "target vehicle") within reasonable distance in front of the car, or the current speed must be at least 15 km/h (9 mph).

For cars with manual gearbox. Speed must be at the lowest 30 km/h (20 mph).

NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

With the symbol/function (4) displayed,

press the steering wheel button (1).

> Adaptive cruise control starts and the cur- rent speed is stored, which is shown in figures in the centre of the speedometer.

The time interval is only adjusted to the vehicle ahead by the ACC when the distance symbol shows two vehicles.

At the same time a speed range is marked.

The higher speed is the stored/selected speed and the lower speed is that of the vehi- cle ahead (target vehicle).

Related information Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 290)

44 Adaptive Cruise Control

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 295

Managing speed with Adaptive Cruise Control The adaptive cruise control (ACC45) can be set to different speeds.

Setting/changing the stored speed

NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model and market.

: Increases the stored speed.

: Reduces stored speed.

Stored speed.

Change the set speed with short or long

presses on steering wheel button (1) or

(2):

Short press: Each press changes the speed in increments of +/- 5 km/h (+/- 5 mph).

Press and hold: Release the button when the speed indicator (3) has moved to the desired speed.

The speed set after the last button press is stored in the memory.

If the driver increases the cars speed using the accelerator pedal before pressing the steering

wheel button , the speed stored will be the cars speed when the button is depressed, provi- ded the drivers foot is on the accelerator pedal at the moment when the button is depressed.

A temporary increase in speed with the accelera- tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect the setting - the car returns to the last stored speed when the accelerator pedal is released.

Automatic gearbox Adaptive cruise control can follow another vehicle at speeds from 0 km/h up to 200 km/h (125 mph).

Note that the lowest programmable speed for the adaptive cruise control is 30 km/h (20 mph) -

even though it is capable of following another vehicle down to 0 km/h, a speed lower than 30 km/h (20 mph) cannot be selected/stored.

The maximum speed selectable is 200 km/h (125 mph).

Manual gearbox The Adaptive cruise control can follow another vehicle at speeds from 30 km/h (20 mph) up to 200 km/h (125 mph).

The lowest programmable speed for the adaptive cruise control is 30 km/h (20 mph) - the maxi- mum speed is 200 km/h (125 mph).

Related information Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 290)

45 Adaptive Cruise Control

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.296

Setting time interval for Adaptive Cruise Control The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC46) can be set to different time intervals.

Different time intervals to the vehicle in front can be selected and shown in the driver display as 1-5 horizontal lines - the more lines the longer the time interval. One line represents about 1 second to the vehicle

in front, 5 lines represents about 3 seconds.

The same symbol is also shown when the Dis- tance Warning function is activated.

NOTE

When the symbol in the driver display shows two cars, ACC is following the vehicle in front at a pre-set time interval.

When only one car is shown, there is no vehi- cle within a reasonable distance ahead.

Control for time interval47.

Decrease time interval

Increase time interval

Distance indicator

Press the steering wheel button (1) or (2) to increase or decrease the time interval.

> The distance indicator (3) shows the cur- rent time interval.

The adaptive cruise control allows the time inter- val to vary significantly in certain situations in order to allow the car to follow the vehicle in front smoothly and comfortably. At low speed, when the distances are short, the adaptive cruise con- trol increases the time interval slightly.

NOTE

The higher the speed the longer the cal- culated distance in metres for a given time interval.

Only use the time intervals permitted by local traffic regulations.

If the adaptive cruise control does not seem to respond with a speed increase when activated, it may be because the time window to the vehicle ahead is shorter than the set time window.

WARNING

Only use a time window that suits the current traffic conditions.

The driver should be aware that short time windows limit the amount of time available to react and take action if an unexpected traffic situation arises.

Select how ACC shall maintain the distance* to the vehicle ahead The driver can select different driving styles for how the Adaptive cruise control should maintain the preset time interval to the vehicle ahead. Selection is made via the drive mode control DRIVE MODE.

46 Adaptive Cruise Control 47 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 297

Select one of the following options:

Eco - ACC focuses on optimal fuel economy, which means longer time interval to the vehi- cle ahead.

Comfort - ACC focuses on following the set time interval to the vehicle ahead as smoothly as possible.

Dynamic - ACC focuses on following the set time interval to the vehicle ahead more closely, which in certain cases may mean heavier acceleration and braking.

See further information in the "Drive modes" sec- tions.

Related information Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 290)

Deactivating/reactivating Adaptive Cruise Control The Adaptive cruise control (ACC48) can be temporarily deactivated so that it is set in the standby mode and can later be reactivated.

Deactivate Adaptive Cruise Control and set it in standby mode

NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

To temporarily switch off Adaptive Cruise Control and set it in standby mode:

Press the steering wheel button (2).

> The symbol on the driver display changes colour from WHITE to GREY and the stored speed in the centre of the speedometer changes from BEIGE to GREY.

WARNING

With the adaptive cruise control is in standby mode, the driver must intervene and regulate both speed and distance to the vehicle ahead.

When the adaptive cruise control is in standby mode and the car comes too close to a vehicle ahead, the driver is warned of the short distance by the Distance Warn- ing function instead.

48 Adaptive Cruise Control

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.298

Standby mode on driver intervention The Adaptive cruise control is temporarily deacti- vated and set in standby mode if:

the foot brake is used.

the gear selector is moved to N position.

the driver maintains a speed higher than the stored speed for longer than 1 minute.

the clutch pedal is depressed for approx. 1 minute - applies to cars with manual gearbox.

A temporary increase in speed with the accelera- tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect the setting - the car returns to the last stored speed when the accelerator pedal is released.

Automatic standby mode The adaptive cruise control is dependent on other systems, e.g. Electronic Stability Control ESC49. If any of the other systems stops working, the adaptive cruise control is deactivated auto- matically.

WARNING

With automatic standby mode, the driver is warned via an acoustic signal and a message on the driver display.

The driver must then regulate the car's speed, apply the brakes as needed and maintain a safe distance to other vehicles.

Automatic standby mode may occur if:

the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and ACC is uncertain whether the vehicle ahead is a stationary vehicle or an object, such as a speed bump.

the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and the vehicle ahead turns off so that ACC no longer has a vehicle to follow.

speed is reduced to below 30 km/h (20 mph) - only applies to cars with manual gearbox.

the driver opens the door.

the driver takes off the seatbelt.

engine speed is too low/high.

one or more wheels lose traction.

brake temperature is high.

the parking brake is applied.

the camera and radar unit is covered by e.g. snow or heavy rainfall (camera lens/radio waves are blocked).

Reactivating adaptive cruise control from standby mode

NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

To reactivate ACC from standby mode:

Press the steering wheel button (1).

> The speed is then set to the most recently stored speed.

WARNING

A significant increase in speed may follow when the speed is resumed with the steering wheel button.

Related information Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 290)

49 Electronic Stability Control

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 299

Overtaking assistance with Adaptive Cruise Control Adaptive cruise control (ACC50) can assist the driver when overtaking other vehicles.

How overtaking assistance works When ACC is following another vehicle and the driver indicates the intention to overtake by acti- vating the direction indicator51, adaptive cruise control helps by accelerating the vehicle towards the vehicle in front before the drivers vehicle reaches the overtaking lane.

The function then delays reducing speed in order to avoid premature braking when the drivers car is approaching a slower vehicle.

The function remains active until the drivers vehi- cle has cleared the overtaken vehicle.

WARNING

Be aware that this function can be activated in more situations than during overtaking, e.g. when a direction indicator is used to indicate a change of lane or exit to another road the car will then accelerate briefly.

Related information Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 290)

Starting overtaking assistance with Adaptive Cruise Control

Continuation for Overtaking Assistance The following conditions must exist for Overtak- ing Assistance to be activated:

there must be a vehicle in front (the target vehicle)

your car's current speed is at least 70 km/h (43 mph)

the stored ACC speed must be high enough for overtaking to take place safely.

Starting Overtaking Assistance To start the Overtaking Assistance:

Activate the direction indicator.

Use the left direction indicator in a car with the steering wheel on the left, or the right direction indicator in a car with the steering wheel on the right.

> Overtaking Assistance is started.

Related information Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 290)

Limitations for overtaking assistance with Adaptive Cruise Control The overtaking assistance function may have lim- ited functionality in certain situations.

WARNING

When using the Overtaking Assistance Sys- tem, the driver should be aware that there may be undesired acceleration if the condi- tions suddenly change.

Some situations should therefore be avoided, such as if:

the car is approaching an exit for turn-of that is in the same direction as overtaking would normally occur.

the vehicle ahead slows down before the driver's car has crossed over into the overtaking lane

the traffic in the overtaking lane slows down

a right-hand drive car is driven in a county with left-hand traffic (or vice versa).

Situations of this kind can be avoided by tempo- rarily setting ACC52 in the standby mode.

Related information Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 290)

50 Adaptive Cruise Control 51 On left flash only in left-hand-drive car, or right flash in right-hand-drive car. 52 Adaptive Cruise Control

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.300

Changing target with Adaptive Cruise Control In combination with automatic gearbox, the

adaptive cruise control (ACC53) has functionality for change of target at certain speeds.

Change of target

If the target vehicle in front suddenly turns then there may be stationary traffic in front.

When adaptive cruise control is following another vehicle at speeds below 30 km/h (20 mph) and changes target from a moving to a stationary vehicle, the adaptive cruise control will slow down for the stationary vehicle.

WARNING

When the adaptive cruise control is following another vehicle at speeds in excess of approx. 30 km/h (20 mph) and the target is changed from a moving vehicle to a stationary vehicle, the adaptive cruise control will ignore the stationary vehicle and instead accelerate to the stored speed.

The driver must then intervene him/ herself and brake.

Automatic standby mode with change of target The adaptive cruise control is disengaged and set in standby mode:

when the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and the adaptive cruise control is uncertain whether the target object is a stationary vehi- cle or some other object, such as a speed bump.

when the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and the vehicle ahead turns off so the adap- tive cruise control no longer has a vehicle to follow.

Related information Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 290)

Automatic braking with Adaptive Cruise Control The Adaptive cruise control (ACC54) has a spe- cial brake function in slow traffic and while sta- tionary.

Brake function in slow queues and while stationary For shorter stops in connection with inching in slow traffic or at traffic lights driving is automati- cally resumed if the stops do not exceed about 3 seconds - if it takes longer before the car in front starts moving again then the adaptive cruise control is set in standby mode with automatic braking.

The Adaptive Cruise Control is reactivated in one of the following ways:

Press the steering wheel button .

Depress the accelerator pedal.

> The Adaptive Cruise Control resumes fol- lowing the vehicle ahead if it starts mov- ing forward within 6 seconds.

53 Adaptive Cruise Control 54 Adaptive Cruise Control

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 301

NOTE

ACC can keep the car stationary for a maxi- mum of 5 minutes. After this the parking brake is applied and adaptive cruise control is disengaged.

The parking brake must be released before the adaptive cruise control can be reactivated.

Cessation of automatic braking In some situations, automatic braking ceases on reaching 0 km/h and Adaptive Cruise Control is set in standby mode. This means that the brakes are released and the car may start to roll - the driver must therefore intervene and brake the car himself/herself to keep it stationary.

This may take place in the following situations:

the driver puts his/her foot on the brake pedal

the parking brake is applied

the gear selector is moved to P, N, or R posi- tion

the driver sets the adaptive cruise control in the standby mode.

Automatic activation of parking brake In certain situations the parking brake is applied to keep the car stationary.

This takes place if the adaptive cruise control is holding the car stationary with the foot brake and:

the driver opens the door or takes off his/her seatbelt

ACC has kept the car stationary for more than approx. 5 minutes

the brakes have overheated

the driver switches the engine off manually.

Related information Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 290)

Limitations for Adaptive Cruise Control Adaptive cruise control (ACC55) may have limita- tions in certain situations.

Steep roads and/or heavy load Bear in mind that the adaptive cruise control is primarily intended for use when driving on level road surfaces. The function may have difficulty in keeping the correct distance from the vehicle ahead when driving on steep downhill slopes - in which case, be extra attentive and ready to brake.

Do not use adaptive cruise control if the car has a heavy load or a trailer is connected to the car.

Miscellaneous Drive mode Off Road cannot be selected

when the adaptive cruise control is activated.

NOTE

The function uses the car's camera unit, which has some general limitations, see the "Limitations for camera unit" section.

NOTE

The function uses the car's radar unit, which has some general limitations, see the section "Limitations for radar unit".

55 Adaptive Cruise Control

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.302

Related information Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 290)

Change between Cruise Control and Adaptive Cruise Control In a car with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC56) the driver can change between Cruise Control

(CC57) and ACC.

A symbol in the driver display shows which cruise control is active:

CC ACC

A A

Cruise control Adaptive cruise control

A WHITE symbol: Function active, GREY symbol: Standby mode

Changing from ACC to CC Proceed as follows:

1. Set adaptive cruise control to standby mode

using steering wheel button .

2. Press the Cruise Control button in the cen- tre display's function view - the button's indi- cator changes colour from GREY to GREEN.

> The symbol in the driver display changes

from ACC to CC. Adap- tive Cruise Control is now switched off and Cruise Control is set to standby mode.

3. Press the steering wheel button .

> Cruise control starts and stores the cur- rent speed.

WARNING

Switching from ACC to CC means that the car:

no longer maintains a preset time interval to the vehicle ahead.

only follows the stored speed, and the driver must therefore apply the brakes when necessary.

If CC is active when the engine is switched off, ACC will be activated automatically the next time the engine is started.

Changing from CC to ACC Proceed as follows:

1. Set cruise control to standby mode using the

steering wheel button.

56 Adaptive Cruise Control 57 Cruise Control

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 303

2. Tap on the Cruise Control button in the function view - the button's indicator changes colour from GREEN to GREY.

> The symbol in the driver display changes

from CC to ACC. Adap- tive Cruise Control is now activated and set to standby mode.

3. Press the steering wheel button .

> Adaptive cruise control starts and stores the current speed, together with the pre- set time interval to the vehicle ahead.

Related information Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 290)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.304

Symbols and messages for Adaptive Cruise Control A number of symbols and messages regarding

the adaptive cruise control (ACC58) can be shown via the driver display and/or the head-up display*.

Here are some examples59.

The previous illustration60 shows that the adap- tive cruise control is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph) and that there is no vehicle ahead to follow.

The previous illustration60 shows that the adap- tive cruise control is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph) and at the same time is following a vehicle ahead which is keeping the same speed.

58 Adaptive Cruise Control 59 In the following illustrative example, the RSI (Road Sign Information) function informs the driver that the maximum permitted speed is 130 km/h (80 mph). 60 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 305

Symbol Message Specification

The symbol is WHITE. The car is maintaining the stored/selected speed.

Adaptive cruise

Unavailable

The symbol is GREY.

Adaptive cruise control is set to standby mode.

Adaptive cruise

Service required

The symbol is GREY.

The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Windscreen sensor

Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual

Clean the windscreen in front of the camera and radar unit's detectors.

A text message can be cleared by briefly press-

ing the button, located in the centre of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.

If a message remains: Contact a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 290)

DRIVER SUPPORT

306

Pilot Assist Pilot Assist helps the driver to drive the car between the lane's side markings using steering assistance as well as to maintain an even speed, combined with a preselected time interval to the vehicle ahead.

How Pilot Assist works The Pilot Assist function is primarily intended for use on motorways and similar major roads where it can contribute to more comfortable driving and a more relaxed driving experience.

The camera and radar unit measures the distance to the vehicle ahead and detects side markings61.

Camera and radar unit

Distance readers

Readers, side markings

The driver selects the desired speed and a time interval to the vehicle ahead. Pilot Assist scans the distance to the vehicle ahead and the lane's side markings on the road surface using the camera and radar unit. The preset time interval is maintained with automatic speed adjustment whilst the steering assistance helps to position the car in the lane.

Pilot Assist steering assistance takes into account the speed of the preceding car and the lane markings. The driver can at any time ignore the Pilot Assist steering recommendation and steer in another direction, e.g. to change lane or avoid an obstruction on the road.

If Pilot Assist cannot interpret the lane unambig- uously, e.g. if the camera and radar unit does not see the lane's side markings, Pilot Assist tempo- rarily deactivates steering assistance, but resumes it if the lane can be interpreted again - although the speed and distance control func- tions remain active.

WARNING

Pilot Assist steering assistance is automati- cally deactivated and is resumed without prior warning.

The current status of steering assistance is indicated by the colour of the steering wheel's symbol:

GREEN steering wheel indi- cates active steering assis-

tance

GREY steering wheel (as in illustration) indi- cates deactivated steering assistance.

61 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

307

WARNING

The Pilot Assist function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driv- ing and make it safer it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions.

The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system (see the list of links at the end of this article).

Pilot Assist must only be used if there are clear lane lines painted on each side of the lane. All other use involves increased risk of contact with surrounding obstacles that cannot be detected by the function.

Pilot Assist is not a substitute for the driv- er's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, positioned cor- rectly in the lane, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.

NOTE

This function can come as either Standard or an Option depending on the market.

Pilot Assist regulates the speed with acceleration and braking. It is normal for the brakes to emit a low sound when they are being used to adjust the speed.

Pilot Assist attempts to regulate the speed smoothly. In situations that demand sudden brak- ing the driver must brake himself/herself. This applies in cases of large speed differences or if the car in front brakes suddenly. Due to the limi- tations of the camera and radar unit, braking may come unexpectedly or not at all.

Pilot Assist aims to follow the vehicle ahead in the same lane at a time interval set by the driver. If the radar unit cannot see any vehicle in front then the car will instead maintain the speed set and stored by the driver. This also takes place if the speed of the vehicle ahead increases and exceeds the stored speed.

The following applies for cars with automatic gearbox:

Pilot Assist can follow another vehicle at speeds from 0 km/h up to 200 km/h (125 mph).

Pilot Assist can give steering assistance from almost stationary up to 140 km/h (87 mph).

The following applies for cars with manual gear- box:

Pilot Assist can follow another vehicle at speeds from 30 km/h (20 mph) up to 200 km/h (125 mph).

Pilot Assist can give steering assistance from 30 km/h (20 mph) up to 140 km/h (87 mph).

WARNING

Pilot Assist is not a collision avoidance system. The driver must intervene if the system does not detect a vehicle in front.

Pilot Assist does not brake for people, animals, objects, small vehicles (e.g. cycles and motorcycles), low trailers as well as oncoming, slow or stationary vehi- cles.

Do not use Pilot Assist in demanding sit- uations, such as in city traffic, at junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot of water or slush on the road, in heavy rain/snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads, on slip roads, or with a trailer connected to the car.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

308

IMPORTANT

Maintenance of Pilot Assist internal compo- nents must only be performed at a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recom- mended.

Round bends and when the road splits Pilot Assist interacts with the driver, who should therefore not await the steering assistance from Pilot Assist but should always be prepared to increase his/her own steering input, especially on bends.

When the car approaches an exit or if the lane splits, the driver should steer towards the desired lane so that Pilot Assist can specify the desired direction.

Pilot Assist strives to keep the car in the middle of the lane When Pilot Assist helps to steer, it strives to posi- tion the car in between the lane markings and therefore it is recommended to let the car find the optimal placement to achieve as smooth a driving experience as possible. The driver checks that the car is positioned safely in the lane, and always has the ability to adjust the position by making his/her own steering corrections.

If Pilot Assist does not position the car in an appropriate way in the lane, it is recommended to

turn Pilot Assist off or switch to Adaptive cruise control.

Overview

Controls

Buttons and symbols for functions61.

: Activates Pilot Assist from standby mode and resumes the stored speed and time interval

: Increases the stored speed

: From standby mode - activates Pilot Assist and stores the current speed

: From active mode - deactivates/ changes Pilot Assist to standby mode

: Switches from Pilot Assist to adaptive cruise control

: Reduces stored speed

Increases the time interval to vehicles ahead

: Switches from adaptive cruise control to Pilot Assist

Reduces the time interval to vehicles ahead

Function symbol

Symbols for target vehicle and time interval to vehicles ahead

Symbol for activated/deactivated steering assistance

61 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 309

Driver display

Indication of speeds61.

Stored speed

Speed of vehicle ahead

Current speed of your car

To see different combinations of symbols depending on traffic situation - see the heading "Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist".

Related information Pilot Assist and Collision risk warning

(p. 309)

Head-up display for Pilot Assist if there is a risk of collision (p. 310)

Activating and starting Pilot Assist (p. 311)

Managing speed for Pilot Assist (p. 312)

Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist (p. 313)

Deactivating/activating Pilot Assist (p. 314)

Overtaking assistance with Pilot Assist (p. 316)

Start overtaking assistance with Pilot Assist (p. 316)

Limitations for overtaking assistance with Pilot Assist (p. 317)

Change the target with Pilot Assist (p. 317)

Automatic braking with Pilot Assist (p. 318)

Limitations of Pilot Assist (p. 318)

Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist* (p. 320)

Pilot Assist and Collision risk warning

61 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.310

Collision risk warning

Audio and symbol for collision warning62.

Acoustic warning signal in the event of a risk of collision

Warning signal in the event of a risk of colli- sion

Distance measurement with the camera and radar unit

Pilot Assist uses approx. 40% of the foot brake's capacity. If the car needs to be braked more heavily than Pilot Assist is capable of and the driver does not brake, the warning lamp and acoustic warning are activated to alert the driver that immediate intervention is required.

WARNING

Pilot Assist only gives warning about vehicles detected by its camera and radar unit there- fore a warning may not occur or be delayed.

Never wait for a warning. Apply the brakes when the situation requires!

Related information Pilot Assist (p. 306)

Head-up display for Pilot Assist if there is a risk of collision In cars equipped with a head up display*, the warning is shown on the windscreen by a flash- ing symbol.

Symbol for collision warning on the windscreen63.

NOTE

Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light con- trasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the driver is not looking straight ahead may make the vis- ual warning signal in the windscreen difficult to recognise.

Related information Pilot Assist (p. 306)

62 The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model. 63 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

DRIVER SUPPORT

311

Activating and starting Pilot Assist Pilot Assist must first be activated and then started to be able to control speed and distance and to give steering assistance.

NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

In order to start the Pilot Assist it is required that:

The driver's seatbelt must be buckled and the driver's door must be closed.

There must be a vehicle (the "target vehicle") within reasonable distance in front of the car, or the current speed must be at least 15 km/h (9 mph).

For cars with manual gearbox. Speed must be at the lowest 30 km/h (20 mph).

With the Adaptive cruise control in standby mode:

1. Press the steering wheel button (6).

> The symbol changes to Pilot Assist in standby mode (8).

2. Press the steering wheel button (2).

> Pilot Assist is started and current speed is stored, which is shown with figures in the centre of the speedometer.

...or...

With the Adaptive cruise control started:

Press the steering wheel button (6).

> Pilot Assist is started.

Pilot Assist steering assistance is only active when the steering wheel symbol (2) has changed from GREY to GREEN.

Pilot Assist only regulates the time interval to the vehicle

ahead when the distance symbol shows a vehicle (1) above the steering wheel symbol.

At the same time a speed range is marked.

The higher speed is the stored/selected speed and the lower speed is that of the vehi- cle ahead (target vehicle).

Hands on the steering wheel In order for Pilot Assist to function, the drivers hands must be on the steering wheel. If Pilot Assist detects that the driver is not holding the steering wheel, the driver is prompted to actively steer the car via a text message and an acoustic signal.

If Pilot Assist still cannot detect that the driver is holding the steering wheel, the function shifts to standby mode. Pilot Assist must then be restar-

ted with the steering wheel button .

NOTE

Note that Pilot Assist only works when the driver has hands on the steering wheel.

Related information Pilot Assist (p. 306)

DRIVER SUPPORT

312

Managing speed for Pilot Assist Pilot Assist can be set to different speeds.

Setting/changing the stored speed

NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model and market.

: Increases the stored speed

: Reduces stored speed

Stored speed

Change the set speed with short or long

presses on steering wheel button (1) or

(2):

Short press: Each press changes the speed in increments of +/- 5 km/h (+/- 5 mph).

Press and hold: Release the button when the speed indicator (3) has moved to the desired speed.

The speed set after the last button press is stored in the memory.

If the driver increases the cars speed using the accelerator pedal before pressing the steering

wheel button , the speed stored will be the cars speed when the button is depressed, provi- ded the drivers foot is on the accelerator pedal at the moment when the button is depressed.

A temporary increase in speed with the accelera- tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect the setting - the car returns to the last stored speed when the accelerator pedal is released.

Automatic gearbox Pilot Assist can follow another vehicle at speeds from 0 km/h up to 200 km/h (125 mph).

Note that the lowest programmable speed for Pilot Assist is 30 km/h (20 mph) - even though it is capable of following another vehicle down to 0 km/h, a speed lower than 30 km/h (20 mph) cannot be selected/stored.

The maximum speed selectable is 200 km/h (125 mph).

Manual gearbox Pilot Assist can follow another vehicle at speeds from 30 km/h (20 mph) up to 200 km/h (125 mph).

The lowest programmable speed for Pilot Assist is 30 km/h (20 mph) - the maximum speed is 200 km/h (125 mph).

Related information Pilot Assist (p. 306)

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 313

Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist Pilot Assist can be set with different time inter- vals.

Different time intervals to the vehicle in front can be selected and shown in the driver display as 1-5 horizontal lines - the more lines the longer the time interval. One line represents about 1 second to the vehicle

in front, 5 lines represents about 3 seconds.

NOTE

When the symbol in the driver display shows a car and a steering wheel, Pilot Assist fol- lows a vehicle in front at a preset time gap.

When only one steering wheel is shown, there is no vehicle within a reasonable distance ahead.

Control for time interval64.

Decrease time interval

Increase time interval

Distance indicator

Press the steering wheel button (1) or (2) to increase or decrease the time interval.

> The distance indicator (3) shows the cur- rent time interval.

In order to follow the vehicle ahead in a smooth and comfortable way, Pilot Assist allows the time interval to vary noticeably in certain conditions. For example, at low speed, when the distances become short, Pilot Assist increases the time interval slightly.

NOTE

The higher the speed the longer the cal- culated distance in metres for a given time interval.

Only use the time intervals permitted by local traffic regulations.

If Pilot Assist does not seem to respond with a speed increase when activated, it may be because the time window to the vehicle ahead is shorter than the set time window.

WARNING

Only use a time window that suits the current traffic conditions.

The driver should be aware that short time windows limit the amount of time available to react and take action if an unexpected traffic situation arises.

Select how Pilot Assist shall maintain the distance* to the vehicle ahead The driver can select different driving styles for how Pilot Assist should maintain the preset time interval to the vehicle ahead. Selection is made via the drive mode control DRIVE MODE.

64 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

314

Select one of the following options:

Eco - Pilot Assist focuses on optimal fuel economy, which means longer time interval to the vehicle ahead.

Comfort - Pilot Assist focuses on following the set time interval to the vehicle ahead as smoothly as possible.

Dynamic - Pilot Assist focuses on following the set time interval to the vehicle ahead more closely, which in certain cases may mean heavier acceleration and braking.

See further information in the "Drive modes" sec- tions.

Related information Pilot Assist (p. 306)

Deactivating/activating Pilot Assist Pilot Assist can be temporarily deactivated so that it is set in the standby mode and can be reactivated later.

Deactivating and setting Pilot Assist in standby mode

NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

To temporarily switch off Pilot Assist and set it in standby mode:

Press the steering wheel button (2).

> Pilot Assist is set in standby mode - the symbol (8) in the driver display changes colour from WHITE to GREY and the stored speed in the centre of the speed- ometer changes from BEIGE to GREY.

...or...

Press the steering wheel button (3).

> Pilot Assist is switched off and changes to the Adaptive cruise control in active mode.

WARNING

With Pilot Assist in standby mode, the driver must intervene and steer, regulat- ing both speed and distance to the vehi- cle ahead.

When Pilot Assist is in standby mode and the car comes too close to a vehicle ahead, the driver is warned of the short distance by the Distance Warning func- tion instead.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

315

Standby mode on driver intervention Pilot Assist is temporarily deactivated and set in standby mode if:

the foot brake is used.

the gear selector is moved to N position.

the direction indicators are used for longer than 1 minute.

the driver maintains a speed higher than the stored speed for longer than 1 minute.

the clutch pedal is depressed for approx. 1 minute - applies to cars with man- ual gearbox.

A temporary increase in speed with the accelera- tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect the setting - the car returns to the last stored speed when the accelerator pedal is released.

When the direction indicators are used, Pilot Assist steering assistance is temporarily disen- gaged. When this is no longer the case, steering assistance is automatically reactivated if the lane's side markings can still be detected.

Automatic standby mode Pilot Assist is dependent on other systems, e.g. stability control/anti-skid ESC65. If any of these other systems stops working, Pilot Assist is switched off automatically.

WARNING

With automatic standby mode, the driver is warned via an acoustic signal and a message on the driver display.

The driver must then regulate the car's speed, apply the brakes as needed and maintain a safe distance to other vehicles.

Automatic standby mode may occur if, for exam- ple:

the driver opens the door.

brake temperature is high.

the driver's hands are not on the steering wheel.

the parking brake is applied.

engine speed is too low/high.

the driver takes off the seatbelt.

one or more wheels lose traction.

the camera and radar unit is covered by e.g. snow or heavy rainfall (camera lens/radio waves are blocked).

the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and Pilot Assist is uncertain whether the vehicle ahead is a stationary vehicle or an object, such as a speed bump.

the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and the vehicle ahead turns off so that Pilot Assist no longer has a vehicle to follow.

speed is reduced to below 30 km/h (20 mph) - only applies to cars with manual gearbox.

Reactivating Pilot Assist from the standby mode

NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

To reactivate Pilot Assist:

Press the steering wheel button (1).

> The speed is then set to the most recently stored speed.

65 Electronic Stability Control

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

316

WARNING

A significant increase in speed may follow when the speed is resumed with the steering wheel button.

Related information Pilot Assist (p. 306)

Overtaking assistance with Pilot Assist Pilot Assist can help the driver when overtaking other vehicles.

How overtaking assistance works When Pilot Assist is following another vehicle and the driver indicates the intention to overtake by activating the direction indicator66, Pilot Assist helps by accelerating the vehicle towards the vehicle in front before the drivers vehicle rea- ches the overtaking lane.

The function then delays reducing speed in order to avoid premature braking when the drivers car is approaching a slower vehicle.

The function remains active until the drivers vehi- cle has cleared the overtaken vehicle.

WARNING

Be aware that this function can be activated in more situations than during overtaking, e.g. when a direction indicator is used to indicate a change of lane or exit to another road the car will then accelerate briefly.

Related information Pilot Assist (p. 306)

Start overtaking assistance with Pilot Assist

Continuation for Overtaking Assistance The following conditions must exist for Overtak- ing Assistance to be activated:

there must be a vehicle in front (the target vehicle)

your car's current speed is at least 70 km/h (43 mph)

the stored Pilot Assist speed must be high enough for overtaking to take place safely.

Starting Overtaking Assistance To start the Overtaking Assistance:

Activate the direction indicator.

Use the left direction indicator in a car with the steering wheel on the left, or the right direction indicator in a car with the steering wheel on the right.

> Overtaking Assistance is started.

Related information Pilot Assist (p. 306)

66 On left flash only in left-hand-drive car, or right flash in right-hand-drive car.

DRIVER SUPPORT

317

Limitations for overtaking assistance with Pilot Assist The overtaking assistance function may have lim- ited functionality in certain situations.

WARNING

When using the Overtaking Assistance Sys- tem, the driver should be aware that there may be undesired acceleration if the condi- tions suddenly change.

Some situations should therefore be avoided, such as if:

the car is approaching an exit for turn-of that is in the same direction as overtaking would normally occur.

the vehicle ahead slows down before the driver's car has crossed over into the overtaking lane

the traffic in the overtaking lane slows down

a right-hand drive car is driven in a county with left-hand traffic (or vice versa).

Situations of this kind can be avoided by tempo- rarily setting Pilot Assist in the standby mode.

Related information Pilot Assist (p. 306)

Change the target with Pilot Assist In combination with automatic gearbox, Pilot Assist has functionality for change of target at certain speeds.

Change of target

If the target vehicle in front suddenly turns then there may be stationary traffic in front.

When Pilot Assist is following another vehicle at speeds below 30 km/h (20 mph) and changes target from a moving to a stationary vehicle, Pilot Assist will slow down for the stationary vehicle.

WARNING

When Pilot Assist is following another vehicle at speeds in excess of approx. 30 km/h (20 mph) and the target is changed from a moving vehicle to a stationary vehicle, Pilot Assist will ignore the stationary vehicle and instead accelerate to the stored speed.

The driver must then intervene him/ herself and brake.

Automatic standby mode with change of target Pilot Assist is disengaged and set in standby mode:

when the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and Pilot Assist is uncertain whether the tar- get object is a stationary vehicle or some other object, e.g. a speed bump.

when the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and the vehicle in front turns off so the Pilot Assist no longer has a vehicle to follow.

Related information Pilot Assist (p. 306)

DRIVER SUPPORT

318

Automatic braking with Pilot Assist Pilot Assist has a special brake function in slow traffic and while stationary.

Brake function in slow queues and while stationary For shorter stops in connection with inching in slow traffic or at traffic lights, driving is automati- cally resumed if the stops do not exceed approx. 3 seconds - if it takes longer before the vehicle in front starts moving again then Pilot Assist is set in standby mode with automatic braking.

Pilot Assist is reactivated in the following way:

Press the steering wheel button .

Depress the accelerator pedal.

> Pilot Assist resumes following the vehicle ahead if it starts moving forward within 6 seconds.

NOTE

Pilot Assist can hold the car stationary for a maximum of 5 minutes - then the parking brake is applied and the function is disen- gaged.

Before Pilot Assist can be reactivated, the parking brake must be released.

Cessation of automatic braking In some situations, automatic braking ceases on coming to a standstill and Pilot Assist is set in standby mode. This means that the brakes are released and the car may start to roll - the driver must therefore intervene and brake the car him- self/herself to keep it stationary.

This may take place in the following situations:

the driver puts his/her foot on the brake pedal

the parking brake is applied

the gear selector is moved to P, N, or R posi- tion

the driver sets Pilot Assist in the standby mode.

Automatic activation of parking brake In certain situations, the parking brake is applied in order to keep the car stationary.

This takes place if Pilot Assist is holding the car stationary with the foot brake and:

the driver opens the door or takes off his/her seatbelt

Pilot Assist has kept the car stationary for more than approx. 5 minutes

the brakes have overheated

the driver switches the engine off manually.

Related information Pilot Assist (p. 306)

Limitations of Pilot Assist The Pilot Assist function may have limitations in certain situations.

The Pilot Assist function is an aid which can help the driver in many situations. But the driver is at all times responsible for maintaining a safe dis- tance to surrounding objects and a correct posi- tion in the lane.

DRIVER SUPPORT

319

WARNING

In certain situations, Pilot Assist steering assistance may have difficulty helping the driver in the right way or it may be automati- cally deactivated - in which case, the use of Pilot Assist is not recommended. Examples of such situations may be that:

the lane markings are worn, missing or cross each other.

lane division is unclear, for example, when the lanes divide or merge or at exits or in the event of multiple sets of markings.

edges or other lines than lane markings are present on or near the road, e.g. kerbs, joints or repairs to the road sur- face, edges of barriers, roadside edges or strong shadows.

the lane is narrow or winding.

the lane contains ridges or holes.

weather conditions are poor, e.g. rain, snow or fog or slush or impaired view with poor light conditions, back-lighting, wet road surface etc.

The driver should also note that Pilot Assist has the following limitations:

High kerbs, roadside barriers, temporary obstacles (traffic cones, safety barriers, etc.) are not detected. Alternatively, they may be detected incorrectly as lane mark- ings, with a subsequent risk of contact

between the car and such obstacles. The driver must ensure him/herself that the car is at a suitable distance from such obstacles.

The camera and radar sensor does not have the capacity to detect all oncoming objects and obstacles in traffic environ- ments, e.g. potholes, stationary obstacles or objects which completely or partially block the route.

Pilot Assist does not "see" pedestrians, animals, etc.

The recommended steering input is force limited, which means that it cannot always help the driver to steer and keep the car within the lane.

Pilot Assist is switched off if the power steering is working with reduced power - e.g. during cooling due to overheating (see section "Speed-dependent steering force").

The driver always has the possibility of correcting or adjusting a steering intervention imposed by Pilot Assist and can turn the steering wheel to the desired position.

Steep roads and/or heavy load Bear in mind that Pilot Assist is primarily intended for use when driving on level road surfa- ces. The function may have difficulty in keeping

the correct distance from the vehicle ahead when driving on steep downhill slopes - in which case, be extra attentive and ready to brake.

Do not use Pilot Assist if the car has a heavy load or a trailer is connected to the car.

NOTE

Pilot Assist cannot be activated if a trailer, bicycle rack or similar is connected to the car's electrical system.

Miscellaneous Off Road drive mode cannot be selected

when Pilot Assist is activated.

NOTE

The function uses the car's camera unit, which has some general limitations, see the "Limitations for camera unit" section.

NOTE

The function uses the car's radar unit, which has some general limitations, see the section "Limitations for radar unit".

Related information Pilot Assist (p. 306)

Speed-dependent steering force (p. 268)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.320

Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist* A number of symbols and messages regarding Pilot Assist can be shown via the driver display and/or the head-up display*.

Here are some examples67.

The previous illustration68 shows that Pilot Assist is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph) and that there is no vehicle ahead to follow.

Pilot Assist provides no steering assistance since the lane's side markings cannot be detected.

The previous illustration68 shows that Pilot Assist is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph) and at the same time is following a vehicle ahead which is keeping the same speed.

Pilot Assist provides no steering assistance since the lane's side markings cannot be detected.

The previous illustration68 shows that Pilot Assist is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph) and at the same time is following a vehicle ahead which is keeping the same speed.

Here, Pilot Assist also provides steering assis- tance since the lane's side markings can be detected.

67 In the following illustrative example, the RSI (Road Sign Information) function informs the driver that the maximum permitted speed is 130 km/h (80 mph). 68 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 321

The previous illustration68 shows that Pilot Assist is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph) and that there is no vehicle ahead to follow.

Here too, Pilot Assist provides steering assis- tance since the lane's side markings can be detected.

Related information Pilot Assist (p. 306)

Radar unit The radar unit is used by several driver support systems and has the task of sensing other vehi- cles.

NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

The radar unit is used by the following functions:

Distance Warning*

Adaptive cruise control*

Lane assistance

Pilot Assist*

City Safety

Modification of the radar unit could result in its use being illegal.

Related information Limitations for radar device (p. 322)

Recommended radar device maintenance (p. 325)

Type approval for radar device (p. 326)

68 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

DRIVER SUPPORT

322

Limitations for radar device The radar unit has certain limitations - which in turn also limits those functions that use the unit.

Blocked unit

The marked area must be kept free from stickers, objects, shade film, etc.69.

The radar unit is placed inside the upper section of the windscreen together with the car's camera unit.

IMPORTANT

Do not place, stick or mount anything on the outside or inside of the windscreen in front of or around the camera and radar unit this can interfere with camera and radar-depend- ent functions.

This may mean that functions are reduced, deactivated completely or give incorrect func- tion response.

If the driver display shows this symbol and the message "Windscreen sensor Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual", this means that the

camera and radar unit cannot detect other vehi- cles, cyclists, pedestrians and larger animals in front of the car and that the car's camera-based and radar-based functions may be disrupted, reduced, completely deactivated or give an incor- rect function response.

The following table presents examples of possible causes for a message being shown, along with the appropriate action:

Cause Action

The windscreen surface in front of the camera and radar unit is dirty or cov- ered with ice or snow.

Clean dirt, ice and snow from the windscreen surface in front of the camera and radar unit.

Thick fog and heavy rain or snow block the radar signals or the camera view.

No action. Sometimes the unit does not work during heavy rain or snowfall.

69 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

323

Cause Action

Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the radar signals or camera view.

No action. Sometimes the unit does not work on a very wet or snow-covered road surface.

Dirt has appeared between the inside of the windscreen and the camera and radar unit.

Visit a workshop to have the windscreen inside the unit's cover cleaned - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

NOTE

Keep the windscreen clean in front of the camera and radar unit.

Vehicle speed The capacity of the radar unit to detect vehicles ahead is reduced significantly if:

the speed of the vehicle ahead is signifi- cantly different from that of your own car

Limited field of vision The radar unit has a limited field of vision. In some situations another vehicle is not detected, or the detection is made later than expected.

The radar unit's field of vision.

Sometimes the radar unit is late at detecting vehicles at close distances - e.g. a vehicle

that drives in between your car and the vehi- cle ahead.

Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or vehi- cles not driving in the centre of the lane can remain undetected.

In bends, the radar unit may detect the wrong vehicle or lose a detected vehicle from view.

Low trailers

Low trailer in radar shadow.

Low trailers can also be difficult for the radar unit to detect, or are not detected at all - the driver should therefore be particularly careful when driv- ing behind low trailers when the adaptive cruise control or Pilot Assist is activated.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

324

High temperature At very high temperatures the camera and radar unit can temporarily be switched off for about 15 minutes after the engine is started so as to protect the unit's electronics. The camera and radar unit restarts automatically when the temperature has fallen sufficiently.

Damaged windscreen

IMPORTANT

If a crack, scratch or stone chip in the wind- screen in front of one of the camera and radar unit windows covers an area of approx. 0.5 3.0 mm (0.02 0.12 in.) or larger, a workshop must be contacted to have the windscreen replaced an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

If not rectified it can lead to reduced perform- ance for the driver support systems that use the camera and radar unit.

This may mean that functions are reduced, deactivated completely or give incorrect func- tion response.

To avoid the risk of failed, deficient or reduced operation of driver support systems that use the radar unit, the following also applies:

Volvo recommends against repairing cracks, scratches or stone chips in the area in front of the camera and radar unit. Instead, the whole windscreen should be replaced.

Before replacing a windscreen, contact an authorised Volvo workshop to verify that the correct windscreen is ordered and fitted.

The same type or Volvo-approved wind- screen wipers must be fitted during replacement.

IMPORTANT

When the windscreen is replaced, the camera and radar unit must be recalibrated at the workshop to ensure the functionality of all the cars camera and radar-based systems. An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information Radar unit (p. 321)

DRIVER SUPPORT

325

Recommended radar device maintenance In order that the camera and radar unit shall function correctly, the windscreen in front of the unit must be kept clear of dirt, ice and snow, and be cleaned regularly with water and car shampoo.

NOTE

Dirt, ice and snow covering the camera and radar unit will reduce its function and may prevent measurement.

This may mean that functions are reduced, deactivated completely or give incorrect func- tion response.

Related information Radar unit (p. 321)

DRIVER SUPPORT

326

Type approval for radar device The type approval for the car's radar units in the

ACC70, PA71 and BLIS72 functions can be read out here.

Market ACCA &

PAB BLISC Symbol Type approval

Brazil

Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio.

Modelo: L2C0054TR

4122-14-8645

EAN: (01)07897843840855

Modelo: L2C0055TR

1500-15-8065

EAN: 07897843840978

Europe

Hereby, Delphi Electronics and Safety declares that L2C0054TR / L2C0055TR are in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 2014/53/EU (RED). The original declaration of conformity can be accessed at the following link www.delphi.com/automotive-homologation.

Frequency Band: 76GHz 77GHz

Maximum Output Power: 55dBm EIRP

The Declaration of Conformity may be consulted at Delphi Electronics & Safety / 2151 E. Lincoln Road / Kokomo, Indiana 46902 USA

70 ACC = Adaptive Cruise Control 71 PA = Pilot Assist 72 BLIS = Blind Spot Information

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

327

Market ACCA &

PAB BLISC Symbol Type approval

The United Arab Emi- rates (UAE)

REGISTERED No: ER37536/15

DEALER No: DA37380/15

REGISTERED No: ER37357/15

DEALER No: DA37380/15

Indonesia

37295/POSTEL/2014

4927

38806/SDPPI/2015

4927

Jordan

Type Approval No.: TRC/LPD/2014/255

Equipment Type: Low Power Device (LPD)

Type Approval No.: TRC/LPD/2015/3

Equipment Type: Low Power Device (LPD)

Korea

Certification No.

MSIP-CMI- DPH-L2C0054TR

Certification No.

MSIP-CMI-DPH-L2C0055TR

Morocco

AGREE PAR LANRT MAROC

NUMRO DAGRMENT: MR 9929 ANRT 2014

DATE DAGRMENT: 26/12/2014

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

328

Market ACCA &

PAB BLISC Symbol Type approval

Mexico IFETEL: RLVDEL215-0299

IFETEL: RLVDEL215-0314

Moldova

Serbia

011 14

011 15

Singapore

South Africa

TA-2014/1824

APPROVED

TA-2014/2390

APPROVED

DRIVER SUPPORT

329

Market ACCA &

PAB BLISC Symbol Type approval

Taiwan

CCAB15LP0560T3

CCAB15LP0680T0

Ukraine

Delphi , RACAM/SRR2

( ) ( 679 24 2009 .) Delphi : Delphi.

A ACC = Adaptive Cruise Control B PA = Pilot Assist C BLIS = Blind Spot Information

Type approval for radio equipment

Market Symbol Type approval

Europe

Hereby, Volvo cars, declares that all radio equipment's are in com- pliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 2014/53/EU.

Related information Radar unit (p. 321)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.330

Camera unit The camera unit is used by several driver sup- port systems and has the task of for example detecting lane lines or traffic signs.

NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

The camera unit is used by the following func- tions:

Adaptive cruise control*

Pilot Assist*

Lane assistance*

Steering assistance at risk of collision

City Safety

Driver Alert Control*

Road Sign Information*

Active main beam*

Related information Limitations for camera unit (p. 331)

Recommended camera device maintenance (p. 334)

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

331

Limitations for camera unit The camera unit has certain limitations - which in turn also limits those functions that use the unit.

Impaired vision The camera has limitations similar to the human eye, i.e. it can "see" worse in for example intense snowfall or rain, dense fog, heavy dust storms and snow flurries. Under such conditions, the functions of camera-dependent systems could be significantly reduced or temporarily disengaged.

Strong oncoming light, reflections in the carriage- way, snow or ice on the road surface, dirty road surfaces or unclear lane markings can also sig- nificantly reduce camera function when it is used to scan the carriageway to detect pedestrians, cyclists, large animals and other vehicles.

Blocked unit

The marked area must be kept free from stickers, objects, shade film, etc.73.

The camera unit is placed inside the upper sec- tion of the windscreen together with the car's radar unit.

IMPORTANT

Do not place, stick or mount anything on the outside or inside of the windscreen in front of or around the camera and radar unit this can interfere with camera and radar-depend- ent functions.

This may mean that functions are reduced, deactivated completely or give incorrect func- tion response.

If the driver display shows this symbol and the message "Windscreen sensor Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual", this means that the

camera and radar unit cannot detect other vehi- cles, cyclists, pedestrians and larger animals in front of the car and that the car's camera-based and radar-based functions may be disrupted, reduced, completely deactivated or give an incor- rect function response.

The following table presents examples of possi- ble causes for a message being shown, along with the appropriate action:

73 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

332

Cause Action

The windscreen surface in front of the camera and radar unit is dirty or covered with ice or snow.

Clean dirt, ice and snow from the windscreen surface in front of the camera and radar unit.

Thick fog and heavy rain or snow block the radar signals or the camera view.

No action. Sometimes the unit does not work during heavy rain or snowfall.

Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the radar signals or camera view.

No action. Sometimes the unit does not work on a very wet or snow-covered road surface.

Dirt has appeared between the inside of the windscreen and the cam- era and radar unit.

Visit a workshop to have the windscreen inside the unit's cover cleaned - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Strong oncoming light No action. The camera unit is reset automatically in more favourable light condi- tions.

NOTE

Keep the windscreen clean in front of the camera and radar unit.

High temperature At very high temperatures the camera and radar unit can temporarily be switched off for about 15 minutes after the engine is started so as to protect the unit's electronics. The camera and radar unit restarts automatically when the temperature has fallen sufficiently.

Damaged windscreen

IMPORTANT

If a crack, scratch or stone chip in the wind- screen in front of one of the camera and radar unit windows covers an area of approx. 0.5 3.0 mm (0.02 0.12 in.) or larger, a workshop must be contacted to have the windscreen replaced an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

If not rectified it can lead to reduced perform- ance for the driver support systems that use the camera and radar unit.

This may mean that functions are reduced, deactivated completely or give incorrect func- tion response.

To avoid the risk of failed, deficient or reduced operation of driver support systems that use the radar unit, the following also applies:

Volvo recommends against repairing cracks, scratches or stone chips in the area in front of the camera and radar unit. Instead, the whole windscreen should be replaced.

Before replacing a windscreen, contact an authorised Volvo workshop to verify

DRIVER SUPPORT

333

that the correct windscreen is ordered and fitted.

The same type or Volvo-approved wind- screen wipers must be fitted during replacement.

IMPORTANT

When the windscreen is replaced, the camera and radar unit must be recalibrated at the workshop to ensure the functionality of all the cars camera and radar-based systems. An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information Camera unit (p. 330)

DRIVER SUPPORT

334

Recommended camera device maintenance In order that the camera and radar unit shall function correctly, the windscreen in front of the unit must be kept clear of dirt, ice and snow, and be cleaned regularly with water and car shampoo.

NOTE

Dirt, ice and snow covering the camera and radar unit will reduce its function and may prevent measurement.

This may mean that functions are reduced, deactivated completely or give incorrect func- tion response.

Related information Camera unit (p. 330)

City Safety City Safety can alert the driver using a visual, acoustic and brake pulse warning to help him/her detect pedestrians, cyclists, larger ani- mals and vehicles that suddenly appear - the car then attempts to brake automatically unless the driver acts within a reasonable time him/herself.

Location of the radar unit74.

City Safety can prevent a collision or reduce colli- sion speed.

City Safety is an aid to assist a driver who is at risk of colliding with a pedestrian, large animal, cyclist or a vehicle.

The City Safety function can help the driver to avoid a collision when driving in queues, e.g. when changes in the traffic ahead, combined with a lapse in attention, could lead to an incident.

The function helps the driver by automatically braking the car in the event of an imminent risk of collision if the driver does not react in time by braking and/or swerving.

City Safety activates a short, sharp braking proce- dure, normally stopping the car just behind the vehicle in front.

City Safety is activated in situations where the driver should have started braking earlier, which is why it cannot help the driver in every situation.

City Safety is designed to be activated as late as possible in order to avoid unnecessary interven- tion.

The driver or passengers are not normally aware of City Safety - it only intervenes in a situation where a collision is immediately imminent.

74 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

335

WARNING

The City Safety is supplementary driver support intended to improve driving safety it cannot handle all situations in all traf- fic, weather and road conditions.

The City Safety auto-brake function can prevent a collision or reduce collision speed, but to ensure full brake perform- ance the driver should always depress the brake pedal even when the car auto- brakes.

The warning and steering assistance are only activated if there is a high risk of col- lision you must therefore never wait for a collision warning or for City Safety to intervene.

The warning and brake intervention for pedestrians and cyclists are deactivated at vehicle speeds exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph).

City Safety does not activates any auto- brake functions in the event of heavy acceleration.

City Safety is not a substitute for the driv- er's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appro- priate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.

The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate to City Safety to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system (see the list of links for all subsections).

Related information Parameters and subfunctions for City Safety

(p. 335)

Setting the warning distance for City Safety (p. 337)

Detection of obstacles with City Safety (p. 338)

City Safety in cross traffic (p. 340)

Limitations for City Safety in cross traffic (p. 341)

City Safety steering assistance for evasive manoeuvre (p. 341)

Limitations of City Safety steering assistance when taking evasive action (p. 342)

City Safety when evasive manoeuvres are prevented (p. 342)

Limitations of City Safety (p. 343)

Messages for City Safety (p. 346)

Parameters and subfunctions for City Safety City Safety can avoid a collision with a vehicle, a cyclist, a pedestrian or a larger animal in front by reducing the car's speed with the auto-brake function.

If the speed difference is greater than the follow- ing specified speeds, the City Safety auto-brake function cannot prevent a collision but mitigates the consequences of it.

Vehicles For a vehicle in front, City Safety can reduce the speed by up to 60 km/h (37 mph).

cyclists For a cyclist, City Safety can reduce the speed by up to 50 km/h (30 mph).

Pedestrians For a pedestrian, City Safety can reduce speed by up to 45 km/h (28 mph).

Large animals In the event of a risk of a collision with a large animal, City Safety can reduce the car's speed by up to 15 km/h (9 mph).

The brake function for large animals is primarily intended to reduce the force of the impact at higher speeds and is most effective at speeds above 70 km/h (43 mph) but less effective at lower speed.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

336

Subfunctions for City Safety

Function overview75.

Acoustic warning signal in the event of a risk of collision

Warning signal in the event of a risk of colli- sion

Distance measurement with the camera and radar unit

City Safety carries out three steps in the follow- ing order:

1. Collision warning

2. Brake support

3. Auto Brake

The following text explains what happens during the three steps:

1 - Collision warning The driver is first warned of a potentially immi- nent collision.

City Safety can detect pedestrians, cyclists or vehicles that are stationary or moving in the same direction as the car and are ahead. City Safety can also detect pedestrians, cyclists or large ani- mals that are crossing the road in front of the car.

In the event of a risk of collision with a pedes- trian, larger animal, cyclist or vehicle (including vehicles described in the "City Safety in cross traffic" section), the driver's attention is alerted by means of a visual, acoustic and brake pulse warn- ing. There is no brake pulse warning at lower speeds, sudden driver braking or acceleration. The brake pulse frequency varies according to the car's speed.

2 - Brake support If the risk of collision has increased further after the collision warning then the brake support is activated.

Brake support reinforces the drivers braking action if the system considers that the braking is not sufficient to avoid a collision.

3 - Auto Brake The automatic brake function is activated last.

If in this situation the driver has not yet started to take evasive action and the risk of collision is

imminent then the automatic braking function is deployed - this takes place irrespective of whether or not the driver brakes. Braking then takes place with full brake force in order to reduce collision speed, or with limited brake force if it is sufficient to avoid a collision.

In connection with automatic braking the seatbelt tensioner may also be activated. For more infor- mation see the "Seatbelt tensioner" section.

In some situations, the action of Auto-brake may begin with light braking and then progress to full brake action.

When City Safety has prevented a collision with a stationary object, the car remains stationary in anticipation of positive action by the driver. If the car has been braked to avoid collision with a slower vehicle in front, its speed is reduced to match that of the vehicle in front.

NOTE

On cars with manual gearbox, the engine stops when the Auto-brake function has stop- ped the car, unless the driver has managed to depress the clutch pedal beforehand.

The driver can always interrupt a braking inter- vention by firmly depressing the accelerator pedal.

75 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

337

NOTE

When City Safety brakes, the brake lights come on.

When City Safety is activated and brakes the vehicle, the driver display shows a text message to the effect that the function is/has been active.

WARNING

City Safety must not be used by the driver to change his/her driving style - the driver must not rely on City Safety alone and allow it to do the braking.

Related information City Safety (p. 334)

Setting the warning distance for City Safety City Safety is always activated but the driver can select the warning distance for the function.

NOTE

The City Safety function cannot be deacti- vated. It is activated automatically when the engine/electric operation is started and remains switched on until the engine/electric operation is switched off.

The warning distance determines the sensitivity of the system and regulates the distance at which a visual, acoustic and brake pulse warning should be deployed.

To select warning distance:

1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe in the centre display's top view.

2. Under City Safety Warning, select Late, Normal or Early to set the desired warning distance.

If the Early setting produces too many warnings, which could be perceived as irritating in certain situations, the Normal or Late warning distance can be selected.

When warnings are perceived as being too fre- quent or disturbing, the warning distance can be reduced, which reduces the total number of

warnings and instead leads to City Safety giving a warning at a later stage.

The Late warning distance should therefore only be used in exceptional cases, as in dynamic driv- ing.

WARNING

No automatic system can guarantee 100 % correct function in all situations. Therefore, never test City Safety by driv- ing at people, animals or vehicles - this may cause severe damage and injury and risk lives.

City Safety warns the driver when there is a risk of a collision, but it cannot shorten the drivers reaction time.

Even if the warning distance has been set to Early warnings could be perceived as being late in certain situations, e.g. when there are large differences in speed or if vehicles ahead suddenly brake heavily.

With the warning distance set at Early, the warnings will come more in advance. This may mean that the warnings come more frequently than at the warning dis- tance Normal, but it is recommended since it can make City Safety more effec- tive.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

338

NOTE

The warning with direction indicators for Rear Collision Warning is deactivated if the warn- ing distance for collision warning in the City Safety function is set at the lowest level "Late".

The seat belt pre-tensioning and braking functions are, however, still active.

Related information City Safety (p. 334)

Detection of obstacles with City Safety The obstructions that City Safety can detect are vehicles, cyclists, large animals and pedestrians.

Vehicles City Safety detects most vehicles that are either stationary or moving in the same direction as your car, as well as vehicles described in the "City Safety in cross traffic" section.

In order that City Safety shall be able to detect a vehicle in the dark, the vehicle's front and rear lights must be working and clearly illuminated.

Cyclists

Optimal examples of what City Safety interprets as a cyclist with clear body outline and bicycle outline.

Optimal performance requires that the system function that detects a cyclist must receive the clearest possible information about the body and

bicycle outline, requiring the ability to identify the bicycle, head, arms, shoulders, legs, upper and lower body plus a normal human pattern of move- ment.

If large parts of the cyclist's body or bicycle are not visible to the function's camera then the sys- tem cannot detect a cyclist.

For the function to be able to detect a cyclist, he/she must be an adult and riding a bicycle designed for adults.

WARNING

City Safety is supplementary driver support, but it cannot detect all cyclists in all situations and, for example, cannot see:

partially obscured cyclists.

cyclists if the background contrast of the cyclist is poor warning and brake inter- ventions may then be late or not occur at all.

cyclists wearing clothing that obscures the body outline.

bicycles loaded with large objects.

The driver is always responsible that the vehi- cle is driven correctly and with a safety dis- tance adapted to the speed.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

339

Pedestrians

Optimal examples of what the system regards as pedes- trians with clear body outlines.

For optimal performance, the system function that detects pedestrians must receive the clear- est possible information about the body outline, requiring the ability to identify the head, arms, shoulders, legs, upper and lower body plus a nor- mal human pattern of movement.

In order that it shall be possible to detect a pedestrian there must be a contrast with the background and this will be affected by such things as clothes, the background and the weather. With poor contrast the pedestrian may either be detected late or not at all, which may mean that warnings and braking are late or omit- ted.

City Safety can also detect pedestrians in the dark if they are illuminated by the car's head- lamps.

WARNING

City Safety is supplementary driver support, but it cannot detect all pedestrians in all sit- uations and, for example, cannot see:

partially obscured pedestrians, people in clothing that hides their body contour or pedestrians shorter than 80 cm (32 in.).

pedestrians if the background contrast of the pedestrians is poor - warning and brake interventions may then be late or not occur at all.

pedestrians who are carrying larger objects.

The driver is always responsible that the vehi- cle is driven correctly and with a safety dis- tance adapted to the speed.

Large animals

Optimum examples of what City Safety interprets as large animals - standing still or walking slowly and with clear body outline.

Optimal performance requires that the system function that detects a large animal (e.g. elk and horse) must receive the clearest possible infor- mation about the body outline, requiring the abil- ity to identify the animal directly from the side in combination with what is a normal pattern of movement for the animal.

If parts of the animal's body are not visible to the function's camera then the system cannot detect the animal.

City Safety can also detect large animals in the dark if they are illuminated by the car's head- lamps.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

340

WARNING

City Safety is supplementary driver support, but it cannot detect all large animals in all sit- uations and, for example, cannot see:

partially obscured large animals.

larger animals seen from the front or from behind.

large animals that run or move quickly.

large animals if the background contrast of the animals is poor - warning and brake interventions may then be late or not occur at all.

small animals such as dogs and cats, for example.

The driver is always responsible that the vehi- cle is driven correctly and with a safety dis- tance adapted to the speed.

Related information City Safety (p. 334)

City Safety in cross traffic City Safety can help the driver when turning and crossing the path of another oncoming vehicle at an intersection.

Sector in which City Safety can detect oncoming crossing vehicles.

For City Safety to detect an oncoming vehicle on a collision course, the oncoming vehicle must first enter the sector in which City Safety can analyse the situation.

The following further criteria must also be fulfil- led:

your car must be travelling at no less than 4 km/h (3 mph)

your car must turn to the left in markets with right-hand traffic (or to the right in left-hand traffic)

the oncoming vehicle must have its head- lamps switched on.

WARNING

The "City Safety in crossing traffic" func- tion is supplementary driver support intended to improve driving safety it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions.

Warnings and brake interventions due to a collision risk with an oncoming vehicle often come very late.

Never wait for a collision warning or for City Safety to intervene.

City Safety is not a substitute for the driv- er's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appro- priate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.

Related information City Safety (p. 334)

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

341

Limitations for City Safety in cross traffic In some cases City Safety may have difficulty helping the driver deal with collision risks due to oncoming cross traffic.

Examples are:

stability control ESC intervenes in the event of slippery driving conditions

if the oncoming vehicle is detected too late

if the oncoming vehicle is obscured by some- thing

if the oncoming vehicle has headlamps switched off

if the oncoming vehicle drives in an unpre- dictable manner, for example, abruptly changes lanes at a late stage.

NOTE

The function uses the car's camera unit, which has some general limitations, see the "Limitations for camera unit" section.

NOTE

The function uses the car's radar unit, which has some general limitations, see the section "Limitations for radar unit".

Related information City Safety (p. 334)

City Safety steering assistance for evasive manoeuvre City Safety steering assistance can assist the driver to steer away from a vehicle/obstacle when it is not possible to avoid a collision by braking alone.

Your car steers away

Slow moving/stationary vehicles or obstacles.

City Safety engages by amplifying the driver's steering input, which only occurs after the driver has begun an evasive manoeuvre - and then only if the driver is not steering enough to avoid a col- lision.

In parallel with the amplified steering input, the brake system is also used to further amplify the steering input. The function also helps to

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

342

straighten the car again after passing the obsta- cle.

City Safety steering assistance can detect:

Vehicles

cyclists

Pedestrians

larger animals.

WARNING

The ability of City Safety to be able to predict a specific situation is supplemen- tary driver support intended to improve driving safety it cannot handle all situa- tions in all traffic, weather and road condi- tions.

City Safety is not a substitute for the driv- er's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appro- priate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.

Activate/deactivate City Safety steering assistance cannot be deacti- vated but is always activated.

Related information City Safety (p. 334)

Limitations of City Safety steering assistance when taking evasive action City Safety may have limited functionality in cer- tain situations and fail to intervene e.g.:

outside the speed range 50-100 km/h (30-62 mph)

if the driver initiates an evasive manoeuvre

if the power steering works at reduced power - e.g. during cooling due to overheating (see section "Speed-dependent steering force").

NOTE

The function uses the car's camera unit, which has some general limitations, see the "Limitations for camera unit" section.

NOTE

The function uses the car's radar unit, which has some general limitations, see the section "Limitations for radar unit".

Related information City Safety (p. 334)

Speed-dependent steering force (p. 268)

City Safety when evasive manoeuvres are prevented City Safety has the facility to assist the driver by automatically braking the car earlier when it is not possible to avoid a collision by only steering away.

City Safety assists the driver by continuously attempting to anticipate whether there are "escape routes" to the side in case a slow or sta- tionary vehicle ahead is discovered at a late stage.

Your car (1) "sees" no options for evading the vehicle ahead (2) and can therefore auto-brake earlier.

Your car

Slow/stationary vehicle

City Safety does not intervene with the auto- brake function as long as the driver him/herself

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

343

has the opportunity to avoid a collision via a steering manoeuvre.

However, if City Safety anticipates that an evasive manoeuvre is not possible due to traffic in an adjacent lane, the function can assist the driver by automatically starting to brake at an earlier stage.

WARNING

The ability of City Safety to be able to predict a specific situation is supplemen- tary driver support intended to improve driving safety it cannot handle all situa- tions in all traffic, weather and road condi- tions.

City Safety is not a substitute for the driv- er's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appro- priate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.

Limitations for City Safety when evasive manoeuvres are prevented

NOTE

The function uses the car's camera unit, which has some general limitations, see the "Limitations for camera unit" section.

NOTE

The function uses the car's radar unit, which has some general limitations, see the section "Limitations for radar unit".

Related information City Safety (p. 334)

Limitations of City Safety The City Safety function may have limitations in certain situations.

Surroundings

Low objects Low-hanging objects, e.g. a flag/pennant for pro- jecting load, or accessories such as auxiliary lamps and bull bars that are higher than the bon- net limit the function.

Skidding On slippery road surfaces the braking distance is extended, which may reduce the capacity of City Safety to avoid a collision. In such situations, the anti-lock brakes and the stability control ESC76

will give the best possible braking force with maintained stability.

Oncoming light The visual warning signal in the windscreen may be difficult to notice in the event of strong sun- light, reflections, when sunglasses are being worn or if the driver is not looking straight ahead.

Heat In the event of high passenger compartment temperature caused by e.g. strong sunlight, the visual warning signal in the windscreen may be temporarily disengaged.

76 Electronic Stability Control

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

344

The camera and radar unit's field of view The camera's field of vision is limited, which is why pedestrians, large animals, cyclists and vehi- cles in some situations cannot be detected, or they are detected later than anticipated.

Dirty vehicles may be detected later than others and if it is dark, motorcycles may be detected late or not at all.

If a text message in the driver display indicates that the camera and radar unit is obstructed, City Safety may be unable to detect pedestrians, large animals, cyclists, vehicles or road lines ahead of the car. This means that the functionality of City Safety may be reduced.

However, an error message is not shown in all situations where the windscreen sensors are obstructed. The driver must therefore take care to keep the area of windscreen in front of the cam- era and radar unit clear.

IMPORTANT

Maintenance and replacement of City Safety components must only be performed by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Driver intervention

Reversing When your own car is reversing, City Safety is temporarily deactivated.

Low speed City Safety is not activated at very low speeds - below 4 km/h (3 mph) - and the system there- fore does not intervene in situations where your car is approaching a vehicle ahead very slowly, e.g. when parking.

Active driver Driver commands are always prioritised, which is why City Safety does not intervene or postpone warning/intervention in situations where the driver is steering and accelerating in a decisive manner, even if a collision is unavoidable.

Active and aware driving behaviour can therefore delay a collision warning and intervention in order to minimise unnecessary warnings.

Miscellaneous

WARNING

Warnings and brake interventions could be implemented late or not at all if a traf- fic situation or external influences mean that the camera and radar unit cannot detect pedestrians, cyclists, large animals or vehicles correctly.

For vehicles to be detected at night, their headlamps and rear lamp cluster must be switched on and shining clearly.

The camera and radar unit has a limited range for pedestrians and cyclists. The system can provide effective warnings and brake interventions as long as the relative speed is below 50 km/h (30 mph). For stationary or slow-moving vehicles, warnings and brake interven- tions are effective at vehicle speeds up to 70 km/h (43 mph). Speed reduction for large animals is less than 15 km/h (9 mph) and can be achieved at vehicle speeds above 70 km/h (43 mph). The warning and brake intervention for large animals is less effective at lower speeds.

Warnings for stationary or slow-moving vehicles and large animals could be dis- engaged due to darkness or poor visibil- ity.

DRIVER SUPPORT

345

Warnings and brake interventions for pedestrians and cyclists are deactivated at vehicle speeds exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph).

Do not place, stick or mount anything on the outside or inside of the windscreen in front of or around the camera and radar unit this can interfere with camera- dependent functions.

Objects, snow, ice or dirt in the area of the camera sensor may reduce its func- tionality, fully deactivate it or give incor- rect function response.

NOTE

The function uses the car's camera unit, which has some general limitations, see the "Limitations for camera unit" section.

NOTE

The function uses the car's radar unit, which has some general limitations, see the section "Limitations for radar unit".

Market limitation City Safety is not available in all countries. If City Safety does not appear in the centre display's Settings menu, the car is not equipped with this function.

Search path in the top view of the centre display:

Settings My Car IntelliSafe

Related information City Safety (p. 334)

DRIVER SUPPORT

346

Messages for City Safety A number of messages regarding City Safety can be shown in the driver display.

The following table shows some examples.

Message Specification

City Safety

Automatic intervention

When City Safety brakes or has done an automatic braking, several of the driver display symbols may be illuminated in connection with a text message being shown.

City Safety

Reduced functionality Service required

The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

A text message can be cleared by briefly press-

ing the button, located in the centre of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.

If a message remains: Contact a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information City Safety (p. 334)

DRIVER SUPPORT

347

Rear Collision Warning The Rear Collision Warning (RCW) function can help the driver to avoid being hit by a vehicle approaching from behind.

RCW is activated automatically each time the engine is started.

The RCW can warn the driver in a vehicle approaching from behind that a collision is immi- nent by rapidly flashing the direction indicators.

If, at a speed below 30 km/h (20 mph), the RCW function detects that the car is in danger of being hit from behind, the seatbelt tensioners may ten- sion the front seatbelts and activate the Whiplash Protection System safety system.

Immediately before a collision from behind, RCW may also activate the foot brake in order to reduce the forward acceleration of the car during the collision. However, the foot brake is only acti- vated if the car is stationary. The foot brake relea- ses immediately if the accelerator pedal is depressed.

Related information Limitations of Rear Collision Warning

(p. 347)

Whiplash Protection System (p. 45)

Limitations of Rear Collision Warning In certain cases the RCW may have difficulty helping the driver in the event of a collision risk. This can be, for example, if:

the vehicle approaching from behind is detected too late

the vehicle approaching from behind changes lane at the last moment

the vehicle approaching from behind has a speed exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph)

a trailer, bicycle rack or similar is connected to the car's electrical system - the RCW function is then deactivated automatically.

NOTE

In certain markets, RCW does not give a warning with the direction indicators due to local traffic regulations - in such cases, this part of the function is deactivated.

NOTE

The warning with direction indicators for Rear Collision Warning is deactivated if the warn- ing distance for collision warning in the City Safety function is set at the lowest level "Late".

The seat belt pre-tensioning and braking functions are, however, still active.

Related information Rear Collision Warning (p. 347)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.348

BLIS* The BLIS77 function is intended to help the driver detect vehicles diagonally behind and to the side of the car so as to provide assistance in heavy traffic on roads with several lanes in the same direction.

BLIS is a driver aid intended to give a warning of:

vehicles in the car's blind spot

quickly approaching vehicles in the left and right lanes closest to the car.

Location of BLIS lamp78.

Indicator lamp

The function is activated/deactivated using the BLIS button in the centre display's func- tion view.

Principle of BLIS

Zone in blind spot

Zone for quickly approaching vehicle.

The BLIS function is active at speeds above 10 km/h (6 mph).

The system is designed to react when:

your car is overtaken by other vehicles

another vehicle is quickly approaching your car.

When BLIS detects a vehicle in Zone 1 or a quickly approaching vehicle in Zone 2, the indica- tor lamp on the door mirror on the affected side illuminates with a constant glow. If the driver acti- vates the direction indicator on the same side as the warning, the indicator lamp will change over

from a constant glow to flashing with a more intense light.

NOTE

The lamp illuminates on the side of the car where the system has detected the vehicle. If the car is overtaken on both sides at the same time then both lamps illuminate.

WARNING

The BLIS function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer it cannot handle all situa- tions in all traffic, weather and road condi- tions.

The responsibility for changing lanes safely and using good judgement always rests with the driver.

BLIS is not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropri- ate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.

77 Blind Spot Information Systems 78 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 349

Related information Activate/deactivate BLIS (p. 349)

Limitations of BLIS (p. 350)

Recommended maintenance for BLIS (p. 350)

Messages for BLIS (p. 352)

Activate/deactivate BLIS The BLIS79 function can be activated/deacti- vated.

Location of BLIS lamp80.

Indicator lamp

The function is activated/deactivated using the BLIS button in the centre display's func- tion view.

Tap on the BLIS button in the function view.

> BLIS is activated/deactivated - a green/ grey indicator is shown in the button.

If BLIS is activated when starting the engine, the function is confirmed by the door mirror indicator lamps blinking once.

If BLIS was deactivated when the engine was switched off, it will continue to be deactivated when the engine is next started and no indicator lights will then be illuminated.

Related information BLIS* (p. 348)

79 Blind Spot Information 80 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.350

Limitations of BLIS The BLIS81 function may have limitations in cer- tain situations.

Keep the surface clean - on both the left and right-hand sides of the car82.

Examples of limitations:

Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may reduce the functions and deactivate alerts.

The BLIS function is automatically deacti- vated if a trailer, bicycle rack or similar is con- nected to the car's electrical system.

For optimal performance of BLIS, no bicycle rack, luggage carrier or similar should be mounted on the car's towbar.

WARNING

BLIS does not work on sharp bends.

BLIS does not work when the car is reversing.

Related information BLIS* (p. 348)

Recommended maintenance for BLIS To ensure optimal functionality, the surfaces

in front of the sensors must be kept clean.

Do not affix any objects, tape or labels in the area of the sensors.

Keep the surface clean - on both the left and right-hand sides of the car83.

The sensors for BLIS are located inside each corner of the rear wing/bumper. The sensors are also used by the Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) and Rear Collision Warning functions.

81 Blind Spot Information 82 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. 83 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 351

IMPORTANT

Repair of the BLIS and CTA functions' com- ponents or repainting the bumpers must only be performed by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information BLIS* (p. 348)

Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 353)

Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert (p. 354)

Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert (p. 354)

Recommended maintenance for Cross Traffic Alert (p. 355)

Messages for Cross Traffic Alert (p. 356)

Rear Collision Warning (p. 347)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.352

Messages for BLIS A number of messages regarding BLIS84 can be shown in the driver display. The following table shows some examples.

Message Specification

Blind spot sensor

Service required

The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Blind spot system off

Trailer attached

BLIS and CTA have been deactivated as a trailer has been connected to the car's electrical system.

A text message can be cleared by briefly press-

ing the button, located in the centre of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.

If a message remains: Contact a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information BLIS* (p. 348)

84 Blind Spot Information

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 353

Cross Traffic Alert* CTA85 is a driver support that supplements

BLIS86 and is designed to help the driver detect traffic crossing behind the car when it is revers- ing.

Principle of CTA.

CTA supplements BLIS by detecting the approach of crossing traffic during reversing, such as when reversing out of a parking space.

CTA is primarily designed to detect vehicles. In favourable conditions it may also be able to detect smaller objects, such as cyclists and pedestrians.

CTA is only active if the car rolls backwards or if reverse gear has been selected.

If CTA senses that something is approaching from the side, this is also indicated with:

an acoustic signal - the sound is heard in the left-hand or right-hand speaker according to the direction from which the object approaches.

an illuminated icon in the PAS87 graphic on the screen.

an icon on the Park assist camera top view.

Illuminated icon for CTA in the PAS87 graphic on the screen88.

WARNING

The Cross Traffic Alert function is supple- mentary driver support intended to facili- tate driving and make it safer it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions.

The responsibility for reversing the car safely and using good judgement always rests with the driver.

Cross Traffic Alert is not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accord- ance with current traffic rules and regula- tions.

Related information Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert

(p. 354)

Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert (p. 354)

Recommended maintenance for Cross Traffic Alert (p. 355)

Messages for Cross Traffic Alert (p. 356)

85 Cross Traffic Alert 86 Blind Spot Information 87 Park Assist System: Parking assistance system with reversing sensors 88 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.354

Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert The driver can choose to switch off the CTA89

function as follows: Press the Cross Traffic Alert button in the centre display function view.

GREY button indication - CTA is deactivated.

GREEN button indication - CTA is activated.

CTA is activated automatically each time the engine is started.

Related information Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 353)

Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert The CTA90 function may have limitations in cer- tain situations.

CTA does not perform optimally in all situations but has some limitations. For example, the CTA sensors cannot "see" through other parked vehi- cles or obstructing obstacles.

Here are some examples of situations where CTAs "field of vision" may be already limited and approaching vehicles cannot therefore be detected until they are very close:

The car is parked deep inside a parking slot.

In an angled parking slot CTA may be completely blind on one side.

Blind CTA sector.

Sector in which CTA can detect/see.

However, as your car slowly reverses, the angle it makes with the obstructing vehicle/object changes and the blind sector rapidly decreases.

89 Cross Traffic Alert 90 Cross Traffic Alert

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 355

Examples of further limitations

Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may reduce the functions and deactivate alerts. See the supplementary information in the section "Recommended maintenance for Cross Traffic Alert".

CTA is automatically deactivated if a trailer, bicycle rack or similar is connected to the car's electrical system.

For optimal performance of CTA, no bicycle rack, luggage carrier or similar should be mounted on the car's towbar.

Related information Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 353)

Recommended maintenance for Cross Traffic Alert To ensure optimal functionality, the surfaces

in front of the sensors must be kept clean.

Do not affix any objects, tape or labels in the area of the sensors.

Keep the surface clean - on both the left and right-hand sides of the car91.

The sensors for CTA are located inside each cor- ner of the rear wing/bumper. The sensors are also used by the BLIS92 and Rear Collision Warning functions.

IMPORTANT

Repair of the BLIS and CTA functions' com- ponents or repainting the bumpers must only be performed by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 353)

BLIS* (p. 348)

Rear Collision Warning (p. 347)

91 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. 92 Blind Spot Information

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.356

Messages for Cross Traffic Alert A number of messages regarding CTA93 can be shown in the driver display. The following table shows some examples.

Message Specification

Blind spot sensor

Service required

The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Blind spot system off

Trailer attached

BLIS and CTA have been deactivated as a trailer has been connected to the car's electrical system.

A text message can be cleared by briefly press-

ing the button, located in the centre of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.

If a message remains: Contact a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 353)

93 Cross Traffic Alert

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 357

Road Sign Information* The Road Sign Information function (RSI94) helps the driver to observe speed-related road signs and certain prohibition signs as the car passes them.

Examples of readable signs95.

RSI provides information about such things as current speed, when a motorway or road is star- ting/ending, when overtaking is prohibited or when the direction of travel is one-way.

If both a sign for motorway/dual carriageway and a sign for the speed limit are passed at the same time, RSI selects to show a sign symbol for motorway/dual carriageway. The new speed limit is shown directly with a line in the driver display's speed scale.

NOTE

In certain markets, the Road Sign Information function (RSI) is only available in combination with Sensus Navigation.

WARNING

The Road Sign Information function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions.

Road Sign Information is not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe man- ner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.

Related information Activating/deactivating Road Sign Informa-

tion (p. 358)

Road Sign Information and sign display (p. 358)

Road Sign Information and Sensus Navigation (p. 360)

Road Sign Information with Speed Warning and Settings (p. 360)

Activating/deactivating Speed warning in Road Sign Information (p. 361)

Road Sign Information with Speed Camera Information (p. 362)

Limitations of Road Sign Information (p. 362)

94 Road Sign Information 95 Road signs are market-dependent - illustrations in these instructions only show a few examples.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.358

Activating/deactivating Road Sign Information The Road Sign Information function is selectable - the driver can select On or Off.

Press the Road Sign Information button in the cen- tre display function view.

GREEN button indication - RSI is activated.

GREY button indication - RSI is deactivated.

NOTE

If the Automatic Speed Limiter function is activated, road sign information is shown in the driver display even if RSI is not activated.

To remove road sign information from the driver display, you must deactivate both Automatic Speed Limiter and RSI.

When the Automatic Speed Limiter func- tion is activated but RSI is deactivated, no warnings are given from RSI. In this situa- tion, settings for RSI cannot be adjusted either - to be able to adjust settings as well as receive warnings, RSI must be activated.

Related information Road Sign Information* (p. 357)

Road Sign Information and sign display The Road Sign Information function (RSI96) reg- isters and shows road signs in different ways depending on the sign and the situation.

Example97 of detected speed information.

When RSI detects a road sign with an imposed speed limit, the driver display shows the sign as a symbol in combination with a RED indication on the speedometer.

An additional97 sign, such as "no overtaking", may be shown together with the speed limit symbol.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

359

If the driver enters a road marked with a no-entry sign at the roadside, the symbol for this sign97 flashes on and off on the driver display as a warn- ing.

If the car is equipped with Sensus Navigation then information from the map is also used to determine whether the car is being driven in the wrong direction.

The driver can also get an acoustic warning when driving towards a no-entry entrance if the Road Sign Audio Warning function is activated - see the heading "Activating/deactivating the acoustic warning" in the section "Activating/deactivating Road Sign Information".

Speed limit or end of motorway When RSI detects an "indirect speed limit sign" stating the end of the current speed limit - e.g. at the end of a motorway - a symbol appears with the corresponding road sign in the driver's dis- play.

Example of indirect speed limit sign97:

End of all restrictions.

End of motorway.

The driver display symbol extinguishes after 10-30 seconds and remains so until the next speed related sign is passed.

Changed speed limit When passing a direct speed limit sign when a speed limit changes, a symbol with the corres- ponding road sign appears in the driver's display.

Example of direct speed limit sign97.

The driver display symbol extinguishes after about 5 minutes and remains so until the next speed related sign is passed.

Additional signs

Examples of additional signs97.

Sometimes different speed limits are signed for the same road - an additional sign then indicates the circumstances under which the different speeds apply. The road section may be particu- larly susceptible to accidents in rain and/or fog, for example.

An additional sign relating to rain is displayed only if the windscreen wipers are in use.

If a trailer is connected to the car's electrical sys- tem and you pass a speed sign with the addi-

96 Road Sign Information 97 Road signs are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show examples.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.360

tional sign trailer, the indicated speed will appear on the driver display.

Some speed limits only apply after a certain distance or at a certain time of day. The driver's attention is drawn to this fact by means of a symbol for an additional sign below the speed symbol. The additional symbol

in the driver display will show either DIST or TIME.

A symbol for additional sign in the form of an empty frame under the driver display's speed symbol97 means that the RSI has detected an additional sign with supplementary information for the current speed limit.

Sign for "School" and "Children at play" If the warning sign97 for "School" or "Children at play" is included in the satellite navi- gator's map data98, the driver display shows a sign of this type.

Related information Road Sign Information* (p. 357)

Road Sign Information and Sensus Navigation If the car is equipped with Sensus Navigation, speed information is read from the navigation unit in the following cases:

On detection of signs that indirectly indicate a speed limit, such as motorway, dual car- riageway and city limit signs.

If a previously detected speed sign is assumed not to apply any longer, but no new sign has been detected.

NOTE

In certain markets, the Road Sign Information function (RSI) is only available in combination with Sensus Navigation.

NOTE

If a downloaded third-party app is used for navigation then there is no support for speed- related information.

Related information Road Sign Information* (p. 357)

Road Sign Information with Speed Warning and Settings The subfunction Speed Limit Warning for

RSI99 is selectable - the driver can select On or Off. Speed Limit Warning alerts the driver when the speed limit in force or the set "speed limit" is exceeded - after the warning has been repeated one extra time if the driver does not reduce speed.

97 Road signs are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show examples. 98 Only in cars with Sensus Navigation. 99 Road Sign Information

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 361

The speed warning is given by the driver display symbol100

showing the applicable maxi- mum permitted speed tempo- rarily flashing when this speed is exceeded.

A speed warning is always given if the speed limit is exceeded in connection with speed camera information.

Settings

Adjust the limit for Speed Warning The driver can select to receive a warning at a higher speed than the signed speed.

Select limit for speed warning as follows:

1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe

Road Sign Information in the centre display's top view.

2. Select Speed Limit Warning.

> The function is activated and a speed limit selector appears.

3. Adjust the limit for Speed Warning by press- ing the up/down arrows on the screen.

Note that the function does not give any consideration to selected limit adjustment when the driver display shows the speed camera symbol.

Acoustic warning On/Off It is also possible to receive an acoustic warning in connection with Speed Warning.

Change setting for acoustic warning as follows:

1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe

Road Sign Information in the centre display's top view.

2. Select/deselect Road Sign Audio Warning to activate/switch off the acoustic warning.

With the Road Sign Audio Warning function activated, the driver is also warned when driving towards one-way traffic/no-entry entrance.

Related information Road Sign Information* (p. 357)

Activating/deactivating Speed warning in Road Sign Information The subfunction Speed Limit Warning is acti- vated as follows:

1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe

Road Sign Information in the centre display's top view.

2. Select Speed Limit Warning.

> The function is activated and a speed limit selector appears.

(see description for "selecting speed limit" in section "Road Sign Information with Speed warning and Settings")

Related information Road Sign Information* (p. 357)

Road Sign Information with Speed Warning and Settings (p. 360)

100Road signs are market-dependent - the illustration in these instructions only show one example.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.362

Road Sign Information with Speed Camera Information A car equipped with RSI101 and Sensus Navigation* can provide information on an upcoming speed camera in the driver display.

Speed camera information in the driver display102.

If the car exceeds a detected speed limit with the Speed warning function activated, a speed warning is given when the car approaches a speed camera, provided that the navi- gation map for the area in

question contains information on speed cameras.

For more information about Speed warnings in connection with speed cameras - see section

"Road Sign Information with Speed Warning and Settings" and "Road Sign Information limita- tions".

NOTE

To get an acoustic warning if you exceed the required speed, the Speed Limit Warning function must be activated and the Road Sign Audio Warning sub- function must be set to On. An acoustic warning is then given if the car's speed exceeds the speed indicated by the RSI function in the driver display.

Information about speed cameras on the navigation map is not available for all markets/areas.

Related information Road Sign Information* (p. 357)

Road Sign Information with Speed Warning and Settings (p. 360)

Limitations of Road Sign Information (p. 362)

Limitations of Road Sign Information The Road Sign Information (RSI103) function may have limitations in certain situations.

Examples of what can reduce the RSI are as fol- lows:

Faded signs

Signs positioned on bends

Rotated or damaged signs

Signs positioned high above the roadway

Fully/partially obscured or poorly positioned signs

signs completely or partly covered with frost, snow and/or dirt

digital road maps104 are out-of-date, inaccu- rate or have no speed information105.

NOTE

The RSI function may interpret some types of bicycle rack, connected to the electrical socket for trailers, as a connected trailer. In such cases, the driver display may show incor- rect speed information.

101Road Sign Information 102NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model and market/area.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 363

NOTE

The function uses the car's camera unit, which has some general limitations, see the "Limitations for camera unit" section.

Related information Road Sign Information* (p. 357)

Driver Alert Control The Driver Alert Control (DAC) function is intended to help make the driver aware that he or she is starting to drive less consistently, e.g. if the driver becomes distracted or starts to fall asleep.

The objective for DAC is to detect slowly deterio- rating driving ability and it is primarily intended for major roads. The function is not intended for city traffic.

The function is activated when speed exceeds 65 km/h (40 mph) and remains active as long as the speed is over 60 km/h (37 mph).

A camera detects the edge markings painted on the carriageway and compares the alignment of

the road with the drivers steering wheel move- ments.

When driving behaviour starts to become inconsistent, the driver is alerted by this symbol in the driver display, together with the text message Time for a break soon?.

If driving behaviour does not improve but becomes noticeably inconsistent, the driver is alerted by the same symbol in the driver display, combined with an acoustic signal and the text message Time to take a break.

If the Rest Stop Guidance function is activated in Sensus Navigation*, suggestions for a suitable

103Road Sign Information 104In cars equipped with Sensus Navigation. 105Map data with speed information does not exist for all areas.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

364

location for a break are also shown with the Time to take a break warning.

The warnings are repeated after a time if driving behaviour has not improved.

WARNING

The Driver Alert Control function is sup- plementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions.

Driver Alert Control should not be used to extend a period of driving. The driver should instead plan for breaks at regular intervals and make sure they are well rested.

Driver Alert Control is not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accord- ance with current traffic rules and regula- tions.

WARNING

An alarm from Driver Alert Control should be taken very seriously, as a sleepy driver is often not aware of his/her own condition.

If the alarm sounds or you feel fatigued:

Stop the car safely as soon as possible and rest.

Studies have shown that it is just as danger- ous to drive while tired as it is to drive under the influence of alcohol or other stimulants.

Related information Activate/deactivate Driver Alert Control

(p. 364)

Select rest stop guidance in the event of a warning with Driver Alert Control (p. 365)

Limitations of Driver Alert Control (p. 365)

Activate/deactivate Driver Alert Control The Driver Alert Control (DAC) function can be activated/deactivated.

On/Off To change settings in DAC:

1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view.

2. Select My Car IntelliSafe Driver Alert Control.

3. Select/deselect Alertness Warning to acti- vate/deactivate DAC.

Related information Driver Alert Control (p. 363)

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

365

Select rest stop guidance in the event of a warning with Driver Alert Control It is possible to set whether the Rest Stop Guidance function should be activated/deacti- vated. With the guide activated, an automatic sugges- tion for an appropriate rest area is displayed while DAC issues a warning.

To select Rest Stop Guidance:

1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view.

2. Select My Car IntelliSafe Driver Alert Control.

3. Select/deselect Rest Stop Guidance to activate/deactivate the function.

Related information Driver Alert Control (p. 363)

Limitations of Driver Alert Control The Driver Alert Control (DAC) function may have limitations in certain situations.

In some cases the system may issue a warning despite driving ability not deteriorating, for exam- ple:

in strong side winds

on rutted road surfaces.

WARNING

In some cases, driving behaviour is not affec- ted despite driver fatigue e.g. when using the Pilot Assist function resulting in the driver not getting a warning from DAC.

It is therefore important to always stop and take a break at the slightest feeling of fatigue, whether the DAC function ha given a warning or not.

NOTE

The function uses the car's camera unit, which has some general limitations, see the "Limitations for camera unit" section.

Related information Driver Alert Control (p. 363)

Lane assistance The function of the Lane Keeping Aid (LKA106) is to help the driver to reduce the risk of the car accidentally leaving its own lane on motorways and similar major routes.

Lane Keeping Aid steers the car back into its lane and/or alerts the driver with vibrations in the steering wheel.

Lane Keeping Aid is active within the speed range 65-200 km/h (40-125 mph) on roads with clearly visible side lines.

On narrow roads the function may be unavailable, in which case it goes into standby mode. The function becomes available again when the road is wide enough.

A camera reads the side lines of the road/lane.

106Lane Keeping Aid

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

366

Lane assistance steers the car back into its lane.

Lane assistance warns with steering wheel vibrations107.

Depending on settings, lane assistance acts in accordance with the following:

Assist108 activated: When the car is approaching a lane line, LKA will actively steer the car back into its lane by applying a slight torque to the steering wheel.

Warning108 activated: If the car is about to cross a lane line, the driver is warned by means of vibrations in the steering wheel.

NOTE

When a direction indicator is switched on, there are no steering corrections or alerts from Lane assistance.

WARNING

The Lane Keeping Aid function is supple- mentary driver support intended to improve driving safety it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions.

The function is not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accord- ance with current traffic rules and regula- tions.

107The steering wheel vibration varies - the longer the car remains outside the lane lines, the longer the vibration. 108See the heading "Assistance alternatives for LKA" in the section "Activating/Deactivating Lane Keeping Aid".

DRIVER SUPPORT

367

Lane assistance does not intervene

Lane assistance does not engage on sharp inside curves.

In some situations, lane assistance allows lane lines to be crossed without intervening with either steering assistance or a warning - e.g. when using the direction indicators or cutting bends.

Related information Steering assistance with lane assistance

(p. 367)

Limitations of Lane assistance (p. 368)

Activate/deactivate Lane Keeping Aid (p. 368)

Select assistance option for lane assistance (p. 368)

Symbols and messages for lane assistance (p. 370)

Lane assistance symbols in the driver display (p. 372)

Steering assistance with lane assistance For steering assistance LKA109 to function, the drivers hands must be on the steering wheel. The system monitors this continuously.

If the driver does not keep his/her hands on the steering wheel, the driver display shows this symbol combined with a message, which prompts the driver to actively steer the car:

Lane Keeping Aid Apply steering

If the driver does not then start to steer, the sym- bol is shown again, combined with a warning sound and this message:

Lane Keeping Aid Standby until steering applied

If the driver then still does not follow the prompt to start steering, LKA109 is set in standby mode - the function will then be unavailable until the driver starts to steer the car again.

Related information Lane assistance (p. 365)

109Lane Keeping Aid

DRIVER SUPPORT

368

Activate/deactivate Lane Keeping Aid The lane assistance LKA110 function is selecta- ble - the driver can select On or Off.

On/Off Press the Lane Keeping Aid button in the centre display function view.

GREEN button indication - LKA is activated.

GREY button indication - LKA is deactivated.

Related information Lane assistance (p. 365)

Select assistance option for lane assistance The driver can select how LKA111 should react if the car leaves its lane.

1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe in the centre display's top view.

2. In the event of Lane Keeping Aid Mode, select how LKA should react:

Assist - the driver is given steering assis- tance without a warning.

Both - the driver is given both a warning and steering assistance.

Warning warning to driver only.

Related information Lane assistance (p. 365)

Limitations of Lane assistance In certain demanding conditions Lane assis- tance may have difficulty helping the driver cor- rectly. In such cases it is recommended to switch off this function. Examples of such conditions are:

road works

winter road conditions

poor road surface

a very sporty driving style

poor weather with reduced visibility

roads with unclear or non-existent side mark- ings

sharp edges or lines other than the lane's side markings

when the power steering works at reduced power - e.g. during cooling due to overheat- ing (see section "Speed-dependent steering force").

NOTE

The function uses the car's camera unit, which has some general limitations, see the "Limitations for camera unit" section.

110Lane Keeping Aid 111Lane Keeping Aid

DRIVER SUPPORT

369

Related information Lane assistance (p. 365)

Speed-dependent steering force (p. 268)

DRIVER SUPPORT

370

Symbols and messages for lane assistance A number of symbols and messages regarding

Lane assistance LKA112 can be shown on the driver display. The following table shows some examples.

Symbol Message Specification

Driver support system

Reduced functionality Service required

The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Windscreen sensor

Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual

The ability of the camera to scan the roadway in front of the car is reduced.

Lane Keeping Aid

Apply steering

The LKA steering assistance does not function if the driver does not have his/her hands on the steering wheel. Follow the instruction and steer the car.

Lane Keeping Aid

Standby until steering applied

LKA is set in standby mode until the driver starts to steer the car again.

112Lane Keeping Aid

DRIVER SUPPORT

371

A text message can be cleared by briefly press-

ing the button, located in the centre of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.

If a message remains: Contact a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information Lane assistance (p. 365)

DRIVER SUPPORT

372

Lane assistance symbols in the driver display Lane assistance LKA113 is visualised by symbols in the driver display depending on the situation.

Here are some examples of symbols and the situations in which they are shown:

Available

Available the lane lines in the symbol are WHITE.

Lane assistance is scanning one or both lane lines.

Unavailable

Unavailable the lane lines in the symbol are GREY.

The Lane assistance cannot detect the lane lines, the speed is too low or the road is too narrow.

Indication of steering assistance/warning

Steering assistance/warning - the lane lines in the sym- bol are COLOURED.

Lane assistance indicates that the system is giv- ing a warning and/or attempting to steer the car back into the lane.

Related information Lane assistance (p. 365)

113Lane Keeping Aid

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 373

Steering assistance at risk of collision The Collision avoidance assistance function is designed to help the driver reduce the risk of the car leaving its lane unintentionally and/or col- liding with another vehicle or obstacle by actively steering the car back into its lane and/or swerv- ing.

The Collision avoidance assistance function consists of three subfunctions:

Steering assistance upon risk of run-off

Steering assistance upon risk of head-on collision

Steering assistance upon risk of rear-end collision*

After automatic engagement, the driver display indicates that this has occurred via a text mes- sage:

Collision avoidance assistance Automatic intervention

NOTE

It is always the driver who decides how much the car should steer the car can never take command.

Related information Activating/deactivating Steering assistance

in the event of a collision risk (p. 373)

Symbols and messages for steering assis- tance upon risk of collision (p. 381)

Steering assistance upon risk of run-off (p. 374)

Steering assistance level in the event of a run-off risk (p. 374)

Activating/deactivating Steering assistance in the event of run-off risk (p. 375)

Limitations for steering assistance upon risk of running off the road (p. 375)

Steering assistance upon risk of head-on collision (p. 376)

Activating/deactivating Steering assistance in the event of a risk of a head-on collision (p. 377)

Limitations for steering assistance upon risk of head-on collision (p. 377)

Steering assistance upon risk of rear-end collision* (p. 378)

Activating/deactivating Steering assistance on risk of rear-end collision* (p. 379)

Limitations for steering assistance upon risk of rear-end collision (p. 379)

Activating/deactivating Steering assistance in the event of a collision risk The function can be selected - the driver can choose to have it On or Off. Proceed as follows to deactivate the function:

1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe in the centre display's top view.

2. Deselect Collision avoidance assistance.

> The function is then disengaged.

NOTE

When the Collision avoidance assistance function is deactivated, all subfunctions are switched off:

Steering assistance at risk of road depar- ture

Steering assistance at risk of oncoming collision

Steering assistance at risk of rear-end collision*

Even though it is possible to deactivate the function, it is advisable for the driver to always have it activated since it improves driving safety in most cases.

Related information Steering assistance at risk of collision

(p. 373)

DRIVER SUPPORT

374

Steering assistance upon risk of run-off The subfunction's task is to help the driver reduce the risk of the car accidentally leaving the road by actively steering the car back onto the road.

The function is active within the speed range 65-140 km/h (40-87 mph) on roads with clearly visible lane markings/lines.

A camera scans the edges of the road and the painted side markings. If the car is about to leave the side of the road, the car is steered back onto the road and if the steering intervention is not enough to avoid run-off, the brakes are also acti- vated.

However, the function does not intervene with either steering assistance or brake intervention if the direction indicators are used. And if the func- tion detects that the driver is actively driving the car, activation of the function will be delayed.

After automatic engagement, the driver display indicates that this has occurred via a text mes- sage:

Collision avoidance assistance Automatic intervention

WARNING

The "Steering assistance at risk of lane departure" subfunction is supplementary driver support intended to improve driving safety it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions.

The function cannot detect barriers, rails or similar obstacles at the side of the road.

"Steering assistance at risk of lane departure" is not a substitute for the driv- er's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appro- priate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.

Related information Steering assistance at risk of collision

(p. 373)

Steering assistance level in the event of a run-off risk The function has two activation levels on inter- vention:

Steering assistance only

Steering assistance with brake intervention

Steering assistance only

Intervention with steering assistance.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 375

Steering assistance with brake intervention

Intervention with steering assistance and braking.

Brake intervention helps in situations where steering assistance alone is not sufficient. The brake force is adapted automatically depending on the situation at the time of road run-off.

Related information Steering assistance at risk of collision

(p. 373)

Activating/deactivating Steering assistance in the event of run-off risk The function can be selected - the driver can choose to have it On or Off. Proceed as follows to deactivate the function:

1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe in the centre display's top view.

2. Deselect Collision avoidance assistance.

> The function is then disengaged.

NOTE

When the Collision avoidance assistance function is deactivated, all subfunctions are switched off:

Steering assistance at risk of road depar- ture

Steering assistance at risk of oncoming collision

Steering assistance at risk of rear-end collision*

Even though it is possible to deactivate the function, it is advisable for the driver to always have it activated since it improves driving safety in most cases.

Related information Steering assistance at risk of collision

(p. 373)

Limitations for steering assistance upon risk of running off the road In certain demanding conditions the function may have difficulty helping the driver correctly. In such cases it is recommended to switch off this function. Examples of such conditions are:

road works

winter road conditions

narrow roads

poor road surface

a very sporty driving style

poor weather with reduced visibility

roads with unclear or non-existent side mark- ings

sharp edges or lines other than the lane's side markings

when the power steering works at reduced power - e.g. during cooling due to overheat- ing (see section "Speed-dependent steering force").

NOTE

The function uses the car's camera unit, which has some general limitations, see the "Limitations for camera unit" section.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

376

NOTE

The function uses the car's radar unit, which has some general limitations, see the section "Limitations for radar unit".

Related information Steering assistance at risk of collision

(p. 373)

Speed-dependent steering force (p. 268)

Steering assistance upon risk of head-on collision The subfunction can help a distracted driver who does not notice that the car is drifting into the oncoming lane.

The function can assist by guiding the car back to its own lane.

Oncoming vehicles

Your car

The function is active within the speed range 60-140 km/h (37-87 mph) on roads with clearly visible lane markings/lines.

If the car is about to leave its own lane while an oncoming vehicle is approaching at the same time, the function can help the driver to steer the car back into its own lane.

However, the function does not intervene with steering assistance if the direction indicator is used. And if the function detects that the driver is actively driving the car, activation of the function will be delayed.

After automatic engagement, the driver display indicates that this has occurred via a text mes- sage:

Collision avoidance assistance Automatic intervention

WARNING

The "Steering assistance at risk of oncoming collision" subfunction is sup- plementary driver support intended to improve driving safety it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions.

Steering assistance is only activated if there is a high risk of collision you must therefore never wait for the function to intervene.

The function is not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accord- ance with current traffic rules and regula- tions.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 377

Related information Steering assistance at risk of collision

(p. 373)

Activating/deactivating Steering assistance in the event of a risk of a head-on collision The function can be selected - the driver can choose to have it On or Off. Proceed as follows to deactivate the function:

1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe in the centre display's top view.

2. Deselect Collision avoidance assistance.

> The function is then disengaged.

NOTE

When the Collision avoidance assistance function is deactivated, all subfunctions are switched off:

Steering assistance at risk of road depar- ture

Steering assistance at risk of oncoming collision

Steering assistance at risk of rear-end collision*

Even though it is possible to deactivate the function, it is advisable for the driver to always have it activated since it improves driving safety in most cases.

Related information Steering assistance at risk of collision

(p. 373)

Limitations for steering assistance upon risk of head-on collision In certain situations the function may have lim- ited functionality and fail to intervene in the fol- lowing cases, for example:

for small vehicles, such as motorcycles

on roads where the lane does not have clear lane markings

if the majority of the car has steered into the adjacent lane

outside the speed range 60-140 km/h (37-87 mph)

when the power steering works at reduced power - e.g. during cooling due to overheat- ing (see section "Speed-dependent steering force").

Other demanding situations can include:

road works

winter road conditions

narrow roads

poor road surface

a very sporty driving style

poor weather with reduced visibility.

In these demanding situations, the function may have difficulty helping the driver correctly. In such cases it is recommended to switch off this func- tion.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.378

NOTE

The function uses the car's camera unit, which has some general limitations, see the "Limitations for camera unit" section.

NOTE

The function uses the car's radar unit, which has some general limitations, see the section "Limitations for radar unit".

Related information Steering assistance at risk of collision

(p. 373)

Speed-dependent steering force (p. 268)

Steering assistance upon risk of rear-end collision* The subfunction can help a distracted driver who does not notice that the car is about to leave its own lane while an oncoming vehicle is approaching at the same time, either from behind or in the blind spot.

The function can assist by steering the car back to its own lane.

Other vehicle in the blind spot

Your car

If the car is about to leave its own lane while another vehicle is in the blind spot, or another vehicle is approaching rapidly in an adjacent lane at the same time, the function can help the driver to steer the car back into its own lane.

The function can even assist if the driver inten- tionally changes lanes using direction indicators

without noticing that another vehicle is approach- ing.

The function is active within the speed range 60-140 km/h (37-87 mph) on roads with clearly visible lane markings/lines.

After automatic engagement, the driver display indicates that this has occurred via a text mes- sage:

Collision avoidance assistance Automatic intervention

WARNING

The "Steering assistance at risk of rear- end collision" subfunction is supplemen- tary driver support intended to improve driving safety it cannot handle all situa- tions in all traffic, weather and road condi- tions.

Steering assistance is only activated if there is a high risk of collision you must therefore never wait for the function to intervene.

The function is not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accord- ance with current traffic rules and regula- tions.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 379

Related information Steering assistance at risk of collision

(p. 373)

Activating/deactivating Steering assistance on risk of rear-end collision* The function can be selected - the driver can choose to have it On or Off. Proceed as follows to switch it off:

1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe in the centre display's top view.

2. Deselect Collision avoidance assistance.

> The function is then disengaged.

NOTE

When the Collision avoidance assistance function is deactivated, all subfunctions are switched off:

Steering assistance at risk of road depar- ture

Steering assistance at risk of oncoming collision

Steering assistance at risk of rear-end collision*

Even though it is possible to deactivate the function, it is advisable for the driver to always have it activated since it improves driving safety in most cases.

Related information Steering assistance at risk of collision

(p. 373)

Limitations for steering assistance upon risk of rear-end collision In certain situations the function may have lim- ited functionality and fail to intervene in the fol- lowing cases, for example:

for small vehicles, such as motorcycles

if the majority of the car has steered into the adjacent lane

on roads/in lanes with unclear or non-exis- tent lane markings

outside the speed range 60-140 km/h (37-87 mph)

when the power steering works at reduced power - e.g. during cooling due to overheat- ing (see section "Speed-dependent steering force").

Other demanding situations can include:

road works

winter road conditions

narrow roads

poor road surface

a very sporty driving style

poor weather with reduced visibility.

In these demanding situations, the function may have difficulty helping the driver correctly. In such cases it is recommended to switch off this func- tion.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

380

NOTE

The function uses the car's camera unit, which has some general limitations, see the "Limitations for camera unit" section.

NOTE

The function uses the car's radar unit, which has some general limitations, see the section "Limitations for radar unit".

In addition to the camera and radar unit, the func- tion uses the car's rear-facing radar, which has certain general imitations that a driver should be aware of - see supplementary information in the section "Limitations for BLIS".

Related information Steering assistance at risk of collision

(p. 373)

Speed-dependent steering force (p. 268)

DRIVER SUPPORT

381

Symbols and messages for steering assistance upon risk of collision A number of symbols and messages regarding the function can be shown on the driver display. The following table shows some examples.

Symbol Message Specification

Collision avoidance assistance

Automatic intervention

When the function is activated, a message is shown to the driver indicating that the system has been activated.

Windscreen sensor

Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual

The ability of the camera to scan the roadway in front of the car is reduced.

A text message can be cleared by briefly press-

ing the button, located in the centre of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.

If a message remains: Contact a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information Steering assistance at risk of collision

(p. 373)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.382

Park Assist* The Park Assist Pilot function can assist the driver when manoeuvring in tight spaces by indi- cating the distance to obstacles through acous- tic signals combined with a graphic in the centre display.

Screen view showing obstacle zones and sensor sectors.

The centre display shows an overview of the rela- tionship between the car and detected obstacles.

The highlighted sector indicates the location of the obstacle. The closer the car symbol is to a highlighted sector box, the shorter the distance between the car and detected obstacle.

The shorter the distance to the obstacle, the faster the signal sounds. Other sound from the audio system is muted automatically.

The acoustic signal for obstacles ahead and to the sides is active when the car is moving but

stops after the car has been stationary for approx. 2 seconds. The acoustic signal for obsta- cles behind is also active when the car is station- ary.

At a distance within 30 cm (1 ft) from an obsta- cle behind or in front of the car, the tone is con- stant and the active sensor's field closest to the car symbol is filled.

The volume of the parking assistance signal can be adjusted while the signal is sounding by means of the [>II] knob on the centre console. Adjustment can also be performed in the top view's Settings menu option.

NOTE

Acoustic warnings are only given for objects directly on the vehicle's route.

WARNING

The Park Assist function is supplemen- tary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer it cannot han- dle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions.

The parking sensors have blind spots where obstacles cannot be detected.

Be particularly aware of people and ani- mals near the car.

The Park Assist system is not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe man- ner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.

Related information Park Assist Pilot front, rear and along the

sides (p. 383)

Activating/deactivating Park Assist Pilot (p. 384)

Limitations of Parking assistance (p. 384)

Recommended Park Assist Pilot mainte- nance (p. 385)

Symbols and messages for Park Assist Pilot (p. 386)

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

383

Park Assist Pilot front, rear and along the sides Park Assist Pilot has different parameters depending on which part of the car is approach- ing an obstacle.

Backwards

NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

The sensors for reverse are activated if the car rolls backward without a gear engaged or when the gear lever is moved to reverse position.

The measuring range starts approx. 1.5 metres ( 5 ft) behind the car.

When reversing with a hitched trailer, parking assistance backward is deactivated automatically.

NOTE

When reversing with e.g. a trailer or bike car- rier on the towbar - without Volvo genuine trailer wiring - parking assistance may need to be switched off manually in order that the sensors do not react to them.

Along the sides

Parking assistance side sensors are activated automatically when the engine is started. They are active at speeds below 10 km/h (6 mph).

The measuring range starts approx. 30 cm (1 ft) from the sides. The acoustic signal for obstacles on the sides comes from the side loudspeakers.

Forwards

NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

The front parking assistance sensors are acti- vated automatically when the engine is started. The front sensors are active at speeds below 10 km/h (6 mph).

The measuring range starts approx. 80 cm (2.5 ft) in front of the car.

NOTE

Parking assistance is deactivated when the parking brake is applied or P mode is selected in a car with an automatic gearbox.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.384

IMPORTANT

When auxiliary lamps are fitted: Remember that these must not obscure the sensors - the auxiliary lamps may then be perceived as an obstacle.

Related information Park Assist* (p. 382)

Activating/deactivating Park Assist Pilot The Park Assist Pilot function can be activated/ deactivated.

On/Off The front and side parking assistance sensors are activated automatically when the engine is started. The rear sensors activate if the car rolls backwards or if reverse gear in engaged.

The function is activated/deac- tivated in function view in the centre display.

Tap on the Park Assist button in the func- tion view.

> Park Assist Pilot is activated/deactivated, a GREEN/GREY indicator is displayed in the button.

In cars equipped with a park assist camera, Park Assist Pilot can also be activated/deactivated from the relevant camera view.

Related information Park Assist* (p. 382)

Limitations of Parking assistance The Parking Assistance System cannot detect everything in all situations and may therefore have limited functionality in some cases.

A driver should be aware about the following examples of Park Assist Pilot's limitations:

WARNING

Pay additional attention while reversing when this symbol is shown if a trailer, bicycle rack or similar is mounted and electrically connected to the car.

The symbol indicates that the parking assistance sensors rearward are switched off and will not warn of any obsta- cles.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 385

IMPORTANT

Objects e.g. chains, thin glossy poles or low barriers may be in the "signal shadow" and are then temporarily not detected by the sen- sors - the pulsating tone may then unexpect- edly stop instead of changing over to the expected constant tone.

The sensors cannot detect high objects, such as projecting loading docks.

In such situations, pay extra attention and manoeuvre/reposition the car particularly slowly or stop the current parking manoeuvre - there may be a high risk of damage to vehicles or other objects since information from the sensors is not always reliable in such situations.

IMPORTANT

In certain conditions the parking assistance system may produce incorrect warning sig- nals that are caused by external sound sources with the same ultrasonic frequencies that the system works with.

Examples of such sources include horns, wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes, exhaust noises from motorcycles, etc.

NOTE

Since a towbar is configured with the car's electrical system, towbar protrusion is included when the function measures the dis- tance to an object behind the car.

Related information Park Assist* (p. 382)

Recommended Park Assist Pilot maintenance For the Park Assist Pilot function to work opti- mally, its sensors must be cleaned regularly with water and car shampoo.

Location of the parking sensors114.

NOTE

Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may cause incorrect warning signals, reduced or no function.

Related information Park Assist* (p. 382)

114NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.386

Symbols and messages for Park Assist Pilot Symbols and messages for Park Assist Pilot can be shown in the driver display and/or the centre display. The following table shows some examples.

Symbol Message Specification

The rearward parking assistance sensors are deactivated, so there are no acoustic warnings for obstacles/objects.

Park Assist System

Sensors blocked, cleaning nee- ded

One or more of the function's sensors are blocked - check and correct as soon as possible.

Park Assist System

Unavailable Service required

The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

A text message can be cleared by briefly press-

ing the button, located in the centre of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.

If a message remains: Contact a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information Park Assist* (p. 382)

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 387

Park assist camera* The park assist camera can assist the driver when manoeuvring in tight spaces by indicating obstacles with a camera image and graphics in the centre display. The parking assistance camera is a support func- tion which is activated automatically when reverse gear is selected or manually via the centre dis- play.

Example of camera view115.

Zoom116 - zoom in/out

360 view* - activates/deactivates all cam- eras

PAS* - activates/deactivates the Parking Assistance System

Lines - activates/deactivates park assist lines

Towbar* - activates/deactivates the towbar park assist line*117

CTA* - activates/deactivates Cross Traffic Alert

WARNING

The parking camera function is supple- mentary driver support intended to facili- tate driving and make it safer it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions.

The parking cameras have blind spots where obstacles cannot be detected.

Be particularly aware of people and ani- mals near the car.

Objects/obstacles on the display screen may be closer to the car than they appear to be on the screen.

The parking cameras are not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe man- ner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.

Related information Parking cameras' camera views (p. 388)

Park assist lines for parking camera (p. 390)

Sensor fields from Park Assist Pilot for park- ing camera (p. 392)

115The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model. 116The park assist lines are switched off when zooming in. 117Not available on all markets.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.388

Starting the park assist camera (p. 392)

Limitations for park assist camera (p. 393)

Recommended parking camera maintenance (p. 394)

Recommended parking camera maintenance (p. 394)

Symbols and messages for Park assist cam- era (p. 395)

Parking cameras' camera views The function can display a composite 360 view and separate views for each of the four cameras: rear, front, left or right camera view.

360 view*

The "field of vision" of the parking cameras with approxi- mate coverage area.

The 360 view function activates all parking cameras, whereupon the four sides of the car are shown simultaneously in the centre display, which helps the driver to observe what is around the car when manoeuvring at slow speeds.

From the 360 view, each camera view can be activated separately:

Press the screen for the desired field of vision of the camera, e.g. on the surface in front of/above the front camera.

A camera symbol on the centre display's car symbol indicates which of the cameras is active.

If the car is also equipped with Park Assist System* then distance to detected obstacles

is illustrated with fields in different colours.

The cameras can be activated automatically or manually, see the section "Starting the Park assist camera".

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 389

Backwards

The backwards-facing camera118 is fitted above the reg- istration plate.

The backward-facing camera shows a wide area behind the car. For certain models, part of the bumper can be seen as well as the towbar in some cases.

Objects shown in the centre display may appear slightly tilted this is normal.

Forwards

The forwards parking camera119 is located in the grille.

The front camera can be helpful on an exit road with limited visibility to the sides, e.g. when there are high hedges. It is active at speeds up to 25 km/h (16 mph) - following which, the front camera is switched off.

If the car does not reach 50 km/h (30 mph) and the speed falls below 22 km/h (14 mph) within 1 minute after the forward-facing camera has been extinguished, the camera is reactivated.

The sides

The side cameras119 are positioned in each door mirror.

The side cameras can show what is along each side of the car.

Related information Park assist camera* (p. 387)

118NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. 119NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

DRIVER SUPPORT

390

Park assist lines for parking camera The Park assist cameras indicate the position of the car in relation to its surroundings by display- ing lines on the screen.

Example120 of park assist lines.

Park assist lines show the intended route for the car's external dimensions with the current steer- ing wheel angle - this facilitates parallel parking,

reversing into tight spaces and when connecting a trailer.

The lines on the screen are projected as if they were at ground level behind the car and respond directly to steering wheel movements, showing the driver the path the car will take - also when the car is turning.

These park assist lines include the car's most protruding parts, e.g. towbar, door mirrors and corners.

NOTE

When reversing with a trailer which is not connected electrically to the car, the park assist lines on the display show the route the car will take not the trailer.

The screen shows no park assist lines when a trailer is connected electrically to the car's electrical system.

Park assist lines are not shown when zooming in.

IMPORTANT

Remember, that with the rear camera view selected, the monitor only displays the area behind the car. Be aware of the sides and front of the car when manoeu- vring in reverse.

The same applies vice versa - note what happens to the rear parts of the car when the front camera view is selected.

Note that the park assist lines show the shortest route. Therefore, pay extra attention to the car's sides so that they do not go against/over something when the steering wheel is turned when driving forward or that the front sweeps against/ over something when the steering wheel is turned when reversing.

120The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 391

Park assist lines in 360 view*

360 view with park assist lines120.

With the 360 view, park assist lines are shown behind, in front of and at the side of the car (depending on the direction of travel):

When driving forwards: Front lines

When reversing: Side lines and reversing lines.

With front or rear camera selected, the park assist lines appear regardless of the car's direc- tion of travel.

With one side camera selected, the park assist lines only appear when reversing.

Towbar assist line*

Towbar with park assist line120.

Towbar - activates the towbar assist line.

Zoom - zoom in/out.

The camera can facilitate connecting up to a trailer by showing an assist line representing the towbar's intended "path" to the trailer.

1. Press Towbar (1).

> The park assist lines for the towbar's intended "path" appear - the car's park assist lines disappear simultaneously.

Park assist lines for both car and towbar cannot be shown at the same time.

2. Press Zoom (2) when a more precise manoeuvring is required.

> The camera view zooms in.

Related information Park assist camera* (p. 387)

120The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.392

Sensor fields from Park Assist Pilot for parking camera If the car is equipped with Parking assistance then the distance is shown in the 360 view with coloured fields for each sensor that registers an obstacle.

Sensor fields backwards and forwards

The screen can show coloured sensor fields on the car symbol121.

The fields for the front and reversing sensors change colour as the distance to the obstacle decreases from yellow through orange to red.

Colours of front and

reversing fields

Distance in metres

(feet)

Yellow 0,6-1,5 (2,0-4,9)

Orange 0,4-0,6 (1,3-2,0)

Red 0-0,4 (0-1,3)

Sensor field to the sides The side fields are only shown in orange.

Colour of side fields Distance in metres

(feet)

Orange 0-0,3 (0-1,0)

Related information Park assist camera* (p. 387)

Starting the park assist camera The park assist camera starts automatically when reverse gear is engaged or manually with one of the centre display's function buttons.

Camera view when reversing When reverse gear is engaged, the screen shows the 360 view if it or any of the side views was the last used camera view, otherwise the rear view is shown.

Camera view for manual camera start Start the parking camera with this button in the centre dis- play's function view.

The screen then initially shows the last used camera view. However, after each engine

start, the previously shown side view is replaced by the 360 view and the previously shown zoomed rear view is replaced by the rear view.

Automatic deactivation of camera The front view extinguishes at 25 km/h (16 mph) to avoid distracting the driver - it reactivates auto- matically if the speed drops to 22 km/h (14 mph) within 1 minute, on the condition that the speed has not exceeded 50 km/h (31 mph).

Other camera views are extinguished at 15 km/h (9 mph) and not reactivated.

121The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 393

Related information Park assist camera* (p. 387)

Limitations for park assist camera The park assist camera cannot detect everything in all situations and may therefore have limited functionality.

A driver should be aware about the following examples of the park assist camera's limitations:

WARNING

Pay additional attention while reversing when this symbol is shown if a trailer, bicycle rack or similar is mounted and electrically connected to the car.

The symbol indicates that the parking assistance sensors rearward are switched off and will not warn of any obsta- cles.

NOTE

A bike carrier or other accessory mounted on the rear of the car could obscure the cam- era's view.

Blind sectors

There are "blind" sectors between the cameras' fields of vision.

In 360 view obstacles/objects can vanish in the gaps between the individual cameras.

WARNING

Pay attention to the possibility that, even if it only looks like a relatively small part of the image is obscured, a relatively large sector could be hidden from view. An obstacle could thereby go undetected until the car is very close to it.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.394

Defective camera If a camera sector is black and contains this symbol then it means that the camera is out of order.

The following illustration shows an example.

The car's left-hand camera is out of order.

Black camera sector A black camera sector is also shown in the fol- lowing instances, but then without the symbol for defective camera:

open door

open tailgate

folded-in door mirror.

Light conditions The camera image is adjusted automatically according to prevailing light conditions. Because

of this, the image may vary slightly in brightness and quality. Poor light conditions can result in reduced image quality.

Related information Park assist camera* (p. 387)

Recommended parking camera maintenance The parking cameras positioned beside the rear number plate holder, in the grille and in both door mirrors need a certain amount of mainte- nance. Clean camera lenses regularly with lukewarm water and car shampoo - be careful not to scratch the lenses.

NOTE

Keep the camera lens clear of dirt, snow and ice to ensure optimum function. This is partic- ularly important in poor light.

Related information Park assist camera* (p. 387)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 395

Symbols and messages for Park assist camera Symbols and messages for Park assist camera can be shown in the driver display and/or the centre display. The following table shows examples.

Symbol Message Specification

The rearward parking assistance sensors are deactivated, so there are no acoustic warnings and field marks for obstacles/objects.

The camera is disengaged.

Park Assist System

Sensors blocked, cleaning needed

One or more of the function's sensors are blocked - check and correct as soon as possible.

Park Assist System

Unavailable Service required

The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

A text message can be cleared by briefly press-

ing the button, located in the centre of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.

If a message remains: Contact a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information Park assist camera* (p. 387)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.396

Park Assist Pilot* Park Assist Pilot (PAP122) helps the driver to park in or leave a parking space.

PAP first checks if a space is large enough and if so steers the car into the space.

The centre display indicates with symbols, graph- ics and text the various operations to be carried out and when to do so.

WARNING

The PAP function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer it cannot handle all situa- tions in all traffic, weather and road condi- tions.

Be particularly aware of people and ani- mals near the car.

PAP is not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropri- ate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.

NOTE

The PAP function measures the space and steers the car - the driver's task is to:

keep a close watch around the car

follow the instructions in the centre dis- play

select gear (reverse/forward) - a "ping" sound indicates when the driver should change gear

control and maintain a safe speed

brake and stop.

Related information Parking variants with Park Assist Pilot

(p. 396)

Parking with Park Assist Pilot (p. 397)

Leaving a car park with Park Assist Pilot (p. 400)

Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* (p. 401)

Recommended Park Assist Pilot mainte- nance (p. 402)

Messages for Park Assist Pilot* (p. 403)

Parking variants with Park Assist Pilot Park Assist Pilot PAP123 can be used for the fol- lowing different parking situations.

122Park Assist Pilot 123Park Assist Pilot

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 397

Parallel parking

The principal of parallel parking.

The PAP function parks the car using the follow- ing steps:

1. A parking space is identified and measured.

2. The car is reversed into the space.

3. The car is positioned in the space by means of driving forward/backward.

Using the Park Out function, a parallel-parked car can also be assisted by PAP to leave the parking space - see the heading "Leaving a park- ing space" in the section "Parking with Park Assist Pilot".

Perpendicular parking

Principle for perpendicular parking.

The PAP function parks the car using the follow- ing steps:

1. A parking space is identified and measured.

2. The car is reversed into the space and then positioned in the space by means of driving forward/backward.

NOTE

A perpendicular-parked car cannot be assis- ted by the PAP Park Out function to leave a parking space - the function must only be used for a parallel-parked car.

Related information Park Assist Pilot* (p. 396)

Parking with Park Assist Pilot Park Assist Pilot (PAP124) helps the driver park via three steps. The function can also help the driver to leave a parking space.

NOTE

The PAP function measures the space and steers the car - the driver's task is to:

keep a close watch around the car

follow the instructions in the centre dis- play

select gear (reverse/forward) - a "ping" sound indicates when the driver should change gear

control and maintain a safe speed

brake and stop.

Symbols, graphics and/or text appear on the cen- tre display's screen when the different steps are to be performed.

PAP can be activated if the following criteria are met once the engine has been started:

No trailer is attached to the car

Speed must be lower than 30 km/h (20 mph).

124Park Assist Pilot

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

398

NOTE

The distance between the car and parking spaces should be 0.5-1.5 metres (1.6-5.0 ft) while PAP is searching for a parking space.

Parking PAP parks the car using the following steps:

1. A parking space is identified and measured.

2. The car is reversed into the space.

3. The car is positioned into the space - the system may then request that the driver changes gear.

Finding and measuring parking spaces The function can be activated in the centre display's function view.

It can also be accessed from the camera views.

Principle for parallel parking.

Principle for perpendicular parking.

Proceed as follows:

1. Drive no faster than 30 km/h (20 mph) for parallel parking or 20 km/h (12 mph) for perpendicular parking.

2. Tap on the Park In button in the function view or in the camera view.

> PAP searches for a parking space and checks whether it is big enough.

3. Be prepared to stop the car when the graphic and message on the centre display state that a suitable parking space has been found.

> A pop-up window is shown.

4. Select Parallel parking or Perpendicular parking and select reverse gear.

NOTE

PAP searches the area for parking, displays instructions and guides the car in on its pas- senger side. But if required the car can also be parked on the driver's side of the street:

Activate the direction indicator to the driver's side - then the system searches for a parking space on that side of the car instead.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

399

Reversing in to the parking space

Parallel.

Perpendicular.

Perform the following to reverse the car into the parking space:

1. Check that the area behind the car is clear, then engage reverse gear.

2. Reverse slowly and carefully without touching the steering wheel - and no faster than 7 km/h (4 mph).

3. Be prepared to stop the car when instructed by the graphic and message on the centre display.

NOTE

Keep your hands away from the steering wheel when the PAP function is acti- vated.

Make sure that the steering wheel is not hindered in any way and can rotate freely.

To achieve optimum results - wait until the steering wheel is fully turned before starting to drive backward/forward.

Positioning the car in the parking space

Parallel.

Perpendicular.

Proceed as follows:

1. Move the gear selector into the D position, wait until the steering wheel has been turned and drive slowly forward.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.400

2. Be prepared to stop the car when instructed by the graphic and message on the centre display.

3. Select reverse gear and drive slowly back- wards.

4. Be prepared to stop the car when instructed by the graphic and message on the centre display.

The function is deactivated automatically and the graphics and message show that parking is com- plete. It may be necessary for the driver to correct the cars position. Only the driver can determine whether the car is properly parked.

IMPORTANT

The warning distance is shorter when the sensors are used by PAP compared with when Park Assist uses the sensors.

Related information Park Assist Pilot* (p. 396)

Leaving a car park with Park Assist Pilot The function Park Out can also help the driver to leave a parking space.

NOTE

When leaving a parking space, the Park Out function must only be used for a parallel- parked car - it does not work for a perpendic- ular-parked car.

The Park Out function is acti- vated in the centre display's function view or in the camera view.

Proceed as follows:

1. Tap on the Park Out button in the function view or in the camera view.

2. Use the direction indicator to select the direction in which the car should leave the parking space.

3. Be prepared to stop the car when instructed by the graphic and message on the centre display - follow the instructions in the same way as for the parking procedure.

Note the steering wheel can "spring" back when the function is completed - the driver may then need to turn the steering wheel back to the maxi-

mum steering angle in order to leave the parking space.

If PAP considers that the driver can leave the parking space without any extra manoeuvring then the function will be stopped, even if the driver may consider that the car is still in the parking space.

Related information Park Assist Pilot* (p. 396)

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 401

Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* The Park Assist Pilot PAP125 function cannot detect everything in all situations and may there- fore have limited functionality.

WARNING

The PAP function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions.

Be particularly aware of people and ani- mals near the car.

Bear in mind that the front of the car may swing out towards oncoming traffic dur- ing the parking manoeuvre.

Objects situated higher than the sensor detection area are not included when cal- culating the parking manoeuvre, which could cause PAP to swing into the park- ing space too early such parking spaces should be avoided for this reason.

PAP is not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropri- ate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.

A driver should be aware about the following examples of Park Assist Pilot limitations:

Parking is discontinued A parking sequence will be discontinued:

if the driver moves the steering wheel

if the car is driven too quickly - above 7 km/h (4 mph)

if the driver presses Cancel in the centre display

when the anti-lock brakes or the Electronic stability control are engaged - e.g. when a wheel loses grip on a slippery road

when the power steering works at reduced power - e.g. during cooling due to overheat- ing (see section "Speed-dependent steering force").

Where applicable, a message in the centre dis- play states the reason for a parking sequence being discontinued.

IMPORTANT

Under certain circumstances, PAP is unable to find parking spaces - one reason for this may be the fact that there is interference with the sensors from external sound sources which emit the same ultrasound frequencies as those with which the system works.

Examples of such sources include horns, wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes and exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.

NOTE

Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors will reduce their function and may prevent meas- urement.

Driver responsibility The driver should bear in mind that the PAP is an aid not an infallible, fully-automatic function. The driver must therefore be prepared to inter- rupt a parking step.

125Park Assist Pilot

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.402

There are also a few details to bear in mind while parking, e.g.:

The driver is always responsible for determin- ing whether the space selected by PAP is suitable for parking.

Do not use PAP if snow chains or a spare wheel are fitted.

Do not use PAP if cargo items are protruding from the car.

Heavy rain or snow may cause the system to measure the parking space incorrectly.

During the search and check-measurement of the parking space, PAP may miss objects positioned deep in the parking space.

Parking spaces on narrow streets are not always feasible, since the space required for manoeuvring may not be sufficient.

Use approved tyres126 with the correct tyre pressure - this affects the ability of PAP to park the car.

PAP bases itself on the locations of vehicles already parked nearby - if they are inap- propriately parked, your own car's tyres and wheel rims may be damaged by contact with the kerb.

Perpendicular parking spaces may be missed or offered unnecessarily if one parked car is protruding more than other parked cars.

PAP is designed for parking on straight streets - not sharp curves or bends. For this reason, make sure the car is parallel to the potential parking spaces when PAP meas- ures the space.

IMPORTANT

Changing to another approved wheel rim and/or tyre dimension may involve a changed tyre circumference, which means that the PAP system's parameters may then need to be updated. Consult a workshop - an author- ised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information Park Assist Pilot* (p. 396)

Speed-dependent steering force (p. 268)

Recommended Park Assist Pilot maintenance For the Park Assist Pilot PAP127 function to work optimally, the parking assistance sensors must be cleaned regularly with water and car sham- poo.

Location of the parking sensors128.

NOTE

Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may cause incorrect warning signals, reduced or no function.

Related information Park Assist Pilot* (p. 396)

126"Approved tyres" refers to tyres of the same type and make as those fitted new on delivery from the factory.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 403

Messages for Park Assist Pilot* Messages for Park Assist Pilot PAP129 can be shown in the driver display and/or the centre dis- play. The following table shows examples.

Message Specification

Park Assist System

Sensors blocked, cleaning needed

One or more of the function's sensors are blocked - check and correct as soon as possible.

Park Assist System

Unavailable Service required

The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

A text message can be cleared by briefly press-

ing the button, located in the centre of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.

If a message remains: Contact a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information Park Assist Pilot* (p. 396)

127Park Assist Pilot 128NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. 129Park Assist Pilot

HYBRID INFORMATION

HYBRID INFORMATION

406

General information about Twin Engine Twin Engine runs like a regular car, but certain functions differ from a car that only runs on pet- rol or diesel. The electric motor drives the car mostly at low speeds, the petrol engine at higher speeds, as well as during more active driving. The driver display shows some information that is unique to the Twin Engine - charging information, selected drive mode, distance to empty battery as well as the hybrid battery's charge level.

It is possible to set the car in different drive modes while driving, e.g. electric operation only or, when power is required, both electric motor and petrol engine. The car calculates an optimal combination of drivability, driving experience, environmental impact and fuel economy accord- ing to the drive mode selected.

In order that the car should have optimal function it is important that the hybrid battery with associ- ated electrical drive systems, as well as the petrol engine and its drive systems, have the correct operating temperature. Battery capacity may be reduced considerably if the battery is too cold or too hot. Preconditioning prepares the car's drive systems and the passenger compartment before departure so that both wear and energy needs during the journey are reduced. The range for the hybrid battery increases.

The hybrid battery which drives the electric motor is charged via a charging cable but can also be charged by gentle braking and engine braking in

gear position B. The hybrid battery can also be charged by the car's engine.

Important to know

Car without power Bear in mind that important functions such as the brakes and power steering are inoperable when the car is without power.

WARNING

In a de-energised car with the electric motor and fuel-driven engine switched off it is not possible to brake the car.

Towing not permitted Towing the Twin Engine is not permitted since this damages the electric motor.

Exterior engine noise

WARNING

Remember that the car does not emit any engine noise when it is only powered by the electric motor and may therefore be difficult to notice by children, pedestrians, cyclists and animals. This is especially true at low speeds, such as in car parks.

High-voltage current

WARNING

Several components in the car work with high-voltage current that could be dangerous in the event of incorrect intervention. These components, and all orange-coloured cables, must only be handled by qualified personnel.

Do not touch anything that is not clearly descri- bed in the owner's manual.

Related information Charging the hybrid battery (p. 407)

Hybrid gauge (p. 80)

Drive modes (p. 449)

Hybrid battery (p. 609)

Factors that affect range when running on electricity (p. 462)

Gear positions for automatic gearbox (p. 443)

Towing (p. 482)

HYBRID INFORMATION

}}

407

Charging the hybrid battery In addition to the fuel tank, as in a conventional car, the car is equipped with a rechargeable bat- tery - a so-called hybrid battery of the lithium-ion type.

The hybrid battery is charged using a charging cable with control unit which is located in a stor- age compartment in the cargo area.

NOTE

Volvo recommends a charging cable in accordance with IEC 62196 and IEC 61851 which supports temperature monitoring.

The time it takes for the hybrid battery to be charged is dependent on the charging current that is used.

NOTE

The capacity of the hybrid battery decreases slightly with age and use, which may result in increased use of the petrol engine and thereby slightly increased fuel consumption.

WARNING

Replacing the hybrid battery must only be per- formed by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Charging cable handle and charging input socket.

Charging status is indicated in three ways:

Different indicators on the charging cable's control unit.

Indicator lamp in the car's charging input socket.

Illustration and text in the driver display.

While the hybrid battery is being charged, charg- ing is also in progress for the car's starter battery.

If the hybrid battery's temperature is below -10 C (14 F) or above 40 C (104 F) then it

may mean that some of the car's functions are changed or unavailable because the capacity of the hybrid batteries is reduced outside this tem- perature range.

Electric operation is not possible if the tempera- ture of the battery is too low or too high. If drive mode PURE is then selected, the combustion engine starts.

Charging with fixed control unit in accordance with mode 31

In certain markets the control unit is installed within a charging station connected to the mains power circuit. In which case, the charging cable has no control unit of its own. Instead, it has a special connector to be used to connect the charging cable to the charging station. Follow the instructions at the charging station.

1 European standard - EN 61851-1.

||

HYBRID INFORMATION

408

Charging with the petrol engine

The car generates current to the battery and the battery is charged, e.g. when the brake pedal is pressed gently or during engine braking down a hill.

The car can also generate power for the hybrid battery and the battery is charged.

The hybrid battery is recharged during gentle braking with the brake pedal. The car's kinetic energy is then converted to electrical energy, which is used to charge the hybrid battery.

In gear position B, the car undergoes electric motor braking when the accelerator pedal is released and the hybrid battery is recharged at the same time.

The hybrid battery can also be charged by the car's engine.

Related information Charging cable (p. 410)

Charging current (p. 408)

Opening and closing the hatch for the charg- ing input socket (p. 413)

Start charging the hybrid battery (p. 414)

Stop charging of hybrid battery (p. 422)

Charging status in the charging cable's con- trol unit (p. 418)

Charging status in the car's charging input socket (p. 416)

Charging status in the car's driver display (p. 420)

Symbols and messages relating to Twin Engine in the driver display (p. 423)

Gear positions for automatic gearbox (p. 443)

Changing drive mode (p. 453)

Long-term storage of vehicles with hybrid batteries (p. 425)

Charging current Charging current is used for charging the hybrid battery as well as preconditioning of the car. The charging cable between the car's charging input

socket and a 230 V socket2 (alternating current) can be set for different current intensity loads (6-16 A) using the control unit. When the charging cable is activated, the driver display shows a message and a lamp in the car's charging input socket illuminates. The charging current is mainly used for battery charging, but is also used for preconditioning the car. When the car's hybrid battery is charged, the starter battery is also charged.

IMPORTANT

Never unplug the charging cable from the 230 V socket (alternating current) while charging is in progress - there is then a risk of damaging the 230 V socket. Always stop charging first before unplugging the charging cable from the car's charging input socket and then from the 230 V socket.

Charging time varies with the amperage setting on the control unit. The following charging times apply to optimal charging, i.e. when no climate control function or other load is affecting charg-

2 The voltage in the socket may vary depending on market.

HYBRID INFORMATION

409

ing. If charging time seems long, it should be investigated.

Current intensity (A)A Charging time (hours)

6 6

10 3.5

16 2,5

A Maximum charging current may vary depending on market.

NOTE

If the weather is very hot or very cold, some of the charging current is used to heat/cool the hybrid battery and the pas- senger compartment, which results in a longer charging time.

The charging time is extended if precon- ditioning has been selected. The time required depends mainly on the outside temperature.

Normally several 230 V consumers are included in a fuse circuit, so additional consumers (e.g. lighting, vacuum cleaner, electric drill, etc.) can be on the same fuse.

Example 1 If the car is connected to a 230 V/10 A socket and the control unit is set at 16 A, then the car will attempt to draw 16 A from the 230 V mains

power circuit - after a while the overloaded 10 A fuse for the socket will be tripped and battery charging stopped.

In which case, reset the fuse for the socket and select a lower charging current on the control unit.

Example 2 If the car is connected to a 230 V/10 A socket and the control unit is set at 10 A, then the car will draw 10 A from the 230 V mains power cir- cuit. If additional consumers are connected to the same socket (or another socket in the same fuse circuit) then there is a risk that the fuse for the socket/fuse socket will be overloaded and trig- gered, at which point battery charging is stopped.

In such cases, reset the fuse for the socket/fuse circuit and select a lower charging current on the control unit - or disconnect other consumers from the socket/fuse circuit.

Example 3 If the car is connected to a 230 V/10 A socket and the control unit is set at 6 A, then the car will only draw 6 A from the 230 V mains power cir- cuit. Battery charging will of course take longer, but then additional consumers can be connected at the same time to the same socket/fuse circuit as long as the total load does not exceed the capacity of the socket/fuse circuit.

Related information Charging cable (p. 410)

The charging cable's control unit (p. 412)

Charging status in the car's driver display (p. 420)

Charging status in the car's charging input socket (p. 416)

Stop charging of hybrid battery (p. 422)

HYBRID INFORMATION

410

Charging cable The charging cable with its control unit is used to charge the car's hybrid battery.

The charging cable is located in the storage compart- ment under the cargo area's floor hatch.

WARNING

Only use the charging cable provided with your car or a replacement cable recom- mended by Volvo.

Specifications, charging cable

Enclosure class IP67

Ambient tempera- ture

-32 C to 50 C (-25 F to 122 F)

WARNING

The charging cable has a built-in circuit breaker. Charging must only take place with grounded and approved sockets.

Children should be supervised when in the vicinity of the charging cable when it is plugged in.

High voltage in the charging cable. Con- tact with high voltage can cause death or serious personal injury.

Do not use the charging cable if it is damaged in any way. A damaged or inop- erative charging cable must only be repaired by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Always position the charging cable so that it will not be driven over, stepped on, tripped over or damaged in some other way, or cause personal injury.

Disconnect the charger from the wall out- let before cleaning it.

Never connect the charging cable to an extension cord or a multiple plug socket.

Also, refer to the manufacturer's instructions for using the charging cable and its compo- nents.

IMPORTANT

Multiple plugs, extension cables, overvoltage protection or similar devices must not be used together with the charging cable since this may involve a risk of fire, electric shocks, etc.

An adapter between the 230 V socket (alter- nating current) and the charging cable may only be used if the adapter is approved in accordance with IEC 61851 and IEC 62196.

IMPORTANT

Never unplug the charging cable from the 230 V socket (alternating current) while charging is in progress - there is then a risk of damaging the 230 V socket. Always stop charging first before unplugging the charging cable from the car's charging input socket and then from the 230 V socket.

IMPORTANT

Clean the charging cable with a clean cloth, moistened with water or a mild detergent. Do not use chemicals or solvents. Do not immerse the charging cable in water.

The charging cable and its associated parts should not be swamped or immersed in water.

HYBRID INFORMATION

411

IMPORTANT

Avoid exposing the control unit and its plug to direct sunlight. In such cases, the overheating protection in the plug is at risk of reducing or interrupting the charging of the hybrid battery.

Related information The charging cable's control unit (p. 412)

Ground fault breaker in the charging cable (p. 411)

Temperature monitoring of the charging cable (p. 412)

Charging the hybrid battery (p. 407)

Ground fault breaker in the charging cable The control unit for the charging cable charging cable has a built-in ground fault breaker that pro- tects the car and the user from electric shocks caused by system faults.

If the control module's built-in ground fault breaker is tripped then the car symbol illuminates with red constant glow - check the 230 V socket (alternating current).

WARNING

Charging the hybrid battery must only take place with grounded and approved 230 V sockets (alternating current). If the capacity for the socket or fuse circuit is unknown, ask a licensed electrician to check the capacity. Charging above the capacity of a fuse circuit may lead to fire or damage the fuse circuit.

WARNING

The charging cable's overvoltage protec- tion helps to protect the car's charging system, but cannot guarantee that over- load will never occur.

Never use visibly worn or damaged elec- trical sockets. This could cause fire or serious injury.

Never connect the charging cable to a cable extension.

Maintenance or replacement of the hybrid battery must only be performed by a trained and qualified Volvo service techni- cian.

IMPORTANT

The ground fault breaker does not protect the 230 V socket (alternating current)/electrical installation.

Related information Charging cable (p. 410)

The charging cable's control unit (p. 412)

Charging status in the charging cable's con- trol unit (p. 418)

HYBRID INFORMATION

412

Temperature monitoring of the charging cable For the car's hybrid battery to be charged safely every time, the control unit for the charging cable and the plug have built-in monitoring devices for the temperature. Temperature monitoring takes place in the con- trol unit and the plug.

NOTE

Volvo recommends a charging cable in accordance with IEC 62196 and IEC 61851 which supports temperature monitoring.

Monitoring in the control unit Charging is switched off if the temperature of the control unit is too high. This is to protect the electronics. This may take place at a high outer temperature, for example, and/or when strong sunlight shines directly on the control unit.

Monitoring at the plug If the temperature at the power source to which the charging cable is connected is too high, the charging current is reduced. If the temperature exceeds a critical level, charging is stopped com- pletely.

IMPORTANT

If the temperature monitoring has automati- cally lowered the charging current repeatedly and charging has been interrupted then the cause of the overheating must be investiga- ted and rectified.

Related information Charging cable (p. 410)

The charging cable's control unit (p. 412)

The charging cable's control unit The charging cable's control device consists of indicators and controls.

Control unit indicators and controls.

HYBRID INFORMATION

413

Indicator shows selected charging current3.

The symbol illuminates when the charging cable is plugged into a 230 V socket4 (alter- nating current).

Pushbuttons to increase and decrease the charging current.

The symbol illuminates when the charging cable is plugged into the car's charging input socket.

NOTE

The charging cable will remember the last setting of the charging current. It is therefore important to adjust the setting if another 230 V socket (alternating current) is used at the next charging.

On the charging cable's control unit, set the required charging current 6-16 A3. On delivery, the lowest possible charging current is preset.

Related information Charging current (p. 408)

Charging cable (p. 410)

Charging status in the charging cable's con- trol unit (p. 418)

Start charging the hybrid battery (p. 414)

Opening and closing the hatch for the charging input socket The flap for the hybrid battery's charging input socket is opened manually.

First unlock the car with the remote control key.

Press in the rear section of the cover and release.

Open the cover.

Close the cover for the charging input socket in reverse order.

NOTE

Since the boot lid/tailgate is locked while driving, the car must be unlocked again for the boot lid/tailgate to be opened.

Related information Start charging the hybrid battery (p. 414)

Stop charging of hybrid battery (p. 422)

Charging the hybrid battery (p. 407)

3 Maximum charging current may vary depending on market. 4 The voltage in the socket may vary depending on market.

HYBRID INFORMATION

414

Start charging the hybrid battery The car's hybrid battery is charged with a charg-

ing cable between the car and a 230 V socket5

(alternating current).

Only use the charging cable supplied with the car or a replacement cable recommended by Volvo.

IMPORTANT

Never connect the charging cable when there is a risk of thunderstorm or lightning strike.

NOTE

Volvo recommends a charging cable in accordance with IEC 62196 and IEC 61851 which supports temperature monitoring.

WARNING

The hybrid battery must only be charged at maximum permitted charging current or lower in accordance with applicable local and national recommendations for hybrid charging from 230 V sockets (alternating current)/plugs.

Charging the hybrid battery must only take place from an approved grounded 230 V socket6 or from a charging station with a loose charging cable (Mode 3) supplied by Volvo.

The control unit's ground fault breaker protects the car, but there may still be a risk of overloading the 230 V mains power circuit.

Avoid visible worn or damaged mains sockets since they may lead to fire dam- age and/or personal injury if used.

Never use an extension cable.

Never use an adapter.

WARNING

The charging cable has a built-in circuit breaker. Charging must only take place with grounded and approved sockets.

Children should be supervised when in the vicinity of the charging cable when it is plugged in.

High voltage in the charging cable. Con- tact with high voltage can cause death or serious personal injury.

Do not use the charging cable if it is damaged in any way. A damaged or inop- erative charging cable must only be repaired by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Always position the charging cable so that it will not be driven over, stepped on, tripped over or damaged in some other way, or cause personal injury.

Disconnect the charger from the wall out- let before cleaning it.

Never connect the charging cable to an extension cord or a multiple plug socket.

Also, refer to the manufacturer's instructions for using the charging cable and its compo- nents.

5 The voltage in the socket may vary depending on market. 6 Or equivalent sockets with a different voltage, depending on market.

HYBRID INFORMATION

}}

415

IMPORTANT

Check that the 230 V socket (alternating current) has adequate power capacity for charging electric vehicles - in the event of uncertainty, the socket must be checked by a qualified professional.

If the socket has unknown power capacity - use the lowest level on the control unit.

Take the charging cable out from the storage compartment under the cargo area floor. Note that the car must be switched off prior to charg- ing.

Connect the charging cable to a 230 V socket. Never use an extension cable.

2. Set the correct charging current (for existing 230 V socket) on the control unit.

Open the charging hatch. Remove the charg- ing handle's protective cover and then press the handle the whole way into the socket for the car.

Clamp the charging handle's cover in place as illustrated.

IMPORTANT

To avoid damage to the paint, e.g. in the event of high winds, position the charging handle's protective cover so that it does not touch the car.

||

HYBRID INFORMATION

416

5. The charging cable's charging handle is fas- tened/locked in, and charging starts within 5 seconds. When charging has started, the LED lamp in the charging input socket flashes with a green glow. The driver display shows the remaining estimated charging time or whether charging is not working as intended.

Battery charging can be interrupted for a while if the car is unlocked:

and the door is opened - charging restarts within a few minutes.

without the door being opened - the car is relocked automatically. Charging restarts after 1 minute.

IMPORTANT

Never unplug the charging cable from the 230 V socket (alternating current) while charging is in progress - there is then a risk of damaging the 230 V socket. Always stop charging first before unplugging the charging cable from the car's charging input socket and then from the 230 V socket.

Condensation from the air conditioning may drip under the car during charging. This is normal and takes place due to cooling of the hybrid battery.

Related information Charging the hybrid battery (p. 407)

The charging cable's control unit (p. 412)

Opening and closing the hatch for the charg- ing input socket (p. 413)

Charging status in the car's charging input socket (p. 416)

Charging status in the car's driver display (p. 420)

Charging status in the charging cable's con- trol unit (p. 418)

Stop charging of hybrid battery (p. 422)

Charging status in the car's charging input socket The charging input socket shows the charging status using an LED lamp.

LED lamp location in the car's charging input socket.

The LED lamp shows the existing status while charging is in progress. If the LED lamp does not illuminate, check that the cable is firmly plugged into the wall socket and the socket in the car. The white, red or yellow lamps are activated when the passenger compartment lighting is switched on - they remain switched on for a while after the passenger compartment lighting has been switched off.

HYBRID INFORMATION

417

LED lamp's

glow

Specification

White LED light.

Yellow Waiting modeA - waiting for charging to start.

Flashing green Charging in progressB.

Green Charging completeC.

Red A fault has arisen.

A For example, after a door has been opened or if the charging cable's handle is not locked in.

B The slower the flashing, the closer to fully charged. C Extinguishes after a while.

Related information Charging the hybrid battery (p. 407)

Charging status in the car's driver display (p. 420)

Charging status in the charging cable's con- trol unit (p. 418)

Stop charging of hybrid battery (p. 422)

HYBRID INFORMATION

418

Charging status in the charging cable's control unit Different indicators on the charging cable's con- trol unit show the status of ongoing charging and after completed charging.

Control unit indicators and controls.

HYBRID INFORMATION

419

Control unit indicators Status Specification Recommended action

The indicator for charging current (1) is extinguished. The car symbol (4) illumi- nates with a constant green glow.

Standby The charging cable is connected to the car.

Charging is possible but has not yet been activated by the electronics in the car.

Wait until the battery is fully charged.

Existing charge current is shown by a green indicator (1). The car symbol (4) illuminates with a constant green glow.

Charging in pro- gress.

The car's electronics have started charging.

Charging in progress.

Wait until the battery is fully charged.

The indicator for charging current (1) is extinguished. The car symbol (4) flashes red.

Charging is not possible.

There is a communication error between the control unit and the car.

The ventilation for the car's electronics is not adequate, not activated or defective.

1. Check all connections or use another 230 V socket (alternating current).

2. Restart the battery charging.

The car symbol (4) illuminates with a con- stant red glow.

Charging is not possible.

The ground fault breaker on the charging cable has triggered.

1. Unplug the charging cable from the 230 V socket.

2. The ground fault breaker is reset and the unit restarts.

3. If the problem persists - consult a qualified professional

The indicator for charging current (1) and the house symbol (2) flash red.

Charging is not possible.

Temperature monitoring has triggered for the 230 V socket.

Restart charging. If the problem persists - consult a qualified professional.

Related information Charging the hybrid battery (p. 407)

The charging cable's control unit (p. 412)

Charging status in the car's charging input socket (p. 416)

Charging status in the car's driver display (p. 420)

Stop charging of hybrid battery (p. 422)

HYBRID INFORMATION

420

Charging status in the car's driver display The driver display shows the status for charging with both image and text. The information is

shown for as long as the driver display is operat- ing.

Image Message Specification

Fully charged at: [Time] is shown together with an animation with blue pulsating light through the charging cable.

Charging continues and an approximate time for when the battery is estimated to be fully charged is shown.

The text Charging complete is shown. An illustration of the car is shown with an LED indicator at the charging input socket that illuminates in green.

The battery is fully charged.

The text Charging error is shown. The LED indicator at the charging input socket illuminates in red.

A fault has occurred, check the connection of the charging cable to the car's charging input socket and to the 230 V socketA (alternating current).

A The voltage in the socket may vary depending on market.

HYBRID INFORMATION

421

NOTE

If the driver display is not used for a while then it is dimmed. Reactivate the display by means of one of the following:

depress the brake pedal

open one of the doors

set the car in ignition position I by turning the START knob clockwise and releasing.

Related information Charging the hybrid battery (p. 407)

Symbols and messages relating to Twin Engine in the driver display (p. 423)

Charging status in the car's charging input socket (p. 416)

Charging status in the charging cable's con- trol unit (p. 418)

Stop charging of hybrid battery (p. 422)

HYBRID INFORMATION

* Option/accessory.422

Stop charging of hybrid battery Finish charging by unlocking the car, unplugging the charging cable from the car's charging input

socket and then from the 230 V socket7 (alter- nating current).

NOTE

Always unlock the car so that charging is stopped before the connection to the 230 V socket (alternating current) is unplugged. Note that the charging cable must be unplug- ged from the car's charging input socket before being unplugged from the 230 V socket, partly to avoid damage to the system and partly to avoid stopping the charging unintentionally.

Unlock the car with the remote control key - charging is finished and the charging cable's locked handle releases/is unlocked.

Unplug the cable from the car's charging input socket and close the hatch.

Unplug the cable from the 230 V socket.

Return the charging cable to the storage compartment under the cargo area floor.

The charging cable is locked automatically If the charging cable is not unplugged from the charging input socket, it is locked in again auto- matically shortly after unlocking in order to maxi-

mise charging and range, as well as to facilitate preconditioning prior to the journey. The charging cable can be unplugged again if the car is unlocked using the remote control key. For cars with Passive Entry*, you can lock and unlock using the handle again.

Related information Opening and closing the hatch for the charg-

ing input socket (p. 413)

Charging cable (p. 410)

Charging the hybrid battery (p. 407)

Start charging the hybrid battery (p. 414)

7 The voltage in the socket may vary depending on market.

HYBRID INFORMATION

}}

423

Symbols and messages relating to Twin Engine in the driver display A number of symbols and messages regarding Twin Engine can be shown in the driver display.

They may also be shown in combination with general indicator and warning symbols and are then extinguished when the problems have been rectified.

Symbol Message Specification

12 V Battery

Charging fault, service urgent. Drive to workshop

Hybrid battery fault. Contact a workshopA to check the battery as soon as possible.

12 V Battery

Charging fault Stop safely

Hybrid battery fault. Stop the car safely and contact a workshopA to have the battery checked as soon as possible.

12 V Battery

Fuse failure Service required

Hybrid battery fault. Contact a workshopA to check the function as soon as possible.

Hybrid battery

Overheated, stop safely

The temperature of the hybrid battery seems to be rising abnormally. Stop the car and switch off the engine. Wait at least 5 minutes before continuing to drive. Call a workshopA or check from the out- side that everything seems normal before continuing to drive.

Reduced performance

Max car speed limited

The hybrid battery is not sufficiently charged for driving at high speeds. Charge the battery as soon as possible.

Hybrid system

Harsh behaviour at low speed, car ok to use

The hybrid system does not function as intended. Contact a workshopA to check the function as soon as possible.

||

HYBRID INFORMATION

424

Symbol Message Specification

Hybrid system failure

Service required

The hybrid system is disengaged. Contact a workshopA to check the function as soon as possible.

Charge cable

Remove before start

Shown when the driver tries to start the car and the charging cable is connected to the car. Discon- nect the charging cable and close the charging hatch.

Charge cable

Removed? Turn and hold start knob 7s

Shown when the driver starts the car with the charging cable connected to the car after an earlier attempt. Disconnect the charging cable or investigate whether the cable actually is disconnected and that the charging hatch is closed.

A An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information Start charging the hybrid battery (p. 414)

Stop charging of hybrid battery (p. 422)

Charging the hybrid battery (p. 407)

Warning symbols in the driver display (p. 89)

Indicator symbols in the driver display (p. 87)

Hybrid gauge (p. 80)

Hybrid battery gauge (p. 81)

HYBRID INFORMATION

425

Long-term storage of vehicles with hybrid batteries To minimise hybrid battery degradation during prolonged storage (longer than 1 month) of the vehicle a charge level of approximately 25% is recommended as indicated on the driver display. Proceed as follows:

1. If the state of charge is high - run the car until approx. 25% remains. If the state of charge is low - charge the battery until a level of approx. 25% is reached.

2. If storage has lasted longer than 6 months or the hybrid battery charge level is significantly lower than 25% - charge the battery to approx. 25% again to compensate for the natural self-discharge that occurred during the prolonged storage. Continuously check the charge level in the driver display.

NOTE

Choose the coolest location possible for the vehicle in order to minimise aging of the bat- tery during long-term storage. During summer the vehicle should preferably remain indoors or outdoors in the shade, depending on where the temperature is lowest.

Related information Start charging the hybrid battery (p. 414)

Hybrid battery gauge (p. 81)

Charging the hybrid battery (p. 407)

STARTING AND DRIVING

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.428

Starting the car The car is started using the start knob in the tun- nel console when the remote control key is in the passenger compartment.

Start knob in the tunnel console.

WARNING

Before starting:

Fasten the seatbelt.

Adjust the seat, steering wheel and mir- rors.

Make sure that the brake pedal can be fully depressed.

The remote control key is not physically used when starting the car since it is equipped with support for keyless starting (Passive start).

To start the car:

1. The remote control key must be inside the car. For cars with Passive Start, the key needs to be located in the front part of the passenger compartment. With the option for keyless locking/unlocking* of the car, the key can be anywhere in the car.

2. Hold the brake pedal depressed1 fully. For cars with automatic gear changing, make sure that gear position P or N is selected. For cars with a manual gearbox, make sure that the gear lever is in neutral position or that the clutch pedal is depressed.

3. Turn the start knob clockwise and then release it. The control automatically returns to its starting position.

When the engine is started the starter motor works until the engine is started or until its over- heating protection triggers.

When starting in normal conditions, the car's electric drive motor is prioritised - the petrol engine remains switched off. This means that after the start knob has been turned clockwise, the electric motor has "started" and the car is ready to drive. A started car is indicated by the

driver display's indicator lamps extinguishing and its preset theme illuminating.

However, there are situations where the petrol engine is started instead, e.g. in the event of the temperature being too low or if the hybrid battery needs charging.

The car should not be started with the charging cable connected but in the cases when it cannot be unplugged, or the car incorrectly detects the charging cable, it is possible to force start the car:

1. Depress the brake pedal and turn the start knob clockwise.

2. The text Charge cable Remove before start appears in the driver display.

3. Turn the start knob clockwise again.

4. The text Removed? Turn and hold start knob 7s appears, at which point, turn the knob clockwise and hold it for 7 seconds to start the car.

1 If the car is moving, the engine can be started by turning the start knob clockwise.

STARTING AND DRIVING

429

Backup reader's location in the tunnel console.

If the Car key not found message is shown in the driver display when starting, place the remote control key by the backup reader. Then try to start the car again.

NOTE

When the remote control key is positioned by the backup reader, make sure that there are no car keys, metal objects or electronic appa- ratus by the backup reader, (e.g. mobile phones, tablets, laptops or chargers). Several car keys close to one another by the backup reader may cause interference with each other.

If the message Car start System check, wait is shown in the driver display when starting, wait

until the message disappears and then try to start the car again.

IMPORTANT

If the engine fails to start after 3 attempts - wait for 3 minutes before making a further attempt. Starting capacity increases if the bat- tery is allowed to recover.

NOTE

The car cannot be started if the hybrid battery is discharged.

WARNING

Never remove the remote control key from the car while driving.

WARNING

Always take the remote control key out from the car when leaving the car and make sure the car's electrical system is in ignition posi- tion 0 - especially if there are children in the car.

NOTE

The idling speed can be noticeably higher than normal for certain engine types during cold starting. This is done in order that the emissions system can reach normal operating temperature as quickly as possible, which minimises exhaust emissions and protects the environment.

Related information Switching off the car (p. 430)

Ignition positions (p. 430)

Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 189)

Using jump starting with another battery (p. 472)

Selecting ignition mode (p. 431)

STARTING AND DRIVING

430

Switching off the car The car is switched off using the start knob in the tunnel console.

Start knob in the tunnel console.

To switch off the car:

Turn the start knob clockwise and release it - the car is switched off. The control automati- cally returns to its starting position.

If the gear selector for cars with an automatic gearbox is not in position P or if the car rolls:

Turn the knob clockwise and hold it until the car is switched off.

Related information Starting the car (p. 428)

Ignition positions (p. 430)

Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 189)

Using jump starting with another battery (p. 472)

Selecting ignition mode (p. 431)

Ignition positions The car's electrical system can be set in different levels/positions and in this way make the differ- ent functions available.

In order to facilitate the use of a limited number of functions with the engine switched off, the car's electrical system can be set in 3 different levels - 0, I and II. These levels are described with the denomination "ignition position" throughout the owner's manual.

The following table shows the functions available in each ignition position/level:

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

* Option/accessory. 431

Level Functions

0 Odometer, clock and temperature gauge are illuminatedA.

The power seats* can be adjusted.

The power windows can be used.

The centre display is started and can be usedA.

The infotainment system can be usedA.

The functions are time-controlled in this ignition position and are switched off automatically after a period of time.

I Panorama roof, power windows, 12V socket in the passenger com- partment, Bluetooth, navigation, phone, ventilation fan and wind- screen wipers can be used.

Power seats can be adjusted.

12 V sockets in the cargo area can be used.

Power is taken from the battery in this ignition position.

Level Functions

II The headlamps come on.

Warning/indicator lamps illuminate for 5 seconds.

Several other systems are acti- vated. However, heating in seat cushions and the rear window can only be activated after the car has been started.

This ignition position consumes a lot of current from the battery and should therefore be avoided!

A Also activated when the door is opened.

Related information Starting the car (p. 428)

Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 189)

Using jump starting with another battery (p. 472)

Selecting ignition mode (p. 431)

Selecting ignition mode The car's electrical system can be set in different levels/positions and in this way make the differ- ent functions available.

Selecting ignition position

Start knob in the tunnel console.

Ignition position 0 - Unlock the car and store the remote control key inside the car.

NOTE

To reach level I or II without starting the engine - do not depress the brake pedal, or the clutch pedal for cars with manual gear changing, when these ignition positions are to be selected.

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.432

Ignition position I - Turn the start knob clockwise and release it. The control auto- matically returns to its starting position.

Ignition position II - Turn the start knob clockwise and hold it in position for approx. 5 seconds. Then release the knob, which automatically returns to its starting position.

Back to ignition position 0 - To return to ignition position 0 from position I and II - Turn the start knob clockwise and release. The control automatically returns to its star- ting position.

Related information Starting the car (p. 428)

Switching off the car (p. 430)

Ignition positions (p. 430)

Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 189)

Using jump starting with another battery (p. 472)

Alcohol lock* The function of the alcohol lock is to prevent the car from being driven by individuals under the influence of alcohol. Before the engine can be started the driver must take a breath test that verifies that he/she is not under the influence of alcohol. Alcohol lock calibration takes place in accordance with each market's limit value in force for driving legally.

The car has an interface for the electrical con- nection of the different makes and models of alcohol lock recommended by Volvo. The inter- face facilitates alcohol lock connection, and gives the option of an integrated function including messages related to the alcohol lock in the car's main display. For information about a specific alcohol lock, please refer to the owner's manual from the respective alcohol lock manufacturer.

WARNING

The alcohol lock is an aid and does not exempt the driver from responsibility. It is always the responsibility of the driver to be sober and to drive the car safely.

Related information Bypass of the alcohol lock* (p. 432)

Before starting the engine with the alcohol lock (p. 433)

Starting the car (p. 428)

Ignition positions (p. 430)

Bypass of the alcohol lock* In the event of an emergency situation or the alcohol lock is out of order, it is possible to bypass the alcohol lock in order to drive the car.

For deactivation via the alcohol lock, see the sep- arate instructions for that specific lock.

Activating the bypass function (Bypass)

NOTE

All bypass activation is logged and saved in the memory in the alcohol lock's control unit. It is not possible to undo a bypass.

The message, Blow into alcolock Bypass instead?, is shown in the screen:

If "Cancel/Yes" is shown - select bypass by pressing the right arrow button on the steer- ing wheel's right-hand keypad and then on the O button.

If "Yes" is shown - select bypass by pressing the O button.

The alcohol lock is now bypassed and the car can be started.

The number of bypasses possible before service is required is selected during alcohol lock instal- lation.

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory. 433

Related information Alcohol lock* (p. 432)

Before starting the engine with the alcohol lock (p. 433)

Starting the car (p. 428)

Ignition positions (p. 430)

Before starting the engine with the alcohol lock The alcohol lock is activated automatically and is then ready for use when the car is opened.

To bear in mind In order to obtain correct function and as accu- rate a measurement result as possible:

Avoid eating or drinking approx. 5 minutes before the breath test.

Avoid excess windscreen washing - the alco- hol in the washer fluid may result in an incor- rect measurement result.

NOTE

After a completed period of driving, the engine can be restarted within 30 minutes without a new breath test.

Related information Bypass of the alcohol lock* (p. 432)

Alcohol lock* (p. 432)

Starting the car (p. 428)

Ignition positions (p. 430)

Brake functions The car's brakes are used to reduce the speed or prevent the car from rolling.

Besides the foot brake and parking brake, the car is equipped with several automatic brake assist functions. These can assist the driver by not needing to keep his/her foot on the brake pedal when stationary at a traffic light, when starting on an uphill gradient or when driving on a downhill gradient.

Depending on the car's equipment, the following auto braking functions are available:

Automatic braking when stationary (Auto Hold)

Hill start assist (Hill Start Assist)

Auto braking after a collision

City Safety

Hill descent control (Hill Descent Control)

Related information Foot brake (p. 434)

Parking brake (p. 436)

Automatic braking when stationary (p. 440)

Auto braking after a collision (p. 441)

Help when starting on a hill (p. 441)

City Safety (p. 334)

Hill descent control (p. 458)

STARTING AND DRIVING

434

Foot brake The foot brake is part of the brake system. The car is equipped with two brake circuits. If a brake circuit is damaged, the brake pedal will engage deeper. Higher pressure on the pedal will therefore be needed to produce the normal brak- ing effect.

WARNING

In a de-energised car with the electric motor and fuel-driven engine switched off it is not possible to brake the car.

In very hilly terrain or when driving with a heavy load the brakes can be relieved by using engine braking in gearshift mode B.

Use drive mode Off Road for increased engine braking while driving on steep downhill gradients at low speeds.

Anti-lock braking system The car has anti-lock brakes, Anti-lock Braking System (ABS), which can prevent the wheels from locking while braking and allows maintained steering control. Vibration may be felt in the brake pedal when this is engaged and this is nor- mal.

A short test of the ABS system is made automat- ically after the car has been started when the driver releases the brake pedal. A further auto- matic test of the system may be made at low

speed. The test may be felt as pulses in the brake pedal.

Light braking charges the hybrid battery The electric motor's engine brake is used during light braking. The car's kinetic energy is then converted to electrical energy instead, which is used to charge the hybrid battery. Battery charg- ing with electric motor braking is indicated in the driver display.

The driver display indicates charging during electric motor braking.

This function is active in the speed interval 150-5 km/h (93-3 mph). During heavier braking, as well as outside the speed interval, braking is supplemented by the hydraulic brake system. The driver's display shows this by the indicator being down in the red zone.

Symbols in the driver display

Symbol Specification

Check the brake fluid level. If the level is low, fill with brake fluid and check for the cause of the brake fluid loss.

Fault in pedal sensor.

Constant glow for 2 seconds when the engine is started: Automatic function check.

Constant glow for more than 2 seconds: Fault in the ABS system. The car's normal brake system is still working, but without the ABS function.

If the message Brake pedal Cha- racteristics changed Service required is shown, the system for "Brake-by-wire" is disengaged. The brake pedal engages deeper and a higher pedal pressure is required to achieve braking effect.

STARTING AND DRIVING

435

WARNING

If both the warning lamps for brake fault and ABS fault illuminate at the same time, a fault has occurred in the brake system.

If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is normal at this stage, drive carefully to the nearest workshop and have the brake system checked - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

If the brake fluid is below the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive fur- ther before topping up the brake fluid. The reason for the loss of brake fluid must be investigated.

Related information Brake assistance (p. 435)

Automatic braking when stationary (p. 440)

Help when starting on a hill (p. 441)

Braking on wet roads (p. 435)

Braking on gritted roads (p. 436)

Brake system maintenance (p. 436)

Brake lights (p. 152)

Brake assistance The brake assist system, BAS (Brake Assist System), helps to increase brake force during braking, thereby shortening the braking distance. The system detects the way in which the driver brakes and increases brake force where neces- sary. The brake force can be boosted up to the level when the ABS system is engaged. The function is suspended when the pressure on the brake pedal decreases.

Related information Foot brake (p. 434)

Braking on wet roads When driving for a prolonged period of time in heavy rain without braking, the braking effect may be delayed slightly when next using the brakes.

This may also be the case after a car wash. It is then necessary to depress the brake pedal more forcefully. You should therefore maintain a greater distance to the vehicles in front.

Brake the car firmly after driving on wet roads or using a car wash. This warms up the brake discs, enabling them to dry faster and protecting them against corrosion. Bear in mind the current traffic situation when braking.

Related information Foot brake (p. 434)

Braking on gritted roads (p. 436)

STARTING AND DRIVING

436

Braking on gritted roads When driving on salted roads, a layer of salt may form on the brake discs and brake linings.

This may extend braking distance. You should therefore maintain a greater safety distance to vehicles in front. In addition, make sure you do the following:

Brake now and again to remove any layer of salt. Make sure that other road users are not put at risk by the braking.

Gently depress the brake pedal after finish- ing driving and before starting your next trip.

Related information Foot brake (p. 434)

Braking on wet roads (p. 435)

Brake system maintenance Check brake system components regularly for wear. To keep the car as safe and reliable as possible, follow the Volvo service intervals as specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet. New and replaced brake linings and brake discs do not provide optimal braking effect until they have been "worn in" for a few hundred kilometres (miles). Compensate for the reduced braking effect by depressing the brake pedal harder. Volvo recommends only fitting brake linings that are approved for your Volvo.

IMPORTANT

The wear on the brake system's components must be checked regularly.

Contact a workshop for information about the procedure or engage a workshop to carry out the inspection - an authorised Volvo work- shop is recommended.

Related information Foot brake (p. 434)

Parking brake The parking brake prevents the car from rolling away from stationary by means of mechanically locking/blocking two wheels.

The control for the parking brake is located in the tunnel console between the seats.

A faint electric motor noise can be heard when the electrically-operated parking brake is being applied. The noise can also be heard during the automatic function checking of the parking brake.

If the car is stationary when the parking brake is applied then it only acts on the rear wheels. If it is applied when the car is moving then the normal foot brake is used, i.e. the brake acts on all four wheels. Brake function changes over to the rear wheels when the car is almost stationary.

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

437

Related information Activating and deactivating the parking brake

(p. 437)

Parking on a hill (p. 439)

In the event of a fault in the parking brake (p. 439)

Automatic braking when stationary (p. 440)

Activating and deactivating the parking brake Use the parking brake to prevent the car from rolling from stationary.

Activating the parking brake

1. Pull the control upward.

> The symbol in the driver display illumi- nates when the parking brake is activated.

2. Check that the car is stationary.

Symbol in the driver display

Symbol Specification

The symbol is illuminated when the parking brake is activated.

If the symbol flashes, it indicates a fault has occurred. Read the mes- sage in the driver display.

Automatic activation The parking brake is activated automatically:

if the Auto hold function (automatic braking when stationary) is activated and the car has been stationary for a longer time (5-10 minutes).

when gear position P is selected on a steep hill.

when the car is switched off and the setting for automatic activation of the parking brake is activated in the centre display.

Emergency brake In an emergency, the parking brake can be acti- vated when the car is in motion by pulling and holding up the control. Braking stops when the control is released, or if the accelerator pedal is depressed.

NOTE

An acoustic signal sounds while emergency braking is active at high speeds.

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

438

Deactivating the parking brake

Deactivate manually 1. Depress the brake pedal firmly.

2. Press the control down.

> The parking brake releases and the sym- bol in the driver display extinguishes.

Deactivate automatically 1. Put the seatbelt on.

2. Depress the brake pedal firmly.

3. Start the car.

4. Select gear position D or R and depress the accelerator pedal.

> The parking brake releases and the sym- bol in the driver display extinguishes.

NOTE

When the car is first started, the parking brake can be released automatically without the seatbelt fastened.

Related information Automatic parking brake activation setting

(p. 438)

In the event of a fault in the parking brake (p. 439)

Parking brake (p. 436)

Parking on a hill (p. 439)

Automatic parking brake activation setting Choose whether the parking brake is to be acti- vated automatically when the car is switched off.

This choice is made in the settings menu in the centre display.

1. Press Settings in the top view.

2. Press My Car Parking Brake and Suspension to select or deselect the func- tion Auto Activate Parking Brake.

Related information Activating and deactivating the parking brake

(p. 437)

Parking brake (p. 436)

STARTING AND DRIVING

439

Parking on a hill Always use the parking brake when parking on a hill.

WARNING

Always use the parking brake when parking on an inclined surface. Engaging a gear or the automatic transmission's P position is not suf- ficient to hold the car stationary in all situa- tions.

If the car is parked facing uphill:

Turn the wheels away from the kerb.

If the car is parked facing downhill:

Turn the wheels towards the kerb.

Heavy load uphill A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the car to roll backward when the parking brake is released automatically on a steep incline. Avoid this by pulling the control upwards while driving the car away. Release the control when the engine achieves traction.

Related information Activating and deactivating the parking brake

(p. 437)

In the event of a fault in the parking brake Contact an authorised Volvo workshop if it is not possible to deactivate or activate the parking brake after several attempts. An acoustic warning signal sounds when driving with the parking brake applied.

If the car must be parked before a possible fault is rectified, then the wheels must be turned as for parking on a hill and the gear selector must be in position P.

Low battery voltage If the battery voltage is too low then the parking brake can neither be released nor applied. Con- nect a donor battery if the battery voltage is too low.

Replacing the brake linings The rear brake linings must be replaced at a workshop due to the design of the electrically- operated parking brake - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Symbols in the driver display

Symbol Specification

If the symbol flashes, it indicates a fault has occurred. See the mes- sage in the driver display.

Fault in brake system. See the message in the driver display.

Information message in driver dis- play.

Related information Activating and deactivating the parking brake

(p. 437)

Starter battery (p. 605)

Volvo service programme (p. 590)

STARTING AND DRIVING

440

Automatic braking when stationary Automatic braking when stationary (Auto hold) means that the driver can release the brake pedal while maintaining braking effect when the car has stopped at traffic lights or a junction. When the car has stopped, the brakes are acti- vated automatically. The function can use either foot brake or parking brake to hold the car sta- tionary and it works on all gradients. When driving away, the brakes disengage automatically if the driver is wearing the seatbelt.

NOTE

When braking to a standstill on an uphill or downhill slope, the brake pedal should be depressed a little harder before being released to ensure the car does not roll.

The parking brake is activated if:

the car is switched off

the driver's door is opened

the driver's seatbelt is unbuckled

the car has been stationary for a longer time (5-10 minutes).

Symbols in the driver display

Symbol Specification

The symbol is illuminated when the function uses the foot brake to keep the car stationary.

The symbol is illuminated when the function uses the parking brake to keep the car stationary.

Related information Activating and deactivating the automatic

brake at a standstill (p. 440)

Foot brake (p. 434)

Parking brake (p. 436)

Help when starting on a hill (p. 441)

Activating and deactivating the automatic brake at a standstill The automatic brake function at a standstill is activated using the button in the tunnel console.

Press the button in the tunnel console to activate or deactivate the function.

> The indicator in the button illuminates when the function is activated. Activated function remains even when the car is started next time.

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

441

Applicable when switching off If the function is active and holds the car with the foot brake (A-symbol illu- minated) then the brake pedal must be depressed at the same time as the

button is depressed in order to deactivate.

The function remains deactivated until it is reactivated.

When the function is deactivated, hill start assist (HSA) remains active to prevent the car from rolling backwards when starting on an uphill gradient.

Related information Automatic braking when stationary (p. 440)

Help when starting on a hill Hill start assist, Hill Start Assist (HSA), prevents the car from rolling backwards when starting on an uphill gradient. When reversing uphill, it pre- vents the car from rolling forwards. The function means that the pedal pressure in the brake system remains for several seconds while the driver's foot is moved from brake pedal to accelerator pedal.

The temporary braking effect releases after sev- eral seconds or when the driver starts to drive away.

Hill start assist is available even if the function for automatic braking when stationary (Auto hold) is deactivated.

Related information Automatic braking when stationary (p. 440)

Foot brake (p. 434)

Auto braking after a collision In the event of a collision in which the activation level is reached for the pyrotechnic seatbelt ten- sioners or airbags, or if a collision with a large animal is detected, the car's brakes are automat- ically applied. This function is to prevent or reduce the effects of any subsequent collision.

After a serious collision there is a risk that it is no longer possible to control and steer the car. In order to avoid or mitigate a possible further colli- sion with a vehicle or an object in the vehicle's path, the auto braking system is activated auto- matically and brakes the car in a safe manner.

Brake lights and hazard warning lights are acti- vated during braking. When the car has stopped, the hazard warning lights continue to flash and the parking brake is applied.

If braking is not appropriate, e.g. if there is a risk of being hit by following traffic, the system can be overridden by the driver depressing the accelera- tor pedal.

The function assumes that the brake system is intact after the collision.

Brake assist is included in the Rear Collision Warning and Blind Spot Information safety sys- tems.

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.442

Related information Rear Collision Warning (p. 347)

BLIS* (p. 348)

Brake functions (p. 433)

Gearbox The gearbox is part of the car's powertrain (power transmission) between engine and drive wheels. The function of the gearbox is to change the gear ratio depending on speed and power requirements. The car has an eight-speed automatic gearbox, and an electric motor for rear-wheel drive. The number of gear changes means that the engine's torque and power range can be used effectively. Two of the gears are overdrive gears that save fuel when driving at constant engine speed. Using the steering wheel paddles* it is possible to shift up or down manually. The driver display shows which gear position is currently in use.

IMPORTANT

To prevent damage to any drive system com- ponents, the working temperature of the gearbox is checked. If there is a risk of over- heating, a warning symbol illuminates in the driver display and a text message is shown - follow the recommendation given.

Symbols in the driver display If a fault should occur in the gearbox, the driver display shows a symbol and a message.

Symbol Specification

Information or error message for gearbox. Follow the recommenda- tion given.

Hot or overheated gearbox. Follow the recommendation given.

Reduced performance/Acceler- ation performance reduced

In the event of a temporary power- train fault, the car can go into a Limp home mode with reduced engine power to prevent damage to the powertrain.

Related information Gear positions for automatic gearbox

(p. 443)

Gear shift indicator* (p. 446)

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

443

Gear positions for automatic gearbox With an automatic gearbox, the system chooses the gear so that driving is optimal. The gearbox also has a manual gearshift mode.

The driver display shows the gear position selected:

P, R, N, D or B.

During manual gear changing, the gear being used is also shown (1-8).

Changing gear The gear selector is the shift-by-wire-type where shifting is performed electronically instead of mechanically. This means simpler shifting and more distinct gear positions.

Change gear position by pressing the spring-loa- ded gear selector forwards or backwards.

Gear positions

Park position - P

The park position is activated via the P button next to the gear selector.

Select the P position when the car is parked or when starting the engine. The car must be sta- tionary when the park position is selected.

To select another gear position when the park position is selected, the brake pedal must be depressed and the ignition position must be II.

To park - first apply the parking bake and then select park position.

WARNING

Always use the parking brake when parking on an inclined surface. Engaging a gear or the automatic transmission's P position is not suf- ficient to hold the car stationary in all situa- tions.

NOTE

The gear selector must be in P position to allow the car to be locked and alarmed.

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.444

Help functions

The system will change to P position automati- cally:

if the car is switched off in position D or R.

if the driver unfastens the seatbelt and opens the driver's door when the car is running with the gear selector in a position other than P.

To park a car without wearing the seatbelt and with the door open - exit the P position by select- ing R or D again.

Reverse position - R Select position R to reverse. The car must be sta- tionary when reverse position is selected.

Neutral position - N No gear is engaged and the engine can be started. Apply the parking brake if the car is sta- tionary with the gear selector in N position.

To be able to change from the neutral position to another gear position, the brake pedal must be depressed and the ignition position must be II.

Drive position - D D is the normal driving position. Shifting up and down takes place automatically based on the level of acceleration and speed. The car must be stationary when changing gear from R position to D position.

Brake position - B B can be selected at any time while driving. In the B position the car brakes with the electric motor

when the accelerator pedal is released while the hybrid battery is charging. This gives more oppor- tunities for recharging the hybrid battery, since charging also takes place without the driver using the brake pedal.

B-position in the driver display.

From the B position it is possible to change gear manually to lower gears. The driver display shows which gear (1 - 8) is being used.

Press the gear selector backwards once to change down to the next lower gear.

Press the gear selector backwards once more to change down further.

To be able to change manually to a higher gear requires that the car is equipped with steering wheel paddles*.

Press the gear selector forwards to return to the D position.

The gearbox automatically shifts down if the speed decreases to a level lower than appropri- ate for the selected gear, in order to avoid jerking and stalling.

Related information Gear selector inhibitor (p. 446)

Changing gear with steering wheel paddles* (p. 445)

Kick-down function (p. 446)

Gear shift indicator* (p. 446)

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory. 445

Changing gear with steering wheel paddles* The steering wheel paddles are a complement to the gear selector and make it possible to change gear manually without releasing hands from the steering wheel.

Activating the steering wheel paddles To be able to change gear with the steering wheel paddles they must first be activated:

Pull one of the paddles toward the steering wheel.

> A figure in the driver display indicates cur- rent gear.

Driver display when changing gear with steering wheel paddles.

Switch To change gear one step:

Pull one of the paddles backwards - towards the steering wheel - and release.

"-": Selects the next lower gear.

"+": Selects the next higher gear.

A gear change occurs at each pull of the paddle provided that the engine speed does not leave the permitted range.

After each gear change the figure in the driver display changes to show the current gear.

Deactivating the function

Manual deactivation in gear position D and B Deactivate the steering wheel paddles by

pulling the right-hand paddle (+) toward the steering wheel and holding in place until the figure in the driver display for the current gear extinguishes.

> The gearbox returns to gear position D and B depending on the position selected before the paddles were activated.

Automatic deactivation In gear position D the steering wheel paddles are deactivated after a short time if they are not used. This is indicated by means of the figure for the current gear extinguishing.

In gear position B there is no automatic deactiva- tion.

Related information Gear positions for automatic gearbox

(p. 443)

Gear shift indicator* (p. 446)

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.446

Gear selector inhibitor The gear selector inhibitor prevents accidental changing between different gear positions in an automatic gearbox.

Automatic gear selector inhibitor The automatic gear selector inhibitor has special safety systems.

From park position - P To be able to move the gear selector from the P position, the brake pedal must be depressed and the ignition position must be II.

From neutral position - N If the gear selector is in the N position and the car has been stationary for at least 3 seconds (irrespective of whether the engine is running) then the gear selector is locked.

To be able to move the gear selector from the N position to another gear position, the brake pedal must be depressed and the ignition position must be II.

Message in the driver display If the gear selector is inhibited, a message is shown in the driver display, e.g. Gear lever Press brake pedal to activate gear lever.

The gear selector is not inhibited mechanically.

Related information Gear positions for automatic gearbox

(p. 443)

Kick-down function Kick-down is used when maximum acceleration is needed, such as for overtaking. When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the way to the floor (beyond the position normally regarded as full acceleration) a lower gear is immediately engaged. This is known as kick- down.

If the accelerator is released from the kick-down position, the gearbox automatically changes up.

Safety function To prevent over-revving of the engine, the gear- box control program has a protective downshift inhibitor.

The gearbox does not permit downshifting/kick- down which would result in an engine speed high enough to damage the engine. Nothing happens if the driver still tries to shift down in this way at high engine speed the original gear remains engaged.

On kick-down the car can shift down one or more steps at a time, depending in engine speed. The car shifts up when the engine has reached is maximum engine speed in order to prevent engine damage.

Related information Gear positions for automatic gearbox

(p. 443)

Gear shift indicator* The gear shift indicator in the driver display shows the current gear during manual gearshift- ing and when it is appropriate to engage the next gear for optimum fuel economy. For eco-driving during manual gear changing, it is important to drive in the right gear and to change gear in good time.

The gear shift indicator shows the current gear in the driver display and uses an up arrow to indi- cate when shifting to a higher gear is recom- mended. The gear shift indicator is shown in gear position B.

Gear shift indicator in the driver display2.

Related information Gear positions for automatic gearbox

(p. 443)

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

447

All-wheel drive All-wheel drive, AWD (All Wheel Drive), means that the car is driving all four wheels at the same time, which improves traction.

The electric motor that drives the rear wheels enables electric all-wheel drive functionality.

To achieve the best possible traction, the motive force is distributed automatically to the wheels with the best grip. The system continuously cal- culates the need for torque to the rear wheels, and can immediately redistribute up to half of the motor's torque to the rear wheels.

All-wheel drive also has a stabilising effect at higher speeds. Under normal driving conditions, the majority of power is transmitted to the front wheels. When stationary, the all-wheel drive is always engaged in preparation for maximum trac- tion during acceleration.

All-wheel drive characteristics vary depending on the selected drive mode.

Related information Drive modes (p. 449)

Low speed control (p. 457)

Gearbox (p. 442)

Drive systems Volvo's Twin Engine combines an internal com- bustion engine that drives the front wheels with an electric motor that drives the rear wheels.

Two drive systems Depending on the driver-selected drive mode and available electric energy, the two drive systems can be used either individually or in parallel.

The electric motor is supplied its energy from a hybrid battery fitted in the tunnel console. The hybrid battery can be charged in a wall socket, or in a special charging station. The internal com- bustion engine can also charge the hybrid battery with a special high-voltage generator.

Both the internal combustion engine and electric motor can generate motive force directly to the wheels. An advanced control system combines the properties of both drive systems in order to provide optimum driving economy.

Hybrid battery - The function of the hybrid battery is to store energy. It receives energy when charging from the mains power circuit, during regenerative braking or from the high- voltage generator. It provides energy for elec- tric operation as well as for temporarily oper- ating the electric air conditioning during the preconditioning of the passenger compart- ment.

Internal combustion engine - The internal combustion engine starts when the energy level in the hybrid battery is insufficient for the engine power that the driver requests.

High voltage generator3 - Charges the hybrid battery. Starter motor for the internal com- bustion engine. Can support the internal

2 The figure is schematic, the layout may vary depending on car model or updated software. 3 CISG (Crank Integrated Starter Generator) - Combined high-voltage generator and starter motor.

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

448

combustion engine with extra electrical energy.

Electric motor - Powers the car in electric operation. If necessary, provides extra torque and power during acceleration. Provides electrical all-wheel drive functionality. Recy- cles brake energy to electrical energy.

Related information General information about Twin Engine

(p. 406)

Starting and stopping the combustion engine in Twin Engine (p. 448)

Drive modes (p. 449)

Gearbox (p. 442)

Factors that affect range when running on electricity (p. 462)

Starting and stopping the combustion engine in Twin Engine An advanced control system determines the extent to which the car is driven on internal com- bustion engine, electric motor or both in parallel. During electric operation, the car may some- times need to start the internal combustion engine automatically due to external circumstan- ces, e.g. in low outside temperatures, which is completely normal. In addition, the internal com- bustion engine always starts when the hybrid battery reaches its lowest state of charge.

Climate settings at low temperatures In low outside temperatures, the internal combus- tion engine sometimes starts automatically in order to achieve the desired passenger compart- ment temperature and air quality. The amount of time that the internal combustion engine runs can be affected by:

lowering the temperature

reducing the fan strength

activating drive mode Pure.

Electric operation in low or high temperatures In low or high outside temperatures, the car's range and output for electric operation may be reduced and affect how often the internal com- bustion engine is started automatically.

Emission control To ensure optimal operation of the emission con- trol, the internal combustion engine must be run for several minutes once it has been started. The duration of the internal combustion engine's run- ning time varies depending on the temperature of the catalytic converter.

Related information Drive systems (p. 447)

Economical driving (p. 460)

Driving with electric operation (p. 461)

Drive modes (p. 449)

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

* Option/accessory. 449

Drive modes Selection of drive mode affects the car's driving characteristics in order to enhance the driving experience and facilitate driving in special situa- tions. Using the drive modes it is possible to quickly have access to the car's numerous functions and settings for different driving needs. The following systems are adapted to obtain the best possible driving characteristics in each respective drive mode:

Steering

Engine/gearbox/all-wheel drive

Brakes

Air suspension* and shock absorption

Driver display

Climate settings

Select the drive mode that best suits the current driving conditions. Remember that not all drive modes are available in all situations.

Selectable drive modes

WARNING

Remember that the car does not emit any engine noise when it is only powered by the electric motor and may therefore be difficult to notice by children, pedestrians, cyclists and animals. This applies in particular at low speeds, such as in car parks.

WARNING

Do not leave the car in an unventilated area with activated drive mode and the fuel-driven engine switched off - automatic engine start occurs at low energy level in the hybrid bat- tery, and the exhaust gases could then cause serious injury to people and animals.

HYBRID

This is the car's normal mode where the electric motor and internal combustion engine work together.

When the car starts, it is in the Hybrid mode. The control system uses both the electric motor and internal combustion engine - individually or in parallel - and calculates optimal use with regard to performance, fuel consumption and comfort. At higher speeds the ground clearance is adjusted automatically to a lower level4 in order to reduce wind resistance. The capacity to run solely with

the electric motor depends on the hybrid bat- tery's energy level and, for example, the need for heating/cooling in the passenger compartment.

If high power output is available, it is possible to drive with electrical power alone. When the accel- erator pedal is depressed, only the electric motor is activated until a certain position is reached. The internal combustion engine starts when this position is exceeded and the energy level in the battery is insufficient for the engine power that the driver requests with the accelerator pedal.

At low energy level (hybrid battery almost empty) the battery's energy level must be maintained, leading to the internal combustion engine star- ting more often. Charge the hybrid battery from a 230 VAC socket with the charging cable, or acti- vate Charge in the function view in order to restore the capacity to run on electricity alone.

The drive mode is designed for low energy con- sumption with an optimised mix of the electric motor and the internal combustion engine, with- out compromising the climate comfort and driving experience. When higher acceleration is required, maximum additional power from the electric drive line is used. The car also senses if the driving conditions require all-wheel drive and automati- cally engages it if necessary. All-wheel drive and electric additional power are always available regardless of the battery's state of charge.

4 Applies with air suspension.

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

450

Information in the driver display When driving in hybrid mode the driver display shows a hybrid gauge. The pointer in the hybrid gauge indicates how much energy the driver requests with the accelerator pedal. The marking between the lightning bolt and the drop shows how much energy is available.

The driver display for propulsion with both the electric motor and internal combustion engine.

The driver display also shows when energy is returned to the battery (regenerated) during light braking.

PURE

Drive the car with electric motor, with energy consumption as low as possible and with lowest possible carbon dioxide emissions.

The drive mode maximises driving on the hybrid battery. This means, for example, that the ground clearance is lower4 to reduce wind resistance and the output of certain climate settings is reduced to provide the longest possible mileage range on electric power alone.

The Pure mode is available when the hybrid bat- tery has a sufficiently high energy level. The inter- nal combustion engine also starts in the Pure mode if the energy level in the battery falls too low. The internal combustion engine also starts

if the speed exceeds 125 km/h (78 mph)

if the driver requests more motive force than electric drive can provide

in the event of system/component limita- tions, e.g. low outside temperature.

The drive mode is optimised for maximum range with electric propulsion and especially developed for urban traffic. Pure means lowest combustion even when the hybrid battery is empty. The cli- mate in the passenger compartment is regulated to Eco climate, and in slippery driving conditions, more wheel spin can be permitted before all- wheel drive is activated automatically.

ECO climate control In the Pure drive mode, Eco climate control is activated automatically in the passenger com- partment in order to reduce energy consumption.

NOTE

When the Pure drive mode is activated, sev- eral parameters in the climate control sys- tem's settings are changed, and several elec- tricity consumer functions are reduced. Cer- tain settings can be reset manually, but full functionality is only regained by leaving Pure drive mode or adapting Individual drive mode with full climate functionality.

In the event of difficulties due to misting, press the button for max. defroster which has normal functionality.

4 Applies with air suspension.

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

451

OFF ROAD

Maximise the car's traction when driving in difficult terrain and on poor roads.

The drive mode provides high ground clearance4, steering is light, all-wheel drive and the function for low speed control with hill descent control (Hill Descent Control) are activated.

The drive mode is only available at low speeds, up to 40 km/h (25 mph). If this speed is exceeded, Off road mode is cancelled and the AWD drive mode is activated instead.

To be able to drive all four wheels, the internal combustion engine and electric motor run contin- ually, which results in increased fuel consump- tion.

In the Off road mode the driver display has a compass between the speedometer and tachom- eter. The speedometer shows the range for speed limitation.

The drive mode is optimised for maximum con- trollability at low speeds in poor road conditions or difficult terrain. It raises the chassis4, reduces the driveline's throttle response and locks the car in all-wheel drive. The Hill Descent Control func- tion facilitates controlled driving on steep descents.

NOTE

The driving mode is not designed to be used on public roads.

NOTE

If the car is switched off in OFF ROAD mode, and therefore has high ground clearance, the car is lowered next time it is started.

IMPORTANT

The OFF ROAD drive mode must not be used while driving with a trailer without trailer con- nector. Otherwise, there is a risk of damage to the air bellows.

AWD

Improve the car's roadholding and traction with enhanced all-wheel drive.

The drive mode locks the car in all-wheel drive. An optimal distribution between the front and rear axle torque gives the best traction, stability and roadholding, for example on slippery roads, when driving with a heavy trailer, or when towing. AWD drive mode is always available regardless of the battery's state of charge.

Both the internal combustion engine and electric motor are engaged in order to drive all four

wheels, which results in increased fuel consump- tion.

In the car's other drive modes, the car automati- cally adapts the need for all-wheel drive to the road surface, and can engage the electric motor or start the internal combustion engine when necessary.

POWER

Power mode means that the car has sportier characteristics and faster response to accel- erating.

The drive mode maximises the combined power from the internal combustion engine and electric motor by means of the car being driven by both front and rear wheels. The gear changes become faster and more distinct, and the gearbox prioriti- ses a gear with greater traction. Steering response is faster, shock absorption is harder and a lower ground clearance4 means that the body follows the roadway in order to reduce roll during cornering.

Both the internal combustion engine and electric motor are engaged in order to drive all four wheels, which results in increased fuel consump- tion.

4 Applies with air suspension.

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

452

The drive mode is optimised for maximum per- formance and response during acceleration. It changes the internal combustion engine's accel- erator pedal response, gear shift pattern and boost pressure system. Chassis settings, steering and brake response are also optimised. Power drive mode is always available regardless of the battery's state of charge.

INDIVIDUAL

Adapting a drive mode according to individ- ual preferences.

Select a drive mode to start from, and then adjust the settings according to the desired driving cha- racteristics. These settings are saved in an indi- vidual driver profile.

An individual drive mode is only available if it is first activated in the centre display.

Settings view5 for individual drive mode.

1. Press Settings in the top view.

2. Press My Car Individual Drive Mode and select Individual Drive Mode.

3. In Presets, select a drive mode to start from: Pure, Hybrid or Power.

Possible adjustments apply to settings for:

Driver Display

Steering force

Powertrain Characteristics

Brake Characteristics

Suspension Control

ECO Climate.

Using the internal combustion engine An advanced control system determines the extent to which the car is driven on internal com- bustion engine, electric motor or both in parallel.

The primary function is to use the engine or motor and the available energy in the hybrid bat- tery as efficiently as possible, with regard to the characteristics of the different drive modes as well as the driver's request for power via the accelerator pedal.

There are also cases where temporary limitations in the system, or functions governed by legal requirements aimed at maintaining a low level of total emissions for the car, may use the internal combustion engine to a greater extent.

5 The figure is schematic - details may vary depending on car model or updated software.

STARTING AND DRIVING

453

Related information Changing drive mode (p. 453)

Economical driving (p. 460)

Hybrid gauge (p. 80)

General information about Twin Engine (p. 406)

Changing drive mode Change the drive mode using the control in the centre console. Select the drive mode that best suits the current driving conditions. Remember that not all drive modes are available in all situations.

To change drive mode:

1. Press the drive mode control DRIVE MODE.

> A pop-up menu is opened in the centre display.

2. Roll the wheel upward or downward until the desired drive mode is highlighted.

3. Press the drive mode control or tap directly on the touch screen to confirm the selection.

> The selected drive mode is indicated in the driver display.

If a drive mode is greyed-out in the pop-up menu then it cannot be selected.

Related information Drive modes (p. 449)

Activating and deactivating low-speed driving using a function button (p. 458)

Activating and deactivating hill descent con- trol with the function button (p. 459)

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.454

Level control* and shock absorption Level control regulates the car's suspension and shock absorption characteristics automatically to ensure the best comfort and functionality while driving. It is also possible to adjust the level manually in order to facilitate loading or entry and exit.

Air suspension and shock absorption The system is adapted according to the selected drive mode and according to the speed of the car. Using the air suspension, the car's ground clearance is adjusted to a lower level at higher speeds, which reduces wind resistance and increases stability. Shock absorption is normally set for the best possible comfort and is regulated

continuously depending on the road surface, the car's acceleration, braking and cornering.

The driver display indicates when level control is in pro- gress.

The level cannot be regulated when the tailgate or any side door is open.

During parking During parking, make sure you allow adequate space above and below the car since the car's ground clearance may vary e.g. depending on the

outside temperature, how the car is loaded, the use of loading mode or the drive mode that is selected after starting.

The level may also be adjusted some time after the car has been parked. This is to compensate for any changes in height that may occur due to temperature changes in the air springs when the car cools down.

During transport During transport of the car on a ferry, train or truck, the car must be lashed around the tyres and not around other parts of the chassis. Changes in the air suspension may occur during transport, which could affect the lashing nega- tively.

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

455

Symbols and messages in driver display

Symbol Message Specification

Suspension

Deactivated by user

Level control has been switched off manually by the user.

Suspension

Temporarily reduced performence

Level control performance has been temporarily reduced due to extensive system use. If this message appears frequently (e.g. several times in one week) contact a workshopA.

Suspension

Service required

A fault has occurred. Visit a workshopA as soon as possible.

Suspension failure

Stop safely

A critical fault has occurred. Stop safely, have the car transported (raised with all wheels on the flat-bed) to a workshopA.

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.456

Symbol Message Specification

Suspension

Slow down Car too high

A fault has occurred. If the message appears whilst driving, contact a workshopA.

Suspension

Auto adjusting car level

Level control to target height in progress.

A An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information Settings for level control* (p. 457)

Drive modes (p. 449)

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

* Option/accessory. 457

Settings for level control* Regulate the level to facilitate loading, or on entry and exit.

Switch off level control when the car is to be jacked up in order to prevent problems with automatic regulation.

Adjusting loading mode

Use the buttons in the cargo area to regulate the height of the car's rear section and facilitate loading and unloading or when connecting or dis- connecting a trailer.

Settings in the centre display

Entry assistance The car can be lowered to facilitate entry and exit.

Activating entry assistance via the centre display:

1. Press Settings in the top view.

2. Press My Car Mirrors and Convenience.

3. Select Easy Entry and Exit Suspension Control.

> When the car is parked and switched off, the car is lowered (level control stops if a door is opened and there may be a cer- tain delay before level control resumes after the door has been closed). When the car is started and begins to move, the car will rise to the height setting for the drive mode selected.

Disable Leveling Control In certain cases, the function must be deacti- vated, e.g. before the car is raised with a jack*. The difference in level created when lifting with a jack would otherwise mean the air suspension starting to adjust the height, creating an unde- sired effect.

Deactivating the function via the centre display:

1. Press Settings in the top view.

2. Press My Car Parking Brake and Suspension.

3. Select Disable Leveling Control.

Related information Level control* and shock absorption (p. 454)

Recommendations for loading (p. 579)

Low speed control The low speed control function Low Speed Control (LSC) facilitates and improves traction for driving off-road and on slippery surfaces, such as with a caravan on grass or a boat trailer on a launch ramp.

The function is included in drive mode Off Road. The function is adapted for off-road driving and driving with a trailer at low speed, up to approx. 40 km/h (25 mph).

With low-speed control, low gears and all-wheel drive are prioritised, which help to avoid wheel- spin and provides better traction on all wheels. The accelerator pedal is less responsive in order to facilitate traction and speed control at low speed.

The function is activated together with Hill Descent Control (HDC) which means that speed down steep hills can be controlled with the accel- erator pedal, reducing the need to use the brake pedal. The system facilitates a low and even speed while driving on steep downhill gradients.

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

458

NOTE

When LSC with HDC is activated by the OFF ROAD driving mode, the feel of the accelera- tor pedal and engine response are changed.

NOTE

The driving mode is not designed to be used on public roads.

NOTE

The function is deactivated when driving at higher speeds and must be reactivated at a lower speed, if required.

Related information Activating and deactivating low-speed driving

using a function button (p. 458)

Changing drive mode (p. 453)

Hill descent control (p. 458)

All-wheel drive (p. 447)

Activating and deactivating low- speed driving using a function button Any car that is not equipped with a drive mode control in the tunnel console has a function but- ton for low-speed driving with Hill Descent Control in the centre display function view.

Select low-speed driving in the centre display function view Press the Hill Descent Control button to

activate or deactivate the function.

> An indicator in the button illuminates when the function is activated.

This function is disabled automatically when the engine is switched off.

NOTE

The function is deactivated when driving at higher speeds and must be reactivated at a lower speed, if required.

Related information Low speed control (p. 457)

Changing drive mode (p. 453)

Hill descent control Hill descent control, Hill Descent Control (HDC), is a low speed function with enhanced engine braking. The function makes it possible to increase or reduce vehicle speed on steep downhill gradients using only the accelerator pedal, without using the foot brake.

The function is included in drive mode Off Road.

Hill descent control is adapted for off-road driv- ing at low speeds and facilitates driving on steep downhill gradients with difficult surfaces. The driver does not need to use the brake pedal, but can instead focus on steering.

WARNING

HDC does not work in all situations but is designed merely as a supplementary aid.

The driver always bears ultimate responsibility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely.

Function Hill descent control allows the car to roll at inching speed both forward and backward, assis- ted by the brake system. The speed can be increased by using the accelerator pedal. When the accelerator pedal is then released the car slows back down to crawling speed, regardless of the gradient of the hill and without the need for the foot brake to be used. The brake lights are switched on when the function is operating.

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

459

The driver can brake and reduce crawling speed, or stop the car at any time by using the foot brake.

The function is activated together with Low Speed Control (LSC) which facilitates driving and improves traction for driving off-road and on slip- pery surfaces. The systems are designed for use at low speed, up to approx. 40 km/h (25 mph).

Points to remember when driving with HDC If the function is disabled while driving on a

steep downhill gradient, the braking effect will gradually decrease.

HDC can be used in gear position D, R, and with 1st or 2nd gear with manual gear changing.

It is not possible to change to 3rd gear or higher with manual gear changing.

NOTE

When LSC with HDC is activated by the OFF ROAD driving mode, the feel of the accelera- tor pedal and engine response are changed.

NOTE

The driving mode is not designed to be used on public roads.

NOTE

The function is deactivated when driving at higher speeds and must be reactivated at a lower speed, if required.

Related information Activating and deactivating hill descent con-

trol with the function button (p. 459)

Changing drive mode (p. 453)

Low speed control (p. 457)

All-wheel drive (p. 447)

Activating and deactivating hill descent control with the function button Any car that is not equipped with a drive mode control in the tunnel console has a function but- ton for hill descent control with Hill Descent Control in the centre display function view.

Selecting hill descent control in the centre display function view Hill descent control only works at low speeds.

Press the Hill Descent Control button to activate or deactivate the function.

> An indicator in the button illuminates when the function is activated.

This function is disabled automatically when the engine is switched off.

NOTE

The function is deactivated when driving at higher speeds and must be reactivated at a lower speed, if required.

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

460

Related information Hill descent control (p. 458)

Changing drive mode (p. 453)

Economical driving Drive economically and eco-consciously by driv- ing smoothly, thinking ahead, and adjusting your driving style and speed to the prevailing condi- tions.

Plan for electric operation It is important to plan carefully when driving in electric mode in order to achieve the longest possible driving distance:

Charge

Charge the car regularly from the mains power circuit. Make it a habit to always start a journey with fully-charged hybrid battery.

Find out where the charging stations are located.

If possible, select a parking space with a charging station.

NOTE

Charge the car from the mains power circuit as often as possible!

Precondition

Precondition the car before driving if possible using the charging cable connected to the mains power circuit.

Avoid parking the car in a way that the inte- rior cools down or overheats while parking.

Park the car in an acclimated garage, for example.

During a short drive after preconditioning of the passenger compartment, switch off the ventilation fan or air conditioning in a hot cli- mate, if possible.

If preconditioning is not possible when it is cold outside, use seat heating and steering wheel heating first of all. Avoid warming up the whole of the interior which takes energy from the hybrid battery.

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

461

Drive

For lowest energy consumption, activate the Pure drive mode.

Drive at a steady speed and keep a good dis- tance to other vehicles and objects in order to avoid braking. This driving style results in the lowest energy consumption.

Balance the power requirement using the accelerator pedal. Use the indicator for avail- able electric motor power in the driver display in order to avoid starting the internal com- bustion engine unnecessarily. The electric motor is more efficient that the internal com- bustion engine, in particular at low speed.

In the event of braking being necessary - brake gently with the brake pedal, this recharges the hybrid battery. A regenerative braking function is built into the brake pedal and can be reinforced with electric motor braking in gear position B.

High speed results in increased energy con- sumption - the wind resistance increases with speed.

Activate the Hold function in the function view at higher speeds during journeys that are longer than the range of the electricity.

If possible, avoid using the Charge function to charge the hybrid battery. Charging with the internal combustion engine increases fuel consumption and involves increased car- bon dioxide emissions.

In a cold climate, reduce electrical heating of windows, mirrors, seats and steering wheel, if possible.

Drive with the correct air pressure in the tyres and check this regularly - select ECO tyre pressure for best results.

Choice of tyres can affect energy consump- tion - seek advice on suitable tyres from a dealer.

Remove unnecessary items from the car - the greater the load the higher the consump- tion.

A roof load and ski box increase air resis- tance, leading to higher consumption - remove the load carriers when not in use.

Avoid driving with open windows.

Do not hold the car stationary on a hill with the accelerator pedal. Use the foot brake instead.

Related information Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure (p. 30)

Factors that affect range when running on electricity (p. 462)

Driving with electric operation (p. 461)

Hybrid gauge (p. 80)

Checking tyre pressure (p. 550)

Driving with electric operation When driving on electric power, Volvo Twin Engine provides a combination of good fuel economy, low emissions and high performance. For the most energy-efficient driving:

Select drive mode Pure to get as far as pos- sible with electric power alone.

Balance the power requirement using the accelerator pedal. Use the indicator for avail- able electric motor power in the driver dis- play's hybrid gauge in order to avoid starting the internal combustion engine unnecessar- ily.

In the event of braking being necessary - brake gently with the brake pedal, this recharges the hybrid battery.

Activate the Hold function in the function view at higher speeds during journeys that are longer than the range of the electricity.

Reduce the current take-off in the passenger compartment by reducing, for example, fan speed, electrical heating or air conditioning usage.

Also follow the general advice on economical driving with regard to speed, tyres and load in order to maximise the range.

Related information General information about Twin Engine

(p. 406)

Economical driving (p. 460)

STARTING AND DRIVING

462

Hybrid gauge (p. 80)

Factors that affect range when running on electricity (p. 462)

Starting and stopping the combustion engine in Twin Engine (p. 448)

"Hold" and "Charge" function (p. 463)

Factors that affect range when running on electricity The car's range for electric operation depends on several factors. The ability to achieve a long range varies according to the circumstances and conditions under which the car is being driven. The certified value for the car's mileage on elec- tric power should not be interpreted as an expec- ted range. The certification value is a comparative value obtained by means of special EU drive cycles. The actual range is dependent on a num- ber of factors.

Factors that affect the range The driver can influence some factors, but has no influence over others.

The longest range is achieved under extremely favourable conditions when all factors have a positive impact.

Factors the driver cannot influence There are several external factors that affect the range in varying degrees:

traffic situation

short driving distances

topography

outside temperature and headwind

road condition and surface.

The table below shows the approximate relation- ship between outside temperature and range, both in a car with deactivated passenger com-

partment climate control, as well as in a car with normal passenger compartment climate control.

A warmer outside temperature has a positive effect on range to a certain extent.

Outside tem-

perature

Deactivated

passenger

compartment

climate con-

trol

Normal pas-

senger com-

partment cli-

mate control

30 C (86 F) 95 % 80 %

20 C (68 F) 100 % 90 %

10 C (50 F) 90 % 80 %

0 C (32 F) 80 % 60 %

-10 C (14 F)

70 % 40 %

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

463

Factors the driver can influence The driver should be aware that the following fac- tors affect the range so he/she can operate the car in an energy-efficient manner:

regular charging

preconditioning

drive mode Pure

climate settings

speed and acceleration

Hold function

tyres and tyre pressure.

The table below shows the approximate relation- ship between constant speed and range, where a lower constant speed has a positive effect on range.

Constant speed

100 km/h (62 mph) 50 %

80 km/h (50 mph) 70 %

60 km/h (37 mph) 90 %

50 km/h (31 mph) 100 %

NOTE

The values shown in the tables relate to a new car.

These are not absolute values, but are dependent upon driving behaviour, envi- ronment and other circumstances.

Related information Driving with electric operation (p. 461)

Economical driving (p. 460)

"Hold" and "Charge" function (p. 463)

Drive modes (p. 449)

"Hold" and "Charge" function In some situations, it can be useful to be able to control the hybrid battery's state of charge while driving is in progress. This is possible using the Hold and Charge functions which are available in all drive modes.

Function buttons for Hold and Charge The functions are activated in the centre display's function view.

Hold Battery level sustained for later use.

The function maintains the charge in the hybrid battery for electric operation saves availa- ble electrical energy for later

use, e.g. for driving in an urban environment or through a residential area. Hold is available regardless of the hybrid battery's state of charge.

The car works as for normal hybrid operation with discharged battery where, in addition to re-using brake-generated energy, for example, the car starts the internal combustion engine more often in order to maintain the charge in the battery.

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

464

Charge Engine charges hybrid battery.

The function charges the hybrid battery with support from the internal combustion engine for using increased electric opera-

tion at a later time. The function is not available when the hybrid battery already has a high charge level.

Symbols in the driver display

The symbol is shown in the hybrid battery gauge when Hold is activated.

The symbol is shown in the hybrid battery gauge when Charge is activated.

Related information Driving with electric operation (p. 461)

Economical driving (p. 460)

Hybrid gauge (p. 80)

Preparations for a long trip Before a driving holiday or some other type of long journey, it is important to check the car's functions and equipment particularly carefully. Check that:

the engine is working normally and that fuel consumption is normal

there are no leaks (fuel, oil or other fluid)

brake force during braking is optimal

all lamps are working - adjust headlamp level if the car is heavily laden

the tyres have sufficient tread depth and pressure. Change to winter tyres when driv- ing to areas where there is a risk of snowy or icy road surfaces.

starter battery charging is good

the wiper blades are in good condition

a warning triangle and high-visibility vest are located in the car - legally required in certain countries.

Related information Checking tyre pressure (p. 550)

Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions (p. 656)

Filling washer fluid (p. 639)

Winter driving (p. 465)

Economical driving (p. 460)

Settings for car modem (p. 529)

STARTING AND DRIVING

465

Recommendations for loading (p. 579)

Driving with a trailer (p. 477)

Pilot Assist (p. 306)

Speed Limiter (p. 274)

Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 565)

Winter driving For winter driving it is important to perform cer- tain checks of the car in order to ensure that it can be driven safely.

Check the following in particular before the cold season:

The engine coolant must contain 50% glycol. This mixture protects the engine against frost down to approx. -35C (-31F). To avoid health risks, different types of glycol must not be mixed.

The fuel tank must be kept filled to prevent condensation.

Engine oil viscosity is important. Oils with lower viscosity (thinner oils) facilitate starting in cold weather and also reduce fuel con- sumption while the engine is cold.

IMPORTANT

Low viscosity oil must not be used for hard driving or in hot weather.

The condition of the starter battery and charge level must be inspected. Cold weather places great demands on the starter battery and its capacity is reduced by the cold.

Use washer fluid with antifreeze to avoid ice forming in the washer fluid reservoir.

Slippery driving conditions To achieve optimum roadholding Volvo recom- mends using winter tyres on all wheels if there is a risk of snow or ice.

NOTE

The use of winter tyres is a legal requirement in certain countries. Studded tyres are not permitted in all countries.

Practise driving on slippery surfaces under con- trolled conditions to learn how the car reacts.

Related information Winter wheels (p. 563)

Snow chains (p. 564)

Braking on gritted roads (p. 436)

Braking on wet roads (p. 435)

Filling washer fluid (p. 639)

Starter battery (p. 605)

Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 637)

Replacing the wiper blade, rear window (p. 636)

Topping up coolant (p. 602)

Adverse driving conditions for engine oil (p. 652)

STARTING AND DRIVING

466

Driving in water Driving in water means that the car is driven in a deeper amount of water on a road that is under water. Driving in water must be performed with great caution. Note the following in order to prevent damage to the car when driving through water (e.g. on floo- ded roads):

The water level must not be higher than the floor of the car. If possible, check the depth at the deepest point before starting to drive through the water. Extra caution should be exercised when passing through flowing water.

Always change to Off Road drive mode before driving through water in order to ensure that the internal combustion engine is running.

Do not drive faster than walking pace.

Do not stop the car in the water. Drive for- ward carefully or reverse the car back out of the water.

Remember that waves created by oncoming traffic may rise above the level for the floor of the car.

Avoid driving through salt water (corrosion risk).

IMPORTANT

Parts of the car (e.g. engine, gearbox, drive- line or electrical components) may be dam- aged when driving through water with a level higher than the floor of the car. Damaged caused to a component caused by submer- sion, hydrolock or lack of oil is not covered by the warranty.

In the event of stalling in water, do not try to restart. Instead, tow the car out of the water and transported on a low loader to a work- shop. An authorised Volvo workshop is rec- ommended.

When the water has been passed, depress the brake pedal lightly and check that full brake func- tion is achieved. Water and mud for example can make the brake linings wet resulting in delayed brake function.

If necessary, clean the contact for the trailer cou- pling after driving in water and mud.

Related information Recovery (p. 484)

Low speed control (p. 457)

Opening and closing the fuel filler flap The fuel filler flap is unlocked by pressing a but- ton on the instrument panel.

In the driver display, the arrow next to the tank symbol indi- cates which side of the car the fuel filler flap is located.

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

467

1. Press the button on the instrument panel.

> Pressure equalisation of the fuel tank involves a certain delay in opening the flap. The message Fuel tank Fuel lid is opening is shown in the driver display, and then Fuel tank Ready for refuelling.

NOTE

After the fuel filler flap has been opened, refuelling must take place within about ten minutes. After this, the valve that was opened by pressing the button is closed, and it is no longer possible to refuel because the pump nozzle cuts out.

If the valve is closed before refuelling is com- plete - press the button again and wait until the driver display shows the message Fuel tank Ready for refuelling.

2. After refuelling is finished - close the flap with a gentle press.

Related information Filling fuel (p. 467)

Filling fuel The fuel tank is fitted with a coverless fuel filler system.

Refuelling the car at a petrol station

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.468

Fuel filling is performed in the following way.

1. Switch off the car and open the fuel filler flap.

NOTE

After the fuel filler flap has been opened, refuelling must take place within about ten minutes. After this, the valve that was opened by pressing the button is closed, and it is no longer possible to refuel because the pump nozzle cuts out.

If the valve is closed before refuelling is com- plete - press the button again and wait until the driver display shows the message Fuel tank Ready for refuelling.

2. Choose fuel that is approved for use in the car in accordance with the identifier6 on the inside of the fuel filler flap. See information on approved fuels and identifier in the sec- tion on "Petrol".

3. Insert the pump nozzle in the fuel filler open- ing. The filler pipe has two opening caps. The pump nozzle must be pushed past both caps before refuelling is started.

4. Do not overfill the tank but fill until the pump nozzle cuts out the first time.

> The tank is full.

NOTE

Overfilled fuel in the tank can overflow in hot weather.

Topping up fuel from a fuel can When filling with a fuel can, use the funnel located in the foam block under the floor hatch in the cargo area.

1. Open the fuel filler flap.

2. Insert the funnel in the fuel filler opening. The filler pipe has two opening caps. The funnel's pipe must be pushed past both caps before filling can be started.

Applies to cars with fuel-driven heater* Never use the fuel-driven heater when the car is in a filling station area.

Decal on the inside of the fuel filler flap.

Related information Opening and closing the fuel filler flap

(p. 466)

Petrol (p. 469)

6 The identifier in accordance with the CEN standard EN16942 is located on the inside of the fuel filler flap, and will be on corresponding fuel pumps and their nozzles at filling stations throughout Europe by the end of 2018 at the latest.

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

469

Handling of fuel Do not use fuel with a lower quality than that rec- ommended by Volvo, as this will negatively affect engine power and fuel consumption.

WARNING

Always avoid inhaling fuel vapour and getting fuel splashes in the eyes.

In the event of fuel in the eyes, remove any contact lenses and rinse the eyes in plenty of water for at least 15 minutes and seek medi- cal attention.

Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol, bioe- thanol and mixtures of them and diesel are highly toxic and could cause permanent injury or be fatal if swallowed. Seek medical atten- tion immediately if fuel has been swallowed.

WARNING

Fuel which spills onto the ground can be igni- ted.

Switch off the fuel-driven heater before star- ting to refuel.

Never carry an activated mobile phone when refuelling. The ring signal could cause spark build-up and ignite petrol fumes, leading to fire and injury.

IMPORTANT

Mixtures of various fuel types or use of fuels which are not recommended will invalidate Volvo's guarantees and any supplementary service agreements; this is applicable to all engines.

Related information Petrol (p. 469)

Petrol Petrol is a type of engine fuel that is intended for cars with a petrol engine. Only use petrol from well-known producers. Never use fuel of dubious quality. The petrol must fulfil the EN 228 standard.

Identifier for petrol The identifier in accordance with the CEN stand- ard EN16942 is located on the inside of the fuel filler flap, and will be on corresponding fuel pumps and their nozzles at filling stations throughout Europe by the end of 2018 at the lat- est.

These are the identifiers that apply for current standard fuels in Europe. Petrol with the following identifiers may be used in cars with petrol engine:

E5 is a petrol with maximum 2.7% oxygen and maximum 5 volume % ethanol.

E10 is a petrol with maximum 3.7% oxygen and maximum 10 volume % ethanol.

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

470

IMPORTANT

Fuel that contains up to 10 percent by volume ethanol is permitted.

EN 228 E10 petrol (max 10 percent by volume ethanol) is approved for use.

Ethanol higher than E10 (max. 10 percent by volume ethanol) is not permitted, e.g. E85 is not permitted.

Octane rating 95 RON can be used for normal driving.

98 RON is recommended for optimum per- formance and minimum fuel consumption.

An octane rating lower than RON 95 must not be used.

When driving in temperatures above +38 C (100 F), fuel with the highest octane rating is recom- mended for optimum performance and fuel econ- omy.

IMPORTANT

Use only unleaded petrol to avoid damag- ing the catalytic converter.

Fuel containing metallic additives must not be used.

Do not use any additives which have not been recommended by Volvo.

Related information Handling of fuel (p. 469)

Filling fuel (p. 467)

Petrol particle filter (p. 470)

Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions (p. 656)

Petrol particle filter Petrol cars are fitted with particle filters for more efficient emission control.

Particles in the exhaust gases are collected in the petrol particle filter during normal driving. In normal driving conditions, passive regeneration takes place, which leads to the particles being oxidised and burned away. The filter is emptied in this way.

If the car is driven at low speed or with repeated cold starts in low outside temperature, active regeneration may be necessary. Regeneration of the particulate filter is automatic and normally takes 10-20 minutes. There may be a smell of burning during regeneration.

Use the parking heater in cold weather - the engine then reaches normal operating tempera- ture more quickly.

When driving short distances at low speeds in a petrol car The capacity of the petrol emission control sys- tem is affected by how the car is driven. It is important to drive varying distances at different speeds to achieve optimal performance.

Driving short distances at low speeds (or in cold climates) frequently, where the engine does not reach normal operating temperature, can lead to problems that can eventually cause a malfunction and trigger a warning message. If the vehicle is mostly driven in city traffic, it is important to regu-

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

471

larly drive at higher speeds to allow the petrol emission control system to regenerate.

The car should be driven on A-roads at speeds in excess of 60 km/h (38 mph) for at least 20 minutes between each refuelling.

Related information Petrol (p. 469)

Overheating in the engine and drive system Under special conditions, for example hard driv- ing in hilly terrain and hot climate, there is a risk that the engine and drive system may overheat - in particular with a heavy load.

In the event of overheating, the engine's power may be limited temporarily.

Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front of the grille when driving in hot climates.

If the temperature in the engine's cooling system becomes too high then a warning symbol is illuminated and the driver display shows the message Engine temperature High temperature Stop safely. Stop the car in a safe way and allow the engine to run at idling speed for several minutes and cool down.

If the message Engine temperature High temperature Turn off engine or Engine coolant Level low, turn off engine is shown, stop the car and switch off the engine.

In the event of overheating in the gearbox, an alternative gear shift program will be selected. In addition, a built-in protection function is activated that, amongst other things, illuminates a warning symbol and the driver display shows the message Transmission warm Reduce speed to lower temperature or Transmission hot

Stop safely, wait for cooling. Follow the recommendation given, reduce speed or stop the car in a safe way and allow the engine to run at idling speed for several minutes to enable the gearbox to cool down.

If the car overheats, the air conditioning may be switched off temporarily.

Do not turn the engine off immediately you stop after a hard drive.

NOTE

It is normal for the engine's cooling fan to operate for a time after the engine has been switched off.

Symbols in the driver display

Symbol Specification

High engine temperature. Follow the recommendation given.

Low level, coolant. Follow the rec- ommendation given.

Gearbox hot/overheated/cooled. Follow the recommendation given.

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.472

Related information Topping up coolant (p. 602)

Driving with a trailer (p. 477)

Preparations for a long trip (p. 464)

Gear shift indicator* (p. 446)

Overloading the starter battery The electrical functions in the car load the starter battery to varying degrees. Avoid using the igni- tion position II when the car is switched off. Instead, use ignition position I - which uses less power.

Also, be aware of different accessories that load the electrical system. Do not use functions which use a lot of power when the car is switched off. Examples of such functions are:

ventilation fan

headlamps

windscreen wiper

audio system (high volume).

If the starter battery voltage is low, a message is shown in the driver display. The energy-saving function then shuts down certain functions or reduces certain functions such as the ventilation fan and/or audio system.

In which case, charge the starter battery by starting the car and then running it for at least 15 minutes - starter battery charging is more effective during driving than running the engine at idling speed while stationary.

Related information Starter battery (p. 605)

Ignition positions (p. 430)

Using jump starting with another battery If the starter battery is discharged then the car can be started with current from another battery.

Charging point for jump-starting own car.

IMPORTANT

The cars charging point is only intended for jump-starting the car itself. The charging point is not intended for jump-starting another car. Using the charging point to jump start another car may cause a fuse to blow, which means the charging point will stop working.

When a fuse has blown the message 12 V Battery Fuse failure Service required is shown in the driver display. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop is contacted.

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

473

When jump-starting the car, the following steps are recommended to avoid short circuits or other damage:

1. Set the car's electrical system in ignition position 0.

2. Check that the donor battery has a voltage of 12 V.

3. If the donor battery is installed in another car - switch off the donor car's engine and make sure that the two cars do not touch each other.

4. Connect one of the red jump lead's clamps to the donor battery's positive terminal (1).

IMPORTANT

Connect the start cable carefully to avoid short circuits with other components in the engine compartment.

5. Open the positive jump-starting point's cover (2).

6. Connect the red jump lead's other clamp onto the car's positive jump-starting point (2).

7. Connect one of the black jump lead's clamps to the donor battery's negative terminal (3).

8. Connect the black jump lead's other clamp onto the car's negative jump-starting point (4).

9. Check that the jump lead clamps are affixed securely so that there are no sparks during the starting attempt.

10. Start the engine of the "donor car" and allow it to run a few minutes at a speed slightly higher than idle approx. 1500 rpm.

11. Start your own car's engine. If the start attempt fails then extend the charging time to 10 minutes, and then make a new start attempt.

NOTE

When starting the engine in normal condi- tions the car's electric drive motor is priori- tised - the petrol engine remains switched off. This means that after the start knob is turned clockwise, the electric motor has "started" and the car is ready to drive. A started motor is indicated by the driver display's indicator lamps extinguishing and its preset theme illu- minating.

IMPORTANT

Do not touch the connections between cable and car during the starting attempt. There is a risk of sparks forming.

12. Remove the jump leads in reverse order - first the black and then the red.

Make sure that none of the black jump lead's clamps comes into contact with the car's positive jump-starting point/donor battery's positive terminal or the clamp connected to the red jump lead.

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.474

WARNING

The battery can generate oxyhydrogen gas, which is highly explosive. A spark can be formed if a jump lead is connected incorrectly, and this can be enough for the battery to explode.

Do not connect the jump leads to any fuel system component or any moving part. Be careful of hot engine parts.

The battery contains sulphuric acid, which can cause serious burns.

If sulphuric acid comes into contact with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large quantities of water. If acid splashes into the eyes - seek medical attention imme- diately.

Never smoke near the battery.

NOTE

The car cannot be started if the hybrid battery is discharged.

Related information Starting the car (p. 428)

Ignition positions (p. 430)

Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 189)

Selecting ignition mode (p. 431)

Towbar* The car can be equipped with a towbar that makes it possible to tow e.g. a trailer behind the car.

There may be different towbar variants available for the car. Contact a Volvo dealer for more infor- mation.

IMPORTANT

When the engine is switched off, the constant battery voltage to the trailer connector can be switched off automatically so as not to drain the starter battery.

IMPORTANT

The towball needs regular cleaning and lubri- cation with grease in order to prevent wear.

NOTE

When a hitch with a vibration damper is used, the towball must not be lubricated.

This also applies when fitting a bicycle rack that is clamped in around the towball.

NOTE

If the car is equipped with a towbar, there is no rear mounting for a towing eye.

Related information Extendable and retractable towbar* (p. 475)

Driving with a trailer (p. 477)

Towbar-mounted bicycle rack* (p. 481)

Specifications for towbar* (p. 475)

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

* Option/accessory. 475

Specifications for towbar* Dimensions and mounting points for towbar.

Dimensions, mounting points in mm (inches)

A 1041,3 (41)

B 90 (3,5)

C 875 (34,4)

D 437,5 (17,2)

E See the image above

F 283,5 (11,1)

G Ball centre

Related information Towbar* (p. 474)

Towing capacity and towball load (p. 648)

Extendable and retractable towbar* The extendable/retractable towbar is always easily accessible and simple to extend or retract as needed. In the retracted position, the towbar is completely concealed.

WARNING

Follow the instructions for retracting and extending the towbar carefully.

Extending the towbar

WARNING

Avoid standing close to the bumper in the centre behind the car when extending the towing hitch.

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

476

1.

Open the tailgate. A button for extending/ retracting the towbar is located on the right- hand side at the rear of the cargo area. An indicator lamp in the button must illuminate with a constant orange glow for the exten- sion function to be active.

2.

Press and release the button - extension might not start if the button is pressed for too long.

> The towbar extends out and down in an unlocked position - the indicator lamp flashes orange.

WARNING

Do not press the extend/retract button if a trailer is attached to the towbar.

NOTE

The towbar must finish the extension proce- dure before it can then be moved to locked position. This procedure may take several seconds. If the towbar is not fixed in locked position, wait a few seconds and try again.

3.

Move the towbar to its end position, where it is secured and locked in place - the indicator lamp illuminates with a constant orange glow.

> The towbar is ready for use.

WARNING

Take care to secure the trailer's safety cable in the intended bracket.

NOTE

Power save mode activates after a while and the indicator lamp goes out. The system is reactivated by closing and opening the tail- gate. This applies when retracting or extend- ing the towbar.

If the car detects a connected trailer electri- cally, the indicator lamp stops illuminating with a constant glow.

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

* Option/accessory. 477

Retracting the towbar

IMPORTANT

Make sure that there is no plug or adapter in the electrical socket when retracting the tow- bar.

1.

Open the tailgate. Press and release the but- ton on the right-hand side at the rear of the cargo area - retraction might not start if the button is pressed for too long.

> The towbar automatically lowers in an unlocked position - the indicator lamp in the button flashes orange.

2.

Lock the towbar by moving it back to its retracted position, where it is locked.

> The indicator lamp will now illuminate with a constant glow if the towbar is correctly retracted.

Related information Driving with a trailer (p. 477)

Towbar* (p. 474)

Driving with a trailer When driving with a trailer, there are a number of points that are important to think about regar- ding the towbar, the trailer and how the load is positioned in the trailer.

Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The total of the weight of the passengers and all accessories, e.g. towbar, reduces the car's pay- load by a corresponding weight.

The car is supplied with the necessary equipment for towing a trailer.

The car's towbar must be of an approved type.

Distribute the load on the trailer so that the weight on the towbar complies with the specified maximum towball load. Towball load is calculated as part of the car's payload.

Increase the tyre pressure to the recom- mended pressure for a full load.

The engine is loaded more heavily than usual when driving with a trailer.

Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is brand new. Wait until it has been driven at least 1000 km (620 miles).

The brakes are loaded much more than usual on long and steep downhill slopes. Downshift to a lower gear when shifting manually and adjust your speed.

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.478

Follow the regulations in force for the permit- ted speeds and weights.

Maintain a low speed when driving with a trailer up long, steep ascents.

The maximum indicated trailer weight only applies to heights up to 1000 metres above sea level (3280 ft). At higher elevations, the engine output and the vehicle's climbing abil- ity are reduced due to the reduced air den- sity, and the maximum trailer load must therefore be reduced. The weight of the car and trailer must be decreased by 10% for each additional 1000 m (3280 ft) (or part thereof).

Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of more than 12%.

NOTE

Extreme weather conditions, driving with a trailer or driving at high altitudes in combina- tion with fuel quality are factors that consider- ably increase the car's fuel consumption.

Trailer connector An adapter is required if the car's towbar has a 13 pin connector and the trailer has a 7 pin con- nector. Use an adapter approved by Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag on the ground.

IMPORTANT

When the engine is switched off, the constant battery voltage to the trailer connector can be switched off automatically so as not to drain the starter battery.

Trailer weights

WARNING

Follow the stated recommendations for trailer weights. Otherwise, the car and trailer may be difficult to control in the event of sudden movement and braking.

NOTE

The stated maximum permitted trailer weights are those permitted by Volvo. National vehicle regulations can further limit trailer weights and speeds. Towbars can be certified for higher towing weights than the car can actually tow.

Level control* The car's system for level control endeavours to maintain a constant height regardless of load (up to the maximum permissible weight). When the car is stationary the rear of the car lowers slightly, which is normal.

When driving in hilly terrain and hot climates Under certain circumstances, there may be a risk of overheating when towing a trailer. If the engine and drive system overheats, a warning symbol comes on in the driver display together with a message.

The automatic gearbox selects the optimum gear related to load and engine speed.

Steep inclines Do not lock the automatic gearbox in a higher gear than the engine "can cope with" - it is not always a good idea to drive at a high gear with low engine speed.

Parking on a hill 1. Depress the brake pedal fully.

2. Activate the parking brake.

3. Select gear position P.

4. Release the brake pedal.

Block the wheels with chocks when parking a car with hitched trailer on a hill.

Starting on a hill 1. Depress the brake pedal fully.

2. Select gear position D.

3. Releasing the parking brake.

4. Release the brake pedal and start driving off.

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

* Option/accessory. 479

Related information Trailer stability assist* (p. 479)

Checking trailer lamps (p. 480)

Towing capacity and towball load (p. 648)

Overheating in the engine and drive system (p. 471)

Adverse driving conditions for engine oil (p. 652)

Trailer stability assist* The function of trailer stability assist (TSA7) is to stabilise cars towing trailers in situations where they begin snaking. The function is included in

the stability system ESC8.

Reasons for snaking The snaking phenomenon can occur with any car/trailer combination. Snaking normally occurs at high speeds. But, there is a risk of it occurring at lower speeds if the trailer is overloaded or the load is improperly distributed, e.g. too far back.

In order for snaking to occur, there must be a triggering factor, e.g.:

Car with trailer subjected to a sudden and powerful side wind.

Car with trailer drives on an uneven road sur- face or in a pothole.

Sweeping steering wheel movements.

If snaking has started, it could be difficult or even impossible to suppress. This makes the car/ trailer combination difficult to control and there is a risk that you could, for example, end up in the wrong lane or leave the carriageway.

Trailer stability assist function The trailer stability assist function continually monitors the car's movements, particularly lateral

movements. If snaking is detected, the front wheels are individually braked. This serves to sta- bilise the car/trailer combination. This is often enough to help the driver regain control of the car.

If snaking is not eliminated the first time that trailer stability assist intervenes, the car/trailer combination is braked with all wheels and engine power is reduced. Once snaking has been gradu- ally suppressed and the car/trailer combination is stable once again, the system stops regulating and the driver once again has full control of the car.

NOTE

The stability function is deactivated if the driver selects Sport mode by deactivating ESC via the menu system in the centre dis- play.

Trailer stability assist may fail to intervene if the driver uses severe steering wheel movements to try to rectify the snaking because in such a situa- tion the system cannot determine whether it is the trailer or the driver causing the snaking.

7 Trailer Stability Assist 8 Electronic Stability Control

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.480

When trailer stability assist is operating, the ESC symbol flashes in the driver display.

Related information Driving with a trailer (p. 477)

Electronic stability control (p. 270)

Checking trailer lamps When connecting a trailer - check that all the trailer lamps work before departure.

Direction indicators and brake lights on the trailer If one or more of the trailer's direction indicators or brake light bulbs is broken, the driver display shows a symbol and a message. Other lights on the trailer must be checked manually by the driver before setting off.

Symbol Message

Trailer turn indicator Right turn indicator malfunction

Trailer turn indicator Left turn indicator malfunction

Trailer brake light Malfunc- tion

If any lamp for the trailer's direction indicators is broken, the driver display symbol for direction indicators will also flash more quickly than nor- mal.

Rear fog lamp on trailer When connecting the trailer, the rear fog lamp may not light up on the car. In such cases, the rear fog lamp function switches to the trailer. Upon activation of the rear fog lamp, check

therefore that the trailer is equipped with a rear fog lamp to travel safely.

Checking trailer lamps* Automatic checking After a trailer is connected electrically, it is possi- ble to check that the trailer lamps are working via an automatic lamp activation. The function helps the driver check that the trailer lamps are working before starting off.

The engine must be switched off to perform the check.

1. When a trailer is connected to the towbar, the Automatic Trailer Lamp Check mes- sage is shown in the driver display.

2. Confirm the message by pressing the right- hand steering wheel keypad's O button.

> The lamp check starts.

3. Exit the car to check lamp functionality.

> All trailer lamps start to flash - then the lamps are switched on one at a time.

4. Visually check that all lamps available on the trailer are operational.

5. After a moment, all lamps on the trailer flash again.

> The check is complete.

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

* Option/accessory. 481

Switching off automatic checking The automatic checking function can be switched off in the centre display.

1. Press Settings in the top view.

2. Press My Car Lights and Lighting.

3. Deselect Automatic Trailer Lamp Check.

Manual checking If the automatic checking is switched off then it is possible to start the check manually.

1. Press Settings in the top view.

2. Press My Car Lights and Lighting.

3. Select Manual Trailer Lamp Check.

> The lamp check starts. Exit the car to check lamp functionality.

Related information Driving with a trailer (p. 477)

Towbar-mounted bicycle rack* When using a bicycle rack, the bicycle racks that Volvo has developed are recommended.

This is in order to avoid damage to the car and in order to achieve the maximum possible safety during a journey. Volvo's bicycle racks are availa- ble for purchase at authorised Volvo dealers.

Carefully follow the instructions enclosed with the bicycle rack.

Bicycle rack including load must weigh a maximum of 75 kg (165 pounds).

The bicycle rack may be designed for a maxi- mum of three bicycles.

WARNING

Incorrect use of the bicycle rack may cause damage to the towbar and car.

The bicycle rack can loosen from the towbar if it:

is incorrectly fitted on the towball

is overloaded, see the bicycle rack's instructions for maximum load weight

is used for carrying something other than bicycles.

The car's driving characteristics are affected when a bicycle rack is fitted on the towbar. For example, due to:

increased weight

reduced acceleration capacity

reduced ground clearance

changed braking capacity.

Recommendations for loading bicycles on the bicycle rack The larger the distance between the load's cen- tre of gravity and the towball, the greater the load on the towbar.

Load according to the following recommenda- tions:

Fit the heaviest bicycle furthest in, closest to the car.

Keep the load symmetrical and as close to the centre of the car as possible, e.g. by loading the bicycles facing alternately if sev- eral bicycles are loaded.

Remove loose objects from the bicycle for transportation, e.g. bicycle basket, battery, child seat. Partly to reduce the load on the towbar and bicycle rack, and partly to reduce the wind resistance, which affects fuel con- sumption.

Do not use protective covers on the bicycles. This may affect manoeuvrability, impair visibil-

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.482

ity and increase fuel consumption. It may also lead to an increased load on the towbar.

Related information Towbar* (p. 474)

Towing During towing, the car is towed by another vehi- cle by means of a towline.

Towing a car with Twin Engine is not permitted since this damages the electric motor. When moving the car it must be transported raised up with all the wheels on a recovery vehicle's plat- form.

When towing another car Towing a car requires a lot of energy - use the AWD drive mode. This then charges the hybrid battery, in combination with improving the car's driving characteristics and roadholding.

Find out the statutory maximum speed limit for towing before the towing begins.

Jump starting Do not tow the car to jump start the engine. Use a donor battery if the starter battery is discharged and the engine does not start.

IMPORTANT

The electric drive motor and the catalytic con- verter may be damaged during attempts to tow-start the car.

Related information Fitting and removing the towing eye (p. 483)

Hazard warning flashers (p. 152)

Recovery (p. 484)

Using jump starting with another battery (p. 472)

Selecting ignition mode (p. 431)

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory. 483

Fitting and removing the towing eye Use the towing eye if the car shall tow another vehicle. The towing eye is screwed into a threa- ded socket behind a cover on the right-hand side of the rear bumper.

NOTE

If the car is equipped with a towbar, there is no rear mounting for a towing eye.

Fitting the towing eye

Take out the towing eye from the foam block under the floor in the cargo area.

Remove the cover - press on the marking with a finger and, at the same time, fold out the opposite side/corner using a coin or sim- ilar.

> The cover pivots around its centre line and can then be removed.

3. Screw the towing eye right in until it stops. Screw the eye in firmly. For example, thread through the wheel bolt wrench* and use it as a lever.

IMPORTANT

It is important that the towing eye is firmly screwed into place - right in until it stops.

Removing the towing eye:

After use, unscrew the towing eye and return it to its place.

Finish by refitting the cover onto the bumper.

Related information Towing (p. 482)

Recovery (p. 484)

Tool kit (p. 557)

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.484

Recovery For recovery, the car is taken away with the help of another vehicle. Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.

The towing eye can be used to pull the car up onto a recovery vehicle with a flatbed platform.

IMPORTANT

Note that cars with Twin Engine must always be transported raised up with all the wheels on the recovery vehicle's platform.

Applies to cars with level control*: If the car is equipped with air suspension, this must be disa- bled before the car is raised. Deactivating the function via the centre display.

1. Press Settings in the top view.

2. Press My Car Parking Brake and Suspension.

3. Select Disable Leveling Control.

The car's position and ground clearance deter- mine whether it is possible to pull it up onto a flatbed platform. If the slope of the recovery vehi- cle's ramp is too steep, or if the ground clearance under the car is inadequate, then the car may be damaged if you try to pull it up. The car should then be lifted using the recovery vehicle's lifting device.

WARNING

No one/nothing is allowed to remain behind the recovery vehicle while the car pulled up onto the flatbed platform.

Related information Fitting and removing the towing eye (p. 483)

HomeLink*9

HomeLink10 is a programmable remote control, integrated in the car's electrical system, which can remotely control up to three different devi- ces (e.g. garage door opener, alarm system, out- door and indoor lighting, etc.) and thereby replace the remote controls for them.

General

The figure is schematic - the version may vary.

Button 1

Button 2

Button 3

Indicator lamp

HomeLink is supplied built-in to the interior rearview mirror. The HomeLink panel consists of

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

* Option/accessory. 485

three programmable buttons and one indicator lamp in the mirror glass.

For more information about HomeLink, visit www.HomeLink.com, www.youtube.com/ HomeLinkGentex or call the toll-free number 00 8000 466 354 65 (or the toll number +49 6838 907 277)11.

Save the original remote controls for future pro- gramming (e.g. when changing to another car or for use in another vehicle). It is also recom- mended that the programming for the buttons is deleted when the car is sold.

Related information Using HomeLink (p. 487)

Programming HomeLink* (p. 485)

Type approval for HomeLink* (p. 488)

Programming HomeLink*12

Follow these instructions to program

HomeLink, reset all programming or reprogram individual buttons.

NOTE

In certain vehicles the ignition must be switched on or in "accessory position" before HomeLink can be programmed or used. If possible, fit new batteries in the remote con- trol that shall be replaced by HomeLink for faster programming and improved transmis- sion of the radio signal. The HomeLink but- tons should be reset before programming.

WARNING

While programming HomeLink, the garage door or gate being programmed may activate. For this reason, make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the door or gate while program- ming is in progress. The car should be outside the garage while a garage door opener is being programmed.

1. Aim the remote control towards the HomeLink button to be programmed and hold it approx. 2-8 cm (approx. 1-3 inches) from the button. Do not obstruct the indicator lamp on HomeLink.

Note: The ability of some remote controls to program HomeLink is improved at a dis- tance of approx. 15-20 cm (approx. 6-12 inches). Bear this in mind if you encounter problems during programming.

2. Press and hold depressed both the button on the remote control and the button to be reprogrammed on HomeLink.

9 Applies to certain markets. 10 HomeLink and the HomeLink house symbol are registered trademarks of Gentex Corporation. 11 Note that the toll-free number may not be available depending on operator. 12 Applies to certain markets.

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

486

3. Do not release the buttons until the indicator lamp has switched from flashing slowly (approx. once per second) to either flashing quickly (approx. 10 times per second) or illu- minating with a constant glow.

> If it illuminates with a constant glow: Indication that the programming has fin- ished. Press the programmed button twice to activate.

If it flashes quickly: The device to be programmed to HomeLink may have a security function that requires extra steps. Test by pressing the programmed button twice to see whether the programming is working. Otherwise, continue with the fol- lowing steps.

4. Locate programming button13 on the receiver for the garage door or similar. It is normally located close to the antenna's bracket on the receiver.

5. Depress and release the receiver's program- ming button once. The programming must be completed within 30 seconds of the button being depressed.

6. Press and release the button on HomeLink

that you want to program. Repeat the sequence of pressing/holding/releasing a second time and, depending on the receiver model, even a third time.

> Programming is now be complete and the garage door, gate or similar should now be activated when the programmed but- ton is depressed.

In the event of programming problems, contact HomeLink at www.HomeLink.com,

www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or call the toll-free number 00 8000 466 354 65 (or the toll number +49 6838 907 277)14.

Reprogramming individual buttons To reprogram an individual HomeLink button, proceed as follows:

1. Press the desired button and hold it depressed for approx. 20 seconds.

2. Once the indicator lamp on HomeLink

starts to flash slowly, programming can con- tinue as normal.

Note: If the button to be reprogrammed is not programmed with a new unit, it will resume the previously saved programming.

Resetting the HomeLink buttons It is only possible to reset all of the HomeLink

buttons at the same time, not each button indi- vidually. Individual buttons can only be reprogram- med.

Press and hold depressed the outer buttons (1 and 3) on HomeLink for approx. 10 sec- onds.

> When the indicator lamp changes over from a constant glow to starting to flash, the buttons are reset and ready to be reprogrammed.

13 Button designation and colour varies between manufacturers. 14 Note that the toll-free number may not be available depending on operator.

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory. 487

Related information Using HomeLink (p. 487)

HomeLink* (p. 484)

Type approval for HomeLink* (p. 488)

Using HomeLink When HomeLink is fully programmed it can be used in place of the separate original remote controls. Depress the programmed button. The garage door, gate, alarm system or similar is activated (may take a few seconds). If the button is depressed for more than 20 seconds then the reprogramming is started. The indicator lamp illu- minates or flashes when the button has been depressed. Naturally the original remote controls can still be used in parallel with HomeLink if required.

NOTE

If the ignition is switched off, HomeLink will work for 30 minutes after the driver's door has been opened.

WARNING

If HomeLink is used to control a garage door or gate, ensure that nobody is near the door or gate while it is in motion.

Do not use HomeLink for any garage door that does not have safety stop and safety reverse.

Related information HomeLink* (p. 484)

Programming HomeLink* (p. 485)

Type approval for HomeLink* (p. 488)

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.488

Type approval for HomeLink*15

Type approval for EU Gentex Corporation hereby declares that HomeLink Model UAHL5 complies with the Radio equipment directive 2014/53/EU.

Wavelength within which the radio equipment functions:

433.05MHz-434.79MHz <10mW E.R.P.

868.00MHz-868.60MHz <25mW E.R.P.

868.70MHz-868.20MHz <25mW E.R.P.

869.40MHz-869.65MHz <25mW E.R.P.

869.70MHz-870.00MHz <25mW E.R.P.

Certificate holder address: Gentex Corporation, 600 North Centennial Street, Zeeland MI 49464, USA

For more information, see support.volvocars.com.

Related information HomeLink* (p. 484)

Compass The upper right-hand corner of the rearview mir- ror has an integrated display that shows the compass direction in which the front of the car is pointing.

Rearview mirror with compass.

Eight different compass directions are shown by their English abbreviations: N (north), NE (north east), E (east), SE (south east), S (south), SW (south west), W (west) and NW (north west).

Related information Activating and deactivating the compass

(p. 488)

Calibrating the compass (p. 489)

Activating and deactivating the compass The upper right-hand corner of the rearview mir- ror has an integrated display that shows the compass direction in which the front of the car is pointing.

Activating and deactivating the compass The compass is activated automatically when the car is started.

To deactivate/activate the compass manually:

Depress the button on the underside of the rearview mirror using e.g. a paper clip.

Related information Compass (p. 488)

Calibrating the compass (p. 489)

15 Applies to certain markets.

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory. 489

Calibrating the compass The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones. The compass should be calibrated if the car is moved between several magnetic zones.

Proceed as follows to perform calibration:

1. Stop the car in a large open area free from steel structures and high-voltage power lines.

2. Start the car and switch off all electrical equipment (air conditioning, wipers, etc.) and ensure that all doors are closed.

NOTE

Calibration may fail or not start at all if electri- cal equipment is not switched off.

3. Hold the button on the underside of the rear- view mirror depressed for approx. 3 seconds (use a paper clip, for example). The number for the current magnetic zone is shown.

Magnetic zones.

4. Press the button repeatedly until the required magnetic zone (115) is shown. See the map of magnetic zones for the com- pass.

5. Wait until the display returns to showing the character C, or hold the button on the under- side of the rearview mirror depressed for approx. 6 seconds until the character C is shown.

6. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no more than 10 km/h (6 mph) until a compass direc- tion is shown in the display, indicating that calibration is complete. Then drive a further 2 circles to fine-tune calibration.

7. Cars with heated windscreen*: If the char- acter C is shown in the display when the heated windscreen is activated, perform the calibration in accordance with point 6 above with the heated windscreen activated.

8. Repeat the above procedure as necessary.

Related information Compass (p. 488)

Activating and deactivating the compass (p. 488)

SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET

SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET

* Option/accessory.492

Sound, media and Internet The audio and media system consists of media player and radio. You can also connect a phone via Bluetooth to use handsfree functions or play music wirelessly in the car. When the car is con- nected to the Internet you can also use apps for media playback.

Overview of audio and media

Control the functions with your voice, steering wheel keypad or the centre display. The number of speakers and amplifiers depends on which audio system the car is equipped with.

System updating The audio and media system is continuously improved. When the car is connected to the Inter- net, it is possible to download system updates for optimal functionality, see support.volvocars.com.

Related information Media player (p. 502)

Radio (p. 496)

Phone (p. 517)

Internet-connected car* (p. 526)

Apps (p. 493)

Voice recognition (p. 137)

Ignition positions (p. 430)

Driver distraction (p. 41)

Managing system updates via the Download Centre (p. 591)

License agreement for audio and media (p. 535)

Audio settings The audio system is preset for optimal sound reproduction but can be adapted according to needs. The volume is normally adjusted with the volume control below the centre display or with the right- hand steering wheel keypad. This applies, for example, during playback of music, radio, ongoing phone calls and active traffic messages.

Optimum sound reproduction The audio system is pre-calibrated for optimum sound reproduction by means of digital signal processing. This calibration takes into account loudspeakers, amplifiers, passenger compartment acoustics, listener position, etc., for each combi- nation of car model and audio system. There is also a dynamic calibration that takes into account the setting of the volume control and vehicle speed.

Audio settings as required The following settings can be selected in the top

view under Settings Sound:

Tone personal preference for bass, treble, equaliser for example.

Balance - balance between right/left loud- speakers and balance between front/rear loudspeakers.

System Volumes adjusts volume in the various systems of the car, e.g. Voice Control, Park Assist and Phone Ringtone.

SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET

}}

* Option/accessory. 493

Sound experience*

Recreating the acoustics from Gothenburg Concert Hall.

Sound Experience is opened from the centre display's app view and gives access to further audio settings. The following settings can be made:

Studio - the sound can be optimised for Driver, All and Rear.

Individual stage - surround sound mode with settings for intensity and enclosure.

Concert hall - reproduces the acoustics from Gothenburg's Concert Hall.

Active noise reduction* Certain cars are equipped with an active noise reduction function that suppresses engine noise in the passenger compartment via the audio sys- tem. Microphones in the car's roof detect disrup-

tive noise and the audio system outputs anti- noise in order to dampen the noise.

Microphones in the car's roof.

NOTE

Do not cover the car's microphones.

Related information Media player (p. 502)

Settings for voice recognition (p. 140)

Settings for phone (p. 525)

Sound, media and Internet (p. 492)

Internet-connected car* (p. 526)

Apps The app view contains applications (apps) that give access to certain of the car's services.

||

SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET

* Option/accessory.494

Swipe from right to left1 across the centre dis- play's screen in order to access the app view from the home view. Apps that have been down- loaded (third-party apps) and apps for embedded functions, such as FM radio, are found here.

App view (generic image, basic apps vary by market and model)

Some basic apps are always available. More apps such as web radio and music services can be

downloaded when the car is connected to the Internet.

Certain apps are only available for use if the car is connected to the Internet.

Start an app by pressing the app in the centre display's app view.

Related information Downloading apps (p. 494)

Updating apps (p. 495)

Deleting apps (p. 496)

Apple CarPlay* (p. 511)

Android Auto* (p. 515)

Internet-connected car* (p. 526)

Storage space on hard disk (p. 534)

User terms and conditions and data sharing (p. 532)

Downloading apps New apps can be downloaded when the car is connected to the Internet.

NOTE

Data download may affect other services that transmit data, e.g. Internet radio. If the effect on other services is experienced as disruptive then the download can be interrupted. Alter- natively, it may be appropriate to switch off or interrupt other services.

NOTE

When downloading using a phone, pay extra attention to the data traffic costs.

1. Open the Download Centre app in the app view.

2. Select New apps in order to open a list of apps that are available but not installed in the car.

1 Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction.

SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET

* Option/accessory. 495

3. Tap on the row for an app in order to expand in the list and get more information about the app.

4. Select Install in order to start the download and installation of the desired app.

> The status of the download and installa- tion is shown while it is in progress.

A message is shown if a download cannot be started for the moment. The app will remain in the list and it is possible to try to start a download again.

Cancelling the download Tap on Abort to cancel a download in pro-

gress.

Note that only the download can be cancelled, when the installation phase has started, this can- not be cancelled.

Related information Apps (p. 493)

Updating apps (p. 495)

Deleting apps (p. 496)

Internet-connected car* (p. 526)

Managing system updates via the Download Centre (p. 591)

Storage space on hard disk (p. 534)

Updating apps The apps can be updated when the car is con- nected to the Internet.

NOTE

Data download may affect other services that transmit data, e.g. Internet radio. If the effect on other services is experienced as disruptive then the download can be interrupted. Alter- natively, it may be appropriate to switch off or interrupt other services.

NOTE

When downloading using a phone, pay extra attention to the data traffic costs.

If an app is being used during an ongoing update, it will be restarted in order for the installation to be completed.

Update all 1. Open the Download Centre app in the app

view.

2. Select Install all.

> Updating is started.

Update some 1. Open the Download Centre app in the app

view.

2. Select Application updates in order to open a list of all available updates.

3. Locate the desired app and select Install.

> Updating is started.

Related information Apps (p. 493)

Downloading apps (p. 494)

Deleting apps (p. 496)

Managing system updates via the Download Centre (p. 591)

Internet-connected car* (p. 526)

SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET

* Option/accessory.496

Deleting apps Apps can be uninstalled when the car is con- nected to the Internet. An app that is being used must be closed in order for the uninstallation to be completed.

1. Open the Download Centre app in the app view.

2. Select Application updates in order to open a list of all installed apps.

3. Locate the desired app and select Uninstall in order to start the uninstallation of the app.

> When the app has been uninstalled, it dis- appears from the list.

Related information Apps (p. 493)

Downloading apps (p. 494)

Updating apps (p. 495)

Managing system updates via the Download Centre (p. 591)

Internet-connected car* (p. 526)

Radio It is possible to listen to the FM bands and to digital radio (DAB)*. When the car is online, it is also possible to listen to Internet radio.

The radio can be operated using voice recognition, the steering wheel keypad or the centre display.

Related information Start radio (p. 497)

Changing radio band and radio station (p. 497)

Setting radio favourites (p. 499)

Settings for radio (p. 499)

Digital radio* (p. 501)

RDS radio (p. 501)

Internet-connected car* (p. 526)

Voice control of radio and media (p. 140)

Media player (p. 502)

SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET

}}

497

Start radio The radio is started from the centre display app view. 1. Open the required frequency band (e.g. FM)

from the app view.

2. Select a radio station.

Related information Radio (p. 496)

Searching for radio stations (p. 498)

Changing radio band and radio station (p. 497)

Setting radio favourites (p. 499)

Settings for radio (p. 499)

Voice control of radio and media (p. 140)

Changing radio band and radio station There are instructions here for changing the radio band, the list in the radio band and the radio station in the selected list.

Changing radio band Swipe to show the app view in the centre display and select the preferred radio band (e.g. FM), or open the driver display's app menu using the right-hand keypad on the steering wheel and make your selection from there.

Changing lists within the frequency band

1. Press Library.

||

SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET

* Option/accessory.498

2. Select playback from Stations, Favourites, Genres or Ensembles2.

3. Tap on the desired station from the list.

Favourites - only plays back selected favourite channels.

Genres only plays back channels broadcast- ing the selected genre/programme type, e.g. pop or classical.

Changing stations within the selected list Press on or under the centre dis-

play or the steering wheel's right-hand key- pad.

> The highlight moves up or down one place in the selected playlist.

You can also change radio station in the selected list via the centre display.

Related information Radio (p. 496)

Searching for radio stations (p. 498)

Voice control of radio and media (p. 140)

Setting radio favourites (p. 499)

Settings for radio (p. 499)

Application menu in driver display (p. 96)

Searching for radio stations The radio automatically compiles a station list of the radio stations within the area that are trans- mitting the strongest signals.

The parameters you can search on depend on the frequency band selected:

FM station, genre and frequency.

DAB* - ensembles and stations.

1. Press Library.

2. Press .

> Search view with keyboard is opened.

3. Enter the search terms.

> Searching takes place with each input of a character and the search results are shown by category.

Manual tuning

On changing over to manual tuning, the radio no longer changes frequency automatically when reception is poor.

Press Manual tuning, pull the control or

press or . With a long press, the search jumps to the next available station in the frequency band. It is also possible to use the right keypad on the steering wheel.

Related information Radio (p. 496)

Start radio (p. 497)

Changing radio band and radio station (p. 497)

Voice control of radio and media (p. 140)

Settings for radio (p. 499)

2 Only applies to digital radio (DAB*).

SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET

}}

499

Setting radio favourites It is possible to add a radio channel to the Radio favourites app and the favourites list for the radio band (e.g. FM). Instructions on how to add and remove favourites can be found below.

Radio Favourites Radio Favourites shows saved favourites from all frequency bands.

1. Open the app Radio favourites from the app view.

2. Tap on the desired station in the list to start listening.

Adding and removing radio favourites Tap on to add or remove a channel to or

from frequency band favourites and Radio Favourites.

When a favourite is saved from a station list, the radio will automatically search for the best fre- quency. But if a favourite is saved from a manual station search, the radio does not automatically change to a stronger frequency.

When you remove a favourite, it will also be removed from frequency band favourites.

Related information Radio (p. 496)

Start radio (p. 497)

Searching for radio stations (p. 498)

Changing radio band and radio station (p. 497)

Voice control of radio and media (p. 140)

Settings for radio (p. 499)

Application menu in driver display (p. 96)

Settings for radio There are various radio functions to activate and deactivate.

Cancelling traffic messages The broadcast of traffic messages etc. can be

temporarily interrupted by tapping on in the right-hand steering wheel keypad or by tapping on Cancel in the centre display.

Activating and deactivating radio functions Drag down the top view and select Settings Media and the desired radio band to view availa- ble functions.

||

SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET

* Option/accessory.500

FM radio

Show Broadcast Information: shows information on programme content, artists, etc.

Freeze Program Name: select to stop the programme service name from scrolling con- tinuously. Instead it freezes after 20 seconds.

Select Announcements:

- Local Interruptions: interrupts the current media playback and broadcasts information about traffic disruptions in the neighbour- hood. Playback of previous media source is resumed when the message is finished. The Local Interruptions function is a geograph- ically restricted version of the Traffic Announcements function. The Traffic Announcements function must be acti- vated at the same time.

- News : interrupts the current media play- back and broadcasts news. Playback of pre- vious media source is resumed when the news broadcast is finished.

- Alarm: interrupts the current media play- back and sends alerts about major accidents and disasters. Playback of previous media source is resumed when the message is fin- ished.

- Traffic Announcements: interrupts the current media playback and broadcasts infor- mation about traffic disruptions. Playback of

previous media source is resumed when the message is finished.

DAB* (digital radio)

Sort Services: option for how channels will be sorted. Either alphabetically or by service number.

DAB To DAB Handover: starts the function for linking within DAB. If reception of a radio channel is lost, another channel is found automatically in another channel group (ensemble).

DAB To FM Handover: starts the function for linking between DAB and FM. If reception of a radio channel is lost, an alternative FM frequency is searched for automatically.

Show Broadcast Information: select to show radio text or selected types of radio text, e.g. artist.

Show Program Related Images: select whether or not to show images for pro- grammes on the screen.

Select Announcements: select the types of messages to be received while DAB is playing. Selected messages will interrupt the current media playback to play back the message. Playback of previous media source is resumed when the message is finished.

- Alarm: interrupts the current media play- back and sends alerts about major accidents and disasters. Playback of previous media

source is resumed when the message is fin- ished.

- Traffic Flash: receives information about traffic disruptions.

- News Flash: receives news.

- Transport Flash: receives information about public transport, e.g. ferry and train timetables.

- Warning/Services: receives information about incidents of lower significance than the Alarm function, e.g. power failures.

Related information Radio (p. 496)

Digital radio* (p. 501)

Symbols in the centre display's status bar (p. 116)

SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET

}}

* Option/accessory. 501

RDS radio RDS (Radio Data System) means that the radio automatically changes to the strongest transmit- ter. RDS provides the ability to receive e.g. traffic information and to search for certain programme types.

RDS links FM transmitters into a network. An FM transmitter in such a network sends information that gives an RDS radio the following functions:

Switch automatically to a stronger transmitter if reception in the area is poor.

Search for programme category, e.g. pro- gramme types or traffic information.

Receive text information on current radio programme.

NOTE

Some radio stations do not use RDS or only selected parts of its functionality.

When broadcasting news or traffic messages, the radio can switch stations, interrupting the audio source currently in use. For example, if the CD player* is in use, it is paused. The radio returns to the previous audio source and volume when the set programme type is no longer broadcast. To

go back earlier, press on the right-hand steering wheel keypad or tap Cancel in the cen- tre display.

Related information Radio (p. 496)

Settings for radio (p. 499)

Digital radio* Digital radio (DAB3) is a digital broadcasting system for radio. The radio supports DAB, DAB

+ and DMB4.

The radio can be operated using voice recognition, the steering wheel keypad or the centre display.

The digital radio app is launched from app view in the centre display.

Digital radio is played back in the same way as other radio bands, such as FM. Besides the option to select playback from Stations, Favourites and Genres, there is also the option to select playback from subchannels and Ensembles. An ensemble is a set of radio chan- nels (a channel group) broadcasting on the same frequency.

In the cases where the radio channel transmits its logotype, it is downloaded and shown beside the station name (download time varies).

||

SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET

* Option/accessory.502

DAB subchannel Secondary components are usually named sub- channels. These are temporary and can contain e.g. translations of the main programme into other languages. Subchannels are indicated with an arrow symbol in the channel list.

Related information Link between FM and digital radio* (p. 502)

Changing radio band and radio station (p. 497)

Searching for radio stations (p. 498)

Setting radio favourites (p. 499)

Voice control of radio and media (p. 140)

Settings for radio (p. 499)

Link between FM and digital radio* The function enables the digital radio (DAB) to switch from a channel with poor or no reception to the same channel in another channel group (ensemble) with better reception, within DAB and/or between DAB and FM.

DAB to DAB and DAB to FM linking 1. Press Settings in the top view.

2. Press Media DAB.

3. Tick/untick DAB To DAB Handover and/or DAB To FM Handover in order to activate/ deactivate the respective functions.

Related information Digital radio* (p. 501)

Radio (p. 496)

Settings for radio (p. 499)

Media player The media player can play back audio from the CD player* and from external audio sources con- nected via the USB port or Bluetooth. It can also play back video format via the USB port. When the car is connected to the internet, it is also possible to listen to web radio, audio books and music services via apps.

The media player is operated from the centre display, but several functions can be oper- ated using the steering wheel's right-hand keypad or voice con- trol.

The radio is operated in the media player and is described in a separate section.

3 Digital Audio Broadcasting 4 Digital Multimedia Broadcasting

SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET

}}

* Option/accessory. 503

Related information Media playback (p. 503)

Controlling and changing media (p. 504)

Searching media (p. 505)

Apps (p. 493)

Radio (p. 496)

CD player* (p. 507)

Video (p. 507)

Media via Bluetooth (p. 508)

Media via USB port (p. 509)

Internet-connected car* (p. 526)

Media playback The media player is controlled from the centre display. Several functions can also be operated using the steering wheel's right-hand keypad or voice control.

The media player also operates the radio, which is described in a separate section.

Starting the media source

App view. (Generic image, basic apps vary by market and model.)

CD* 1. Insert a CD.

2. Open the app CD from the app view.

3. Select what to play back.

> Playback begins.

USB memory 1. Insert the USB memory.

2. Open the app USB from the app view.

3. Select what to play back.

> Playback begins.

Mp3 player and iPod

NOTE

To start playback from iPod, use the iPod app (not USB).

When an iPod is used as audio source, the car's audio and media system has a menu structure that is similar to the iPod player's own menu structure.

1. Connect media source.

2. Start playback from the connected media source.

3. Open the app (iPod, USB) from the app view.

> Playback begins.

||

SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET

* Option/accessory.504

Bluetooth connected device 1. Activate Bluetooth in the media source.

2. Connect media source.

3. Start playback from the connected media source.

4. Open the app Bluetooth from the app view.

> Playback begins.

Media with Internet connection Play back media from Internet-connected apps:

1. Connect the car to the Internet.

2. Open the current app from the app view.

> Playback begins.

Read the separate section on how apps are downloaded.

Video 1. Connect media source.

2. Open the app USB from the app view.

3. Tap on the title of the desired item to play back.

> Playback begins.

Apple CarPlay CarPlay is described in a separate section.

Android Auto Android Auto is described in a separate section.

Related information Handling the application menu in the driver

display (p. 97)

Radio (p. 496)

Controlling and changing media (p. 504)

Connecting a device via USB port (p. 509)

Connecting a device via Bluetooth

(p. 509)

Downloading apps (p. 494)

Internet-connected car* (p. 526)

Video (p. 507)

Apple CarPlay* (p. 511)

Android Auto* (p. 515)

Voice control of radio and media (p. 140)

Compatible media formats (p. 533)

Controlling and changing media The playback of media can be controlled with voice control, steering wheel keypad or the cen- tre display.

The media player can be oper- ated by voice recognition, from the steering wheel keypad or the centre display.

Volume - turn the control knob under the centre

display or press on the steering wheel's right-hand keypad in order to increase or decrease the volume.

Play/pause - tap on the image belonging to the song being played back, the physical button

under the centre display or on the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.

SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET

}}

* Option/accessory. 505

Change track/song - tap on the desired track in

the centre display, press on or under the centre display or on the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.

Fast forward/move in time - tap on the time axis in the centre display and drag sideways, or press

and hold or under the centre display or on the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.

Changing media - select from previous sources in the app, in the app view, press on the desired app or select with the steering wheel's right-hand

keypad via the app menu .

Library - tap on the button to play back from the library.

Shuffle - tap on the button to shuffle the playback order.

Similar - tap on the button in order to use Gracenote to search for similar music on the USB device and to create a playlist from it. The playlist can contain a maximum of 50 songs.

Change device - tap on the button in order to switch between USB devices when several are connected.

Related information Media player (p. 502)

Searching media (p. 505)

Audio settings (p. 492)

Apps (p. 493)

Gracenote (p. 506)

Voice control of radio and media (p. 140)

Searching media It is possible to search by artist, composer, song titles, album, video, audio book, playlist and, when the car is connected to the Internet, pod- casts (digital media via Internet).

1. Press .

> Search view with keyboard is opened.

2. Enter the search terms.

3. Press Search.

> Connected devices are searched and the search results are listed by category.

Swipe sideways across the screen to show each category separately.

Related information Media player (p. 502)

Internet-connected car* (p. 526)

SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET

506

Media playback (p. 503)

Enter the characters, letters and words man- ually in the centre display (p. 121)

Gracenote

Gracenote identifies artist, album, song titles and associated images, which are shown during playback.

Gracenote MusicID is a standard for music rec- ognition.

1. Press Settings in the top view.

2. Press Media Gracenote.

3. Select settings for Gracenote data:

Gracenote Online Search - searches in Gracenote's online database for playing media.

Gracenote Multiple Results - selects how to display Gracenote data if there are more than one search results.

1 - the file's original data are used.

2 - Gracenote data are used.

3 - Gracenote or original data can be selected.

None - no results are shown.

Updating Gracenote The content of the Gracenote database is upda- ted continuously. Download the latest update for optimal functionality. For information and down- load, see support.volvocars.com.

Related information Media playback (p. 503)

License agreement for audio and media (p. 535)

SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET

* Option/accessory. 507

CD player* The media player can play back CD discs with compatible audio files.

Disc insert and eject slot.

Disc eject button.

Related information Media playback (p. 503)

Voice control of radio and media (p. 140)

Compatible media formats (p. 533)

Video Videos on USB-connected devices can be played back using the media player.

No picture is shown when the car starts to move, but only the audio is played back. The picture is shown again when the car is stationary.

Information on compatible formats for media can be found in a separate section.

Related information Playing a video (p. 507)

Playing back DivX (p. 508)

Settings for video (p. 508)

Compatible media formats (p. 533)

Playing a video Videos are played using the USB app in the app view. 1. Connecting a media source (USB device).

2. Open the app USB from the app view.

3. Tap on the title of the desired item to play back.

> Playback begins.

Related information Video (p. 507)

Playing back DivX (p. 508)

Settings for video (p. 508)

Compatible media formats (p. 533)

SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET

508

Playing back DivX This DivX Certified device must be registered in order to play back purchased DivX Video-on- Demand (VOD) films.

1. Press Settings in the top view.

2. Tap Video DivX VOD and retrieve the registration code.

3. Go to vod.divx.com for more information and to complete the registration.

Related information Video (p. 507)

Playing a video (p. 507)

Settings for video (p. 508)

Compatible media formats (p. 533)

Settings for video It is possible to change certain video playback settings, e.g. language. With the video player in full screen mode, or by

opening the top view and pressing Settings Video, the following can be adjusted: Audio Language, Off and Subtitle Language.

Related information Video (p. 507)

Media via Bluetooth

The car's media player is equipped with Bluetooth and can wirelessly play audio files from external Bluetooth devices, such as mobile phones and tablets. For the media player to be able to play back audio files wirelessly from an external device, the device must first be connected to the car via Bluetooth.

Related information Connecting a device via Bluetooth

(p. 509)

Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 518)

Media playback (p. 503)

Compatible media formats (p. 533)

SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET

}}

* Option/accessory. 509

Connecting a device via Bluetooth

Connect a Bluetooth device to the car for wire- less playback of media and to provide the car with an Internet connection where possible.

Many phones on the market now have wireless Bluetooth technology, but not all of them are fully compatible with the car. For compatibility, see support.volvocars.com.

The procedure for connecting a media device is the same as for connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth.

Related information Media via Bluetooth (p. 508)

Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 518)

Media playback (p. 503)

Media via USB port An external audio source, e.g. an iPod or MP3 player, can be connected to the audio system via the car's USB port.

Devices with rechargeable batteries are recharged when connected via USB and the igni- tion is in position I, II or the engine is running.

The content of the external source can be loaded more quickly if it only consists of compatible for- mats. Video files can also be played back via the USB port.

Certain MP3 players have their own file system that the car does not support.

Related information Connecting a device via USB port (p. 509)

Media playback (p. 503)

Video (p. 507)

Ignition positions (p. 430)

Technical specifications for USB devices (p. 534)

Apple CarPlay* (p. 511)

Android Auto* (p. 515)

Connecting a device via USB port An external audio source, e.g. an iPod or MP3 player, can be connected to the audio system via one of the car's USB ports.

The phone must be connected to the USB port with white frame (when there are two USB ports) when using Apple CarPlay* and Android Auto*.

USB inputs (type A) in the tunnel console. Allow the cable to lie forwards so that it is not trapped when the lid is closed.

Related information Media playback (p. 503)

Media via USB port (p. 509)

Media player (p. 502)

Technical specifications for USB devices (p. 534)

Technical specifications for USB devices (p. 534)

SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET

* Option/accessory.510

Apple CarPlay* (p. 511)

Android Auto* (p. 515)

TV*5

No images are shown once the car reaches a certain speed but the sound will be heard the whole time. The picture returns once more when the car is almost or completely stationary. The TV is controlled from the centre display. Sev- eral functions can also be controlled from the right keypad on the steering wheel or with voice recognition.

Related information Using the TV* (p. 510)

Settings for TV* (p. 511)

Using the TV*6

The TV is started from the app view. Tap on the TV app and select a channel. The TV automatically searches for the channels with best reception.

Change the list of visible channels 1. Press Library

2. Select playback from TV-channels or Favourites.

3. Select the desired channel.

Change channel from selected list

Press on or under the centre dis- play or on the steering wheel keypad.

> The highlight moves up or down one place in the selected playlist

You can also change stations from the centre display.

Favourites A TV channel can be saved as a favourite:

Tap on in order to add/remove a chan- nel to/from the favourites list.

5 Applies to certain markets. 6 Applies to certain markets.

SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET

}}

* Option/accessory. 511

TV guide A programme guide is available with information about TV programmes for up to 48 hours.

Tap on Guide to show information about TV programmes.

NOTE

If the car is moved within the country, e.g. from city to city, it is not certain that Favourites are available since the frequency may have changed.

NOTE

The system only supports TV broadcasts in the countries that broadcast in MPEG-2 or MPEG-4 format and follow the DVB-T/T2 standard. The system does not support ana- logue broadcasts.

Related information TV* (p. 510)

Settings for TV* (p. 511)

Voice control of radio and media (p. 140)

License agreement for audio and media (p. 535)

Settings for TV*7

The option to make certain settings is available, both in the top view or when the TV is in full screen mode. With the TV in full screen mode, or by opening

the top view and pressing Settings Media TV, the following can be adjusted:

Subtitle Language

Audio Language

Pict. format Tapping on Picture format enables you to choose which format the TV picture should be shown in.

1. Auto - The TV picture is shown in the image format being transmitted.

2. Auto fill - The TV picture is maximised with- out cropping.

Related information TV* (p. 510)

Using the TV* (p. 510)

Compatible media formats (p. 533)

Resetting settings in the centre display (p. 127)

Apple CarPlay* CarPlay gives you the option to listen to music, make phone calls, get directions, send/receive messages and use Siri, all while you stay focused on your driving.

CarPlay works with selected Apple devices. If the car does not already support CarPlay there is the option to install it retroactively. Contact a Volvo retailer to install CarPlay.

Information about which apps are supported and which phones are compatible is available on Apple's website: www.apple.com/ios/carplay/. Using apps that are not compatible with CarPlay may sometimes mean that the connection between an iPhone and the car is broken. Please note that Volvo is not responsible for the content in CarPlay.

When using map navigation via CarPlay, there is no guidance in the driver display or head-up dis- play, but only in the centre display.

The CarPlay apps can be controlled via the cen- tre display, phone or using the steering wheel's right-hand keypad (applies to certain functions). The apps can also be voice-controlled using Siri.

A long press on the steering wheel button

7 Applies to certain markets.

||

SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET

* Option/accessory.512

starts voice control using Siri and a short press activates the car's own voice control. If Siri breaks

off too early, hold the steering wheel button 8

depressed.

By using Apple CarPlay you acknowledge the following: Apple CarPlay is a service provided by Apple Inc. under its terms and conditions. Volvo Cars is thus not responsible for Apple CarPlay or its features/applications. When using Apple CarPlay, certain information from your car (including its position) is transferred to your iPhone. In relation to Volvo Cars, you are fully responsible for your and any others persons use of Apple CarPlay.

Related information Using Apple CarPlay* (p. 512)

Settings for Apple CarPlay* (p. 513)

Voice recognition (p. 137)

Resetting settings in the centre display (p. 127)

Using Apple CarPlay* To use CarPlay, Siri voice control must be acti- vated in your phone. The phone must also have an Internet connection via Wi-Fi or the mobile network.

Connect an iPhone and start CarPlay

NOTE

CarPlay can only be used if Bluetooth is deactivated. A phone or media player con- nected to the car via Bluetooth will therefore not be available when CarPlay is active. An alternative Internet source must be used to connect to the Internet for the car's apps. Use Wi-Fi or the car's built-in modem*.

1. Connect an iPhone to the USB port. In the cases where there are two USB ports, the one with the white frame around the port must be used.

2. Read the information in the pop-up window and then tap on OK.

3. Tap on Apple CarPlay in the app view.

4. Read the terms and conditions and then tap on Accept to connect.

> The tile with CarPlay is opened and com- patible apps are shown.

5. Tap on the desired app.

> The app starts.

Starting CarPlay CarPlay is started according to the following after an iPhone has been connected.

1. Connect an iPhone to the USB port. In the cases where there are two USB ports, the one with the white frame around the port must be used.

> If the setting for automatic start is selected - the name of the phone is shown.

2. Tap on the phone name - the tile with CarPlay is opened and compatible apps are shown.

3. If the tile with CarPlay is not opened, tap on Apple CarPlay in the app view.

> The tile with CarPlay is opened and com- patible apps are shown.

4. Tap on the desired app.

> The app starts.

CarPlay runs in the background if another app is started in the same tile. To show CarPlay in the tile again - tap on the CarPlay icon in the app view.

8 Apple and CarPlay are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc.

SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET

}}

* Option/accessory. 513

Switch the connection between CarPlay and iPod

CarPlay to iPod 1. Press Settings in the top view.

2. Continue to Communication Apple CarPlay.

3. Untick the box for the Apple device that shall no longer start CarPlay automatically when the USB cable is connected.

4. Disconnect and connect the Apple device to the USB port.

5. Open the app iPod from the app view.

iPod to CarPlay 1. Tap on Apple CarPlay in the app view.

2. Read the information in the pop-up window and then tap on OK.

3. Disconnect and connect the Apple device to the USB port.

> The tile with Apple CarPlay is opened and compatible apps are shown9.

Related information Connecting a device via USB port (p. 509)

Apple CarPlay* (p. 511)

Settings for Apple CarPlay* (p. 513)

Connecting the car to the Internet via a mobile device (Wi-Fi) (p. 528)

Connect the car to the Internet via car modem (SIM card) (p. 528)

Voice recognition (p. 137)

Settings for Apple CarPlay* Settings for Apple device connected with

CarPlay10.

Automatic start 1. Press Settings in the top view.

2. Continue to Communication Apple CarPlay and select setting:

Tick the box - CarPlay starts automatically when the USB cable is connected.

Untick the box - CarPlay does not start automatically when the USB cable is con- nected.

A maximum of 20 Apple devices can be stored in the list. When the list is full and a new device is connected the oldest one is deleted.

To delete the list, the settings must be reset in the centre display (factory reset).

System volumes 1. Press Settings in the top view.

2. Tap on Sound System Volumes and make the settings for the following:

Voice Control

Navi Voice Guidance

Phone Ringtone

9 Apple, CarPlay, iPhone and iPod are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc. 10 Apple and CarPlay are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc.

||

SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET

* Option/accessory.514

Related information Apple CarPlay* (p. 511)

Using Apple CarPlay* (p. 512)

Resetting settings in the centre display (p. 127)

Tips for using Apple CarPlay* Here are some useful tips for using CarPlay.

Update your iPhone with the latest version of iOS operating system and ensure that the apps have been updated.

In the event of a problem with CarPlay, dis- connect the telephone from the USB port and reconnect. Otherwise, try to close the app on the telephone that is not working and then restart the app, or try closing all apps and restart your phone.

If the apps do not appear when CarPlay starts (black screen), try minimising and expanding the tile for CarPlay.

Using apps that are not compatible with CarPlay may sometimes mean that the con- nection between the phone and the car is broken. Information about supported apps and compatible telephone models can be found on Apple's website. You can also search for CarPlay in the App Store to find information about apps that are compatible with CarPlay on your market.

CarPlay only works with iPhone11.

NOTE

Availability and functionality may vary depend- ing on market.

Related information Apple CarPlay* (p. 511)

11 Apple, CarPlay and iPhone are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc.

SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET

}}

* Option/accessory. 515

Android Auto* Android Auto gives you the option to listen to music, make phone calls, get directions and use car-adapted apps from an Android device. Android Auto works with selected Android devi- ces.

Information about which apps are supported and which phones are compatible is available on the website: www.android.com/auto/. For third-party apps, see Google Play. Please note that Volvo is not responsible for the content in Android Auto.

Android Auto is started from the app view. After Android Auto has been started once, the app will be started automatically the next time the device is connected. Automatic start can be deactivated under settings.

NOTE

When a phone is connected to Android Auto it is possible to stream via Bluetooth to another media player. Bluetooth is active while Android Auto is being used.

When using map navigation via Android Auto there is no guidance in the driver display or head- up display, but only in the centre display.

Android Auto can be controlled via the centre display using the steering wheel's right-hand key- pad or voice control. A long press on the steering

wheel button starts voice recognition control and a short press deactivates.

By using Android Auto, you acknowledge the following: Android Auto is a service provided by Google Inc. under its terms and conditions. Volvo Cars is not responsible for Android Auto or its features or applications. When you use Android Auto, your car transfers certain information (including its location) to your connected Android phone. You are fully responsible for your and any other persons use of Android Auto.

Related information Using Android Auto* (p. 515)

Settings for Android Auto* (p. 516)

Using Android Auto* To use the app Android Auto, the telephone must be connected to the car's USB port.

The first time an Android is connected 1. Connect the Android phone to the USB port.

In the cases where there are two USB ports, the one with the white frame around the port must be used.

2. Read the information in the pop-up window and then tap on OK.

3. Tap on Android Auto in the app view.

4. Read the terms and conditions and then tap on Accept to connect.

> The tile with Android Auto is opened and compatible apps are shown.

5. Tap on the desired app.

> The app starts.

||

SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET

* Option/accessory.516

Previously connected Android 1. Connect the phone to the USB port.

> If the setting for automatic start is selected - the name of the phone is shown.

2. Tap on the phone name - the tile with Android Auto is opened and compatible apps are shown.

3. If the setting for automatic start is not selected - open the Android Auto app from the app view.

> The tile with Android Auto is opened and compatible apps are shown.

4. Tap on the desired app.

> The app starts.

Android Auto runs in the background if another app is started in the same tile. To show Android Auto in the tile again - tap on the Android Auto icon in the app view.

Related information Android Auto* (p. 515)

Settings for Android Auto* (p. 516)

Connecting a device via USB port (p. 509)

Voice recognition (p. 137)

Settings for Android Auto* Settings for a phone that has been connected the first time with Android Auto.

Automatic start 1. Press Settings in the top view.

2. Press Communication Android Auto and select setting:

Tick the box - Android Auto starts auto- matically when the USB cable is con- nected.

Untick the box - Android Auto does not start automatically when the USB cable is connected.

A maximum of 20 Android devices can be stored in the list. When the list is full and a new device is connected the oldest one is deleted.

A factory reset has to be executed in order to clear the list.

System volumes 1. Press Settings in the top view.

2. Tap on Sound System Volumes and make the settings for the following:

Voice Control

Navi Voice Guidance

Phone Ringtone

Related information Android Auto* (p. 515)

Using Android Auto* (p. 515)

Resetting settings in the centre display (p. 127)

SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET

}}

* Option/accessory. 517

Tips for using Android Auto* Here are some useful tips for using Android Auto.

Ensure that your apps are updated.

When starting the car, wait until the centre display has started, connect the telephone and then open Android Auto from the app view.

In the event of problems with Android Auto, disconnect your Android phone from the USB port and then reconnect via USB. Oth- erwise, try closing the app on the phone and then restarting the app.

When a telephone is connected to Android Auto it is still possible to playback media via Bluetooth to another media player. The Bluetooth function is on when Android Auto is used.

Related information Android Auto* (p. 515)

Phone A phone with Bluetooth can be connected wire- lessly to the car's built-in hands-free system.

The audio and media system acts as hands-free, with the facility to remotely control a selection of the phone's functions. The phone can still be operated with its own keys even if it is connected to the car.

When a phone has been connected online and connected with the car, it can be used make calls, send/receive messages, play back media wirelessly and be used as an Internet connection.

The phone is operated from the centre display, but some opera- tions are also available via voice recognition and the app menu, which are accessed from the right-hand steering wheel key- pad.

Overview

Microphone.

Phone.

Phone operation from centre display.

Keypad for operating phone functions that are shown in the driver display and voice rec- ognition.

Driver display.

Related information Managing phone calls (p. 522)

Managing the phone book (p. 524)

Managing text messages (p. 523)

Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 518)

SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET

518

Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth automatically (p. 520)

Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth manually (p. 520)

Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected phone (p. 521)

Switch between Bluetooth-connected phones (p. 521)

Removing a Bluetooth-connected phone (p. 522)

Settings for phone (p. 525)

Voice recognition (p. 137)

Handling the application menu in the driver display (p. 97)

Audio settings (p. 492)

Connecting the car to the Internet via a mobile device (Bluetooth) (p. 527)

Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time Connect a phone with Bluetooth activated to then be able to make calls from the car, send/ receive messages, play back media wirelessly and connect the car to the Internet. It is possible to have two Bluetooth devices con- nected at once, in which case one of them can only play back wirelessly. The most recently con- nected phone will automatically be connected to make calls, send/receive messages, play back media and provide an Internet connection. It is possible to change the use of the phone in the settings for Bluetooth Devices.

After the device has been connected/registered a first time via Bluetooth, it no longer needs to be visible/discoverable, but only have Bluetooth acti- vated. To connect the car to the Internet via a phone, tethering must also be activated on the phone. A maximum of 20 connected Bluetooth devices can be stored in the car.

There are two options for connecting. Either search the phone from the car or search the car from the phone.

Option 1 - search phone from car 1. Make the phone searchable/visible via

Bluetooth.

2. To connect the car to the Internet via the phones Bluetooth, activate tethering (porta- ble/personal hotspot) via Bluetooth on the phone.

3. Open the tile for the phone.

If there is no phone connected to the car, tap on Add phone.

If there is a phone connected to the car,

tap on Change . In the pop-up win- dow, tap on Add phone.

> Available Bluetooth devices are listed. The list is updated as new devices are detected.

4. Tap on the name of the phone to be con- nected.

5. Check that the specified number code in the car matches that in the phone. In which case, choose to accept in both places.

6. On the phone, choose to accept or reject any options for phone contacts and messages.

NOTE

The message function must be activated in certain phones.

Not all mobile phones are fully compati- ble and may therefore not show contacts and messages in the car.

SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET

519

Option 2 - search car from phone 1. Open the tile for the phone.

If there is no phone connected to the car,

tap on Add phone Make car discoverable.

If there is a phone connected to the car,

tap on Change . In the pop-up win-

dow, tap on Add phone Make car discoverable.

2. Activate Bluetooth on the phone.

3. To connect the car to the Internet via the phones Bluetooth, activate tethering (porta- ble/personal hotspot) via Bluetooth on the phone.

4. Search on the phone for Bluetooth devices.

> Available Bluetooth devices are listed.

5. Select the name of the car on the phone.

6. A pop-up window for the connection is shown in the car. Confirm the connection.

7. Check that the specified number code in the car matches that in the external device. In which case, choose to accept in both places.

8. On the phone, choose to accept or reject any options for phone contacts and messages.

NOTE

The message function must be activated in certain phones.

Not all mobile phones are fully compati- ble and may therefore not show contacts and messages in the car.

NOTE

If the phone's operating system is updated then the connection may be broken. In which case, delete the phone from the car and then connect again.

Compatible phones Many phones on the market now have wireless Bluetooth technology, but not all of them are fully compatible with the car. For compatibility, see support.volvocars.com.

Related information Phone (p. 517)

Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth automatically (p. 520)

Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth manually (p. 520)

Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected phone (p. 521)

Switch between Bluetooth-connected phones (p. 521)

Removing a Bluetooth-connected phone (p. 522)

Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 526)

Connecting the car to the Internet via a mobile device (Bluetooth) (p. 527)

SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET

520

Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth automatically It is possible to connect a phone to the car auto- matically via Bluetooth. The phone has to have been connected to the car for the first time. It is only the two last connected phones that can be connected automatically.

1. Activate Bluetooth in the phone before set- ting the car in ignition position I.

To connect the car to the Internet at the same time, tethering (portable/personal hot- spot) in the phone must be activated.

2. Set the car in ignition position I or higher.

> The phone will connect.

Related information Phone (p. 517)

Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 518)

Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth manually (p. 520)

Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected phone (p. 521)

Switch between Bluetooth-connected phones (p. 521)

Removing a Bluetooth-connected phone (p. 522)

Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 526)

Connecting the car to the Internet via a mobile device (Bluetooth) (p. 527)

Ignition positions (p. 430)

Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth manually It is possible to connect a phone to the car man- ually via Bluetooth. The phone has to have been connected to the car for the first time. 1. Activate Bluetooth on the phone.

To connect the car to the Internet at the same time, tethering (portable/personal hot- spot) in the phone must be activated.

2. Open the tile for the phone.

> Connected phones are listed.

3. Tap on the name of the phone to be con- nected.

> The phone will connect.

Related information Phone (p. 517)

Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 518)

Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth automatically (p. 520)

Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected phone (p. 521)

Switch between Bluetooth-connected phones (p. 521)

Removing a Bluetooth-connected phone (p. 522)

SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET

521

Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 526)

Connecting the car to the Internet via a mobile device (Bluetooth) (p. 527)

Disconnecting a Bluetooth- connected phone Disconnect a Bluetooth-connected phone from the car by deactivating Bluetooth on your phone. When the phone is out of range of the car it is automatically disconnected. If disconnection occurs during an active call then the call can be continued on the phone.

Related information Phone (p. 517)

Settings for phone (p. 525)

Switch between Bluetooth-connected phones (p. 521)

Removing a Bluetooth-connected phone (p. 522)

Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 526)

Switch between Bluetooth- connected phones It is possible to switch between a number of Bluetooth-connected phones. 1. Open the tile for the phone.

2. Tap on Change or drag down the top

view and tap on Settings

Communication Bluetooth Devices Add device.

> Available Bluetooth devices are listed.

3. Tap on the phone to be connected.

Related information Phone (p. 517)

Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 518)

Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 526)

Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected phone (p. 521)

Removing a Bluetooth-connected phone (p. 522)

SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET

522

Removing a Bluetooth-connected phone It is possible to remove phones from the list of registered Bluetooth devices. 1. Press Settings in the top view.

2. Press Communication Bluetooth Devices.

> Registered Bluetooth devices are listed.

3. Tap on the phone to be removed.

4. Tap on Remove device and confirm your selection.

> The phone is no longer registered to the car.

Related information Phone (p. 517)

Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 518)

Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected phone (p. 521)

Switch between Bluetooth-connected phones (p. 521)

Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 526)

Managing phone calls Call handling in the car for a Bluetooth-con- nected phone.

Generic illustration.

Making phone calls 1. Open the tile for the phone.

2. Select call from: call history, enter number using the keypad or via the contact list. It is possible to search or browse in the contact

list. Tap on in the contact list in order to add a contact under Favourites.

3. Press .

4. Tap on to end the call.

You can also make calls from the call log via the app menu, which is accessed from the right-hand

steering wheel keypad .

Making multi-party calls During a call:

1. Press Add call.

2. Choose to make a call from the call log, favourites or the contact list.

3. Tap on an entry/row in the call log, or tap on

alongside the contact in the contact list.

4. Tap on Swap call to switch between the parties.

5. Tap on to end the active call.

Conference calls During an active multi-party call:

1. Tap on Join calls to merge the active multi- party call.

2. Tap on to end the call.

Incoming phone calls Incoming phone calls are shown in the driver dis- play and the centre display. Manage the call on the right-hand steering wheel keypad or in the centre display.

1. Tap on Answer/Reject.

2. Tap on to end the call.

Incoming phone call during an active call 1. Tap on Answer/Reject.

2. Tap on to end the call.

SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET

}}

523

Private call During the current call, press Privacy and

select setting:

Switch to mobile phone - the hands- free function is disconnected and the call continues on your mobile phone.

Driver focused - the microphone in the roof on the passenger side is switched off and the call continues with the car's handsfree function.

Related information Phone (p. 517)

Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 518)

Controlling a telephone with voice recogni- tion (p. 139)

Handling the application menu in the driver display (p. 97)

Enter the characters, letters and words man- ually in the centre display (p. 121)

Managing the phone book (p. 524)

Managing text messages (p. 523)

Audio settings (p. 492)

Managing text messages Message handling in the car for a Bluetooth- connected phone. In some phones, the message function must be activated. Not all phones are compatible. In such cases, they cannot display contacts and mes- sages in the car. For compatibility, see support.volvocars.com.

Managing text messages in the centre display Text messages are only shown in the centre dis- play if the setting is selected.

Press Messages in the app view to manage text messages in the centre display.

Reading text messages in the centre display Press the icon to get the message read aloud.

Sending text messages in the centre

display12

1. You can reply to a message or create a new message.

Reply to message tap on the contact whose message you wish to reply to, then tap on Answer.

Create new message - tap on Create new. Select a contact or enter a number.

2. Compose the message.

3. Press Send.

Managing text messages in the driver display Text messages are only shown in the driver dis- play if the setting is selected.

Reading a new text message in the driver display To have the message read aloud select

Read out with the steering wheel keypad.

Dictating a reply in the driver display After the text message has been read out, it is possible to reply briefly with dictation if the car is connected to the Internet.

Press Answer with the steering wheel key- pad. A dictation dialogue starts.

12 Only certain phones can broadcast messages from the car. For compatibility, see support.volvocars.com.

||

SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET

* Option/accessory.524

Message notification It is possible to activate and deactivate notifica- tions in the text message settings.

Related information Phone (p. 517)

Settings for text messages (p. 524)

Settings for phone (p. 525)

Internet-connected car* (p. 526)

Controlling a telephone with voice recogni- tion (p. 139)

Enter the characters, letters and words man- ually in the centre display (p. 121)

Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 518)

Settings for text messages Settings for text messages on connected phone. 1. Press Settings in the top view.

2. Press Communication Text Messages and select settings:

Notification in centre display - shows message notifications in the centre dis- play's status bar.

Notification in driver display - displays notifications in the driver's display and incoming messages can be managed using the steering wheel's right-hand key- pad.

Text message tone - select tone for incoming text messages.

Related information Phone (p. 517)

Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 518)

Managing text messages (p. 523)

Settings for phone (p. 525)

Managing the phone book Contact handling in the car for a Bluetooth-con- nected phone.

Browse between the letters and to find a matching contact. Depending on existing contacts in the phone book, only matching letters are shown.

Search contacts - tap on to search for a phone number of name in the contact list.

Favourites - tap on to add/remove a contact to/from the favourites list.

NOTE

Only contacts from an active Bluetooth-con- nected phone are shown in the centre display. Up to 3000 contacts can be shown.

SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET

* Option/accessory. 525

Sorting The contact list is sorted in alphabetical order where special characters and numbers are sorted

under . It is possible to sort by first name or surname, and this setting is adjusted in the tele- phone setup.

Related information Phone (p. 517)

Settings for phone (p. 525)

Controlling a telephone with voice recogni- tion (p. 139)

Enter the characters, letters and words man- ually in the centre display (p. 121)

Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 518)

Settings for phone When the telephone is connected to the car, the following settings can be made:

1. Press Settings in the top view.

2. Press Communication Phone and select settings:

Ringtones - select ringtone. It is possible to use a ringtone from the phone or the car. Some phones are not fully compatible and their ringtones may therefore not be available for use in the car. For compatibil- ity, see support.volvocars.com.

Sort order - select sort order of contact list.

Call notifications in head up display* 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top

view.

2. Press My Car Displays Head-Up Display Options.

3. Select Show Phone.

Related information Phone (p. 517)

Settings for text messages (p. 524)

Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 526)

Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 518)

Head-up display* (p. 134)

Audio settings (p. 492)

SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET

* Option/accessory.526

Settings for Bluetooth devices Settings for Bluetooth-connected devices. 1. Press Settings in the top view.

2. Press Communication Bluetooth Devices and select settings:

Add device - starts the pairing of a new device.

Previously paired devices - lists con- nected devices.

Remove device - removes the connected device.

Allowed services for this device - sets device usage options: calling, sending/ receiving messages, streaming media and as Internet connection.

Internet connection - connects the car to the Internet via the device's Bluetooth con- nection.

Related information Phone (p. 517)

Settings for phone (p. 525)

Internet-connected car* (p. 526)

Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 518)

Internet-connected car* When the car is connected to the Internet, it is possible for example to use web radio and music services via apps, download software and contact your retailer from the car.

The car is connected via Bluetooth, Wi-Fi or with the car's built-in modem*.

When the car is online, its Internet connection (Wi-Fi hotspot) can be shared to allow other devi- ces to use the Internet connection13.

Connection status is indicated by a symbol in the centre display's status bar.

NOTE

Data is transferred when using the internet (data traffic), which can have a cost.

Activation of data roaming can result in fur- ther charges.

Contact your network operator about the cost for data traffic.

NOTE

When using Apple CarPlay, it is only possible to connect the car to the Internet using Wi-Fi or the car modem*.

NOTE

When using Android Auto, it is possible to connect the car to the Internet using Wi-Fi, Bluetooth or the car modem*.

Read Terms and Conditions for Services and Customer Privacy Policy at support.volvocars.com before connecting the car to the Internet.

13 This does not apply in the case of connection with Wi-Fi.

SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET

* Option/accessory. 527

Related information Symbols in the centre display's status bar

(p. 116)

Connecting the car to the Internet via a mobile device (Bluetooth) (p. 527)

Connecting the car to the Internet via a mobile device (Wi-Fi) (p. 528)

Connect the car to the Internet via car modem (SIM card) (p. 528)

Apps (p. 493)

No or poor Internet connection (p. 531)

Sharing Internet access from the car via a Wi-Fi hotspot (p. 530)

Remove Wi-Fi network (p. 531)

Wi-Fi technologies and security (p. 532)

Volvo ID (p. 28)

User terms and conditions and data sharing (p. 532)

Connecting the car to the Internet via a mobile device (Bluetooth) Create an Internet connection via Bluetooth by sharing your phone's Internet access and access several online services in the car. The phone and network operator must support tethering (sharing the Internet connection) and the subscription plan must include data.

1. To be able to connect the car to the Internet via a Bluetooth-connected phone, the phone has to have already been connected to the car via Bluetooth for a first time. Ensure that the personal hotspot (portable/personal hot- spot) is activated in your phone.

2. If the phone has been connected via Blue- tooth previously, press Settings in the cen- tre display top view.

3. In the centre display: Press Communication

Bluetooth Devices.

4. Tick the box for Bluetooth Internet connection under the heading Internet connection.

> Your car is now connected to the Internet via the Bluetooth-connected phone.

NOTE

When using Apple CarPlay, it is only possible to connect the car to the Internet using Wi-Fi or the car modem*.

Related information Internet-connected car* (p. 526)

Connect the car to the Internet via car modem (SIM card) (p. 528)

Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 518)

Connecting the car to the Internet via a mobile device (Wi-Fi) (p. 528)

Apple CarPlay* (p. 511)

No or poor Internet connection (p. 531)

Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 526)

SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET

* Option/accessory.528

Connecting the car to the Internet via a mobile device (Wi-Fi) Create an Internet connection via Wi-Fi by shar- ing your phone's Internet access and access several online services in the car. The phone and network operator must support tethering (sharing the Internet connection) and the subscription plan must include data.

1. Activate tethering (portable/personal hot- spot) on the phone.

2. Press Settings in the top view.

3. Continue to Communication Wi-Fi.

4. Activate/deactivate by ticking/unticking the box for Wi-Fi.

5. Tap on the network name of the network to be connected.

6. Enter the network password.

7. If another connection source has been used in the past - confirm the option to change connection.

> The car connects to the network.

Note that certain phones switch off tethering after the contact with the car has been discon- nected, e.g. when leaving the car and until the next time it is used. The tethering in the phone therefore needs to be reactivated the next time it is used.

When a phone is connected to the car, it is saved for future use. When the maximum number of saved phones (50) is reached, the first con- nected phones are deleted. To show a list of saved networks or manually delete saved net-

works, go to Settings Communication

Wi-Fi Saved networks.

Technical and safety requirements for Wi-Fi con- nection, are described in a separate section.

Related information Internet-connected car* (p. 526)

Remove Wi-Fi network (p. 531)

No or poor Internet connection (p. 531)

Wi-Fi technologies and security (p. 532)

Connect the car to the Internet via car modem (SIM card) For cars equipped with Volvo On Call*, it is pos- sible to establish an Internet connection via the car modem and a personal SIM card (P-SIM). When the car is connected to the Internet via the car modem, Volvo On Call services will use this connection.

1.

Fit a personal SIM card into the holder by the floor on the passenger side.

2. Press Settings in the top view.

3. Press Communication Car Modem Internet.

4. Activate/deactivate by ticking/unticking the box for Car modem Internet.

SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET

* Option/accessory. 529

5. If another connection source has been used in the past - confirm the option to change connection.

6. Enter the SIM card's PIN code.

> The car connects to the network.

Related information Internet-connected car* (p. 526)

No or poor Internet connection (p. 531)

Settings for car modem (p. 529)

Settings for car modem14

The car is equipped with a modem that can be used to connect the car to the Internet. It is also possible to share the Internet connection via Wi-Fi.

1. Press Settings in the top view.

2. Press Communication Car Modem Internet and select settings:

Car modem Internet - select whether to use the car modem as Internet connection.

Data usage - tap on Reset resets the counters for received and sent data volume.

Network

Select network operator - automatic or manual selection of network operator.

Data roaming - if the box is ticked, the car modem will attempt to connect to the Inter- net when the car is abroad and outside its home network. Note that this may result in heavy costs. Check your roaming agreement for data traffic abroad with your network pro- vider in your home country.

SIM card PIN

Change PIN - a maximum of 4 digits can be entered.

Disable PIN - select whether the PIN code shall be required for access to the SIM card.

Send request code used e.g. to top up or check the balance on a prepaid card. Functionality depends on the provider.

Related information Connect the car to the Internet via car

modem (SIM card) (p. 528)

No or poor Internet connection (p. 531)

14 Only cars with Volvo On Call.

SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET

* Option/accessory.530

Sharing Internet access from the car via a Wi-Fi hotspot When the car is online, its Internet connection can be shared to allow other devices to use the

Internet connection15.

The network operator (SIM card) must support tethering (sharing of the Internet connection).

1. Press Settings in the top view.

2. Press Communication Car Wi-Fi Hotspot.

3. Tap on Network name and name the shared connection.

4. Tap on Password and select a password to be entered on connecting devices.

5. Tap on Frequency band and select the fre- quency on which the hotspot is to transmit data. Note that selection of frequency band is not available in all markets.

6. Activate/deactivate by ticking/unticking the box for Car Wi-Fi Hotspot.

7. If Wi-Fi has previously been used as a con- nection source, confirm the option to change connection.

> It is now possible for external devices to connect to the car's tethering (Wi-Fi hot- spot).

NOTE

Activation of Wi-Fi-hotspot can result in fur- ther charges from your network operator.

Contact your network operator about the cost for data traffic.

Connection status is indicated by the symbol in the centre display's status bar.

Press Connected devices to see a list of the currently connected devices.

Related information Symbols in the centre display's status bar

(p. 116)

Internet-connected car* (p. 526)

No or poor Internet connection (p. 531)

15 Does not apply when the car is online via Wi-Fi.

SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET

* Option/accessory. 531

No or poor Internet connection Factors that affect the Internet connection.

The amount of data transferred is dependent on the services or apps in use in the car. For exam- ple, streaming audio can require large amounts of data which requires a good connection and good signal strength.

Phone to car The speed of the Internet connection may vary depending on the location of the phone in the car. Move the phone closer to the centre display in order to increase the signal strength. Ensure that there is no source of interference in between.

Phone to network operator The speed of the mobile network varies depend- ing on the coverage in the present location. Poor network coverage may occur, for example in tun- nels, in mountainous country, in deep valleys or indoors. The speed also depends on the agree- ment you have with your network.

NOTE

In the event of problems with data traffic, con- tact your network operator.

Restarting the phone If there are problems with the Internet connection then it may help to restart the phone.

Related information Internet-connected car* (p. 526)

Wi-Fi technologies and security (p. 532)

Remove Wi-Fi network Removing a network that is not to be used.

1. Press Settings in the top view.

2. Continue to Communication Wi-Fi Saved networks.

3. Tap on Forget alongside the network to be removed.

4. Confirm the selection.

> The car will no longer connect to the net- work in future.

Remove all networks All networks can be removed simultaneously by restoring factory settings. Please note that all user data and system settings are reset to origi- nal factory settings.

Related information Internet-connected car* (p. 526)

No or poor Internet connection (p. 531)

Resetting settings in the centre display (p. 127)

Connecting the car to the Internet via a mobile device (Wi-Fi) (p. 528)

SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET

* Option/accessory.532

Wi-Fi technologies and security Possible network types to connect to.

It is only possible to connect to the following types of network:

Frequency 2.4 or 5 GHz16.

Standards 802.11 a/b/g/n.

Security type - WPA2-AES-CCMP.

The cars Wi-Fi system is designed to handle Wi-Fi devices inside the car.

If several devices operate on the frequency at the same time then it may result in reduced perform- ance.

Related information Internet-connected car* (p. 526)

User terms and conditions and data sharing The first time certain services and apps are started, a pop-up window with the headings Terms and conditions and Data sharing may be shown. The purpose is to inform about Volvo's user terms and conditions and policy for data sharing. By accepting data sharing, the user accepts that certain information is sent from the car. This is required so that certain services and apps can have full functionality.

Data sharing can be set from the centre display's settings menu.

Related information Activating and deactivating data sharing

(p. 532)

Activating and deactivating data sharing Data sharing for services and apps required can be set in the centre display's settings menu. 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre

display.

2. Press System Privacy and data.

3. Select Data sharing to activate or deacti- vate data sharing.

4. When data sharing is activated, settings for individual services and apps can be changed in the list below.

When data sharing is deactivated, the earlier set- tings for individual services and apps remain available when data sharing is reactivated.

Related information User terms and conditions and data sharing

(p. 532)

16 Selection of frequency is not available on all markets.

SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET

533

Compatible media formats The following file formats must be used for media playback.

Audio files

For-

mat

File extension Codec

MP3 .mp3 MPEG1 Layer III, MPEG2 Layer III, MP3 Pro (mp3 compatible), MP3 HD (mp3 compatible)

AAC .m4a, .m4b, .aac AAC LC (MPEG-4 part III Audio), HE-AAC (aacPlus v1/v2)

WMA .wma WMA8/9, WMA9/10 Pro

WAV .wav LPCM

FLAC .flac FLAC

Video files

Format File extension

MP4 .mp4, m4v

MPEG-PS .mpg, .mp2, .mpeg, .m1v

Format File extension

AVI .avi

AVI (DivX) .avi, divx

ASF .asf, .wmv

MKV .mkv

Subtitles

Format File extension

SubViewer .sub

SubRip .srt

SSA .ssa

DivX

DivX certified devices have been tested for high- quality DivX (.divx, .avi) video playback. When you see the DivX logo, you have the freedom to play DivX films.

Profile DivX Home Theater

Video codec DivX, MPEG-4

Resolution 720x576

Bit rate 4.8Mbps

Frame rate 30 fps

File extension .divx, .avi

Max file size 4 GB

Audio codec MP3, AC3

Subtitles XSUB

Special func- tions

Multiple subtitles, multiple audio, resume play

Reference Meets all requirements of the DivX Home Theater pro- file. Visit divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX Home Theater video.

Related information Media player (p. 502)

Video (p. 507)

Playing back DivX (p. 508)

SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET

534

Technical specifications for USB devices The following specifications must be met to allow the contents of the USB devices to be read. No folder structure will be shown in the centre display during playback.

Max number

Files 15 000

Folders 1 000

Folder levels 8

Playlists 100

Items in a playlist 1 000

Subfolders No limit

Technical specification for USB A connector Type A socket

Version 2.0

Voltage supply 5 V

Current supply max. 2.1 A

Related information Media via USB port (p. 509)

Storage space on hard disk It is possible to view how much free space there is on the car's hard disk. Storage information for the car's hard disk, including total capacity, available capacity and how much space is used for installed apps can be shown. The information is available under

Settings System System Information Storage.

Related information Apps (p. 493)

SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET

}}

535

License agreement for audio and media A license is an agreement for the right to oper- ate a certain activity or the right to use someone else's entitlement according to the terms and conditions in the agreement. The following texts are Volvo's agreements with manufacturers/ developers.

Bowers & Wilkins

Bowers & Wilkins and B&W are trademarks of the B&W Group Ltd. Nautilus is a trademark of B&W Group Ltd. Kevlar is a registered trademark of DuPont.

Dirac Unison

Dirac Unison co-optimises the loudspeakers in frequency, time and space for the best possible bass integration and clarity. It enables a faithful reproduction of the acoustic characteristics of specific performance venues. Using advanced algorithms, Dirac Unison controls all loudspeak- ers digitally based on acoustic high-precision measurements. Like a conductor of an orchestra, it guarantees that the loudspeakers perform in perfect unison.

DivX

DivX, DivX Certified and associated logotypes are trademarks belonging to DivX, LLC and are used under licence.

This DivX Certified device can play back DivX Home Theater video files up to 576p (includ- ing .avi, .divx). Download free software on www.divx.com to create, play back and stream digital video.

ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified device must be registered in order to play back purchased DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) films. Get the registration code by locating the DivX VOD section in the device's settings menu. Go to vod.divx.com for more information on how to complete the registration.

Patent numbers Protected by one or more of the following US patents. 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710; 8,656,183; 8,731,369; RE45,052.

Gracenote

||

SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET

536

Parts of the content are copyright of Gracenote or its suppliers.

Gracenote,Gracenote logo and logotype, "Powered by Gracenote" and Gracenote MusicID are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Gracenote, Inc. in the USA and/or other coun- tries.

Gracenote End User License Agreement This program or device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California, USA ("Gracenote"). The software from Gracenote ("Gracenote software") activates this program to perform disc and/or file identification and obtain music-related information, including name, artist, track and title ("Gracenote data") from online servers or embedded databases (together called "Gracenote servers") and in order to perform other actions. You may only use Gracenote data in accordance with the intended end-user func- tions for this program or this device.

You agree to only use Gracenote data, Gracenote software and Gracenote servers for your own personal non-commercial use. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or transmit this Gracenote software or any Gracenote data to any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED IN THIS AGREEMENT.

You agree that your non-exclusive right to use Gracenote data, Gracenote software and Grace-

note servers will be terminated if you violate these restrictions. If your license is terminated you agree to cease all use of Gracenote data, Gracenote software and Gracenote servers. Gracenote holds exclusive rights to all Gracenote data, all Gracenote software and all Gracenote servers, including all ownership rights. Gracenote will under no circumstances have any obligation to pay you for any information you provide. You agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce the com- pany's rights under this agreement against you directly in its own name.

The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to track enquiries for statistical purposes. The pur- pose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to enable the Gracenote service to count enqui- ries without knowing anything about who you are. Additional information is available on the web page for Gracenote's privacy policy for the Grace- note service.

The Gracenote software and everything included in Gracenote data are licensed to you "as is". Gracenote provides no undertakings or warran- ties, express or implied, as to the accuracy of the Gracenote data contained in the Gracenote serv- ers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete data from the Gracenote servers or to change data categories for any reason that Gracenote deems sufficient. No warranty is provided that the Grace- note software or Gracenote servers are fault-free or that the Gracenote software or Gracenote servers will operate without interruption. Grace-

note has no obligation to provide you with new, improved or additional data types or categories that Gracenote may provide in the future, and the company reserves the right to discontinue its services at any time.

GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRAN- TIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND NON- INFRINGEMENT OF INTELLECTUAL PROP- ERTY RIGHTS. GRACENOTE DOES NOT GUAR- ANTEE THE RESULTS OBTAINED THROUGH YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR A GRACENOTE SERVER. GRACENOTE WILL IN NO EVENT BE LIABLE FOR ANY CON- SEQUENTIAL DAMAGE OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR REVENUES.

Gracenote, Inc. 2009

Sensus software

This software uses parts of sources from clib2 and Prex Embedded Real-time OS - Source (Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1991, 1993, 1994), and Quercus Robusta (Copyright (c) 1990, 1993), The Regents of the University of California. All or some portions are derived from material licensed to the University of California by American Telephone and Telegraph Co. or Unix System Laboratories, Inc. and are reproduced herein with the permission of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. Redistribution and use in

SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET

}}

537

source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. Neither the name of the nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF

THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.

This software uses parts of sources from "libtess". The Original Code is: OpenGL Sample Implementation, Version 1.2.1, released January 26, 2000, developed by Silicon Graphics, Inc. The Original Code is Copyright (c) 1991-2000 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Copyright in any portions created by third parties is as indicated elsewhere herein. All Rights Reserved. Copyright (C) [1991-2000] Silicon Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notice including the dates of first publication and either this permission notice or a reference to http:// oss.sgi.com/projects/FreeB/ shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL SILICON GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this notice, the name of Silicon Graphics, Inc. shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from Silicon Graphics, Inc.

This software is based in parts on the work of the FreeType Team.

This software uses parts of SSLeay Library: Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). All rights reserved

Linux software

This product contains software licensed under GNU General Public License (GPL) or GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL), etc.

You have the right of acquisition, modification, and distribution of the source code of the GPL/ LGPL software.

You may download Source Code from the following website at no charge: http:// www.embedded-carmultimedia.jp/linux/oss/ download/TVM_8351_013

||

SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET

538

The website provides the Source Code "As Is" and without warranty of any kind.

By downloading Source Code, you expressly assume all risk and liability associated with downloading and using the Source Code and complying with the user agreements that accompany each Source Code.

Please note that we cannot respond to any inquiries regarding the source code.

camellia:1.2.0 Copyright (c) 2006, 2007

NTT (Nippon Telegraph and Telephone Corporation). All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer as the first lines of this file unmodified.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY NTT ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL NTT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Unicode: 5.1.0 COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE

Copyright c 1991-2013 Unicode, Inc. All rights reserved. Distributed under the Terms of Use in http://www.unicode.org/copyright.html.

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of the Unicode data files and any associated documentation (the "Data Files") or Unicode software and any associated documentation (the "Software") to deal in the Data Files or Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, and/or sell copies of the Data Files or Software, and to permit persons to whom the Data Files or Software are furnished to do so, provided that (a)

the above copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear with all copies of the Data Files or Software, (b) both the above copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in associated documentation, and (c) there is clear notice in each modified Data File or in the Software as well as in the documentation associated with the Data File(s) or Software that the data or software has been modified.

THE DATA FILES AND SOFTWARE ARE PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE DATA FILES OR SOFTWARE.

Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other

SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET

}}

539

dealings in these Data Files or Software without prior written authorization of the copyright holder.

Declaration of Conformity

||

SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET

540

Country/

Area

Brazil:

Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio isto e, no tem direito a proteco contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio.

Para consultas, visite: www.anatel.gov.br

EU:

Manufacturer: Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Sanda Works 2-3-33, Miwa, Sanda-city. Hyogo, 669-1513, Japan

Mitsubishi Electric Corporation hereby declares that this type of radio equipment [Audio Navigation Unit] conforms with directive 2014/53/EU.

For more information, see support.volvocars.com.

The Uni- ted Arab Emirates:

SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET

}}

541

Country/

Area

Kazakh- stan:

Model name: NR 0V

Manufacturer: Mitsubishi Electric Corporation

Exporting country: Japan

||

SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET

542

Country/

Area

China: 1.

2.4 - 2.4835 GHz

(EIRP) 10dBi 100 mW 20 dBm

10dBi 20 dBm / MHz(EIRP)

20 ppm

( 2.4-2.4835GHz ) -80 dBm / Hz (EIRP)

() (2.5 )

-36 dBm / 100 kHz (30 - 1000 MHz)

-33 dBm / 100 kHz (2.4 - 2.4835 GHz)

-40 dBm / 1 MHz (3.4 - 3.53 GHz)

-40 dBm / 1 MHz (5.725 - 5.85 GHz)

-30 dBm / 1 MHz ( 1 - 12.75 GHz)

2. ( )

3.

4.

5.

SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET

}}

543

Country/

Area

Korea: B ( )

(B )

,

.

.

Malaysia

This device has been certified under the Communications & Multimedia Act of 1998, Communications and Multimedia (Technical Standards) Regulations 2000.To retrieve your devices serial number, please visit (support.volvocars.com) and search for SIRIM Label Verification.

Device category: Navigation equipment for vehicle (Bluetooth)

Model: NR-0V

Type Approval No.:

RBAY/18A/1015S(15-4067)

||

SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET

* Option/accessory.544

Country/

Area

Mexico:

Taiwan:

Related information Sound, media and Internet (p. 492)

Internet-connected car* (p. 526)

Media player (p. 502)

Gracenote (p. 506)

Sensus - online connectivity and entertain- ment (p. 34)

WHEELS AND TYRES

WHEELS AND TYRES

546

Tyres Amongst other things, the function of the tyres is to carry load, provide grip on the road surface, dampen vibration and protect the wheel from wear. The tyres greatly affect the car's driving characte- ristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre pressure and speed rating are important for how the car performs.

The car is fitted with tyres according to the tyre information sticker found on the driver's side door pillar (between the front door and the rear door).

WARNING

A damaged tyre may lead to loss of control over the car.

Recommended tyres On delivery, the car is equipped with Volvo origi- nal tyres that have the VOL1 marking on the side of the tyres. These tyres are carefully adapted to the car. In the event of changing tyres, it is there- fore important that the new tyres also have this marking in order for the car's driving characteris- tics, comfort and fuel consumption to be main- tained.

New tyres

Tyres are perishable. After a few years they begin to harden at the same time as the friction capacity/characteristics gradually deteriorate. For this reason, aim to get as fresh tyres as possible when you replace them. This is especially impor- tant with regard to winter tyres. The last four dig- its in the sequence mean the week and year of manufacture. This is the tyre's DOT marking (Department of Transportation), and this is stated with four digits, for example 0717. The tyre is then manufactured in week 07, year 2017.

Tyre age All tyres older than 6 years old should be checked by an expert even if they seem undam- aged. Tyres age and decompose, even if they are hardly ever or never used. The function can therefore be affected. This applies to all tyres that

are stored for future use. Examples of external signs which indicate that the tyre is unsuitable for use are cracks or discolouration.

Tyre economy Maintain the correct tyre pressure.

Avoid fast starts, heavy braking and squeal- ing tyres.

Tyre wear increases with speed.

Correct wheel alignment is very important.

Unbalanced wheels worsen tyre economy and travelling comfort.

The tyres must have the same direction of rotation during their entire service life.

When you change tyres, the tyres with the best tread must be fitted on the rear wheels to reduce the risk of oversteer during heavy braking.

If you drive over kerbstones or deep holes you can damage the tyres and/or wheel rims permanently.

Tyre rotation The car has no mandatory tyre rotation. Driving style, tyre pressure, climate and road condition affect how quickly the tyres age and wear. Cor- rect tyre pressure results in more even wear.

To avoid differences in tread depth and to pre- vent wear patterns forming on the tyres, the front

1 There may be deviations for certain tyre dimensions.

WHEELS AND TYRES

}}

* Option/accessory. 547

and rear wheels should be switched with each other. A suitable distance for the first change is approx. 5000 km (approx. 3100 miles) and then at 10000 km (approx. 6200 miles) intervals.

Volvo recommends the an authorised Volvo work- shop is contacted for checking if you are uncer- tain about tread depth. If significant differences in wear (> 1 mm difference in tread depth) between tyres have already occurred, then the least worn tyres must always be fitted on the rear. Under- steer is normally easier to correct than oversteer, and leads to the car continuing forwards in a straight line rather than having the rear end skid- ding to one side, resulting in possible complete loss of control over the car. This is why it is important for the rear wheels never to lose grip before the front wheels.

Storing wheels and tyres When you store complete wheels (tyres fitted on wheel rims) they should be hung up or positioned lying on their sides on the floor.

Tyres not fitted on rims must be stored lying on their sides or standing upright, but not hung up.

IMPORTANT

Tyres should be stored in a cool, dry and dark place, and should never be stored close to solvents, petrol, oils, etc.

WARNING

Wheel rim size and tyre size for your Volvo are specified to meet stringent requirements for stability and driving cha- racteristics. Unapproved combinations of wheel rim size and tyre size may have a negative effect on the car's stability and driving characteristics.

Any damage caused by the fitting of unapproved combinations of wheel rim size and tyre size is not covered by the new car warranty. Volvo accepts no liabil- ity for death, personal injury or any costs caused by such installations.

Related information Checking tyre pressure (p. 550)

Tyres' rotation direction (p. 549)

Tread wear indicators on the tyres (p. 549)

Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 552)

Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 565)

Dimension designation for tyre (p. 547)

Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 658)

Recommendations for loading (p. 579)

Dimension designation for tyre Designations for tyre dimension, load index and speed rating.

The car has an approval for the complete vehicle with certain combinations of wheel rims and tyres.

Designation of dimensions All tyres have a dimension designation, such as: 235/60 R18 103 V.

235 Tyre width (mm)

60 Ratio between tyre wall height and tyre width (%)

R Radial ply

18 Rim diameter in inches

103 Codes for the maximum permitted tyre load, tyre load index (LI)

V Speed rating for maximum permitted speed, speed rating (SS). (In this case 240 km/h (149 mph).)

Load index Each tyre has a certain capacity to carry a load, a load index (LI). The car's weight determines the load capacity required of the tyres.

||

WHEELS AND TYRES

548

Speed rating Each tyre can withstand a certain maximum speed. Tyre speed rating, SS (Speed Symbol), must at least correspond with the car's top speed. The table below shows the maximum per- mitted speed for each speed rating (SS). The only exception to these regulations is winter tyres2, where a lower speed rating may be used. If such a tyre is chosen, the car must not be driven faster than the speed rating of the tyre (for example, class Q can be driven at a maximum of 160 km/h (100 mph).) The top speed at which the car can be driven depends on road condi- tions, not the speed rating of the tyres.

NOTE

The maximum permitted speed is specified in the table.

Q 160 km/h (100 mph) (used only on win- ter tyres)

T 190 km/h (118 mph)

H 210 km/h (130 mph)

V 240 km/h (149 mph)

W 270 km/h (168 mph)

Y 300 km/h (186 mph)

WARNING

The lowest permitted tyre load index (LI) and speed rating (SS) for the tyres for each respective engine variant are shown in the specifications, which can be found in the prin- ted owner's manual. If a tyre with too low a load index or speed rating is used, it may overheat and be damaged.

Related information Tyres (p. 546)

Dimension designation for wheel rim (p. 548)

Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 658)

Lowest permitted tyre load index and speed rating for tyres (p. 659)

Dimension designation for wheel rim Wheel and rim dimensions are designated in accordance with the examples in the table below. The car has an approval for the complete vehicle with certain combinations of wheel rims and tyres.

All wheel rims have a dimension designation, for example: 7.5Jx18x50.5.

7,5 Rim width in inches

J Rim flange profile

18 Rim diameter in inches

50,5 Off-set in mm (distance from wheel centre to wheel contact surface against the hub)

Related information Tyres (p. 546)

Dimension designation for tyre (p. 547)

Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 658)

2 Both those with metal studs and those without.

WHEELS AND TYRES

549

Tyres' rotation direction Tyres with a tread pattern which are designed to only turn in one direction have the direction of rotation marked with an arrow.

The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation.

The tyre must always rotate in the same direction throughout its lifespan.

Tyres should only be switched between front and rear positions, never between left and right-hand sides, or vice versa.

If the tyres are fitted incorrectly, the car's braking characteristics and capacity to force rain and slush out of the way are adversely affected.

Tyres with the greatest tread depth should always be fitted to the rear of the car (to decrease the risk of skidding).

NOTE

Make sure that both pairs of wheels have the same type and dimension, and also the same make.

Related information Tyres (p. 546)

Tread wear indicators on the tyres Tread wear indicators show the status of the tyre's tread depth.

A tread wear indicator is a narrow elevation across the longitudinal grooves of the tyre's tread pattern. On the side of the tyre are the letters TWI (Tread Wear Indicator). When the tyre's tread depth is down to 1.6 mm (1/16 inch), the tread will be level in height with the tread wear indica- tors. Change to new tyres as soon as possible. Remember that tyres with little tread depth pro- vide very poor grip in rain and snow.

Related information Tyres (p. 546)

WHEELS AND TYRES

* Option/accessory.550

Checking tyre pressure Correct tyre pressure helps to improve driving stability, saves fuel and extends the service life of the tyres.

Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a natu- ral phenomenon. Tyre pressure also varies depending on ambient temperature. Driving on tyres with tyre pressure that is too low could result in the tyres overheating and being dam- aged. Tyre pressure affects travelling comfort, road noise and driving characteristics.

Check the tyre pressures monthly. Use the tyre pressure recommended for cold tyres in order to achieve optimal tyre performance and optimal wear. Tyre pressure that is too low or too high may cause uneven wear on the tyres.

WARNING

Tyre pressure that is too low is the most common cause of tyre failure and may result in serious cracks in the tyre, the tread loosening or the tyre exploding, with unexpected loss of control of the car and increased risk of personal injury.

Tyres with pressure that is too low reduce the load capacity of the car.

Cold tyres The tyre pressure must be checked when the tyres are cold.

Tyres are considered cold when they have the same temperature as the surrounding air.

This temperature is normally reached when the car has been parked for at least three hours.

After having driven approximately 1.6 km (1 mile) these tyres are considered as warm. If you have to drive further than this to inflate the tyres, first check and record the tyre pressure and inflate to a suitable tyre pressure when you arrive at the pump.

When the outside temperature changes, the tyre pressure also changes. A decrease in tempera- ture of 10 degrees causes the tyre pressure to decrease 1 psi (7 kPa). Check the tyre pressure regularly and adjust to the correct pressure, which is specified on the car's tyre information plate or certification label.

If you check the tyre pressure when the tyres are warm then you must never release any air. The tyres are warm due to driving and it is normal for the pressure to increase above the recom- mended pressure for cold tyres. A warm tyre with tyre pressure equal to or below the recommenda- tion for cold tyres may have a pressure that is far too low.

Related information Adjusting tyre pressure (p. 550)

Recommended tyre pressure (p. 551)

Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 552)

Tyres (p. 546)

Adjusting tyre pressure Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a nat- ural phenomenon. The tyre pressure must there- fore sometimes be adjusted in order to maintain the recommended tyre pressure. Use the tyre pressure recommended for cold tyres in order to achieve optimal tyre performance and optimal wear.

NOTE

To avoid incorrect tyre pressure, the pressure should be checked on cold tyres. "Cold tyres" means the tyres are the same temperature as the ambient temperature (approx. 3 hours after the car has been driven). After a few kil- ometres of driving, the tyres warm up and the pressure increases.

1. Remove the cap from the valve on one tyre and then press the tyre pressure gauge firmly down onto the valve.

2. Inflate to the recommended pressure.

WHEELS AND TYRES

* Option/accessory. 551

3. Refit the dust cap.

NOTE

After a tyre has been inflated, always refit the dust cap in order to avoid damage to the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.

Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust caps can rust and become difficult to unscrew.

4. Check the tyres visually for any implanted nails or other objects that could puncture the tyre and cause leakage.

5. Check the sidewalls for any cavities, cuts, bumps or other irregularities.

6. Repeat this for all tyres, including the spare tyre*.

NOTE

If you have over-inflated, release air by press- ing in the metal pin in the centre of the valve. Then check the pressure again using the tyre pressure gauge.

Some spare tyres require a higher tyre pres- sure than other tyres. Check in the tyre pres- sure table or on the tyre pressure plate.

Related information Recommended tyre pressure (p. 551)

Checking tyre pressure (p. 550)

Inflating tyres with the compressor from the puncture repair kit (p. 569)

Approved tyre pressures (p. 660)

Recommended tyre pressure The tyre pressure label on the driver's side door pillar (between frame and rear door) shows which pressures the tyres should have at differ- ent loads and speed conditions.

The plate displays the designation for the factory- fitted tyres on the car, as well as load limits and tyre pressure.

Improved fuel economy with ECO pressure For a light load (max. 3 people) and a speed of up to 160 km/h (100 mph), the ECO pressures can be chosen for optimum fuel economy. How- ever, the lower comfort pressures are recom- mended instead if optimum noise and travelling comfort are desired.

Related information Checking tyre pressure (p. 550)

Approved tyre pressures (p. 660)

WHEELS AND TYRES

* Option/accessory.552

Tyre pressure monitoring system* The tyre pressure monitoring system, Indirect Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (ITPMS), gives a warning with an indicator symbol in the driver display when the pressure in one or more of the car's tyres is too low.

Symbol Explanation

The symbol illuminates to indicate low tyre pressure.

If there is a fault in the system the tyre pressure warning symbol flashes for approximately one minute and then remains illumi- nated.

System description The tyre pressure monitoring system measures differences in rotation speed between the differ- ent wheels via the ABS system in order to be able to determine whether they have the correct tyre pressure. If the tyre pressure is too low, the tyre's diameter is changed and, as a result, so is its rotation speed. By comparing the tyres with each other the system can determine whether one or more tyres have pressure that is too low.

General information on the tyre monitoring system In the information below, the tyre monitoring sys- tem is referred to generically as TPMS.

Each tyre, including the spare tyre*, should be checked once a month. When checking, the tyre should be cold and have the air pressure recom- mended by the car manufacturer specified on the tyre pressure label or in the tyre pressure table. If the car has tyres of a different size than that rec- ommended by the manufacturer, find out what the correct air pressure level is for these.

As an extra safety feature, the car is equipped with a tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS), which shows when the air pressure in one or more tyres is too low. When the indicator symbol for low air pressure is lit, stop and check the tyres as soon as possible and inflate to the correct air pressure.

Driving with tyres that have tyre pressure that is too low may cause the tyre to overheat, which can cause a puncture. Low tyre pressure also reduces fuel efficiency as well as tyre service life, and can affect car handling and stopping ability. Note that TPMS does not replace regular tyre maintenance. It is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tyre pressure, even if the limit for low tyre pressure has not been reached so that the indicator symbol illuminates.

The car is also equipped with a TPMS system fault indicator, which indicates when the system is not functioning correctly. The TPMS system fault indicator is combined with the indicator sym- bol for low tyre pressure. When the system detects a fault, the symbol in the driver display

will flash for about one minute and then remain illuminated. This procedure will be repeated when the car is started until the fault has been rectified. When the symbol is illuminated, the system's abil- ity to detect or warn of low tyre pressure may be affected.

A TPMS system fault can occur for several rea- sons, such as after changing to a spare tyre, or changing tyres or wheels that prevent TPMS from functioning correctly.

Always check the indicator symbol for TPMS after changing one or more tyres in order to ensure the new tyre or wheel is working correctly with TPMS.

Messages on the instrument panel When the tyre pressure is too low, the indicator symbol for low tyre pressure is illuminated in the driver display and a message is shown.

Tyre pressure low Check tyres, calibrate after fill

Tyre pressure system Temporarily unavailable

Tyre pressure system Service required

To bear in mind Always calibrate the system after a wheel

change or tyre pressure adjustment. See the tyre pressure label on the driver's side door

WHEELS AND TYRES

}}

* Option/accessory. 553

pillar for Volvo's recommended tyre pres- sures.

If you change to tyres of a different size to the ones fitted at the factory, the system must be calibrated for these tyres to avoid false warnings.

If a spare wheel* is used, it is possible that the tyre pressure monitoring system does not work correctly due to the differences between the wheels.

The system does not replace the need for regular tyre inspection and maintenance.

It is not possible to switch off the tyre pres- sure monitoring system.

WARNING

Incorrect tyre pressure may lead to tyre failure, which could result in the driver losing control of the car.

The system cannot indicate sudden tyre damage in advance.

Related information Recommended tyre pressure (p. 551)

See tyre pressure statue in the centre dis- play* (p. 555)

Action in the event of warning for low tyre pressure (p. 556)

Calibrate the system for tyre pressure moni- toring* (p. 553)

Calibrate the system for tyre pressure monitoring* In order for the system for tyre pressure monitor- ing, Indirect Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (ITPMS) to work correctly, a reference value for the tyre pressure must be determined. This must be performed each time the tyres are changed or the tyre pressure is changed.

For example, when driving with a heavy load or at high speed above 160 km/h (100 mph), the tyre pressure should be adjusted in accordance with Volvo's recommended tyre pressure values. Fol- lowing which, the system must be recalibrated.

1. Switch off the car.

2. Inflate the tyres to the desired pressure in accordance with the tyre pressure label on the door pillar on the driver's side.

3. Start the car.

4. Open the Car status app in the app view.

||

WHEELS AND TYRES

* Option/accessory.554

5. Press TPMS.

NOTE

The car must be stationary when calibration is started.

6. Press Calibrate.

7. Tap on OK to confirm that the tyre pressure in all four tyres has been checked and adjusted.

8. Run the car until calibration is complete.

Calibration is performed when the car is driven at a speed above 35 km/h (22 mph).

> When sufficient data has been collected to enable the system to detect low tyre pressure, the tyres in the centre display change colour from grey to green. The system provides no additional confirma- tion that the calibration is complete.

If the car's ignition is switched off before calibration is complete, the tyres in the centre display change colour from grey to green upon next start-up, even if calibra- tion is not complete. Perform calibration again and allow it to complete within the same operating cycle to ensure that the calibration is carried out correctly.

If start-up of calibration fails, the following message appears: Calibration unsuccessful. Try again..

NOTE

Remember to always calibrate the tyre pres- sure monitoring system when you have changed a wheel or if the tyre pressure has been changed according to the tyre pressure label or tyre pressure table.

If correct reference values have not been set, the system may not warn correctly about low tyre pressure.

The car must be stationary with the engine running for you to have access to the calibra- tion button and start the calibration process.

WARNING

The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, which is invisible and odourless, but highly toxic. For this reason, calibration must always be performed outside or in a workshop with exhaust extraction.

Related information Recommended tyre pressure (p. 551)

Adjusting tyre pressure (p. 550)

See tyre pressure statue in the centre dis- play* (p. 555)

Action in the event of warning for low tyre pressure (p. 556)

Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 552)

WHEELS AND TYRES

* Option/accessory. 555

See tyre pressure statue in the centre display* With the system for tyre pressure monitoring, Indirect Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (ITPMS), tyre pressure status can be viewed in the centre display.

Checking status 1. Open the Car status app in the app view.

2. Tap on TPMS to show the status of the tyres.

Status indication The graphics in the centre display show the sta- tus for each tyre3.

Green tyre:

The tyre pressure is above the limit value for a warning.

Yellow tyre:

The tyre's pressure is too low. Stop and check/rectify the tyre pressure by inflating as soon as possible. Calibrate the system after the tyre pressure has been adjusted.

All tyres yellow:

The pressure is too low in two or more tyres. Stop and check/rectify the tyre pressures by inflating as soon as possible. Calibrate the system after the tyre pressures have been adjusted.

All tyres grey:

Calibration in progress.

Unknown status.

Several minutes driving above 35 km/h (22 mph) may be required for the system to become active.

All tyres grey and a message:

Tyre pressure system Temporarily unavailable. The indicator symbol flashes and changes to constant glow after approx. 1 minute. The system is currently unavailable, activated shortly.

Tyre pressure system Service required. The indicator symbol flashes and changes to constant glow after approx. 1 minute. The system is not working correctly, contact a workshop4.

Related information Calibrate the system for tyre pressure moni-

toring* (p. 553)

Action in the event of warning for low tyre pressure (p. 556)

Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 552)

Car status (p. 592)

3 The figure is schematic. Layout may vary depending on car model or updated software. 4 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

WHEELS AND TYRES

* Option/accessory.556

Action in the event of warning for low tyre pressure When the tyre pressure monitoring system, Indirect Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (ITPMS) gives a warning, the tyre pressure in one or more of the car's tyres is too low and action is required.

Check and rectify the tyre pressure when the indicator symbol for the sys- tem is illuminated and the Tyre pressure low message is shown.

1. Switch off the car.

2. Check the tyre pressure in all four tyres with a tyre pressure gauge.

3. Inflate the tyres to the correct pressure as indicated on the tyre pressure label on the door pillar on the driver's side.

4. Perform calibration of the system via the centre display after tyre pressure adjustment.

Note that the indicator symbol does not extinguish until the low tyre pressure has been rectified and new calibration has been performed.

NOTE

To avoid incorrect tyre pressure, the pressure should be checked on cold tyres. "Cold tyres" means the tyres are the same temperature as the ambient temperature (approx. 3 hours after the car has been driven). After a few kil- ometres of driving, the tyres warm up and the pressure increases.

NOTE

After a tyre has been inflated, always refit the dust cap in order to avoid damage to the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.

Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust caps can rust and become difficult to unscrew.

WARNING

Incorrect tyre pressure may lead to tyre failure, which could result in the driver losing control of the car.

The system cannot indicate sudden tyre damage in advance.

Related information Recommended tyre pressure (p. 551)

Adjusting tyre pressure (p. 550)

Calibrate the system for tyre pressure moni- toring* (p. 553)

See tyre pressure statue in the centre dis- play* (p. 555)

Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 552)

Inflating tyres with the compressor from the puncture repair kit (p. 569)

WHEELS AND TYRES

}}

* Option/accessory. 557

When changing wheels The car's wheels can be changed, e.g. to winter wheels or a spare wheel. Follow the relevant instructions for removing and fitting wheels.

When changing to another tyre dimension Check that the tyre dimension is approved for use on the car.

Contact an authorised Volvo workshop for updat- ing the software at each change of tyre dimen- sion. A software download may be necessary both when changing to larger and smaller dimen- sions, and also when switching between summer and winter wheels.

Related information Removing a wheel (p. 559)

Fitting the wheels (p. 561)

Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 658)

Tool kit (p. 557)

Winter wheels (p. 563)

Spare wheel* (p. 562)

Wheel bolts (p. 558)

Tool kit Tools that can be useful during towing, wheel changes or similar are found in the car's cargo area.

The foam block under the cargo area floor con- tains the car's towing eye, puncture repair kit, tool for removing the plastic caps from the wheel bolts and a socket for the lockable wheel bolts.

If the car is equipped with spare wheel* then a jack and wheel wrench are included, as well as a package with disposable gloves and a bag for the damaged wheel.

Related information When changing wheels (p. 557)

Jack* (p. 557)

Jack* The jack can be used to raise the car, for exam- ple, to change to the spare wheel.

The figure is schematic - the version may vary.

||

WHEELS AND TYRES

* Option/accessory.558

IMPORTANT

When the jack* is not in use it must be stored in its storage space under the cargo area floor.

The jack included with the car is only designed for occasional, short-term use, such as when changing a wheel after a puncture. Only the jack belonging to the specific model is to be used to jack up the car. If the car is to be jacked up more often, or for a longer time than is required just to change a wheel, use of a garage jack is recommended. In this instance, follow the instructions for use that come with the equipment.

The jack needs to be cranked together to the correct position in order to have space.

Models with self-levelling* If the car is equipped with the air suspension option then this function must be deactivated before the car is raised with the jack.

Related information Tool kit (p. 557)

Wheel bolts Wheel bolts are used to attach the wheels to the hubs.

IMPORTANT

The wheel bolts must be tightened to 140 Nm (103 ft. lbs.). Overtightening or loose tightening may damage the nuts and the bolts.

Only use rims that are tested and approved by Volvo and which are Volvo genuine accessories.

Check the tightening torque of the wheel bolts with a torque wrench.

Do not use lubricant on the threads of the wheel bolts.

WARNING

The wheel bolts may need to be re-tightened several days after the change. Temperature differences and vibration may mean that they are not attached equally as tightly.

Locking wheel bolts* In the foam block under the cargo area floor there is space for the sleeve for the lockable wheel bolts.

Related information Removing a wheel (p. 559)

Fitting the wheels (p. 561)

WHEELS AND TYRES

}}

* Option/accessory. 559

Removing a wheel Instructions for removing a wheel when chang- ing wheels. Wheel changes must always be per- formed correctly.

IMPORTANT

When the jack* is not in use it must be stored in its storage space under the cargo area floor.

The jack included with the car is only designed for occasional, short-term use, such as when changing a wheel after a puncture. Only the jack belonging to the specific model is to be used to jack up the car. If the car is to be jacked up more often, or for a longer time than is required just to change a wheel, use of a garage jack is recommended. In this instance, follow the instructions for use that come with the equipment.

WARNING

Apply the parking brake and set the gear selector in Park position (P).

Chock the wheels standing on the ground using solid wood blocks or large stones.

Check that the jack is not damaged, that the threads are thoroughly lubricated and that it is free from dirt.

Check that the jack is resting on a firm, level surface that is not slippery and is not slanted.

The jack must be correctly attached in the jack's bracket.

Never position anything between the ground and the jack, nor between the jack and the car's jacking point.

Passengers must leave the car when it is raised on the jack.

If a wheel must be changed in a traf- ficked environment, passengers must stand in a safe place.

Use a jack designed for the car when changing tyres. Use supports to secure the car for all other work.

Never crawl under the car or reach under with a part of your body when it is raised on a jack.

1. Set up the warning triangle and activate the hazard warning lights if a tyre is being changed in a trafficked location.

2. Apply the parking brake and engage gear position P.

Applies to cars with Leveling Control*: If the car is equipped with air suspension, this must be disabled before the car is raised with a jack*.

3. Take out the jack*, wheel wrench* and tools for the wheel bolts' plastic caps that are fitted in the foam block.

Tool for removing the plastic caps on the wheel bolts.

4. Chock in front of and behind the wheels that remain on the ground. Use, for example, heavy wooden blocks or large stones.

||

WHEELS AND TYRES

* Option/accessory.560

5. Screw together the towing eye with the wheel wrench* until the stop position as per the instructions.

IMPORTANT

The towing eye must be screwed into the wheel bolt wrench* as far as possible.

6. Remove the plastic caps from the wheel bolts with the intended tool.

7. With the car still on the ground, use the wheel bolt wrench/towing eye to undo the wheel bolts -1 turn by pressing downwards (anticlockwise).

8. When raising the car, it is important that the jack* or lifting arms are fitted in the intended points on the car's underbody. The triangle markings in the plastic cover indicate the locations of the jacking/lifting points. There are two jacking points on each side of the car. There is a recess for the jack at each point.

9. Position the jack on level, firm and non-slip- pery ground under the jacking point that will be used.

10. Crank up until it is correctly aligned and so that it makes contact with the car's jacking point. Check that the head of the jack (or the lift arms at a workshop) is correctly posi- tioned in the jacking point so that the bump in the centre of the head fits into the jacking point hole and the base is positioned verti- cally below the jacking point.

11. Turn the jack so that the crank is as far away from the side of the car as possible, at which point the jack's arms are perpendicular to the direction of the car.

12. Raise the car high enough to allow the wheel to be removed to move freely. Remove the wheel bolts and lift off the wheel.

Related information Settings for level control* (p. 457)

When changing wheels (p. 557)

Raise the car (p. 595)

Jack* (p. 557)

Tool kit (p. 557)

Fitting the wheels (p. 561)

WHEELS AND TYRES

}}

561

Fitting the wheels Instructions for fitting a wheel when changing wheels.

NOTE

The jack included with the car is only designed for occasional, short-term use, such as when changing a wheel after a puncture. Only the jack belonging to the specific model is to be used to jack up the car. If the car is to be jacked up more often, or for a longer time than is required just to change a wheel, use of a garage jack is recommended. In this instance, follow the instructions for use that come with the equipment.

WARNING

Apply the parking brake and set the gear selector in Park position (P).

Chock the wheels standing on the ground using solid wood blocks or large stones.

Check that the jack is not damaged, that the threads are thoroughly lubricated and that it is free from dirt.

Check that the jack is resting on a firm, level surface that is not slippery and is not slanted.

The jack must be correctly attached in the jack's bracket.

Never position anything between the ground and the jack, nor between the jack and the car's jacking point.

Passengers must leave the car when it is raised on the jack.

If a wheel must be changed in a traf- ficked environment, passengers must stand in a safe place.

Use a jack designed for the car when changing tyres. Use supports to secure the car for all other work.

Never crawl under the car or reach under with a part of your body when it is raised on a jack.

1. Clean the contact surfaces between wheel and hub.

2. Put on the wheel. Tighten the wheel bolts thoroughly.

Do not use lubricant on the threads of the wheel bolts.

3. Lower the car so that the wheels cannot rotate.

4. Tighten the wheel bolts crosswise. It is impor- tant that the wheel bolts are tightened prop- erly. Tighten to 140 Nm (103 ft.lbs.). Check the tightening torque with a torque wrench.

5. Refit the plastic caps on the wheel bolts.

||

WHEELS AND TYRES

* Option/accessory.562

WARNING

The wheel bolts may need to be re-tightened several days after the change. Temperature differences and vibration may mean that they are not attached equally as tightly.

NOTE

After a tyre has been inflated, always refit the dust cap in order to avoid damage to the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.

Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust caps can rust and become difficult to unscrew.

Related information Settings for level control* (p. 457)

When changing wheels (p. 557)

Raise the car (p. 595)

Jack* (p. 557)

Tool kit (p. 557)

Removing a wheel (p. 559)

Spare wheel* The spare wheel, the Temporary spare type, can be used to temporarily replace a punctured nor- mal wheel. The spare tyre is only designed for temporary use. Replace it with a normal wheel as soon as possible.

The car's driving characteristics can be changed when the spare wheel is used and the ground clearance is reduced. Do not wash the car in an automatic car wash if the Temporary Spare is being used.

Recommended tyre pressure must be maintained regardless of the position of the temporary spare wheel on the car.

If the spare tyre is damaged then a new one can be purchased from a Volvo dealer.

WARNING

Never drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph) with a spare wheel fitted on the car.

The car must never be driven fitted with more than one spare wheel of the type "Temporary Spare" at the same time.

The car may have different driving charac- teristics while driving with the spare wheel. The spare wheel must be replaced with a normal wheel as soon as possible.

The spare wheel is smaller than the nor- mal wheel, which affects the car's ground clearance. Look out for high kerbs and do not machine-wash the car.

Follow the manufacturer's recommended tyre pressure for the spare wheel.

On all-wheel drive cars, the drive on the rear axle can be disengaged.

If the spare wheel is fitted to the front axle then it is not possible to use snow chains at the same time.

The spare wheel must not be repaired.

WHEELS AND TYRES

}}

* Option/accessory. 563

IMPORTANT

The car must not be driven with tyres of dif- ferent sizes or with a spare tyre other than the one supplied with the car. Using different- sized wheels can cause serious damage to the car's transmission.

Related information When changing wheels (p. 557)

Recommended tyre pressure (p. 551)

Taking out the spare wheel Follow these instructions for handling the spare wheel.

The spare wheel is stored in a bag and must be secured with two straps on the floor of the cargo area while driving. The straps must be tensioned crosswise over the wheel and attached in the car's four load retaining eyelets.

Tools for changing wheels are located under the cargo area floor.

Related information Spare wheel* (p. 562)

Winter wheels Winter wheels are adapted for winter road con- ditions.

Volvo recommends winter tyres with particular dimensions. Tyre dimensions are dependent on engine variant. When driving on winter tyres, the correct type of tyres must be fitted to all four wheels.

NOTE

Contact a Volvo dealer for advice about which wheel rim and type of tyre are most suitable.

Tips for changing to winter tyres When summer and winter wheels are changed, mark which side of the car they were mounted on, for example L for left and R for right.

Studded tyres Studded winter tyres should be run in gently for 500-1000 km (300-600 miles), so the studs settle properly into the tyres. This gives the tyre, and especially the studs, a longer service life.

NOTE

The legal provisions for the use of studded tyres vary from country to country.

||

WHEELS AND TYRES

564

Tread depth Road conditions with ice, slush and low tempera- tures place considerably higher demands on tyres than summer conditions. Volvo therefore recom- mends not to drive on winter tyres that have a tread depth of less than 4 mm (0.15 inches).

Related information When changing wheels (p. 557)

Winter driving (p. 465)

Tread wear indicators on the tyres (p. 549)

Snow chains Use of snow chains and/or winter tyres can help to improve the traction in winter conditions.

WARNING

Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equivalent chains designed for the car model, and tyre and rim dimensions. Only single-sided snow chains are permitted.

In the event of uncertainty about the show chain, Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted. The wrong snow chains may cause serious dam- age to the car and lead to an accident.

IMPORTANT

Snow chains can be used on the car with the following restrictions:

Volvo does not recommend the use of show chains on wheel dimensions greater than 18 inches.

Always follow the mounting instructions from the manufacturer carefully. Fit the chains as tensioned as possible and ten- sion them at regular intervals.

Snow chains must only be used on the front wheels (also applies to all-wheel drive cars).

In some cases, snow chains must NOT be used, such as if accessory, aftermar- ket or "special" tyres and wheels are fit- ted that have a different size to the origi- nal tyres and wheels. Sufficient distance must be maintained between the chains and brakes, suspension and body compo- nents.

Check local regulations with regard to using snow chains before fitting them.

Never exceed the chain manufacturer's specified maximum speed. You must never exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) under any circumstances.

Avoid bumps, holes or sharp turns when driving with snow chains.

WHEELS AND TYRES

* Option/accessory. 565

Avoid driving on bare ground as this wears out both the snow chains and tyres.

Driving with snow chains may have a negative effect on the car's driving cha- racteristics. Avoid fast or sharp turns, as well as braking with locked wheels.

Some types of chain that are firmly ten- sioned affect brake components and must therefore NOT be used.

You can obtain more information on snow chains from a Volvo retailer.

Related information Winter driving (p. 465)

Emergency puncture repair kit The emergency puncture repair kit5, is used to seal a puncture as well as to check and adjust the air pressure in the tyre.

Cars equipped with spare tyre* do not have the puncture repair kit.

The puncture repair kit consists of a compressor and a bottle with sealing fluid. The sealing works as a temporary repair.

NOTE

The sealing fluid is effective at sealing tyres with tread punctures but has limited ability to seal tyres with sidewall punctures. Do not use the emergency puncture repair kit on tyres displaying larger slits, cracks or similar dam- age.

NOTE

The compressor is intended for temporary emergency puncture repair and is approved by Volvo.

Location The puncture repair kit is located in the foam block under the floor in the cargo area.

Sealing fluid bottle The bottle of sealing fluid must be replaced if the bottle's expiry date has passed (see the decal on the bottle). Treat the old bottle as environmentally hazardous waste.

The sealing fluid bottle must be replaced after use. Volvo recommends that the replacement is performed by an authorised Volvo workshop.

Related information Using a puncture repair kit (p. 566)

Inflating tyres with the compressor from the puncture repair kit (p. 569)

Tyres (p. 546)

5 Temporary Mobility Kit (TMK)

WHEELS AND TYRES

566

Using a puncture repair kit Seal a puncture with the emergency puncture repair kit, Temporary Mobility Kit (TMK).

Overview

Electrical cable

Air hose

Pressure reducing valve

Protective cap

Label, maximum permitted speed

Bottle holder (orange cap)

Pressure gauge

Sealing fluid bottle

Switch

Connecting

NOTE

Do not break the bottle's seal before use. The seal is broken automatically when the bottle is screwed in.

WARNING

Please keep the following points in mind when using the tyre sealing system:

The sealing fluid bottle contains 1) rubber latex, natural and 2) ethanediol. These substances are harmful if swallowed.

The contents of this bottle may cause allergic skin reactions or otherwise be potentially harmful to the respiratory tract, the skin, the central nervous system, and the eyes.

Precautions:

Store out of the reach of children.

Harmful if ingested.

Avoid prolonged or repeated contact with the skin. If sealing fluid has come into contact with your clothes, remove them.

Wash thoroughly after handling.

First aid:

Skin: Wash affected areas of skin with soap and water. Get medical attention if symptoms occur.

Eyes: Flush with plenty of water for least 15 minutes, occasionally lifting the upper and lower eyelids. Get medical attention if symptoms occur.

WHEELS AND TYRES

}}

567

Inhalation: Move the exposed person to fresh air. If irritation persists, get medical attention.

Ingestion: Do NOT induce vomiting unless directed to do so by medical per- sonnel. Get medical attention.

Disposal: Dispose of this material and its container at a hazardous or special waste collection point.

WARNING

Do not remove the bottle when the punc- ture repair kit is being used.

Do not remove the air hose when the puncture repair kit is being used.

1. Set up the warning triangle and activate the hazard warning lights if a tyre is being sealed in a trafficked location.

If the puncture was caused by a nail or simi- lar, allow this to remain in the tyre. It helps to seal the hole.

2. Detach the decal for maximum permitted speed that is affixed on one side of the com- pressor. Affix it visibly on the windscreen as a reminder to observe the speed limit. You should not drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph) after the emergency tyre repair kit has been used.

3. Check that the switch is in position 0 (Off), and locate the electrical cable and the air hose.

4. Unscrew the orange-coloured cap from the compressor, and unscrew the cork from the sealing fluid bottle.

5. Screw in the bottle to the bottom of the bot- tle holder.

The bottle and the bottle holder are equip- ped with a reverse catch to prevent sealant leakage. When the bottle is screwed in it cannot be unscrewed from the bottle holder again. Bottle removal must be performed at a workshop, Volvo recommends an authorised Volvo workshop.

WARNING

Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.

6. Unscrew the tyre's dust cap and screw in the air hose's valve connection to the bottom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.

Check that the pressure reducing valve on the air hose is fully screwed in.

7. Connect the electrical cable to the closest 12 V socket and start the car.

NOTE

Make sure that none of the other 12 V sock- ets is in use when the compressor is operat- ing.

WARNING

Do not leave children in the car without supervision when the engine is running.

||

WHEELS AND TYRES

568

8. Start the compressor by flicking the switch to position I (On).

WARNING

Never stand next to the tyre when the com- pressor is running. If cracks or unevenness arise then the compressor must be switched off immediately. The journey should not be continued. Call roadside assistance for recov- ery to a tyre centre. Volvo recommends an authorised tyre centre.

NOTE

When the compressor starts, the pressure can increase up to 6 bar (88 psi) but the pressure drops after approximately 30 seconds.

9. Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes.

IMPORTANT

The compressor must not be operated for longer than 10 minutes - risk of overheating.

10. Switch off the compressor to check the pres- sure on the pressure gauge. Minimum pres- sure is 1.8 bar (22 psi) and maximum is 3.5 bar (51 psi). Release air using the pres- sure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high.

WARNING

If the bottle is removed in the wrong order, sealing fluid could spill out.

WARNING

If the pressure is below 1.8 bar (22 psi) then the hole in the tyre is too big. The journey should not be continued. Call roadside assis- tance for recovery to a tyre centre. Volvo rec- ommends an authorised tyre centre.

11. Switch off the compressor and detach the electrical cable.

12. Unscrew the air hose from the tyre valve and refit the dust cap on the tyre.

13. Fit the protective cap on the air hose in order to avoid leakage of the remaining sealing fluid. Place the equipment in the cargo area.

14. As soon as possible, drive at least 3 km (2 miles) at a maximum speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) so that the sealing fluid can seal the tyre, and then perform a follow-up check.

NOTE

Sealant will spurt out of the puncture during the first few rotations of the tyre.

WARNING

Make sure that nobody is standing near the car and gets the sealing fluid splashed onto them when the car is driven away. The dis- tance should be at least 2 metres (7 feet).

15. Follow-up inspection

Connect the air hose on the tyre valve and screw in the valve connection to the bottom of the tyre valve's thread. The compressor must be switched off.

WHEELS AND TYRES

}}

569

16. Read the tyre pressure on the pressure gauge.

If it is below 1.3 bar (19 psi) then the tyre is insufficiently sealed. The journey should not be continued. Call roadside assistance for recovery.

If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3 bar (19 psi), the tyre must be inflated to the pressure specified in accordance with the tyre pressure label on the driver's side door pillar (1 bar = 100 kPa = 14.5 psi). Release air using the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high.

NOTE

The sealing fluid bottle and the hose must be replaced after use. Volvo recommends that this replacement is performed by an author- ised Volvo workshop.

WARNING

Check the tyre pressure regularly.

Volvo recommends that the car is driven to the nearest authorised Volvo workshop for the replacement/repair of the damaged tyre. Advise the workshop that the tyre contains sealing fluid.

WARNING

Maximum mileage with tyres containing seal- ing fluid is 200 km (120 miles).

NOTE

The compressor is an electrical device. Follow local regulations related to waste manage- ment.

Related information Recommended tyre pressure (p. 551)

Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 565)

Inflating tyres with the compressor from the puncture repair kit (p. 569)

Inflating tyres with the compressor from the puncture repair kit The car's original tyres can be inflated using the compressor in the emergency puncture repair kit.

1. The compressor must be switched off. Make sure that the switch is in position 0 (Off), and take out the electrical cable and the air hose.

2. Unscrew the tyre's dust cap and screw in the air hose's valve connection to the bottom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.

Check that the pressure reducing valve on the air hose is fully screwed in.

3. Connect the electrical cable to the closest 12 V socket and start the car.

WARNING

Inhaling car exhaust fumes could result in danger to life. Never leave the engine running in sealed areas or areas that lack sufficient ventilation.

WARNING

Do not leave children in the car without supervision when the engine is running.

4. Start the compressor by flicking the switch to position I (On).

||

WHEELS AND TYRES

570

IMPORTANT

Risk of overheating. The compressor must not run for more than 10 minutes.

5. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified on the tyre pressure label on the driver side door pillar. Release air using the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high.

6. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air hose and the electrical cable.

7. Refit the dust cap on the tyre.

NOTE

After a tyre has been inflated, always refit the dust cap in order to avoid damage to the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.

Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust caps can rust and become difficult to unscrew.

NOTE

The compressor is an electrical device. Follow local regulations related to waste manage- ment.

Related information Recommended tyre pressure (p. 551)

Using a puncture repair kit (p. 566)

Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 565)

LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COM- PARTMENT

LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

* Option/accessory.572

Passenger compartment interior Overview of the passenger compartment's inte- rior and storage locations.

Front seat

Storage compartment in the door panel, glovebox and sun visor.

Storage spaces with cup holder, electrical socket and USB port in the tunnel console.

Rear seat

Storage compartment in door panel, cup holder* in cen- tre seat backrest, storage pocket* on front seat backrest, electrical sockets in tunnel console, as well as storage compartment under seat.

WARNING

Keep loose objects such as mobile phones, cameras, remote controls for accessories, etc. in the glove compartment or other compart- ments. Otherwise they may injure people in the car in the event of sudden braking or a collision.

IMPORTANT

Keep in mind that high gloss surfaces, for example, are easily scratched by metal objects. Do not place keys, phones and other items on sensitive surfaces.

Related information Electrical sockets (p. 574)

Using the glovebox (p. 577)

Sun visors (p. 579)

Tunnel console (p. 573)

Connecting a device via USB port (p. 509)

LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

* Option/accessory. 573

Tunnel console The tunnel console is located between the front seats.

Storage compartment with hatch*. The hatch is opened/closed with a push on the handle.

Storage compartment with cup holder for driver and passenger as well as 12V socket.

Storage compartment and USB port under the armrest.

Climate controls for the rear seat climate functions* or storage compartment.

WARNING

Keep loose objects such as mobile phones, cameras, remote controls for accessories, etc. in the glove compartment or other compart- ments. Otherwise they may injure people in the car in the event of sudden braking or a collision.

NOTE

One of the detectors for the alarm* is located under the tunnel console's cup holder. Avoid leaving coins, keys and other metal objects in the cup holder, since this may trigger the alarm.

IMPORTANT

Keep in mind that high gloss surfaces, for example, are easily scratched by metal objects. Do not place keys, phones and other items on sensitive surfaces.

Related information Passenger compartment interior (p. 572)

Electrical sockets (p. 574)

Climate controls (p. 203)

LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

* Option/accessory.574

Electrical sockets There are two 12 V electrical sockets and one 230 V electrical socket* in the tunnel console, and there is one 12 V electrical socket* in the cargo area.

If a problem occurs with an electrical socket, contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo work- shop is recommended.

12 V electrical socket

12 V electrical socket in tunnel console, front seat.

The 12 V sockets can be used for various acces- sories designed for this, such as music players, cooler boxes and mobile phones.

12 V electrical socket in tunnel console, rear seat.

12 V electrical socket in cargo area*.

High voltage socket*

Electrical socket in the tunnel console, rear seat.

The high-voltage socket* can be used for various accessories designed for this, such as chargers or laptops.

Status indication, high-voltage socket An LED1 lamp on the socket indicates the status of the socket:

1 LED (Light Emitting Diode)

LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

575

Status indication Reason Action

Steady green light The socket is delivering current to a connected device. None.

Blinking orange light The temperature of the socket's voltage converter is too high (because for example the accessory draws too high a current or the passenger compart- ment is too warm).

Remove the plug and let the voltage converter cool down before reinserting the plug.

The connected accessory draws too much current (intermittently or continu- ously) or is defective.

None. The accessory cannot be connected to the socket.

Extinguished lamp The socket does not sense that a plug has been inserted. Check that the plug is properly inserted into the socket.

The socket is not active. Switch the car's electrical system to the lowest igni- tion position I.

The socket has been active but is now deactivated. Start the engine and/or charge the starter battery.

Related information Passenger compartment interior (p. 572)

Using electrical sockets (p. 576)

LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

* Option/accessory.576

Using electrical sockets 12 V sockets can be used for various accesso- ries designed for this, such as music players, cooler boxes and mobile phones.

High-voltage sockets* can be used for various accessories designed for this, such as chargers and portable computers. For the sockets to supply current, the car's elec- trical system must be set in the lowest ignition position I. The sockets are then active as long as the starter battery level does not become too low.

If the engine is switched off and the car is locked, the sockets are deactivated. If the engine is switched off and the car is not locked, or is locked with double lock temporarily deactivated, then the sockets continue to be active for a fur- ther seven minutes.

NOTE

Remember that use of the electrical socket with the engine switched off entails a risk of discharging the starter battery, which can limit functionality.

Accessories that are connected to the electri- cal sockets may be activated even when the car's electrical system is disconnected or if preconditioning is used. For this reason, dis- connect the connectors when they are not in use in order to avoid the starter battery being discharged.

WARNING

Do not use accessories with large or heavy connectors - they can damage the socket or come loose when driving.

Do not use accessories that can cause interference to the car's radio receiver or electrical system for example.

Position the accessory so that it is not at risk of injuring the driver or passengers in the event of heavy braking or collision.

Keep an eye on connected accessories as they can generate heat that can burn passengers or the interior.

Using 12 V sockets 1. Remove the blanking plug (tunnel console)

or fold down the cover (cargo area) in front of the socket and plug in the accessory's connector.

2. Unplug the accessory's connector and refit the blanking plug (tunnel console) or fold up the cover (cargo area) when the socket is not in use or if the socket is left unattended.

IMPORTANT

Maximum socket output is 120 W (10 A) per socket.

Using high-voltage sockets 1. Pull down the socket cover and insert the

accessory's plug.

> The LED2 lamp on the socket indicates the status.

2. Check that the lamp is illuminated with a steady green light - only then is current avail- able at the socket.

3. Disconnect the accessory by pulling out the plug - do not pull on the cable.

Pull up the cover when the socket is not being used or the socket is left unattended.

2 LED (Light Emitting Diode)

LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

}}

577

IMPORTANT

Maximum socket output is 150 W.

WARNING

Never modify or repair the high-voltage socket yourself. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contac- ted.

WARNING

Only use accessories that are undam- aged and fault-free. The accessories must be rated for 230 V and 50 Hz with connectors designed for the socket. The accessories must have a CE marking, UL marking or an equivalent safety marking.

Never allow sockets, connectors or accessories to come into contact with water or other liquids. Do not touch or use the socket if it appears to be dam- aged or has come into contact with water or other liquid.

Do not connect junction sockets, adapt- ers or extension cables to the socket as these can override the socket's safety features.

The socket is equipped with a protective cover, ensure that nothing protrudes in or damages the socket preventing the cover from doing its job. Do not leave children in the car unsupervised when the socket is active.

Failure to follow the advice given above can lead to severe or fatal electric shocks.

Related information Electrical sockets (p. 574)

Passenger compartment interior (p. 572)

Using the glovebox The glovebox is located on the passenger side. The printed owner's manual and maps can be kept in the glovebox, for example. There is also space for a pen and card holder.

||

LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

* Option/accessory.578

Locking and unlocking the glovebox* The glovebox can be locked, e.g. when the car is taken in for service, left at a hotel or similar. The glovebox can only be locked/unlocked with the accompanying key.

The key's designated storage space. The figure is sche- matic - the design may vary.

The figure is schematic - the design may vary.

Locking the glovebox:

Insert the key in the glovebox lock cylinder.

Turn the key 90 degrees clockwise.

Pull out the key.

Unlock by carrying this out in reverse order.

Using the glovebox as a cooled area* The glovebox can be used for cooling of e.g. drinks or food. The cooling works when the cli- mate control system is active (i.e. when the car is set in ignition position II or when the engine is running).

The figure is schematic - the design may vary.

Activating cooling

Deactivating cooling

Activate or deactivate the cooling by moving the control to the end position toward the passenger compartment/glovebox.

Related information Passenger compartment interior (p. 572)

Private locking (p. 260)

LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

}}

* Option/accessory. 579

Sun visors There are sun visors in the roof in front of the driver and the front seat passenger which can be folded down and angled out to the side when necessary.

The figure is schematic - the design may vary.

The mirror lighting* is switched on automatically when the lid is lifted.

The mirror frame incorporates a holder for e.g. cards or tickets.

Related information Passenger compartment interior (p. 572)

Cargo area The car has a flexible cargo area that makes it possible to transport and secure large objects. By folding down the backrests in the rear seat, the cargo area can become quite spacious. To facilitate loading and unloading, the rear section of the car can be lowered with the level control function*. Use load retaining eyelets or bag hold- ers to secure the load, and the extendable cargo cover* to conceal the load if desired.

If the car is equipped with a spare wheel then this is attached on the cargo area floor. The car's towing eye and puncture repair kit are stored under the cargo area floor.

Related information Recommendations for loading (p. 579)

Bag hooks (p. 581)

Load retaining eyelets (p. 581)

Fitting and removing cargo cover* (p. 582)

Recommendations for loading There are a number of things to remember when loading the car. Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The total of the weight of the passengers and all accessories reduces the car's payload by a cor- responding weight.

WARNING

The cars driving properties change depend- ing on the weight and positioning of the load.

Loading in the cargo area Position the load firmly against the rear

seat's backrest.

Centre the load.

Heavy objects should be placed as low as possible. Avoid placing heavy loads on low- ered backrests.

Cover sharp edges with something soft to avoid damaging the upholstery.

Secure all loads to the load retaining eyelets with straps or web lashings.

WARNING

A loose object weighing 20 kg (44 pounds) can, in a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h (30 mph) carry the impact of an item weighing 1000 kg (2200 pounds).

||

LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

* Option/accessory.580

WARNING

Leave 10 cm (4 inches) space between the load and the side windows if the car is loaded to above the top edge of the door windows. Otherwise, the intended protection of the inflatable curtain, which is concealed in the headlining, may be compromised.

WARNING

Always secure the load. During heavy braking the load may otherwise shift, causing injury to the car's occupants.

Cover sharp edges and sharp corners with something soft.

Switch off the engine and apply the parking brake when loading/unloading long items. Otherwise you may accidentally knock the gear lever or gear selector with the load into a drive position - and the car could then move off.

Increasing the space in the cargo area To expand the cargo area and simplify loading, the rear seat's backrest can be lowered. Note that objects must not prevent the function of the WHIPS system for the front seats if any of the rear seat's backrests is folded down.

A through-load hatch in the rear seat can be folded down for carrying long and narrow loads.

Level control of the car's rear section* The car's rear section can be lowered/raised in order to create a better working height for the car's cargo area or to assist when a trailer shall be coupled/uncoupled to/from the towbar*.

Level control is performed via a control at the rear on the right-hand side in the cargo area's side panel.

Controls for raising/lowering the car's rear section.

The control consists of two buttons - one button that lowers and one button that raises the rear section of the car. For raising or lowering, each button must be held depressed until the rear sec- tion has reached the desired level.

It is not possible to raise the car's rear section higher than its normal level.

During driving, the rear section height will return to the normal level.

NOTE

It is not possible to adjust the height of the rear section when one or more of the doors or the bonnet is open. This does not apply to the tailgate.

WARNING

Pay attention to ensure that there is no per- son, animal or object under the car when low- ering. This would involve danger to life and damage to the car or object.

Related information Load retaining eyelets (p. 581)

Lowering the backrests in the rear seat (p. 184)

Through-load hatch in the rear seat (p. 582)

Roof load and loading on load carriers (p. 581)

Level control* and shock absorption (p. 454)

Weights (p. 647)

LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

* Option/accessory. 581

Roof load and loading on load carriers For loading on the car's roof, the load carriers that Volvo have developed are recommended. This is in order to avoid damage to the car and in order to achieve the maximum possible safety during a journey. Volvo's load carriers are availa- ble for purchase at authorised Volvo retailers.

Carefully follow the installation instructions sup- plied with the carriers.

Check periodically that the load carriers and load are properly secured. Lash the load securely with retaining straps.

Distribute the load evenly over the load carri- ers. Put the heaviest objects at the bottom.

The size of the area exposed to the wind, and therefore fuel consumption, increase with the size of the load.

Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration, heavy braking and hard cornering.

WARNING

The car's centre of gravity and driving charac- teristics are altered by roof loads.

Follow the car's specifications with regard to weights and maximum permitted load.

Related information Recommendations for loading (p. 579)

Weights (p. 647)

Bag hooks Bag hooks keep carrier bags in place and pre- vent them from overturning and spreading their contents across the cargo area.

Along the sides

There is a bag hook in the side panel on each side of the cargo area.

IMPORTANT

The bag hooks may be loaded with a maxi- mum of 5 kg (11 lbs).

Related information Recommendations for loading (p. 579)

Fitting and removing the safety net* (p. 586)

Fitting and removing cargo cover* (p. 582)

Fitting and removing safety grilles* (p. 585)

Load retaining eyelets The folding load retaining eyelets are used to fasten straps in order to anchor items in the cargo area.

WARNING

Hard, sharp and/or heavy objects which pro- trude may cause injury under violent braking.

Always secure large and heavy objects with a seatbelt or cargo retaining straps.

Related information Recommendations for loading (p. 579)

Weights (p. 647)

LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

* Option/accessory.582

Through-load hatch in the rear seat The hatch in the rear seat's backrest can be opened to transport long narrow items, e.g. skis.

1. In the cargo area, grip the hatch's handle and fold down the hatch.

2. Fold forward the armrest in the rear seat.

If the private locking* function is used then the hatch must be closed.

Related information Recommendations for loading (p. 579)

Private locking (p. 260)

Load retaining eyelets (p. 581)

Fitting and removing cargo cover* In the extended position, the cargo cover and the rear panel prevent visual access to the cargo area.

Fitting cargo cover

Insert one of the cargo cover's end pieces in the recess in the side panel in the cargo area.

Then insert the other end piece in the recess in the side panel on the opposite side.

Ensure that the front panel is pointing down behind the backrests before the cassette is put in place.

Press down the end pieces on both sides - one by one.

> When a "click" is heard and the red mark- ing on each end piece has disappeared, the cargo cover is attached - check that it is affixed securely.

LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

* Option/accessory. 583

Installation of the tailgate panel

A panel must be fitted on the tailgate when using the cargo cover.

1. Turn the panel in the right direction with the screw side downward and guide the pin into the bracket on one side of the tailgate.

2. Clamp the panel slightly to facilitate guiding the pin into the equivalent bracket on the other side.

3. Press the two upper clips into the respective sockets in the tailgate so that they click into place.

Removing cargo cover In retracted position:

1. Depress the button on one of the retracted cargo cover's end pieces and lift out that end.

2. Angle the cover up/out carefully.

> The other end piece loosens automatically and the cover can be lifted out of the cargo area.

Removal of the tailgate panel If the cargo cover is not in use then the rear panel can be removed.

1. Pull the panel's upper clips straight out from the tailgate.

2. Carefully pull the panel away from the bracket on one side of the tailgate, and then from the other side. If necessary, clamp the panel slightly so that it is more flexible and to facilitate removal.

Related information Operating cargo cover* (p. 584)

Recommendations for loading (p. 579)

LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

* Option/accessory.584

Operating cargo cover* There are two extended positions for the cargo cover - a full-cover position and a loading posi- tion, where it is partially extended to make it eas- ier to reach further into the cargo area.

Full-cover position

Grip the handle and pull the cargo cover out to the end position.

Hook the attachment pins into the recesses at the cargo area's rear pillars.

> The cargo cover is locked in the full-cover position.

Cargo cover in full-cover position.

The rear panel fitted to the inside of the tailgate comple- ments the cargo cover.

Loading mode

From the full-cover position:

Press the cargo cover's handle section upwards slightly.

> The cover goes up until it stops in the loading position.

Returning to full-cover position from loading posi- tion:

1. Grip the handle and pull the cargo cover down to the end position. To facilitate, angle up the handle slightly so that the attachment pins pass the stops.

2. Release the handle so that the attachment pins engage.

> The cover is locked in the full-cover posi- tion.

LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

}}

* Option/accessory. 585

IMPORTANT

The cargo cover may obscure the view to the rear when in the loading position. Make sure the cargo cover is fully extended or fully retracted when driving.

Retracting 1. From the full-cover position:

Lift up the handle and pull it backward to dis- engage the cargo cover's attachment pins and then release.

From loading position:

Grip the handle and pull out the cargo cover in the grooves - pull to the full-cover position. Lift up the handle and pull it backward to dis- engage the attachment pins and then release.

2. Retract the cover with its attachment pins outside of the side panels until it stops in the retracted position.

Related information Fitting and removing cargo cover* (p. 582)

Fitting and removing safety grilles* The safety grille prevents loads or pets in the cargo area from being thrown forward in the passenger compartment. The safety grille is crash-tested in accordance with the ECE R17 legal requirement and fulfils Volvo's strength requirements.

For safety reasons, the safety grille must always be attached and anchored correctly.

WARNING

Under no circumstances may anybody remain in the cargo area while the car is moving. This is to avoid injury in the event of heavy braking or an accident.

Installation

IMPORTANT

The safety grille must only be used in the rear position (behind the rear seat) described here.

Before first installing the safety grille, the existing plastic roof mountings must be replaced with steel roof mountings. Volvo recommends that replacing roof mountings is performed at an authorised Volvo workshop or retailer.

1. Fold the rear seat's backrest forward.

2. Make sure that the safety grille is turned in the right direction. Lift in the safety grille through one of the rear side doors.

3. Position the safety grille's brackets on the roof mountings.

The next step is facilitated if two people hold the safety grille in the right position.

||

LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

* Option/accessory.586

4. Insert the supplied screw and tighten using the supplied 6 mm Allen key. Repeat on the other side. Recommended tightening torque: 20 Nm (15 foot-pounds).

> Check that the safety grille is properly fit- ted.

5. Restore the backrest to the upright position.

For more information about the tools required and methods for fitting/removal, see the installa- tion instructions that were included with the initial purchase.

IMPORTANT

The protective grille cannot be folded up or down when a cargo cover is fitted.

Related information Recommendations for loading (p. 579)

Load retaining eyelets (p. 581)

Fitting and removing the safety net* The safety net prevents loads from being thrown forward in the passenger compartment in the event of sudden braking. The safety net is fitted into four mounting points.

For reasons of safety, the safety net must always be fastened and anchored as described below.

The net is made of a strong nylon fabric and can be secured two different locations in the car:

Rear fitting - behind the rear seat.

Front fitting - behind the front seats.

WARNING

Loads in the luggage compartment must be anchored well, and also using a correctly fit- ted safety net.

Fitting the safety net

WARNING

It is necessary to ensure that the upper secur- ing points of the safety net are fitted correctly and that the puller-straps are hooked in prop- erly.

Damaged safety nets must not be used.

NOTE

With forward mounting, the safety net is most easily mounted via one of the rear doors.

1. Unfold the safety net and make sure that the split upper rod in the net is locked in its extended position.

2. Hook one retaining hook of the net into the front or rear roof mounting with the anchor- ing strap locks turned towards you.

3. Hook the net's other retaining hook into the roof mounting on the opposite side - the telescopic spring-loaded retaining hooks facilitate alignment.

Take care to press forward the net's retain- ing hooks for each respective roof moun- ting's front end position.

LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

587

4. Rear fitting: With the net fitted in the rear roof mountings, hook the safety net's anchor- ing straps into the front floor eyes in the cargo area.

Rear fitting.

Front fitting: With the net fitted in the front roof mountings, hook the anchoring straps into the outer eyes on the rear of the seat slide rails - it is easier if the backrests are straightened and the seats are moved for- ward slightly.

Front fitting.

Pay attention to make sure that you do not press the seat and backrest hard against the net when they are moved back again - only adjust until the seat or backrest makes con- tact with the net.

IMPORTANT

If a seat or backrest is pushed backwards hard into the safety net, the net and roof mounts may be damaged.

5. Tension the safety net with the anchoring straps.

Removing the safety net The safety net can be easily removed and folded up.

1. Reduce safety net tension by pressing the button in the anchoring strap lock and feed- ing out a little of the anchoring strap on each side.

2. Press in the catches and detach both of the anchoring strap's hooks.

3. Undo the upper attachments and release the net from the roof mountings.

4. Press the red button on the rod to enable folding and then roll up the net. Store the net in its case.

Related information Recommendations for loading (p. 579)

Load retaining eyelets (p. 581)

LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

588

First aid kit The first aid kit contains first aid equipment. Store the first aid kit behind the elastic strap on the right-hand side of the cargo area.

Related information Cargo area (p. 579)

Warning triangle Use the warning triangle to warn other road users if the car is stationary in traffic. Also activate the hazard warning flashers.

Storage spaces The warning triangle is located in the compart- ment on the inside of the tailgate.

Folding up the warning triangle Open the hatch by first turning the knob a quarter turn and then pulling the hatch from its brackets in the top and bottom edges.

Press the latch that secures the warning tri- angle slightly to the right and remove the case.

Remove the warning triangle from the case, unfold it and put the ends together.

Fold out the warning triangle's support legs.

Follow the regulations for the use of a warning triangle. Position the warning triangle in a suita- ble place with regard to traffic.

Make sure that the warning triangle and case are properly secured in their storage space and that the hatch is fully closed after use.

Related information Cargo area (p. 579)

Hazard warning flashers (p. 152)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

590

Volvo service programme To keep the car as safe and reliable as possible, follow the Volvo service programme as specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet.

Volvo recommends engaging an authorised Volvo workshop to perform the service and mainte- nance work. Volvo workshops have the personnel, special tools and service literature to guarantee the highest quality of service.

IMPORTANT

For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and follow the instructions in the Service and Warranty Booklet.

Service and repair Service the car regularly. Follow Volvo's recom- mended service intervals.

If inspection and repair are required then only an authorised Volvo workshop may carry out the work.

WARNING

Do not carry out any repairs of your own on this vehicle. Electrical cables and/or compo- nents that have detached must only be recti- fied by an authorised workshop - an author- ised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Charging cable with control unit

IMPORTANT

Do not modify the control unit in any way.

Related information Car status (p. 592)

Book service and repair (p. 593)

Connection of equipment to the car's diag- nostic socket (p. 40)

Servicing the climate control system (p. 598)

Brake system maintenance (p. 436)

Engine compartment overview (p. 599)

Data transfer between car and workshop via Wi-Fi Volvo's workshops have a specific Wi-Fi network for secure data transfer between your car and the workshop. Your workshop visit will be sim- pler and more efficient when the transfer of diag- nostic information and software can take place via the workshop's network. When you reach the workshop for your visit, your technician may want to connect your car to the workshop's network via Wi-Fi to perform fault- tracing and software download. For this type of communication, the car only connects to the workshop's network. It is therefore not possible to connect the car to another Wi-Fi network, such as at home, but only the workshop's specific net- work.

Manual connection to the workshop Manual connection is normally handled by the service technician. The technician uses your remote control key's buttons to connect the car, which is why it is important to bring a key with buttons with you for the workshop visit. Press three times on the lock button on the remote control key to connect the car to the workshop's network via Wi-Fi.

When the car is connected to a Wi-Fi network,

the symbol appears in the centre display.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

* Option/accessory. 591

WARNING

The car must not be driven when connected to the workshop's networks and systems.

Related information Managing system updates via the Download

Centre (p. 591)

Book service and repair (p. 593)

Download Center Several of the car's systems can be updated

from the centre display with an online car1.

The Download Centre app is started from app view in the centre display and enables:

searching for and updating system software

updating map data for Sensus Navigation*

downloading, updating and uninstalling apps.

Related information Managing system updates via the Download

Centre (p. 591)

Downloading apps (p. 494)

Updating apps (p. 495)

Deleting apps (p. 496)

Internet-connected car* (p. 526)

Navigating in the centre display's views (p. 107)

Managing system updates via the Download Centre System updates are intended for the online and infotainment components in the car. If system software updates are available, the updates can be made all at once or one at a time.

Searching for update For system updates to be pos- sible, the car must be con- nected to the Internet2.

System updates are handled via the Download Centre app in the centre display's applica-

tion view. If no search for available updates has been performed since the last time the infotain- ment system was started, a search is performed. No search is performed if a software installation is in progress. A number on the System updates button shows how many updates are available. A tap on the button shows a list of the updates that can be installed in the car. If an update is available, the New software updates available message is also shown in the centre display's status bar.

1 Data is transferred (data traffic) when using the Internet, and this may involve a cost. 2 Data is transferred (data traffic) when using the Internet, and this may involve a cost.

||

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

* Option/accessory.592

NOTE

Data download may affect other services that transmit data, e.g. Internet radio. If the effect on other services is experienced as disruptive then the download can be interrupted. Alter- natively, it may be appropriate to switch off or interrupt other services.

NOTE

An update can be interrupted when the igni- tion is switched off and the car is left.

However, the update does not have to be completed before the car is left, this is because the update is resumed the next time the car is used.

Update all system software Select Install all at the bottom of the list.

If no list is desired, then the Install all option can be selected at the System updates button instead.

Update individual system software programs Select Install for the software required.

Cancelling software download Tap on X in the activity indicator that has

replaced the button Install at the start of the download.

Note that only the download can be cancelled, when the installation phase has started, this can- not be cancelled.

Deactivating the background search for software update Automatic background search for software updates is activated when the car is delivered from the factory, but this function can be deacti- vated.

1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view.

2. Press System Download Centre.

3. Deselect Auto Software Update.

Related information Download Center (p. 591)

Internet-connected car* (p. 526)

Navigating in the centre display's views (p. 107)

Car status The car's general status can be shown in the centre display along with the opportunity to book

service3.

The Car status app is started from app view in the centre dis- play and has four tabs:

Messages - status messages

Status - checking the oil level

TPMS - checking the tyre pressure

Appointments - appointment information and car information3.

Related information Handling a message saved from the driver

display (p. 99)

Checking and filling with engine oil (p. 601)

Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 552)

Book service and repair (p. 593)

Sending car information to a workshop (p. 594)

Navigating in the centre display's views (p. 107)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

593

Book service and repair4

This service provides a convenient way to book a service and workshop visit directly in the car. When it is time for service, and in some cases when the car is in need of repair, a message will appear in the driver display and at the top of the centre display. The service date is determined by how much time has passed, hours that the engine has been running, or distance driven since the last service.

Before the service can be used Create a Volvo ID and register the Volvo ID

to the car.

Select the Volvo retailer you would like to contact by going to www.volvocars.com and logging in.

To send and receive booking information, the car must be connected to the Internet5.

Book a service When you decide to book a service from your car, the information will be sent via you Internet con- nection5.

Fill in the appointment request when desired or when a message stating that service or repairs are needed is shown in the driver display and at the top of the centre display.

1. Open the Car status app from the app view in the centre display.

2. Press the Appointments button.

3. Press the Request appointment button.

4. Make sure that the correct Volvo ID is filled in.

5. Make sure that the desired Workshop is filled in.

6. Fill in the field Tap to write information to the workshop if there is anything you would like done during the workshop visit or any other important information to your work- shop.

7. Press the Send appointment request but- ton.

> You will receive an appointment sugges- tion to your car within a couple of days6. You will also receive the same communi- cation via e-mail and when you go to www.volvocars.com and log in.

In certain markets, once you have sent the appointment request, the message that the car needs service is extinguished in the driver display.

8. Press the Cancel request button to cancel your request.

The booking enquiry sent from the car includes car information that facilitates workshop planning.

The retailer comes back with a digital booking proposal. You also have information on your retailer available in the car and can contact your workshop at any time.

Accept the appointment suggestion When the car has received an appointment sug- gestion, a message will be shown at the top of the centre display.

1. Tap the message.

3 Applies to certain markets. 4 Applies to certain markets. 5 Data is transferred (data traffic) when using the Internet, and this may involve a cost. 6 This time frame may vary depending on market.

||

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

* Option/accessory.594

2. If the suggested booking is acceptable, tap on the Accept button. Otherwise press either of the Send new proposal or Decline buttons.

For certain markets, the system reminds you of a scheduled appointment time as it approaches and the navigation system7 can also guide you to the workshop when the time comes.

Related information Car status (p. 592)

Sending car information to a workshop (p. 594)

Navigating in the centre display's views (p. 107)

Volvo ID (p. 28)

Internet-connected car* (p. 526)

Sending car information to a workshop8

It is possible to send information for the car at any time, e.g. if you book a workshop appoint- ment and want to help your workshop by provid- ing them with better data so that your visit can be planned. Sending car information is not the same as booking a service appointment.

1. Open the Car status app from the app view in the centre display.

2. Press the Appointments button.

3. Press the Send car data button.

> A message that vehicle data are being sent is shown at the top of the centre dis- play. You can cancel data transmission by tapping the X in the activity indicator.

The information is sent via the car's Inter- net connection9.

This car information can be accessed by any retailer if they have the car's identification num- ber (VIN10).

Car information content The data sent is the last information saved (the last time the car was running) and includes infor- mation in the following areas:

service requirement

time since last service

function status

fluid levels

meter reading

the car's vehicle identification number (VIN10)

the car's software version

the car's diagnostics data.

Related information Book service and repair (p. 593)

Car status (p. 592)

Navigating in the centre display's views (p. 107)

Internet-connected car* (p. 526)

7 Applies to Sensus Navigation*. 8 Applies to certain markets. 9 Data is transferred (data traffic) when using the Internet, and this may involve a cost. 10 Vehicle Identification Number.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

* Option/accessory. 595

Raise the car When raising the car it is important that the car jack or the workshop/garage jack is fitted to the intended points on the cars underbody.

For cars with level control*, air suspension, if fit- ted, must be switched off before the car is raised. Deactivating the function via the centre display.

WARNING

If the car is raised using a workshop jack, this must be placed beneath one of the four jack- ing points. Take care to position the workshop jack so that the car cannot slip off. Make sure that the jack plate is fitted with a rubber guard so that the car remains stable and is not dam- aged. Always use axle stands or similar.

NOTE

Volvo recommends only using the jack that belongs to the car model in question. If a jack is selected other than the one recommended by Volvo, follow the instructions supplied with the equipment.

The normal car jack is only designed for occa- sional, short-term use, such as when chang- ing a wheel after a puncture. If the car is to be jacked up more often, or for a longer time than is required just to change a wheel, use of a garage jack is recommended. In this instance, follow the instructions for use that come with the equipment.

||

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

* Option/accessory.596

The triangles in the plastic cover indicate the locations of the lifting points (marked in red).

Related information Removing a wheel (p. 559)

Jack* (p. 557)

Settings for level control* (p. 457)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

597

Opening and closing the bonnet The bonnet can be opened using the handle in the passenger compartment and a handle under the bonnet.

Open the bonnet

Pull the handle near the foot pedals to release the bonnet from its fully closed posi- tion.

Sweep from left to right in the opening under the bonnet, move the handle up and to the side to release the bonnet from the bonnet lock's catch and lift the bonnet.

Warning - bonnet not closed When the bonnet is released, the warn- ing symbol and the graphics in the driver display will light up and an acoustic reminder will sound. If the car

starts rolling, an acoustic warning signal will repeat.

NOTE

If the warning symbol is lit or the warning sig- nal is heard despite the bonnet being closed properly, contact an authorised Volvo work- shop.

Close the bonnet 1. Push the bonnet down until it starts to fall

from its own weight.

2. When the bonnet stops against the lock catch, push the bonnet to close it completely.

WARNING

Risk of crushing! Ensure that the closing path under the bonnet is not obstructed, otherwise there is a risk of personal injury.

WARNING

Check that the bonnet locks properly when closed. The bonnet must engage at both sides audibly.

Bonnet not completely closed. The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.

||

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

598

Bonnet completely closed. The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.

WARNING

Never drive with an open bonnet!

If there are any signs that the bonnet is not properly closed whilst driving, stop immedi- ately and close it.

Related information Engine compartment overview (p. 599)

Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 49)

Servicing the climate control system The air conditioning system must only be serv- iced and repaired by an authorised workshop.

Troubleshooting and repair The air conditioning system contains fluorescent tracing agents. Ultraviolet light must be used dur- ing leak detection.

Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop is contacted.

Cars with R134a refrigerant

WARNING

The air conditioning system contains pressur- ised refrigerant R134a. This system must only be serviced and repaired by an authorised workshop.

Cars with R1234yf refrigerant

WARNING

The air conditioning system contains pressur- ised refrigerant R1234yf. In accordance with SAE J2845 (Technician Training for Safe Service and Containment of Refrigerants Used in Mobile A/C System), service and repair of the refrigerant system must only be performed by trained and certified technicians in order to ensure the safety of the system.

Related information Volvo service programme (p. 590)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

* Option/accessory. 599

Head-up display when replacing the windscreen* Cars with head-up display are equipped with a special type of windscreen that meets the requirements for displaying the projected image.

Volvo recommends that you contact an author- ised Volvo workshop when replacing the wind- screen. The correct version of the windscreen must be fitted in order that the head-up display's graphics shall be displayed correctly.

Related information Head-up display* (p. 134)

Cleaning the head up display* (p. 624)

Engine compartment overview The overview shows some service-related com- ponents. Some of the components included in the car's electric drive system are located under the bon- net. Exercise caution in this area and only touch anything that is related to normal maintenance.

WARNING

Orange-coloured cables must only be handled by qualified personnel.

WARNING

Several components in the car work with high-voltage current that could be dangerous in the event of incorrect intervention.

Do not touch anything that is not clearly described in this owner's manual.

Exercise caution when checking/refilling fluids in the engine compartment.

The appearance of the engine compartment may differ depending on model and engine variant.

Coolant expansion tank

Reservoir for brake fluid (located on the driv- er's side)

Washer fluid filler pipe11

Central electrical unit

Air filter

Engine oil filler pipe

11 Fill the washer fluid at regular intervals, e.g. when refuelling.

||

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

600

WARNING

Remember that the radiator fan (located at the front of the engine compartment, behind the radiator) may start or continue to operate automatically for up to approx. 6 minutes after the engine has been switched off.

Always have the engine cleaned by a work- shop - an authorised Volvo workshop is rec- ommended. There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot.

WARNING

The ignition system works at a very high and hazardous voltage. The car's electrical system must always be in ignition position 0 when work is being performed in the engine com- partment.

Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition coil when the car's electrical system is in ignition position II or when the engine is hot.

Related information Opening and closing the bonnet (p. 597)

Filling washer fluid (p. 639)

Topping up coolant (p. 602)

Fuses in engine compartment (p. 612)

Checking and filling with engine oil (p. 601)

Ignition positions (p. 430)

Engine oil An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service intervals and war- ranty can be applied.

Volvo recommends:

If the engine oil cannot be checked on a regular basis and the level falls too low, there is a risk that this will cause serious damage to the engine.

IMPORTANT

In order to fulfil the requirements for the engine's service intervals all engines are filled with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil has been made very carefully with regard to service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact.

An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service intervals can be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil for both filling and oil change, otherwise there is a risk of the service life, starting characte- ristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact of the car being affected.

If engine oil of the prescribed grade and vis- cosity is not used, engine related components may become damaged. Volvo Car Corporation disclaims any liability for any such damage.

Volvo recommends that oil changes are car- ried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.

Volvo uses different systems to warn about the oil level if it is too low/high, or in the event of low oil pressure. Certain engine variants have an oil pressure sensor, and then the driver display's

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

601

warning symbol for low oil pressure is used. Other variants have an oil level sensor, when the driver is informed via the driver display's

warning symbol and display texts. Certain variants have both systems. Contact a Volvo retailer for more information.

Change the engine oil and oil filter in accordance with the intervals specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet. Using oil of a higher than specified grade is permitted. If the car is driven in adverse conditions, Volvo recommends using an oil of a higher grade than the one specified.

Related information Checking and filling with engine oil

(p. 601)

Engine oil specifications (p. 651)

Adverse driving conditions for engine oil (p. 652)

Checking and filling with engine oil The oil level is detected with the electronic oil level sensor.

Filler pipe12.

In some cases, oil may need to be topped up between service intervals.

No action with regard to engine oil level needs to be taken until a message is shown in the driver display.

WARNING

If this symbol is shown together with the message Engine oil level Service required, visit a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is

recommended. The oil level may be too high.

IMPORTANT

If this symbol is shown together with a message about low oil level, such as Engine oil level low Refill 1 litre for example, then only

fill the volume specified, e.g. 1 litre (1 quart).

WARNING

Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold due to the risk of fire.

See oil level in the centre display The oil level is visualised using the electronic oil level gauge in the centre display when the car has been started. The oil level should be checked regularly.

1. Open the Car status app from the app view in the centre display.

2. Press Status to show the oil level.

12 Engines with electronic oil level sensor do not have a dipstick.

||

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

602

Graphics for oil level in the centre display.

NOTE

The system cannot directly detect changes when the oil is filled or drained. The car must have been driven approx. 30 km (approx. 20 miles) and have been stationary for 5 minutes with the engine switched off and on level ground before the oil level indication is correct.

NOTE

If the right conditions for measuring the oil level (time after engine shutdown, the car's inclination, outside temperature, etc.) are not met, then the message No value available will be shown in the centre display. This does not mean that there is something wrong in the car's systems.

Related information Engine oil (p. 600)

Adverse driving conditions for engine oil (p. 652)

Engine oil specifications (p. 651)

Ignition positions (p. 430)

Car status (p. 592)

Topping up coolant The coolant cools the internal combustion engine to the correct operating temperature. The heat that is transferred from the engine to the coolant can be used to heat the passenger com- partment.

When topping up the coolant, follow the instruc- tions on the packaging. Never top up with water only. The risk of freezing increases with both too little and too much coolant concentrate.

If there is coolant under the car, if there is cool- ant smoke, or if more than 2 litres (approx. 2 quarts) have been filled, always call for recovery to avoid the risk of engine damage due to a defective cooling system when attempting to start the car.

WARNING

The coolant may be very hot. Never open the cap when the coolant is hot. If a top-up is required, unscrew the expansion tank cap slowly to allow any overpressure to disappear.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

603

Coolant expansion tank, left-hand drive car.

Screw off the cap in the plastic cover.

Screw off the cap and top up with coolant if necessary. The coolant level must not exceed the yellow MAX mark inside the expansion tank.

Reinstall the parts in reverse order.

Coolant expansion tank, right-hand drive car.

Grip the hatch's handle and lift/jiggle the hatch from the plastic cover.

Screw off the cap and top up with coolant if necessary. The coolant level must not exceed the yellow MAX mark inside the expansion tank.

Reinstall the parts in reverse order.

||

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

604

IMPORTANT

Mix the coolant with approved quality water. In the event of any doubt about water quality, used ready-mixed coolant in accordance with Volvo recommendations.

Make sure that the coolant mixture is 50% water and 50% coolant.

Always use coolant with anti-corrosion agent as recommended by Volvo.

Only new coolant should be used when replacing major cooling system compo- nents to ensure the system has sufficient corrosion protection.

The engine must only be run with a well- filled cooling system. Otherwise, tempera- tures that are too high may occur result- ing in the risk of damage (cracks) in the cylinder head.

A high content of chlorine, chlorides and other salts may cause corrosion in the cooling system.

Related information Engine compartment overview (p. 599)

Coolant specifications (p. 653)

Bulb replacement Halogen headlamps are not available for all models and markets. Contact a Volvo retailer for more information.

An LED13 type lamp must be replaced by a workshop. An authorised Volvo workshop is rec- ommended.

NOTE

For information about bulbs not covered in this article, contact a Volvo dealer or a certi- fied Volvo service technician.

NOTE

Outside lighting such as headlamps and rear lamps may temporarily have condensation on the inside of the lens. This is normal, all exte- rior lighting is designed to withstand this. Condensation is normally vented out of the lamp housing when the lamp has been switched on for a time.

Related information Bulb specifications (p. 604)

Bulb specifications The specifications apply to bulbs in halogen headlamps.

Contact a workshop14 if faults occur in other lamps.

Function WA Type

Dipped beam 55 H7

Main beam 65 H9

Front direction indicators 24 PWY24W

daytime running lights/ position lamps, front

21/5 W21/5W

A Watt

Related information Bulb replacement (p. 604)

13 LED (Ligth Emitting Diode) 14 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

605

Starter battery The electrical system is single-pole and uses the chassis and engine casing as a conductor.

The starter battery is used to start up the electri- cal system and drive electrical equipment in the car. The hybrid battery is used when the internal combustion engine is started.

The starter battery should be replaced by a

workshop15.

The starter battery is a 12 V AGM battery (Absorbed Glass Mat), designed for regenerative charging, and to support the functionality of the car's different systems.

The service life and function of the starter battery is influenced by factors such as the number of starts, discharging, driving style, driving condi- tions, climatic conditions etc.

Never disconnect the starter battery when the engine is running.

Check that the cables to the starter battery are correctly connected and properly tight- ened.

WARNING

The battery can generate oxyhydrogen gas, which is highly explosive. A spark can be formed if a jump lead is connected incorrectly, and this can be enough for the battery to explode.

Do not connect the jump leads to any fuel system component or any moving part. Be careful of hot engine parts.

The battery contains sulphuric acid, which can cause serious burns.

If sulphuric acid comes into contact with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large quantities of water. If acid splashes into the eyes - seek medical attention imme- diately.

Never smoke near the battery.

Charging points When connecting an external starter battery or battery charger, use the car's charging points in the engine compartment.

The battery terminals on the car's starter battery in the luggage/cargo area must not be used.

Positive charging point

Negative charging point

IMPORTANT

It is not possible to charge another cars bat- tery by means of current through the charging points. Using the charging points to charge another car's battery may cause a fuse to blow, which means that the charging points will stop working.

15 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

||

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

606

IMPORTANT

When charging the starter battery, only use a modern battery charger with controlled charg- ing voltage. Fast charging function must not be used since it may damage the battery.

NOTE

If both the starter battery and the hybrid bat- tery are discharged then both batteries must be charged. In such a case, charging only the hybrid battery first is not possible.

In order for the hybrid battery to be charged the starter battery must have a certain state of charge.

IMPORTANT

If the following instruction is not observed then the energy saving function for infotain- ment may be temporarily disengaged, and/or the message in the driver display about the starter battery's state of charge may be tem- porarily inapplicable, following the connection of an external starter battery or battery charger:

The negative battery terminal on the car's starter battery must never be used for connecting an external starter battery or battery charger - only the car's negative charging point may be used as the grounding point.

NOTE

The life of the battery is shortened if it becomes discharged repeatedly.

The life of the battery is affected by several factors, including driving conditions and cli- mate. Battery starting capacity decreases gradually with time and therefore needs to be recharged if the car is not used for a longer time or when it is only driven short distances. Extreme cold further limits starting capacity.

To maintain the battery in good condition, at least 15 minutes of driving/week is recom- mended or that the battery is connected to a battery charger with automatic trickle charg- ing.

A battery that is kept fully charged has a maximum service life.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

607

Location

The starter battery is located in the cargo area.

WARNING

If the starter battery is disconnected, the automatic opening and closing function must be reset to work properly. A reset must take place for pinch protection to work.

Specifications

Battery H8 AGM

Voltage (V) 12

Cold start capacityA - CCAB (A) 850

Size, LBH 353175190 mm (13.96.97.5 inches)

Capacity (Ah) 95

A According to EN standard. B Cold Cranking Amperes.

Volvo recommends entrusting battery replace- ment to an authorised Volvo workshop.

16 Absorbed Glass Mat.

||

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

608

IMPORTANT

When replacing the starter battery, a battery of AGM16 type must be fitted.

IMPORTANT

If the starter battery is replaced, make sure you replace it with a battery with the same cold starting capacity and type as the original battery (see the label on the battery).

NOTE

The starter battery's container size must be consistent with the dimensions for the origi- nal battery.

Related information Symbols on the batteries (p. 610)

Hybrid battery (p. 609)

Using jump starting with another battery (p. 472)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

609

Hybrid battery The car is equipped with a hybrid battery for electric motor operation - a maintenance-free rechargeable Lithium-ion type battery.

NOTE

The car cannot be started if the hybrid battery is discharged.

NOTE

If both the starter battery and the hybrid bat- tery are discharged then both batteries must be charged. In such a case, charging only the hybrid battery first is not possible.

In order for the hybrid battery to be charged the starter battery must have a certain state of charge.

WARNING

The hybrid battery must only be replaced by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Coolant The hybrid battery's cooling system has a sepa- rate expansion tank.

IMPORTANT

The hybrid battery's coolant must only be top- ped up by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Specifications Type: Lithium-ion

Total amount of energy: 10.4 kWh.

NOTE

The capacity of the hybrid battery diminishes with age and use, which may result in increased use of the internal combustion engine and, as a consequence, reduced fuel economy and reduced range during electric operation.

Related information Symbols on the batteries (p. 610)

Starter battery (p. 605)

Charging the hybrid battery (p. 407)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

610

Symbols on the batteries There are information and warning symbols on the batteries.

Use protective goggles.

Further information in the owner's manual for the car.

Store the battery out of the reach of children.

The battery contains corro- sive acid.

Avoid sparks and naked flames.

Risk of explosion.

Must be taken for recycling.

NOTE

An expended battery must be recycled in an environmentally safe manner as it contains lead.

Related information Starter battery (p. 605)

Hybrid battery (p. 609)

Fuses and central electrical units All electrical functions and components are pro- tected by a number of fuses in order to protect the car's electrical system from damage by short circuiting or overloading.

WARNING

Never use a foreign object or a fuse with an amperage higher than that specified when replacing a fuse. This could cause significant damage to the electrical system and possibly lead to fire.

WARNING

Orange-coloured cables must only be handled by qualified personnel.

WARNING

Several components in the car work with high-voltage current that could be dangerous in the event of incorrect intervention.

Do not touch anything that is not clearly described in this owner's manual.

If an electrical component or function does not work, it may be because the component's fuse was temporarily overloaded and failed. If the same fuse fails repeatedly then there is a fault in the circuit. Volvo recommends contacting an authorised Volvo workshop for checking.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

611

Location of central electrical units

The figure is schematic - appearance may vary depend- ing on car model.

Central electrical unit locations in a left-hand drive car. In a right-hand drive car the central electrical units under the glovebox change sides.

Engine compartment

Under the glovebox

Cargo area

Related information Replacing a fuse (p. 611)

Fuses in cargo area (p. 619)

Fuses in engine compartment (p. 612)

Fuses under glovebox (p. 616)

Replacing a fuse All electrical functions and components are pro- tected by a number of fuses in order to protect the car's electrical system from damage by short circuiting or overloading.

1. Look in the fuse diagram to locate the fuse.

2. Pull out the fuse and check from the side to see whether the curved wire has blown.

3. If this is the case, replace it with a new fuse of the same colour and amperage.

WARNING

Never use a foreign object or a fuse with an amperage higher than that specified when replacing a fuse. This could cause significant damage to the electrical system and possibly lead to fire.

WARNING

Contact an authorised Volvo workshop about the fuses not mentioned in the owner's man- ual. If this is not performed correctly, it can cause serious damage to the electrical sys- tems.

Related information Fuses and central electrical units (p. 610)

Fuses in cargo area (p. 619)

Fuses in engine compartment (p. 612)

Fuses under glovebox (p. 616)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

612

Fuses in engine compartment Fuses in the engine compartment protect engine and brake functions, amongst other things.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

613

On the inside of the cover there are tweezers that facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting of fuses.

The fuse box also provides space for several spare fuses.

Positions On the inside of the cover is a label that shows the location of the fuses.

Fuses 1-13, 18-30, 35-37 and 46-70 are of the "Micro" type.

Fuses 14-17, 31-34, 38-45 and 71-78 are of the "MCase" type and should be replaced by a workshop17.

Function AA

Control module for actuator for engagement/change of auto- matic gearbox gear positions

5

Control module for the high-volt- age heater of the internal com- bustion engine's coolant

5

Function AA

Control module for air condition- ing; Shut-off valve for heat exchanger; Shut-off valve for coolant that passes through the climate control system

5

Control module for hybrid bat- tery; High voltage converter for combined high-voltage genera- tor/starter motor with voltage converter 500 V-12 V

5

Converter for control of the sup- ply to the rear axle's electric motor

10

Control module for hybrid bat- tery; High voltage converter for combined high-voltage genera- tor/starter motor with voltage converter 500 V-12 V

10

Charging unit 5

Shut-off valve for the hybrid bat- tery's coolant; Coolant pump 1 for hybrid battery

10

Function AA

Coolant pump for electric drive system

10

Cooling fan for hybrid compo- nents

25

12 V socket in tunnel console, front

15

12 V socket in tunnel console, by legroom for second seat row

15

17 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

||

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

* Option/accessory.614

Function AA

12 V socket in cargo area*

USB ports for iPad holder

15

Left-hand headlamp, certain variants of LEDB

15

Right-hand headlamp, certain variants of LEDB

15

Heated windscreen* left-hand side

Shunt

Heated windscreen* left-hand side

40

Headlamp washers* 25

Windscreen washers 25

Horn 20

Siren* 5

Control module for brake system (valves, parking brake)

40

Windscreen wipers 30

Function AA

Rear window washer 25

Heated windscreen* right-hand side

40

Parking heater* 20

Control unit for brake system (ABS pump)

40

Heated windscreen* right-hand side

Shunt

Supplied when the ignition is switched on: Engine control module; Transmission compo- nents; Electric steering servo; Central electronic module

5

Exterior car noise (certain mar- kets)

5

Right-hand headlamp 7,5

Right-hand headlamp, certain variants of LEDB

15

Alcohol lock 5

Function AA

Airbags 5

Left-hand headlamp 7,5

Left-hand headlamp, certain variants of LEDB

15

Accelerator pedal sensor 5

Transmission control module; Control module for gear selector

15

Engine Control Module (ECM) 5

Engine control module; Actuator; Throttle unit; Valve for turbo- charger

20

Solenoids; Valve; Thermostat for engine cooling system

10

Vacuum regulators; Valve 7,5

Control module, spoiler roller cover; Control module, radiator roller cover

5

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

615

Function AA

Lambda-sond, front; Lambda- sond, rear

15

Solenoid for engine oil pump; Solenoid clutch A/C; Lambda sond, centre

15

Engine Control Module (ECM) 20

Ignition coils; Spark plugs 15

Control module for transmission fluid pump

30

Control module for vacuum pump

40

Actuator for transmission 25

A Ampere B LED (Light Emitting Diode)

Related information Fuses and central electrical units (p. 610)

Replacing a fuse (p. 611)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

616

Fuses under glovebox Fuses under the glovebox protect, amongst other things, electrical sockets, displays and door modules.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

* Option/accessory. 617

On the inside of the cover there are tweezers that facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting of fuses.

The fuse box in the engine compartment also provides space for several spare fuses.

Positions Fuses 1, 3-21, 23-36, 39-53 and 55-59 are

of the "Micro" type.

Fuses 2, 22, 37-38 and 54 are of the "MCase" type and should be replaced by a workshop18.

Function AA

Movement detector* 5

Media player 5

Driver display 5

Keypad in centre console 5

Sun sensor 5

Function AA

Steering wheel module 5

Module for start knob and for park- ing brake control

5

Steering wheel module for heated steering wheel*

15

Control module for climate control system

10

Steering lock 7,5

Diagnostic socket OBDII 10

Centre display 5

Fan module for climate control sys- tem, front

40

USB HUB 5

Function AA

Controls lighting; Interior lighting; Dimming of interior rearview mir- ror*; Rain and light sensor*; Keypad in tunnel console, by legroom for rear seat*; Power front seats*; Con- trol panels in rear doors; Fan mod- ule for climate control left/right

7,5

Control module for driver support functions

5

Panorama roof with sun blind* 20

Head-up display* 5

Passenger compartment lighting 5

Display in roof console (Seatbelt reminder/Indicator for airbag on the front passenger seat)

5

Humidity sensor 5

Door module in right-hand rear door

20

Fuses in cargo area 10

18 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

||

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

* Option/accessory.618

Function AA

Control module for online car; Con- trol module for Volvo On Call

5

Door module in left-hand rear door 20

Audio control module (amplifier) (certain variants)

40

Module for multi-band antenna 5

Modules for seat comfort (mas- sage) front*

5

Alcohol lock 5

Rear window wiper 15

Control module for fuel pump 15

Relay coils in central electrical unit in engine compartment; relay coil for transmission fluid pump

5

Seat heating, driver's side front 15

Seat heating, passenger side front 15

Coolant pump 10

Function AA

Door module in left-hand front door 20

Control module for suspension (active chassis)*

20

Sensus control module 10

Door module in right-hand front door

20

TV* (certain markets) 5

Primary fuse for fuses 53 and 58 15

A Ampere

Related information Fuses and central electrical units (p. 610)

Replacing a fuse (p. 611)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

* Option/accessory. 619

Fuses in cargo area Fuses in the cargo area protect, amongst other things, power seats*, airbags and seatbelt ten- sioners.

||

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

620

The central electrical unit is located on the right-hand side.

On the inside of the cover there are tweezers that facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting of fuses.

The fuse box in the engine compartment also provides space for several spare fuses.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

* Option/accessory. 621

Positions Fuses 13-17 and 21-36 are of the "Micro"

type.

Fuses 1-12, 18-20 and 37 are of the "MCase" type and should be replaced by a workshop19.

Function AA

Rear window defroster 30

Compressor for air suspension* 40

Lock motor for backrest on rear right-hand side

15

Lock motor for backrest on rear left-hand side

15

Control module for reduction of nitrous oxides (diesel)

30

Power operated tailgate* 25

Electrically operated front passen- ger seat*

20

Function AA

Towbar control module* 40

Seatbelt pretensioner module, right-hand side

40

Internal relay coils 5

Control module for reduction of nitrous oxides (diesel)

15

Module for detecting foot move- ment* (for opening the power oper- ated tailgate)

5

Alcohol lock, USB hub/accessory port

5

Towbar control module* 25

Power driver seat* 20

Seatbelt pretensioner module, left- hand side

40

Parking camera* 5

Function AA

Supply when the ignition is switched on

10

Control module for airbags and seatbelt tensioners

5

Seat heating left-hand side rear* 15

Blind Spot Information (BLIS)*: control module, exterior reversing sound

5

Seatbelt pretensioner modules 5

Actuator for exhaust gases (petrol, certain engine variants)

5

19 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

||

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

* Option/accessory.622

Function AA

Seat heating right-hand side rear* 15

A Ampere

Related information Fuses and central electrical units (p. 610)

Replacing a fuse (p. 611)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

623

Cleaning the interior Only use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and treat stains at once for best results. Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaning agents.

IMPORTANT

Certain items of coloured clothing (e.g. dark jeans and suede garments) may stain the upholstery. If this occurs, it is important to clean and treat these parts of the upholstery as soon as possible.

Never use strong solvents such as washer fluid, pure petrol or white spirit or concentrated alcohol to clean the interior, since this may damage the upholstery as well as other interior materials.

Never spray the cleaning agent directly onto components that have electrical but- tons and controls. Wipe them instead using a moistened cloth containing the cleaning agent.

Sharp objects and Velcro may damage the fabric upholstery.

Related information Cleaning the centre display (p. 623)

Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining (p. 625)

Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 625)

Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats (p. 625)

Cleaning leather upholstery (p. 626)

Cleaning the leather steering wheel (p. 627)

Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood parts (p. 627)

Cleaning the centre display Dirt, stains and grease from fingers can affect the centre display's performance and readability. Clean the screen frequently with a microfibre cloth.

To clean the centre display:

1. Turn off the centre display with a long press on the home button.

2. Wipe the screen with the microfibre cloth supplied or use another microfibre cloth of equivalent quality. The screen should be wiped with a clean and dry microfibre cloth with small circular movements. If necessary, lightly moisten the microfibre cloth with clean water.

3. Activate the display with a short press on the home button.

||

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

* Option/accessory.624

IMPORTANT

The microfibre cloth used to clean the centre display must be free from sand and dirt.

IMPORTANT

When cleaning the centre display, only use gentle pressure on the screen. Heavy pres- sure can damage the screen.

IMPORTANT

Do not spray any liquid or caustic chemicals directly on the centre display. Do not use win- dow cleaning agent, other cleaning agents, aerosol spray, solvents, alcohol, ammonia or cleaning agent containing abrasive.

Never use abrasive cloths, paper towels or tis- sue paper, these can scratch the centre dis- play.

Related information Cleaning the interior (p. 623)

Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining (p. 625)

Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 625)

Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats (p. 625)

Cleaning leather upholstery (p. 626)

Cleaning the leather steering wheel (p. 627)

Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood parts (p. 627)

Cleaning the head up display* Gently wipe the display's cover glass with a clean and dry microfibre cloth. If necessary, lightly moisten the microfibre cloth.

Never use strong stain removers. A special clean- ing agent available from Volvo retailers can be used for more difficult cleaning.

Related information Activating and deactivating the head-up dis-

play* (p. 136)

Head-up display* (p. 134)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

625

Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining Only use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and treat stains at once for best results. Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaning agents.

Fabric upholstery and ceiling upholstery Never scrape or rub a stain since this risks destroying the upholstery. Never use strong stain removers since this risks destroying the colour of the upholstery.

Related information Cleaning the interior (p. 623)

Cleaning the centre display (p. 623)

Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 625)

Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats (p. 625)

Cleaning leather upholstery (p. 626)

Cleaning the leather steering wheel (p. 627)

Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood parts (p. 627)

Cleaning the seatbelts Only use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and treat stains at once for best results. Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaning agents.

Seatbelts Use water and a synthetic detergent. A special textile cleaning agent is available from Volvo retailers. Ensure that the seatbelt is dry before allowing it to retract.

Related information Cleaning the interior (p. 623)

Cleaning the centre display (p. 623)

Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining (p. 625)

Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats (p. 625)

Cleaning leather upholstery (p. 626)

Cleaning the leather steering wheel (p. 627)

Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood parts (p. 627)

Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats Only use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and treat stains at once for best results. Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaning agents.

Inlay mats and floor mat Remove inlaid carpets for separate cleaning of the floor carpet and the inlaid carpets. Use a vac- uum cleaner to remove dust and dirt. Each inlay mat is secured with pins.

Remove the inlay mat by taking hold of the inlay mat at each pin and lifting the mat straight up.

Fit the inlay mat in place by pressing it in at each pin.

WARNING

Only use one inlaid mat at each seat, and check before setting off that the mat by the driver's seat is firmly affixed and secured in the pins so that it does not get caught adja- cent to and under the pedals.

A special textile cleaner is recommended for stains on the floor mat after vacuuming. Floor mats should be cleaned with agents recom- mended by Volvo retailers.

Related information Cleaning the interior (p. 623)

Cleaning the centre display (p. 623)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

* Option/accessory.626

Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining (p. 625)

Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 625)

Cleaning leather upholstery (p. 626)

Cleaning the leather steering wheel (p. 627)

Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood parts (p. 627)

Cleaning leather upholstery Only use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and treat stains at once for best results. Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaning agents.

Leather upholstery* Volvo's leather upholstery is treated to preserve its original appearance.

Leather upholstery is a natural product that changes and acquires a beautiful patina over time. Regular cleaning and treatment are required in order that the properties and colours of the leather shall be preserved. Volvo offers a comprehensive product Volvo Leather Care Kit/ Wipes for the cleaning and treatment of leather upholstery which, when used in accordance with the instructions, preserves the leather's protective coating.

To achieve best results, Volvo recommends cleaning and application of the protective cream one to four times per year (or more if required). Volvo Leather Care Kit/Wipes is available from Volvo retailers.

Cleaning the leather upholstery 1. Apply the leather cleaner to a damp sponge

and squeeze until a foam is created.

2. Use the sponge on the stain in a circular motion.

3. Thoroughly dampen the stain using the sponge, allow the sponge to absorb the stain without scrubbing.

4. Wipe the stain with a soft cloth and allow the leather to dry thoroughly

Protecting the leather upholstery 1. Apply a small amount of leather protective

agent to a cloth and then apply it to the leather in light circular motions.

2. Allow to dry for about 20 minutes.

Protecting the leather upholstery makes it more resistant to the stresses from the sun's UV radia- tion.

Related information Cleaning the interior (p. 623)

Cleaning the centre display (p. 623)

Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining (p. 625)

Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 625)

Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats (p. 625)

Cleaning the leather steering wheel (p. 627)

Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood parts (p. 627)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

627

Cleaning the leather steering wheel Only use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and treat stains at once for best results. Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaning agents.

Leather steering wheel Leather needs to breathe. Never cover the leather steering wheel with protective plastic. We recommend Volvo Leather Care Kit/Wipes for cleaning the leather steering wheel. First remove dirt, dust, etc. with a damp sponge or cloth.

IMPORTANT

Sharp objects, e.g. rings, can damage the leather on the steering wheel.

Related information Cleaning the interior (p. 623)

Cleaning the centre display (p. 623)

Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining (p. 625)

Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 625)

Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats (p. 625)

Cleaning leather upholstery (p. 626)

Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood parts (p. 627)

Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood parts Only use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and treat stains at once for best results.

Interior plastic, metal and wood parts A fibrillated fibre or microfibre cloth, lightly mois- tened with water, available from Volvo retailers, is recommended for cleaning interior parts and sur- faces.

Do not scrape or rub stains. Never use strong stain removers.

IMPORTANT

Do not use solvent that contains alcohol when cleaning the glass for the driver display.

IMPORTANT

Keep in mind that high gloss surfaces are easily scratched. Clean these surfaces with a clean, dry microfibre cloth using small, circular motions. If needed, dampen the microfibre cloth with a little clean water.

Related information Cleaning the interior (p. 623)

Cleaning the centre display (p. 623)

Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining (p. 625)

Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 625)

Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats (p. 625)

Cleaning leather upholstery (p. 626)

Cleaning the leather steering wheel (p. 627)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

628

Cleaning the exterior The car should be washed as soon as it becomes dirty. This means that the car is easier to clean since the dirt does not attach as firmly. It also reduces the risk of scratches and keeps the car fresh. Wash the car in a car wash with oil separator. Use car shampoo.

Related information Cleaning the exterior (p. 628)

Polishing and waxing (p. 628)

Handwashing (p. 629)

Automatic car wash (p. 630)

High-pressure washing (p. 631)

Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 631)

Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim components (p. 632)

Cleaning wheel rims (p. 633)

Rustproofing (p. 633)

Polishing and waxing Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull or to give the paintwork extra protection. The car does not need to be polished until it is at least one year old. However, the car can be waxed during this time. Do not polish or wax the car in direct sunlight, the surface being polished should be a maximum of 45 C (113 F).

Wash and dry the car thoroughly before you begin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphalt and tar stains using tar remover or white spi- rit. More stubborn stains can be removed using fine rubbing paste designed for car paintwork.

Polish first with a polish and then wax with liquid or solid wax. Follow the instructions on the packaging carefully. Many preparations contain both polish and wax.

IMPORTANT

Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and rubber.

When using degreasant on plastic and rubber, only rub with light pressure if it is necessary. Use a soft washing sponge.

Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear away or damage the glossy surface layer.

Polishing agent that contains abrasive must not be used.

IMPORTANT

Only paint treatment recommended by Volvo should be used. Other treatment such as pre- serving, sealing, protection, lustre sealing or similar could damage the paintwork. Paint- work damage caused by such treatments is not covered by Volvo warranty.

Related information Cleaning the exterior (p. 628)

Handwashing (p. 629)

Automatic car wash (p. 630)

High-pressure washing (p. 631)

Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 631)

Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim components (p. 632)

Cleaning wheel rims (p. 633)

Rustproofing (p. 633)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

629

Handwashing The car should be washed as soon as it becomes dirty. This means that the car is easier to clean since the dirt does not attach as firmly. It also reduces the risk of scratches and keeps the car fresh. Wash the car in a car wash with oil separator. Use car shampoo.

Handwashing The following steps are good to remember when washing the car:

Avoid washing the car in direct sunlight. This can cause the detergent or wax to dry and have an abrasive effect.

Remove bird droppings from the paintwork as soon as possible. Bird droppings contain chemicals that affect and discolour paintwork very quickly. For example, use soft paper or sponge soaked in plenty of water. An author- ised Volvo workshop is recommended for the removal of any discolouration.

Wash the underbody, including wheel hous- ings and bumpers.

Rinse the entire car until the dissolved dirt has been removed so as to reduce the risk of scratches from washing. Do not spray directly onto the locks.

If necessary, use cold degreasing agent on very dirty surfaces. Note that in this case, the surfaces must not be hot from the sun.

Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and plenty of lukewarm water.

Clean the wiper blades with a lukewarm soap solution or car shampoo.

Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or a water scraper. If you avoid allowing drops of water to dry in strong sunlight, you reduce the risk of water drying stains which may need to be polished out.

After the car has been washed, tar from asphalt may remain. Use tar remover to get rid of the last spots after the car has been washed.

WARNING

Always have the engine cleaned by a work- shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot.

IMPORTANT

Dirty headlamps have impaired functionality. Clean them regularly, e.g. when refuelling.

Do not use any corrosive cleaning agents but use water and a non-scratching sponge instead.

NOTE

Outside lighting such as headlamps and rear lamps may temporarily have condensation on the inside of the lens. This is normal, all exte- rior lighting is designed to withstand this. Condensation is normally vented out of the lamp housing when the lamp has been switched on for a time.

IMPORTANT

Make sure that the panoramic roof and sun visor are closed before washing the car.

Never use polishing agent with abrasive properties on the panoramic roof.

Never use wax on the rubber mouldings around the panoramic roof.

IMPORTANT

Remember to remove dirt from the drain holes in the doors and in the sills after wash- ing the car.

Related information Cleaning the exterior (p. 628)

Polishing and waxing (p. 628)

Automatic car wash (p. 630)

High-pressure washing (p. 631)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

630

Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 631)

Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim components (p. 632)

Cleaning wheel rims (p. 633)

Rustproofing (p. 633)

Automatic car wash The car should be washed as soon as it becomes dirty. This means that the car is easier to clean since the dirt does not attach as firmly. It also reduces the risk of scratches and keeps the car fresh.

Automatic car wash An automatic car wash is a simple and quick way of washing the car, but it cannot reach every- where. Washing the car by hand is recommended to achieve a good result, or to supplement auto- matic car washes with washing by hand.

NOTE

Volvo recommends that the car is not washed in an automatic car wash during the first few months (this is because the paintwork has not fully hardened).

IMPORTANT

Before driving the car into an automatic car wash, deactivate the functions for automatic braking when stationary and automatic park- ing brake application. If these functions are not deactivated, the brake system will jam when the car is stationary and the car will not be able to move.

IMPORTANT

For car washes where the car is pulled for- ward with rolling wheels, the following applies:

1. Before washing the car, make sure that the automatic rain sensor is deactivated, otherwise there is the risk of it starting and damaging the wiper arms.

2. Make sure that the door mirrors are retracted, any auxiliary lamps secured, antennas retracted or removed, otherwise they risk being damaged by the auto- matic car wash.

3. Drive into the car wash.

4. Switch off the "Automatic braking at standstill" function using the switch on the tunnel console.

5. Switch off the "Automatic parking brake application" function via the top view of the centre display.

6. Switch off the engine by turning the start knob in the tunnel console clockwise. Hold the knob in place for at least 2 seconds.

The car is ready for the car wash.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

631

IMPORTANT

The system will automatically switch to P mode unless the above step is followed. The wheels are locked in P mode, which they should not be when putting the car through an automatic car wash.

Related information Cleaning the exterior (p. 628)

Polishing and waxing (p. 628)

Handwashing (p. 629)

High-pressure washing (p. 631)

Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 631)

Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim components (p. 632)

Cleaning wheel rims (p. 633)

Rustproofing (p. 633)

High-pressure washing The car should be washed as soon as it becomes dirty. This means that the car is easier to clean since the dirt does not attach as firmly. It also reduces the risk of scratches and keeps the car fresh. Wash the car in a car wash with oil separator. Use car shampoo.

High-pressure washing When using high-pressure washing, use sweep- ing movements and make sure that the nozzle does not come closer than 30 cm (13 in.) to the surface of the car. Do not spray directly onto the locks.

Related information Cleaning the exterior (p. 628)

Polishing and waxing (p. 628)

Handwashing (p. 629)

Automatic car wash (p. 630)

Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 631)

Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim components (p. 632)

Cleaning wheel rims (p. 633)

Rustproofing (p. 633)

Cleaning the wiper blades The car should be washed as soon as it becomes dirty. This means that the car is easier to clean since the dirt does not attach as firmly. It also reduces the risk of scratches and keeps the car fresh. Wash the car in a car wash with oil separator. Use car shampoo.

Wiper blades Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper blades, as well as insects, ice etc. on the windscreen, impair the service life of wiper blades.

When cleaning, set the wiper blades in service position.

NOTE

Wash the wiper blades and windscreen regu- larly with a lukewarm soap solution or car shampoo. Do not use any strong solvents.

Related information Cleaning the exterior (p. 628)

Polishing and waxing (p. 628)

Handwashing (p. 629)

Automatic car wash (p. 630)

High-pressure washing (p. 631)

Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim components (p. 632)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

* Option/accessory.632

Cleaning wheel rims (p. 633)

Rustproofing (p. 633)

Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim components The car should be washed as soon as it becomes dirty. This means that the car is easier to clean since the dirt does not attach as firmly. It also reduces the risk of scratches and keeps the car fresh. Wash the car in a car wash with oil separator. Use car shampoo.

Exterior plastic, rubber and trim components A special cleaning agent available from Volvo retailers is recommended for the cleaning and care of coloured plastic parts, rubber and trim components, e.g. glossy trim mouldings. When using such a cleaning agent the instructions must be followed carefully.

Avoid washing the car with detergent with a pH value below 3.5 or above 11.5. This can cause discolouration of anodised aluminium compo- nents*, as illustrated. We advise against use of abrasive polishing agents, as illustrated.

Parts that should be washed using a cleaning agent with a pH value between 3.5 and 11.5.

IMPORTANT

Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and rubber.

When using degreasant on plastic and rubber, only rub with light pressure if it is necessary. Use a soft washing sponge.

Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear away or damage the glossy surface layer.

Polishing agent that contains abrasive must not be used.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

633

IMPORTANT

Avoid washing the car with cleaning agent with a pH value lower than 3.5 or higher than 11.5. This may result in discolouration of ano- dised aluminium parts such as roof rack and around the side windows.

Never use metal polishing agent on anodised aluminium parts, this can result in discoloura- tion and destroy the surface treatment.

Related information Cleaning the exterior (p. 628)

Polishing and waxing (p. 628)

Handwashing (p. 629)

Automatic car wash (p. 630)

High-pressure washing (p. 631)

Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 631)

Cleaning wheel rims (p. 633)

Rustproofing (p. 633)

Cleaning wheel rims The car should be washed as soon as it becomes dirty. This means that the car is easier to clean since the dirt does not attach as firmly. It also reduces the risk of scratches and keeps the car fresh. Wash the car in a car wash with oil separator. Use car shampoo.

Rims Only use rim cleaning agent recommended by Volvo.

Strong rim cleaning agents can damage the sur- face and cause stains on chrome-plated alumi- nium rims.

Related information Cleaning the exterior (p. 628)

Polishing and waxing (p. 628)

Handwashing (p. 629)

Automatic car wash (p. 630)

High-pressure washing (p. 631)

Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim components (p. 632)

Cleaning wheel rims (p. 633)

Rustproofing (p. 633)

Rustproofing The car has effective protection against corro- sion.

Anti-corrosion protection for the body consists of metallic protective coatings on the sheet metal, a high-quality painting process, corrosion-protected and minimised metal overlap, and shielding plas- tic components, abrasion protection and supple- mental rust inhibitor on exposed areas. In the chassis, exposed components of the wheel sus- pension are made of corrosion-resistant cast alu- minium.

Inspection and maintenance The car's anti-corrosion protection normally requires no maintenance, but a good way to fur- ther reduce the risk of corrosion is to keep the car clean. Strong alkaline or acidic cleaning solu- tions must always be avoided on glossy trim com- ponents. Any stone chips should be rectified as soon as they are discovered.

Related information Cleaning the exterior (p. 628)

Polishing and waxing (p. 628)

Handwashing (p. 629)

Automatic car wash (p. 630)

High-pressure washing (p. 631)

Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 631)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

634

Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim components (p. 632)

Cleaning wheel rims (p. 633)

Car paintwork The paintwork consists of several layers and is an important part of the car's rustproofing, and should therefore be checked regularly.

The most common types of paintwork damage are stone chips, scratches, and marks on the edges of wings, doors and bumpers. To avoid the onset of rust, damaged paintwork should be rec- tified immediately.

Related information Touching up minor paintwork damage

(p. 634)

Colour codes (p. 636)

Touching up minor paintwork damage Paint is an important part of the car's rustproof- ing and should therefore be checked regularly. The most common types of paintwork damage are stone chips, scratches, and marks on the edges of wings, doors and bumpers.

When repairing paint damage, the car must be clean, dry and have a temperature of over 15 C.

Touching up minor paintwork damage To avoid the onset of rust, damaged paintwork should be rectified immediately.

NOTE

When repairing the paintwork, it must be clean and dry and at a temperature of at least 15C.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

635

Materials that may be needed

Primer20 - a special adhesive primer in a spray can is available for e.g. plastic-coated bumpers.

Basecoat and clearcoat - available in spray cans or as touch-up pens/sticks21.

Masking tape.

fine sand paper20.

If the damage has not reached down to the metal, the touch-up paint can be applied directly after the surface has been cleaned.

NOTE

When paint is repaired the surface must be clean and dry. The temperature of the surface should be at least 15 C (60 F).

1. Apply a piece of masking tape over the dam- aged surface. Then remove the tape to remove any loose paint.

If the damage is down to the metal, use of a primer is appropriate. In the event of damage to a plastic surface, an adhesive primer should be used to give better results - spray into the lid of the spray can and brush on thinly.

2. Before painting, gentle polishing using a very fine polishing agent may be carried out locally if required (e.g. if there are any uneven edges). The surface is cleaned thoroughly and left to dry.

3. Stir the primer well and apply using a fine brush, a matchstick or similar. Finish off with a basecoat and clearcoat once the primer has dried.

For scratches, proceed as described above, but mask around the damaged area to protect the undamaged paintwork.

Touch-up pens and spray paints are available from Volvo retailers.

NOTE

If the stone chip has not penetrated down to the meal and an undamaged layer of paint remains in place, fill in with base coat and clear coat as soon as the surface has been cleaned.

Related information Car paintwork (p. 634)

Colour codes (p. 636)

20 If required. 21 Follow the instructions that are included with the package for the touch-up pen/stick.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

636

Colour codes

Colour code The colour code label is located on the car's right-hand rear door pillar and becomes visible when the right-hand rear door is opened.

Exterior colour code

Any secondary exterior colour code

It is important that the correct colour is used.

Related information Car paintwork (p. 634)

Touching up minor paintwork damage (p. 634)

Replacing the wiper blade, rear window The wiper blades sweep water away from the windscreen and rear window. Together with the washer fluid they clean the windows and ensure visibility for driving. Windscreen and rear window wiper blades can be replaced.

Replacing the wiper blade, rear window

Lift the wiper arm from the window and pull the lower section of the blade to the right.

1. Grip the centre of the wiper arm and lift it from the windscreen to lock position.

NOTE

There is a lock position at half extension angle that may feel like resistance, this lock prevents the arm from falling back against the windscreen. The wiper arm must be pulled past the lock for wiper blade replacement.

2. Grip the lower part of the blade and pull to the right until the blade loosens from the arm.

3. Press the new wiper blade into place. You should hear a click. Check that it is firmly installed.

4. Lower the wiper arm.

IMPORTANT

Check the blades regularly. Neglected main- tenance shortens the service life of the wiper blades.

Related information Using the rain sensor (p. 170)

Using windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 172)

Using automatic rear windscreen wiping when reversing (p. 174)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

* Option/accessory. 637

Heated windscreen wiper nozzles* (p. 170)

Using the rain sensor's memory function (p. 171)

Using the rear window wiper and washer (p. 173)

Filling washer fluid (p. 639)

Wiper blades in service position (p. 638)

Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 637)

Using windscreen wipers (p. 169)

Replacing windscreen wiper blades The wiper blades sweep water away from the windscreen and rear window. Together with the washer fluid they clean the windows and ensure visibility for driving. Windscreen and rear window wiper blades can be replaced.

Replacing a windscreen wiper blade

1. Fold up the wiper arm when it is in service position. Service position is activated/deacti- vated via the function view in the centre dis- play when the car is stationary and the wind- screen wipers are not on.

2. Set the wiper blade in removal position by angling it out from the arm until a click sound can be heard.

3. Press and hold the lock button located on the wiper blade mounting and at the

same time pull the blade straight out par- allel with the wiper arm.

4. Slide in the new wiper blade until the lock button engages.

5. Angle the blade in towards the arm until a click sound is heard. The blade is then no longer in the removal position and can be moved again.

6. Check that the wiper blade is firmly installed.

7. Fold the wiper arm back towards the wind- screen.

The wiper blades are different lengths.

||

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

* Option/accessory.638

NOTE

The wiper blades are different lengths. The blade on the driver's side is longer than on the passenger side.

Related information Using the rain sensor (p. 170)

Using windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 172)

Using automatic rear windscreen wiping when reversing (p. 174)

Heated windscreen wiper nozzles* (p. 170)

Using the rain sensor's memory function (p. 171)

Using the rear window wiper and washer (p. 173)

Filling washer fluid (p. 639)

Wiper blades in service position (p. 638)

Replacing the wiper blade, rear window (p. 636)

Using windscreen wipers (p. 169)

Wiper blades in service position The windscreen wiper blades must be in service position (vertical position) when, for example, they are being replaced.

Wiper blades in service position.

In order to change, clean or lift the wiper blades (e.g. for scraping off ice from the windscreen) they must be in service position.

IMPORTANT

Before placing the wiper blades in the service position, make sure that they are not frozen down.

Activating/deactivating service mode Service mode can be activated/deactivated when the car is stationary and the windscreen wipers

are not on. Service mode is activated/deactivated via the function view in the centre display:

Press the Wiper Service Position button. The light indi- cator in the button illuminates when the service position is activated. Upon activation, the wipers move to standing straight up. To deactivate the

service mode, press Wiper Service Position again. The light indicator in the button extin- guishes when the service position is deactivated.

The wiper blades also exit service position if:

Windscreen wiping is activated.

Windscreen washing is activated.

Rain sensor activated.

The car is driven away.

IMPORTANT

If the wiper arms in service position have been folded up from the windscreen, they must be folded back down onto the wind- screen before the activation of wiping, wash- ing or the rain sensor, as well as before driv- ing. This is to avoid scraping the paint on the bonnet.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

* Option/accessory. 639

Related information Using the rain sensor (p. 170)

Using windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 172)

Using automatic rear windscreen wiping when reversing (p. 174)

Heated windscreen wiper nozzles* (p. 170)

Using the rain sensor's memory function (p. 171)

Using the rear window wiper and washer (p. 173)

Filling washer fluid (p. 639)

Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 637)

Replacing the wiper blade, rear window (p. 636)

Using windscreen wipers (p. 169)

Filling washer fluid Washer fluid is used for cleaning the headlamps as well as the windscreen and rear window. Washer fluid with antifreeze must be used when the temperature is under the freezing point.

Filling of washer fluid takes place in the reservoir with a blue cap. The reservoir is used for wind- screen washer, rear window washer and head- lamp washers*

NOTE

When approx. 1 litre (1 qt) of washer fluid remains in the reservoir, the message Washer fluid Level low, refill is shown in

the driver display, together with the symbol.

Prescribed grade: Washer fluid recommended by Volvo - with frost protection during cold weather and below freezing point.

IMPORTANT

Use Volvo genuine washer fluid or equivalent with a recommended pH of between 6 and 8, in working dilution (e.g. 1:1 with neutral water).

IMPORTANT

Use washer fluid with antifreeze when the temperature is below freezing to avoid freez- ing in the pump, reservoir and hoses.

Volume:

Cars with headlamp washing: 5.3 litres (5.6 qts).

Cars without headlamp washing: 3.5 litres (3.7 qts).

Related information Using the rain sensor (p. 170)

Using windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 172)

Using automatic rear windscreen wiping when reversing (p. 174)

Heated windscreen wiper nozzles* (p. 170)

||

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

640

Using the rain sensor's memory function (p. 171)

Using the rear window wiper and washer (p. 173)

Wiper blades in service position (p. 638)

Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 637)

Replacing the wiper blade, rear window (p. 636)

Using windscreen wipers (p. 169)

SPECIFICATIONS

SPECIFICATIONS

642

Type designations The decals in the car contain information such as chassis number, type designation, colour code, etc.

Label location

The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on market and model.

Knowing the car's type designation, vehicle iden- tification and engine numbers can facilitate all contact with an authorised Volvo retailer regar- ding the car and when ordering spare parts and accessories.

SPECIFICATIONS

}}

643

Decal for type designation, vehicle identifica- tion number, permissible maximum weights and code designation for exterior colour and type approval number. The decal is positioned on the door pillar, and will be visible when the right-hand rear door is opened.

Decal A/C system for cars with refrigerant R1234yf.

Decal A/C system for cars with refrigerant R134a.

Label for parking heater.

Decal for engine code and the engine's serial number.

Label for engine oil.

||

SPECIFICATIONS

644

Decal for gearbox type designation and serial number.

Decal for the car's identification number - VIN (Vehicle Identification Number).

Further information on the car is presented in the registration document.

NOTE

It is not intended that the decals illustrated in the owner's manual should be exact replicas of those in the car. They are included to show their approximate appearance and locations in the car. The information that applies to your particular car can be found on the decal on the car.

Related information Air conditioning specifications (p. 654)

SPECIFICATIONS

}}

645

Dimensions Measurement of car length, height, etc. can be read in the table.

Dimensions mm inches

A Ground clearanceA 211 8,3

B Wheelbase 2865 112,8

C Length 4688 184,6

D Load length, floor, folded seat

1746 68,7

E Load length, floor 960 37,8

F Height 1658 65,3

Dimensions mm inches

G Load height 776 30,6

H Front track 1653B

1649C

1655D

1668E

65,1B

64,9C

65,2D

65,7E

Dimensions mm inches

I Rear track 1657B

1653C

1659D

1673E

65,2B

65,1C

65,3D

65,9E

J Load width, floor 1010 39,8

K Width 1902 74,9

||

SPECIFICATIONS

646

Dimensions mm inches

L Width including door mirrors

2117 83,3

M Width including folded- in door mirrors

1999 78,7

A For kerb weight + 1 person. Varies slightly depending on tyre dimension, chassis alternative, etc.).

B Applies to cars with 17/19 inch wheels. C Applies to cars with 20 inch wheels. D Applies to cars with 21 inch wheels. E Applies to cars with 22 inch wheels.

Related information Weights (p. 647)

SPECIFICATIONS

647

Weights Max. gross vehicle weight, etc. can be read on a label in the car.

Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank 90% full and all fluids.

The weight of passengers and accessories, and towball load (when a trailer is hitched) influence the load capacity and are not included in the kerb weight.

Permitted max. load = Gross vehicle weight - Kerb weight.

NOTE

The documented kerb weight applies to cars in the standard version - i.e. a car without extra equipment or accessories. This means that for every accessory added the loading capacity of the car is reduced correspondingly by the weight of the accessory.

Examples of accessories that reduce load capacity are the different equipment levels (e.g. Kinetic, Momentum, Summum), as well as other accessories such as towbar, load carrier, space box, audio system, auxiliary lamps, GPS, fuel-driven heater, safety grille, carpets, cargo cover, power seats, etc.

Weighing the car is a certain way of ascer- taining the kerb weight of your own particular car.

WARNING

The car's driving characteristics change depending on how heavily it is loaded and how the load is distributed.

The decal is positioned on the door pillar, and will be visible when the right-hand rear door is opened.

Max. gross vehicle weight

Max. train weight (car+trailer)

Max. front axle load

Max. rear axle load

Equipment level

Max. load: See registration document.

Max. roof load: 100 kg.

Related information Type designations (p. 642)

Towing capacity and towball load (p. 648)

SPECIFICATIONS

648

Towing capacity and towball load

Towing capacity and towball load for driving with a trailer can be read in the tables.

Max. weight braked trailer

NOTE

Use of vibration dampers on the towbar is recommended for trailers heavier than 1800 kg.

Engine Engine codeA Gearbox Max. weight braked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)

T8 Twin Engine B4204T35 Automatic 2100 110

T8 Twin Engine B4204T28 Automatic 2100 110

A The engine code, component number and serial number can be found on the engine.

IMPORTANT

When driving with a trailer, it is permitted to exceed the vehicle's gross vehicle weight (including towball load) by a maximum of 100 kg (220 lbs), provided that speed is lim- ited to 100 km/h (62 mph). National legal requirements for the vehicle combination, such as speed, etc. must be observed.

Max. weight unbraked trailer

Max. weight unbraked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)

750 50

SPECIFICATIONS

* Option/accessory. 649

Related information Type designations (p. 642)

Weights (p. 647)

Driving with a trailer (p. 477)

Trailer stability assist* (p. 479)

SPECIFICATIONS

650

Engine specifications Engine specifications (power, etc.) for each respective engine alternative can be found in the table below.

The Twin Engine variant is driven both by a pet- rol engine and an electric drive motor (ERAD Electric Rear Axle Drive).

NOTE

Not all engines are available in all markets.

Engine Engine codeA Output

(kW/rpm)

Output

(hp/rpm)

Max. rated power

(kW/rpm)

Max. rated power

(hp/rpm)

Torque

(Nm/rpm)

No. of cylinders

T8 Twin Engine B4204T35 235/5700 320/5700 262/5700 356/5700 400/2200-5400 4

T8 Twin Engine B4204T28 233/6000 318/6000 400/2200-5400 4

A The engine code, component number and serial number can be found on the engine.

Electric drive motor Max. power output: 65 kW (87 hp).

Torque: 240 Nm.

Related information Type designations (p. 642)

Engine oil specifications (p. 651)

Coolant specifications (p. 653)

SPECIFICATIONS

651

Engine oil specifications Engine oil grade and volume for each respective engine alternative can be read in the table. Volvo recommends:

Engine Engine codeA Oil grade Volume, incl. oil filter

(litres)

T8 Twin Engine B4204T35 Castrol Edge Professional V 0W-20 or VCC RBS0-2AE 0W-20 approx. 5.6

T8 Twin Engine B4204T28 approx. 5.6

A The engine code, component number and serial number can be found on the engine.

Related information Type designations (p. 642)

Adverse driving conditions for engine oil (p. 652)

Checking and filling with engine oil (p. 601)

Engine oil (p. 600)

SPECIFICATIONS

652

Adverse driving conditions for engine oil Adverse driving conditions can lead to abnor- mally high oil temperature or oil consumption. Below are some examples of adverse driving conditions.

Check the oil level more frequently for long jour- neys:

towing a caravan or trailer

in mountainous regions

at high speeds

in temperatures colder than -30 C (-22 F) or hotter than +40 C (+104 F).

The above also apply to shorter driving distances at low temperatures.

Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adverse driving conditions. It provides extra protection for the engine.

Volvo recommends:

IMPORTANT

In order to fulfil the requirements for the engine's service intervals all engines are filled with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil has been made very carefully with regard to service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact.

An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service intervals can be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil for both filling and oil change, otherwise there is a risk of the service life, starting characte- ristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact of the car being affected.

If engine oil of the prescribed grade and vis- cosity is not used, engine related components may become damaged. Volvo Car Corporation disclaims any liability for any such damage.

Volvo recommends that oil changes are car- ried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.

Related information Engine oil specifications (p. 651)

Engine oil (p. 600)

SPECIFICATIONS

653

Coolant specifications Prescribed grade: Coolant recommended by

Volvo mixed with 50% water1, see the packag- ing. Consult a Volvo retailer if unsure.

To avoid health risks, different types of glycol must not be mixed.

Related information Topping up coolant (p. 602)

Transmission fluid specifications Under normal driving conditions, the transmis- sion fluid does not need to be changed during its service life. However, it may be necessary in adverse driving conditions.

Automatic gearbox

Prescribed transmission fluid: AW1

Brake fluid specifications The medium in a hydraulic brake system is called brake fluid, and it is used to transfer pres- sure from e.g. a brake pedal via a master brake cylinder to one or more slave cylinders, which in turn act on a mechanical brake.

Prescribed grade: Volvo Original Dot 4 class 6 or equivalent.

NOTE

It is recommended that brake fluid is changed or filled by an authorised Volvo workshop.

Related information Engine compartment overview (p. 599)

1 Water quality must fulfil the standard STD 1285.1.

SPECIFICATIONS

654

Fuel tank - volume The fuel tank's filling capacity can be read in the table below.

All models

Litres (approx.) 50

US gallons (approx.) 13.2

Related information Filling fuel (p. 467)

Air conditioning specifications The car's climate control system uses a freon- free refrigerant, either R1234yf or R134a depending on market. Information about which refrigerant the car's climate control system uses is printed on a decal located on the inside of the bonnet.

Prescribed grades and volumes of fluids and lubricants in the air conditioning system can be read in the tables below.

A/C decal

Decal for R134a

Decal for R1234yf

SPECIFICATIONS

655

Symbol explanation R1234yf

Symbol Meaning

Caution

Mobile air conditioning system (MAC)

Lubricant type

A trained and certified technician is required in order to service the mobile air conditioning system (MAC)

Flammable refrigerants

Refrigerant

Cars with R134a refrigerant

Weight Prescribed grade

725 g (1.60 lbs) R134a

WARNING

The air conditioning system contains pressur- ised refrigerant R134a. This system must only be serviced and repaired by an authorised workshop.

Cars with R1234yf refrigerant

Weight Prescribed grade

675 g R1234yf

WARNING

The air conditioning system contains pressur- ised refrigerant R1234yf. In accordance with SAE J2845 (Technician Training for Safe Service and Containment of Refrigerants Used in Mobile A/C System), service and repair of the refrigerant system must only be performed by trained and certified technicians in order to ensure the safety of the system.

Compressor oil

Volume Prescribed grade

100 ml (3.38 fl. oz.) PAG SP-A2

Evaporator

IMPORTANT

The A/C system's evaporator must never be repaired or replaced with a previously used evaporator. A new evaporator must be certi- fied and labelled in accordance with SAE J2842.

Related information Servicing the climate control system (p. 598)

SPECIFICATIONS

656

Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions

The fuel consumption for a vehicle is measured in litres per 100 km and CO2 emissions are measured in gram CO2 per km.

Explanation

gram CO2/km

litres/100 km

Certified value for the car's poten- tial range ("up to") in km in electric mode. The value should not be interpreted as an expected range, and the range is difficult to achieve during normal driving.

mixed driving

automatic gearbox

NOTE

If the consumption and emission data is miss- ing then it is included in the enclosed supple- ment.

NOTE

The capacity of the hybrid battery diminishes with age and use, which may result in increased use of the internal combustion engine and, as a consequence, reduced fuel economy and reduced range during electric operation.

T8 Twin Engine (B4204T35) 49 2,1 45A

A Drive mode PURE

The values in the above table for fuel consump- tion, emissions and range in electric mode are based on special EU driving cycles (see below),

which apply for cars with kerb weight in basic ver- sion and without extra equipment. The car's weight may increase depending on its equipment

level. This, along with how heavily the car is loa- ded, increases its fuel consumption and CO2 emissions and reduces its range in electric mode.

SPECIFICATIONS

657

The certified values for the car should not be interpreted as the expected values. The certifica- tion values are the comparative values obtained during special "EU driving cycles" (see below).

There are several reasons for fuel consumption that is higher and an electric range that is shorter than the values in the table. Examples of these include:

If the car is not regularly charged from the mains.

If the car is equipped with extra equipment that affects its weight.

Driving style.

If the customer chooses wheels other than those mounted as standard on the basic ver- sion of the model, as this could increase roll- ing resistance.

High speed causes increased air resistance.

Fuel quality, road and traffic conditions, weather and the condition of the car.

A combination of the examples above could increase consumption considerably.

There may be huge deviations in fuel consump- tion if comparing to the EU driving cycles (see below), which are used in the certification of the car and on which consumption figures in the table are based. For further information, please refer to the referenced regulations.

NOTE

Extreme weather conditions, driving with a trailer or driving at high altitudes in combina- tion with fuel quality are factors that consider- ably increase the car's fuel consumption.

EU driving cycles The official fuel consumption figures and range during electric operation are based on two stand- ardised driving cycles in a laboratory environment ("EU driving cycles"), all in accordance with EU Regulation no 692/2008 and 715/2007 (Euro 5 / Euro 6), 2017/1151 and 2017/1153. Since the driving cycles are also used for quality con- trol, there are stringent requirements for test repeatability. Testing is therefore conducted in a controlled manner and only with the car's basic functions (e.g. air conditioning, radio, etc. switched off). The results of the official figures are therefore not naturally representative of what the customer sees in actual use.

The regulations cover the driving cycles "Urban driving" and "Motorway driving":

Urban driving the measurement starts with a cold start of the engine. The driving is simulated.

Motorway driving the car is accelerated and braked at speed of 0-120 km/h (0-75 mph). The driving is simulated.

The official value for mixed driving, which is shown in the table, is a combination of the results from the "Urban driving" and "Motorway driving" driving cycles in accordance with legal require- ments.

To determine the carbon dioxide emissions (CO2

emissions) during the two driving cycles, the exhaust gases were collected. These were then analysed to determine the value for CO2 emis- sions.

Related information Type designations (p. 642)

Weights (p. 647)

Economical driving (p. 460)

Factors that affect range when running on electricity (p. 462)

SPECIFICATIONS

658

Approved wheel and tyre sizes In certain countries not all approved sizes are indicated by the registration document or other

documents. The following table shows all approved combinations of wheel rims and tyres.

= Approved

Engine man/

aut

235/60R18

7,5x18x50,5

235/55R19

7,5x19x50,5

255/45R20

8x20x52.5

255/40R21A

8,5x21x49,5

265/35R22A

9x22x43

All engines aut A Only in combination with wheel arch extension.

Related information Lowest permitted tyre load index and speed

rating for tyres (p. 659)

Type designations (p. 642)

Dimension designation for tyre (p. 547)

Dimension designation for wheel rim (p. 548)

SPECIFICATIONS

659

Lowest permitted tyre load index and speed rating for tyres The table below shows the minimum permitted load index (LI) and speed rating (SS).

Engine man/

aut

Minimum permitted load index (LI)A Minimum permitted speed rating (SS)B

All engines aut 98 V

A The tyre's load index must be at least equal to or greater than indicated in the table. B The tyre's speed rating must be at least equal to or greater than indicated in the table.

Related information Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 658)

Approved tyre pressures (p. 660)

Type designations (p. 642)

Dimension designation for tyre (p. 547)

Dimension designation for wheel rim (p. 548)

SPECIFICATIONS

660

Approved tyre pressures Approved tyre pressures for each engine alterna- tive can be found in the table.

NOTE

All engines, tyres or combinations of these are not always available in all markets.

Engine Tyre size Speed Load, 1-3 persons Max. load ECO pressureA

Front

(kPa)B

Rear

(kPa)

Front

(kPa)

Rear

(kPa)

Front/rear

(kPa)

All engines

235/60 R18

235/55 R19

255/45 R20

255/40 R21

265/35 R22

0-160 km/h (0-100 mph) 230 230 270 270 270

160+ km/h (100+ mph) 250 250 270 270

Temporary Spare Tyre max 80 km/h (max 50 mph) 420 420 420 420

A Economical driving. B In certain countries the "bar" unit is used alongside the SI unit "Pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa.

Related information Type designations (p. 642)

Checking tyre pressure (p. 550)

Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 658)

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

661

1, 2, 3 ...

4WD 447

A

A/C (Air conditioning) 215

ABS anti-lock brakes 434

ACC Adaptive cruise control 290, 293, 294, 295, 296, 297, 299, 300, 301, 302, 304

Accessories and extra equipment 39 installation 39

Active bending lights 150

Active main beam 148

Active Park Assist 396, 397, 400, 401, 402, 403

function 396, 397, 401, 402, 403 Limitations 401 operation 397, 400 Symbols and messages 403

Active Yaw Control 270

Adapting driving characteristics 268, 449

Adaptive Cruise Control 290, 293, 294, 295, 296, 297, 299, 300, 301, 302, 304

change cruise control functionality 302 fault tracing 301

function 290 managing speed 294, 295 overtaking 299 radar sensor 321 setting the time interval 296, 297

Additional heater (Auxiliary heater) 218

Adjusting the steering wheel 189

Aerial location 250

Airbag 51 Activating/deactivating 54 driver's side 51 passenger side 52, 54

Airbag, see Airbag 51

Air conditioning 215

Air conditioning, fluid volume and grade 654

Air conditioning system 192, 203 repair 598

Air distribution 197 Air vents 197, 199 change 198 defrosting 209 Recirculation 208 table of options 200

Air quality 194, 196 allergies and asthma 196 passenger compartment filter 197

Air recirculation 208

Alarm 261 deactivation 263 motion and tilt sensors 262 reduced alarm level 264

Alcohol lock 432, 433

Allergy and asthma inducing substances. 196

All Wheel Drive (AWD) 447

Ambience lights 155

Android Auto 515, 517

Apple CarPlay 511, 512, 514

Approach lighting 153

Apps 493

Assistance at risk of collision 373, 374, 375, 376, 377, 378, 379, 381

Audio and media 492

Audio settings 492, 524 phone 525 play media 503, 504 Text message 524

Auto climate control 208

Auto hold 440

Automatic brake 440 activate and deactivate 440 after collision 441

Automatic car wash 630

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

662

Automatic car washes 630

Automatic gearbox 443 kickdown 446 oil 653 trailer 477

Automatic locking 254

Automatic relocking 225, 248

Automatic speed limiter 278, 280, 281

Auxiliary heater 218

AWD, All Wheel Drive 447

B

Backrest front seat, adjusting 176, 177, 179, 180, 181, 182 rear seat, lowering 184

Bag holder 581

Battery 472, 605 HYBRID 609 jump starting 472 maintenance 605 overload 472 start 605 symbols on the battery 610 warning symbols 610

Bicycle rack towbar mounted 481

BLIS 348, 349, 350

Bluetooth connect 509 connect car to Internet 527 phone 517 settings 526

Bonnet, opening 597

Book service and repair 593

Brake assist after collision 441

Brake fluid grade 653

Brake functions 433

Brake light 152

Brake mode 443

Brakes 434 Anti-lock braking system, ABS 434 automatic when stationary 440 brake assist system, BAS 435 brake light 152 brake system 433 emergency brake lights 152 handbrake 436 maintenance 436 on gritted roads 436 on wet roads 435

Brake system fluid 653

bulbs, specifications 604

bypass alcohol lock 432

C

Camera sensor 343

Camera unit 330

Car care 628, 629, 630, 631, 632, 633 Leather upholstery 626

Car functions in centre display 114

Cargo area 579 electrical socket 574, 576 lighting 155 mounting points 581 protective net 586

Cargo cover 582, 584

Cargo grille 585

Car holiday 464

Car key battery low 229

Car modem connect car to Internet 528 settings 529

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

663

Car status 592 Tyre pressure 555

Car upholstery 623, 625, 626, 627

Car washing 628, 629, 630, 631, 632, 633

Catalytic converter Recovery 482

CD player 507

central locking 251

Centre display change appearance 123 cleaning 623 climate control 203 function view 114 Keyboard 118 messages 132, 133, 134 operation 104, 107, 111, 116 overview 101 settings 124, 125, 126 switch off and change volume 123 symbols in status bar 116 views 107

Change of owner 126

Charge current 408

Charging finish charging 422 Hybrid battery 407 open and close charging flap 413

start charging 414 Status 416, 418, 420

Charging cable 410 control unit 412

Checking the engine oil level 601

Checking the level 454

Child safety 59

Child safety locks 253

Child seat 59, 60, 62, 64 i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points 62 lower mounting points 61 positioning/fitting 62, 64 table for location 66 table of i-Size 68 table of ISOFIX 69 Upper mounting points 60

City Safety in crossing traffic 340, 341

City Safety with evasive manoeuvre 341, 342

City Safety with obstructed evasive manoeuvre 342

City Safety 334, 335, 337, 338, 343, 346

Cleaning 625, 627 automatic car wash 630 car washing 628, 629, 630, 631, 632, 633 centre display 623 Fabric upholstery 623, 625, 626 rims 633

Seatbelts 625 upholstery 623, 625, 626, 627

Cleaning wheel rims 633

Cleaning wiper blades 631

Clean Zone 195

Clean Zone Interior Package 196

Climate control 192, 203 auto-regulation 208 centre display 203 experienced temperature 193 fan control 213 rear seat 203 sensors 192 temperature control 214 voice control 193 zones 192

Climate control system Refrigerant 654

Clock, adjustment 86

CO2 emissions 656

Collision 44, 46, 51, 57

Collision warning 334, 347

Collision warning system Pedestrian detection 338 Radar sensor 321

Colour code, paint 636

Colour codes 636

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

664

Combined instrument panel 77 settings 79

Compass 488 calibration 489

Condensation in headlamps 629, 630, 631, 632

Connect car to Internet no or poor connection 531 via a mobile device (WiFi) 528 via car modem 528 via mobile device (Bluetooth) 527

Connect phone 518

Controls lighting 155

Control unit 412 charging status 418

Coolant 653

Coolant, filling 602

Cooling system overheating 471

Corner Traction Control 270

Cover cargo area 584

Crash, see Collision 44

Cross Traffic Alert CTA 353, 354, 355, 356

Cruise control 282, 283 deactivate 286

managing speed 283, 284 temporary deactivation 285

CTA Cross Traffic Alert 353, 354, 355, 356

Cyclist detection 338

CZIP (Clean Zone Interior Package) 196

D

Data recording 37 transfer between car and workshop 590

Data link connector 40

Data sharing 532

Daytime running lights 146

Deadlock 264 deactivation 265

Defrosting 209

Digital radio (DAB) 501

Dimensions 645 Towbar 475

dipped beam 147

Dipstick, electronic 601

Direction indicator 150

Direction indicators 150

direction of rotation 549

Display lighting 155

Distance Warning 287, 288 Limitations 289

DivX 508

Door mirrors 161, 163 Dipping 162 resetting 163

Drive-E Environmental philosophy 30

Driver Alert Control 363 operation 364, 365

Driver display application menu 96, 97 hybrid-related symbols and messages 423 messages 98

Driver performance 85

Driver profile 129 edit 131 select 130

driver support system 268

Drive systems 447

Drivetrain Gearbox 442

Driving cooling system 471 with a tailer 477

Driving economy 460

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

665

Driving in water 466

Driving mode 449 change 453

Driving with a trailer towball load 648 towing capacity 648

E

Economical driving 460

ECO pressure 551, 660

Electrical socket 574 using 576

Electrical system 605

Electric drive motor specifications 650

Electric motor 447

Electric operation Driving 461 range 462

Electric parking brake 436

emergency brake lights 152

Emergency equipment first aid kit 588 warning triangle 588

Emergency puncture repair kit 566 implementation, follow-up inspection 566 location 565 overview 565 Pump up tyre 569 sealing fluid 565

Emissions of carbon dioxide 656

Engine automatic start and stop of internal combustion engine 448 deactivate 430 overheating 471 start 428

Engine braking, automatic 458

Engine compartment coolant 602 Engine oil 600 overview 599

Engine drag control 270

Engine oil 600, 652 adverse driving conditions 652 filling 601 filter 600 grade and volume 651

Engine specifications 650

Engine temperature high 471

Environment 30

Error messages Adaptive Cruise Control 304 see Messages and symbols 304, 320

Error messages in BLIS 352

Ethanol content maximum 10 percent by volume 469

External dimensions 645

F

Fan Air distribution 198 Air vents 199 Control 213

Fault tracing for the camera sensor 331

Ferry transport 454

First aid 588

First aid kit 588

Flooded road 466

Fluids, capacities 639, 654

Fluids and oils 653, 654

Fog lamp rear 151

Foot brake 434

Four-C 454

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

666

Front seat Climate control 203 Fan 213 heating 204, 205 Temperature 214 Ventilation 206

Front seat, manual 176

Front seat, power 177 adjusting seat 177 adjusting the passenger seat from the driver's seat 183 Lumbar support 182 massage 179, 180, 181 memory function 178, 179 multi-function control 179, 180, 181, 182 Side supports 181

FSC, ecolabelling 25

Fuel 469 fuel consumption 656 identifier 469

fuel gauge 79

Fuelling filling 467 fuel filler flap 466

Fuel tank volume 654

Fuel vapour 469

Fuse box 611

Fuses changing 611 General 610 in cargo area 619 in engine compartment 612 under glovebox 616

G

Gearbox 442 automatic 443

Gear positions automatic gearbox 443

Gear selector inhibitor 446

Gear shift indicator 446

Glass laminated/reinforced 158

Glovebox 577

Gracenote 506

Gross vehicle weight 647

Ground fault breaker 411

GSI - Gear selector assistance 446

H

Handbrake 436, 437

Handwash 629

Hard disk space 534

Hazard warning flashers 152

HDC 458

Headlamp control 144, 155

head restraint 187

Head up display activate and deactivate 136 cleaning 624 settings 136 windscreen replacement 599

Head-up display 134

Heated washer nozzles 170

Heater 216 auxiliary heater 218 parking heater 217

Heating seats 204, 205 steering wheel 207 Windows 211, 212

Height adjustment 454, 457

High engine temperature 471

High-pressure washing 631

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

667

Hill descent control 458 activate with function button 459

Hill Descent Control 458, 459

Hill start assist Hill Start Assist (HSA) 441

Hill Start Assist 441

HomeLink 484 program 485 using 487

Home safe light duration 153

Horn 188

Hybrid battery 609 charging 407

Hybrid battery meter 81

Hybrid meter 80

I

IAQS (Interior Air Quality System) 196

IC (Inflatable Curtain) 57

ID, Volvo 28

Identification number 41

Ignition position 430, 431

Immobiliser 236

Immobilizer Immobiliser 236

Indicator symbols 87

Individual drive mode 449

Inflatable curtain 57

Inflatable Curtain 57

Information display 77, 79

Infotainment system (Audio and media) 492

Instrument lighting 155

Instrument overview left-hand drive car 74 right-hand drive car 75

Instruments and controls 74, 75

IntelliSafe Driver support 33

Interior Air Quality System 196

Interior lighting 154, 155

Interior rearview mirror 161 Dipping 162

Intermittent wiping 169

Internet, see Internet-connected car 526

Internet-connected car book service and repair 593 send car information 594 system updates 591

iPod, connection 509

ITPMS - Indirect Tyre Pressure Monitoring System 552

J

Jack 557

Journey statistics 85

Jump starting 472

K

Kerb weight 647

Key 223

Keyboard 118, 121 change language 121

Keyless Locking/unlocking 248 settings 249 touch-sensitive surfaces 247

Keypad in the steering wheel 188

Key tag 223

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

668

L

Labels location of 642

Laminated glass 158

Lamps change 604 specifications 604 trailer 480

Lane assistance operation 368

Lane assistance Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) 365, 367, 368, 370, 372

Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) 365, 367, 368, 370, 372

Language 124

Leather upholstery, washing instructions 626

Level control settings 457

License agreement 90, 535

Lifting tool 557

Lighting active bending lights 150 approach lighting 153 automatic lighting, passenger compart- ment 154 Automatic main beam 148

brake light 152 bulbs, specifications 604 controls 144, 154, 155 controls lighting 155 daytime running lights 146 dipped beam 147 direction indicators 150 display lighting 155 emergency brake lights 152 Hazard warning flashers 152 home safe lighting 153 instrument lighting 155 in the passenger compartment 154, 155 main beam 147, 148 position lamps 145 rear fog lamp 151 settings 145

Lighting, bulb replacement 604

Limitations for Driver Alert Control 365

Limp home 442

Load carriers 581

Loading General 579 load retaining eyelets 581 long load 580

Loading hooks 581

Load retaining eyelets cargo area 581

Lock locking 225 unlocking 225

Lockable wheel bolts 558

Lock confirmation 222 setting 223

Locking/unlocking tailgate 227, 249

Long-term storage 425

Low battery voltage Battery 472

Lowering the rear section 580

Low speed control 457 activate with function button 458

M

Main beam 147, 148

maintenance Rustproofing 633

Max. roof load 647

Media player 502, 503, 504 compatible file formats 533, 534 voice control 140

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

669

Messages and symbols Adaptive Cruise Control 304 Collision Warning with Auto Brake 346

Messages in BLIS 352

Messages in displays 98, 132 manage 99, 133 saved 99, 134

Meters fuel gauge 79

Mileage 82 Electric operation 462

Misting condensation in headlamps 628, 630

Mobile phone, see Phone 518

Mood lighting 155

Motion sensor 262

N

Net cargo area 586

O

octane rating 469

Oil, see also Engine oil 651, 652

Oil level low 601

Online car 526 no or poor connection 531

Option/accessory 23

Output 650 electric motor 650

outside temperature gauge 87

Overheating 471, 477

Overtaking Assistance 299, 316, 317

Owner's manual 23 ecolabelling 25 in centre display 19, 20 in mobile 22

Owner information 18

P

PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch) 54

Paddle on the steering wheel 188

Paintwork colour code 636 damage and touch-up 634, 636

Panorama roof opening and closing 166 pinch protection 158

sun blind 164, 168 ventilation position 167

PAP - Active Park Assist 396, 397, 400, 401, 402, 403

Park Assist 382, 383, 384, 385, 386 function 382, 383, 384

Park assist camera 387, 388, 390, 392, 393, 394, 395

settings 392

Park assist camera's limitations 393

Park assist lines for Park assist camera 390

Parking on hill 439

Parking brake 436 activate and deactivate 437 automatic activation 438 low battery voltage 439

Parking heater 217

Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch 54

Passenger compartment filter 197

Passenger compartment heater (Parking heater) 217

Passenger compartment interior 572 electrical socket 574 glovebox 577 Sun visor 579 tunnel console 573

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

670

Passenger compartment lighting automatic 154

Personal information (Privacy policy) 38

petrol 469

Petrol particle filter 470

Phone 517 Calls 522, 524 change to another 521 connect 518 connect automatically 520 connect manually 520 disconnect 521 remove 522 text message 523 voice control 139

Pilot Assist 306, 309, 310, 311, 312, 313, 314, 316, 317, 318, 320

overtaking 316, 317

Pinch protection 158 resetting 159

PIN code 529

Pocket park assist - PAP 396, 397, 400, 401, 402, 403

Polishing 628

Position lamp 145

Power operated tailgate 254

Power panorama roof 164

Power save mode 472

Power seat 177

Power windows 159, 160 pinch protection 158

Privacy policy 38

Private locking 260 Activating/deactivating 260

Protective grille 585

Protective net 586

Pump up tyre 569

Puncture 565

R

Radar sensor 293, 321 Limitations 322

Radar unit 321

Radio 496 change radio frequency and radio sta- tion 497 DAB 501 search for radio station 498 settings 499 start 497 voice control 140

Radio favourites 499

Rain sensor 170, 171

Rain sensor memory function 171

Raising the car 595

Raising the rear section 580

Range during electric operation 656

Rear seat Climate control 203 head restraint 187 heating 205 lowering the backrest 184

Rearview and door mirrors compass 488, 489 Dipping 162 door 161, 163 electrically retractable 163 heating 212 interior 161

rear window heating 212 Washers 173, 174 Wiper 173, 174

Recommendations during driving 464

Recommendations for loading 579

Recovery 484

Red Key 232 settings 233

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

671

Refrigerant 598 climate control system 654

Refuelling 467

Regeneration 470

Remote control, HomeLink programmable 484

Remote control immobiliser 236

Remote control key 223 battery replacement 229 connect to driver profile 131 detachable key blade 234 loss 232 range 228

Remote control key system, type approval 238

Remote updates 591

Resetting, trip meter 84

Resetting the door mirrors 163

Restore settings 127 change of owner 126 Driver profile 131

Retractable power door mirrors 163

Reversing camera 387, 388, 390, 392, 393, 394, 395

Reversing sensors 382, 383, 384, 385, 386

Road run-off protection 374, 375

Road sign information 357, 358, 360 Limitations 362 operation 358, 360, 361, 362

Roll Stability Control 269

Roof load, max. weight 647

RSC (Roll Stability Control) 269

Rustproofing 633

S

Safety 44 pregnancy 44

Safety mode 57 start/movement 58

Sealing fluid 565

Seat, see Seats 176

Seatbelt 46 buckle/unbuckle 47 pregnancy 44 seatbelt reminder 49 seatbelt tensioner 48

Seatbelt, see Seatbelts 46

Seatbelt reminder 49

seatbelt tensioner Resetting 49

Seatbelt tensioner 48

Seats heating 204, 205 manual front seat 176 memory function front seat 178, 179 power front seat 177 Ventilation 206 whiplash protection 45

sensors Air quality 197 Climate control 192

Sensus connection and entertainment 34

Sensus Navigation 360

Service position 638

Service programme 590

Set time interval 288

Settings 127 Categories 128 contextual 125 Resetting 127 settings menu 127

Side airbag 56

Side Impact Protection System 56, 57

SIM card 529

SIPS (Side Impact Protection System) 56, 57

Skidding 465

Ski hatch 582

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

672

slippery driving conditions 465

Software updates 37

spare wheel 562, 563

Speed camera 362

Speed limiter 274, 277, 278, 281 deactivation 277 getting started 275 temporary deactivation 276

Speed ratings, tyres 547

Spin control 270

Stabiliser trailer 479

Stability and traction control system 270, 273 operation 271, 272

Stability system 270

Stains 623, 625, 626, 627

Starting the engine 428 after collision 58

Start the car 428

State of charge car function 463

Steering assistance at risk of colli- sion 373, 374, 375, 376, 377, 378, 379, 381

Steering assistance at risk of head-on colli- sion 376, 377

Steering assistance at risk of rear-end col- lision 378, 379

Steering force, speed related 268

Steering force level, see Steering force 268

Steering lock 189

Steering wheel 188, 189 heating 207 keypad 188 paddle 188 steering wheel adjustment 189

Steering wheel paddles 445

Stickers location of 642

Stone chips and scratches 634, 636

Storage spaces 572 glovebox 577 Sun visor 579 tunnel console 573

Sun blind panorama roof 164, 168 pinch protection 158

Sunroof pinch protection 158

Sun visor 579 mirror lighting 155

Switching off the engine 430

Switch off engine 430

Symbols indicator symbols 87

Symbols and messages Adaptive Cruise Control 304 centre display status field 116 Collision Warning with Auto Brake 346 hybrid related 423

Symbols and messages for Assistance at risk of collision 381

system updates 591

T

Tailgate Locking/unlocking 227, 249 opening/closing with foot movement 258 power 254 unlock from inside 252

Temperature Control 214 experienced 193

Temperature monitoring 412

Temporary spare spare wheel 562

Terms and conditions services 38 user 532

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

673

Through-load hatch 582

Tilt detector 262

Tools 557

Total airing function 223, 251

Towbar 474 foldable 475 specifications 475

Towing 482, 484

Towing capacity and towball load 648

Towing eye 483

Traction control 270

Traffic information 499

Trailer 479 cable 478 driving with a trailer 477 Lamps 480 snaking 479

Trailer stability assist 270, 479

Transmission 442

Transmission oil grade 653

Tread 549

Tread depth 549, 563

Tread wear indicators 549

Trip computer 82, 83

Trip meter 82

Trip meter, resetting 84

Troubleshooting Adaptive Cruise Control 301

TSA - trailer stability assist 479

TSA - Trailer stability assist 270

Tunnel console 573

Tunnel detection 147

TV 510 settings 511 watch 510

Twin Engine General 406

Type approval radar system 326 remote control key system 238

Type designations 642

Tyre dimension 547, 557

Tyre load index 547

Tyre pressure Adjust 550 Check 550 recommended 551

Tyre pressure label 551

Tyre pressure monitoring 552 action 556 Calibrate 553 Status 555

Tyre pressure table 660

Tyres 546 dimensions 658 direction of rotation 549 installation 561 pressure 660 puncture repair 565 removal 559 rotation 546 specifications 658, 659, 660 storage 546 tread depth 563 tread wear indicators 549 tyre pressure monitoring 552 tyre pressure table 660 winter tyres 563

U

Units 124

Unknown car part 265

Unlocking settings 227 with key blade 235

USB jack for connecting media 509

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

674

V

Ventilation 197, 198, 199 seats 206

Vibration damper 474

Video 507, 509 settings 508

Voice control Climate control 193 phone 139 radio and media 140 settings 140

Voice recognition 137

VOL marking 546

Volvo ID 28 create and register 28

W

Warning lamp Adaptive Cruise Control 293 stability and traction control system 270

Warning lamps Airbags SRS 89 alternator not charging 89 Fault in brake system 89 Low oil pressure 89

Parking brake applied 89 seatbelt reminder 89 starter battery not charging 89 Warning 89

Warning sound Parking brake 439

Warning symbols 89 Safety 44

Warning triangle 588

Washer fluid 639

Washer nozzles, heated 170

Washers Headlamps 172 rear window 173, 174 washer fluid, filling 639 windscreen 172

Waxing 628

Weights kerb weight 647

Wheel bolts 558 lockable 558

Wheel change 557

Wheel rim, dimensions 548

Wheel rims cleaning 633

Wheels installation 561 removal 559 snow chains 564

Wheels and tyres approved dimensions 658 tyre load index and speed rating 547, 659

whiplash protection 45

Whiplash Protection System 45

WHIPS (Whiplash Protection System) 45

Wi-Fi connect car to Internet 528 delete network 531 share internet connection, hotspot 530 technology and security 532

Windows and glass 158

Windscreen heating 211 projected image 134, 136

Windscreen washing 172

Windscreen wiper 169 rain sensor 170, 171

Winter driving 465

Winter tyres 563

Winter wheels 563

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the XC60 Volvo works, you can view and download the Volvo XC60 Twin Engine 2018 Owners Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Volvo XC60 as well as other Volvo manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Volvo XC60. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Volvo XC60 Twin Engine 2018 Owners Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Volvo XC60 Twin Engine 2018 Owners Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Volvo XC60 Twin Engine 2018 Owners Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Volvo XC60 Twin Engine 2018 Owners Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Volvo XC60 Twin Engine 2018 Owners Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.